EKSMA

Laser Components
2013 / 2014
Revision EUDM-130401
Technical Flexibility Serving Your Photonics Needs

EKSMA OPTICS is a manufacturer and global supplier of precision optical components, optical systems, laser & nonlinear frequency conversion crystals, opto-mechanics and electro-optical Pockels cells with drivers used in lasers and other optical instruments.
Our laser components are used across different laser and photonics applications in scientific, industry, medical and aesthetic, military and aerospace markets. The applications coverage by wavelength spectrum starts from UV (193 nm) through VIS up to IR (20 m) and at THz ranges. All components provided by the Company are subject to high quality testing and certifications in Quality Control Laboratory. EKSMA OPTICS (legal company name Optolita UAB) is ISO 9001:2008 certified. Certification issued by Bureau Veritas. EKSMA OPTICS serves to provide flexible and technical solutions to varied laser components customers requirements, which can often be quite challenging and is most receptive to providing new products where necessary, meeting customer specific applications.
1983
SPIN-OFF FROM PHYSICS INSTITUTE AND EKSMA ESTABLISHED
ISO9001:2008 certified
1987
FIRST TIME EKSMA PARTICIPATED IN MUNICH LASER FAIR EKSMA WAS REORGANIZED IN TO PRIVATE JOINT STOCK COMPANY
1990
EKSMA ESTABLISHED DAUGHTER COMPANY EKSMA OPTICS FOR GLASS AND CRYSTAL MATERIALS POLISHING FOR LASER APPLICATIONS
2006
The Company has been built on more than 30 years of expertise in the laser and optics fields.
FINLAND NORWAY
SWEDEN ESTONIA
RUSSIA
LATVIA IRELAND
DENMARK
LITHUANIA
Vilnius
UNITED KINGDOM NETHERLANDS BELGIUM GERMANY
BELARUS
POLAND
UKRAINE FRANCE CZECH REPUBLIC
Product range
Optical Components
Coatings Mirrors Lenses & Lens Kits Windows Filters Prisms Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics
Pockels Cells
BBO Pockels Cells KD*P Pockels Cells Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells Pockels Cells Drivers Pockels Cells Kits
Opto-mechanical Components
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails
Nonlinear & Laser Crystals

Nonlinear Crystals Laser Crystals SRS Crystals Passive Q-Switches Crystal Ovens & Holders
Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Motorized Positioners
Nd:YAG LaserLine Components

Mirrors Windows AR Coated Lens Kits Polarizing Optics Nonlinear & Laser Crystals
Optical Systems
Beam Expanders F-Theta Lenses Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Pulses Gauss-to-Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens Iris Diaphragms
Femtoline Components
Mirrors AR Coated Lens Kits Polarizing Optics Laser & Nonlinear Crystals
DPSS Lasers& Diode Laser Modules

DPSS Lasers Diode Laser Modules
www.eksmaoptics.com
Online product catalogue
Quality Control Laboratory

All components are subject to high quality testing and certifications in Quality Control laboratory. Through stringent inspection procedures, quality control assessments and commitment to new advanced technologies, we are continuously improving and delivering exceptional quality.
Optical Testing
Analytik Jena spectrophotometer

Specord250 Plus for precise transmission and reflection measurements at 190-1100 nm range
Moeller-Wedel Optical Elcomat

vario 140/40 Autocollimator
G-5 Goniometers for prisms EKSPLA laser spectrophotometer

for precise transmission and reflection measurements at 210-2300 nm range. Laser beam dia <1 mm
and wedged optics angles and flat components parallelism, piramidality measurements
Nikon Microscopes x56-400

Laboratory capabilities The Optics Laboratory has the following capabilities: determination of optical and geometrical parameters, e.g. focal length, refractive index, radius of curvature, angle, piramidality, determination of optical axis orientation for optimal wavelength conversion (2nd, 3rd harmonics generation); surface finish quality measurement, according to MIL, ISO or DIN standards; flatness measurements: wavefront distortion (reflected or/and transmitted beams); prisms and wedges angles measurements and parallelism measurement of flat components; materials and thin-film coating spectral or/and angular reflectance and transmission measurements (200 2300 nanometers); optical design, using ZEMAX software.
ESDI Intellium Z100 Fizeau
magnification microscopes with CCD cameras for surface quality inspection
Interferometer Computer controlled scientific interferometer for surface flatness and transmitted wavefront distortion measurements at 633 nm. Etalon accuracy /20
EKSPLA NL220 laser Nd:YAG Trioptics Super-Spherotronic HR

Spherometer
laser operating at 1064, 532, 355, 266 nm for crystal cut angle accuracy checking, efficiency tests and orientation of crystals
Ordering Information
PRICES Payment Options
Prices are indicated F.C.A. Vilnius, Lithuania and are exclusive of any taxes, duties or freight. Quantity as well as research application discounts are subject to quote. EKSMA OPTICS reserves the right to change prices without prior written notice.
Product Delivery Time
Standard payment option at e-shop is by credit card using Paypal or Skrill services. Wire transfer or bank check is also available option. However, please contact EKSMA OPTICS for authorization for this type of payment.
WIRE TRANSFER DETAILS
Most of the standard products provided in catalogue are available for fast-off-the shelf delivery. Delivery time of the stock products can be estimated on the website. Estimated product delivery time is displayed on each product page. Search in www.eksmaoptics. com using product code.
Account number (IBAN) Bank name Bank address SWIFT Code Beneficiary
LT16 7044 0600 0577 4220 AB SEB Bankas Gedimino Ave. 12, LT-01103 Vilnius, LITHUANIA CBVILT2X OPTOLITA UAB
Please note that customers bank transfer fee associated with payment service should be paid by customer. Return Policy
30 days customer satisfaction warranty covers all standard products. Please contact EKSMA OPTICS if you are not satisfied with the product to arrange a refund. EKSMA OPTICS does not cover any costs associated with shipping.
Warranty
All products are guaranteed to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 1 year after delivery. EKSMA OPTICS does not assume liability from installation, labour or consequential damages.
Shipping
EKSMA OPTICS work with all express freight forwarders. Most common are DHL, TNT, FedEx, UPS. Other freight forwarders are available on request. If not specified by a customer, the default forwarder is DHL. The customer can evaluate shipping charges by DHL using e-shop www.eksmaoptics.com. Final shipping costs are subject to quote depending on individual orders. EKSMA OPTICS reserves the right to change the prices without prior written notice depending on freight forwarders pricing. Shipping charges are prepaid and added as a separate item to your invoice.
Certificate of Origin
Optolita UAB
Mokslinink str. 11 LT-08412, Lithuania Ph.: (+370) 5 272 99 00 Fax.: (+370) 5 272 92 99 info@eksmaoptics.com www.eksmaoptics.com VAT No.: LT100002802516 Company code: 300624547
PROFORMA INVOICE No.40011 Ship to:

Name Surname Company Address Street numbet Postal Code, City Country Ph.:+37065244444 VAT No.:LT1234567897 E-mail: e-mail@e-mail.com Ship via: DHL
No 1 Code BBO-1001H Product Beta Barium Borate BBO Crystals Specifications 10x10x0.1; 29.2; 90; P/P@400-800 nm; SHG@800 nm, Type 1; Estimated delivery time: 1 - 3 days 0.14 kg; Estimated delivery time: 1 - 3 days 5x5x15; 90; 11.6; AR/AR@1064+532 nm; SHG@1064 nm, Type 1; Estimated delivery time: 1 - 3 days
2013-04-15 Bill to:

Name Surname Company Address Street numbet Postal Code, City Country Ph.:+37065244444 VAT No.:LT1234567897 Purchase Order No PO#5643
Item price () 725 Qty 1 Total price () 725
All items shown in this catalogue are of Lithuanian Origin (EU). Certificate of Origin is available under request.
Ordering
840-0199
Purchase orders to EKSMA OPTICS can be sent using our e-shop or by fax. Customs paperwork and fees if any applied must be handled by customers.
COMPANY DETAILS
Positioning Mount 840-0199 for Nonlinear Crystal Housing Lithium Triborate LBO Crystals
165
330
LBO-403
765
765
Sub-total: Shipping charges: Total:
1820 35 1855
Optolita uab (legal company name) Mokslininku str. 11, LT-08412 Vilnius, Lithuania Company Code: 300624547 VAT No.: LT100002802516 Tel: +370 5 272 99 00 Fax: +370 5 272 92 99 E-mail: info@eksmaoptics.com
Term of payment : 30 days net Pay by bank transfer to: Beneficiary: Optolita UAB SWIFT: CBVILT2X IBAN: LT16 7044 0600 0577 4220 Bank: AB SEB Bankas (Bank charges covered by customer)
An Example of Purchase Order at www.eksmaoptics.com for wire transfer payment.
Table of Contents
Optics
Optical Components Selection Guide.....................1.1 Coatings...............................................................................1.3 High Reflectivity Coatings.....................................................1.3 Partial Reflecting Coatings...................................................1.4 Laser Harmonic Separators..................................................1.4 Anti-Reflection Coatings.......................................................1.5 Metallic Coatings..................................................................1.6 Windows & Filters............................................................1.7 Curved Windows..................................................................1.7 Elliptical Windows.................................................................1.8 Flat Windows........................................................................1.9 Precision Thin Round Windows..........................................1.10 Precision Windows.............................................................1.10 Optical Flats........................................................................1.12 Crystalline Materials for Optical UV Band Pass Filters.......1.12 Neutral Density Absorption Type Filters..............................1.13 Neutral Density Reflective Type Filters...............................1.14 Color Glass Filters..............................................................1.15 Laser Safety Eyewear........................................................1.16 Visualizator 990-0840........................................................1.16 Mirrors...............................................................................1.17 Laser Mirrors......................................................................1.17 Metal Coated Mirrors..........................................................1.19 Dichroic Mirrors..................................................................1.21 Lenses (UV FS, BK7, CaF2)................................................1.22 Plano-Convex Lenses........................................................1.22 Biconvex Lenses................................................................1.25 Plano-Concave Lenses......................................................1.28 Biconcave Lenses..............................................................1.30 Conical Lenses (Axicons)...................................................1.31
Plano-Cylindrical Lenses....................................................1.32 Lens Kits.............................................................................1.35 Simple Telescope Kit..........................................................1.36 Prisms..................................................................................1.37 Wedge Prisms....................................................................1.37 Laser Dispersing Prisms.....................................................1.38 Pellin-Broca Prisms............................................................1.39 Right Angle Prisms.............................................................1.39 Corner Cubes.....................................................................1.40 Non-Polarizing Cube Beamsplitters....................................1.41 Fixed Ratio Cube Beamsplitters.........................................1.42 Polarizing Optics...........................................................1.43 Brewster Windows..............................................................1.43 Thin Film Laser Polarizers..................................................1.43 Cube Polarizing Beamsplitters...........................................1.45 Glan Laser Polarizing Prisms.............................................1.46 Wollaston Prisms................................................................1.47 Rochon Polarizing Prisms..................................................1.47 Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates...............................1.48 Zero Order Air-Spaced Plates............................................1.49 Achromatic Air-Spaced Waveplates ..................................1.49 Zero Order Dual Wavelength Plates...................................1.50 Low Order Plates................................................................1.51 Multiple Order Plates..........................................................1.51 Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates..............................1.52 Polarization Plane Rotators................................................1.53 Fresnel Rhombs.................................................................1.54 UV & IR Optics....................................................................1.55 Lithium Fluoride (LiF) Components....................................1.55 Magnesium Fluoride (MgF2) Components..........................1.56 Calcium Fluoride (CaF2) Components................................1.57 Barium Fluoride (BaF2) Components..................................1.58 Sapphire (AI2O3) Components............................................1.59 Zinc Selenide (ZnSe) Components....................................1.60 Silicon (Si) Components.....................................................1.61 Germanium (Ge) Components...........................................1.62
Crystals
Crystals Selection Guide.............................................2.1 Nonlinear Crystals........................................................2.3 Lithium Triborate LBO........................................................2.3 Beta Barium Borate BBO...................................................2.5 Potassium Dideuterium Phosphate KDP, DKDP...............2.7 Potassium Titanyl Phosphate KTP....................................2.9 Potassium Titanyle Arsenate KTA....................................2.11 Lithium Iodate LiIO3.........................................................2.12 Infrared Nonlinear Crystals.................................................2.13 Ultrathin Nonlinear Crystals................................................2.16 Laser Crystals...............................................................2.18 Neodymium Doped Yttrium Aluminium Garnet Nd:YAG..............................................2.18 Yb-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate Yb:KGW, Yb:KYW...........................................2.19 Nd-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate Nd:KGW..........................................................2.20 Titanium Doped Sapphire Ti:Sapphire.............................2.20 Lead Thiogallate with Dysprosium Ions Co-doped by Alkali Metals Dy3+:PbGa2S4........................................2.21
Terahertz Crystals......................................................2.22 Organic Terahertz Crystals DSTMS, DAST,OH1............2.22 Semiconductor Terahertz Crystals GaSe, ZnTe...............2.24 Raman Crystals..............................................................2.25 Crystals for Stimulated Raman Scattering KGW, Ba(NO3)2..............................................2.25 Passive Q-switching Crystals.............................................2.26 Positioners & Holders.................................................2.27 Ring Holders for Nonlinear Crystals 830-0001...................2.27 Positioning Mount 840-0056-11..........................................2.28 Kinematic Positioning Mount 840-0193..............................2.28 Positioning Mount for Nonlinear Crystal Housing 840-0199..................................................2.29 Crystal Ovens.................................................................2.30 Temperature Controller TC1 with Oven CO1......................2.30 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH3.......................................2.31 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH4.......................................2.32 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH7.......................................2.33 Precision Resistive Heater Kit TC2 and CO10 Series Ovens.....................................................2.34
EKSMA OPTICS Tel.: +370 5 272 99 00 Fax: +370 5 272 92 99 info@eksmaoptics.com www.eksmaoptics.com
Table of Contents
Pockels Cells
Pockels cells Selection Guide.................................3.1 Pockels cells...................................................................3.2 KTP Pockels Cells ...............................................................3.3 KD*P Pockels Cells..............................................................3.4 BBO Pockels Cells ..............................................................3.5 Mounting Stages..............................................................3.6 Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 25.4 mm PCH1...............................3.6 Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 35 mm HPR....................................3.6
Pockels cells drivers..................................................3.7 High Repetition Rate Pockels Cell Driver for Q-Switching DQ............................................................3.7 Cavity Dumping & Pulse Picking Pockels Cells Drivers DPS/DPD........................................3.8 High Voltage Pockels Cells Driver DPB...........................3.12 Cavity Dumper Driver DP...............................................3.13 Pockels Cells Driver for Q-Switching for Flashlamp Pumped Lasers DQF................................3.13 High Voltage Power Supply PS.......................................3.14 Pulse Picker & Q-Switching Kits...............................3.15 BBO Pockels Cells Pulse Picker Kit...................................3.15 OEM DKDP Pockels Cells Kit for Lamp Pumped Nanosecond Lasers .............................3.16 BBO Pockels Cell Kit for High Repetition Rate Lasers.........................................3.16
Nd:YAG Laser Line Components Selection Guide.................................................................4.1 Nd:YAG Laser Optics........................................................4.3 Laser Mirrors........................................................................4.3 Laser Harmonic Separators..................................................4.5 Laser Output Couplers.........................................................4.6 Laser Rear Mirrors................................................................4.8 Laser Beamsplitters..............................................................4.9 Laser Line Anti-Reflection Coated Precision Windows....... 4.11 AR Coated Lens Kits..........................................................4.12
Thin Film Laser Polarizers..................................................4.14 Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates...............................4.15 Zero Order Air-Spaced Plates............................................4.15 Low Order Plates................................................................4.16 Multiple Order Plates..........................................................4.16 Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates..............................4.17 Polarization Plane Rotators................................................4.17 Variable Attenuators for Nd:YAG Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070, -0071.............................4.18 Nd:YAG Laser & Nonlinear Crystals.......................4.20 Nd:YAG Crystals (Standard Rods).....................................4.20 Nonlinear Crystals for SHG@1064 nm...............................4.21 Nonlinear Crystals for THG@1064 nm...............................4.22 Nonlinear Crystals for 4HG@1064 nm...............................4.22
Femtoline Components Selection Guide................5.1 Femtoline Optics..............................................................5.3 Laser Mirrors........................................................................5.3 Dual Line Laser Mirrors........................................................5.5 Broadband Ultrafast Ti:Sapphire Laser Mirrors....................5.6 Laser Harmonic Separators..................................................5.7 Laser Output Couplers.........................................................5.8 Laser Rear Mirrors................................................................5.9 Laser Beamsplitters............................................................ 5.11 AR Coated Lens Kits..........................................................5.13 Thin Film Laser Polarizers..................................................5.14 Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates...............................5.16 Zero Order-Air Spaced Plates............................................5.16
Zero Order Dual Wavelength Plates...................................5.17 Low Oder Plates.................................................................5.17 Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates..............................5.18 Polarization Plane Rotators................................................5.18 Group Velocity Delay (GVD) Compensation Plates............5.19 Variable Attenuator for Femtosecond Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070, -0071...............5.20 Femtoline Crystals.......................................................5.22 Ti:Sapphire Laser Line and Harmonics..............................5.22 Thin BBO Crystals for SHG and THG of Ti:Sapphire Laser Wavelength........................................5.23 Femtokits for Third Harmonic Generation of Femtosecond Ti:Sapphire Laser.....................................5.26 Thin AgGaS2 Crystals for DFG 2.5-1.3 m....................5.28 Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW Crystals Laser Lines and Harmonics...................................................................5.29 BBO and LBO Crystals for SHG of Yb:KGW/KYW Laser Frequency Conversion.................5.30
Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices
Table of Contents
DPSS Lasers
DPSS Lasers Selection Guide......................................6.1 DPSS Lasers........................................................................6.2 Violet Blue Lasers: 405 nm...................................................6.2 Blue Lasers: 445 nm.............................................................6.3 Blue Lasers: 473 nm.............................................................6.4
Green Laser Modules: 532 nm.............................................6.6 Green Lasers: 532 nm..........................................................6.7 Red Lasers: 635 nm........................................................... 6.11 Red Lasers: 650 nm...........................................................6.12 Red Lasers: 671 nm...........................................................6.13 Infrared Lasers: 1064 nm...................................................6.15
Optical Systems
Optical Systems Selection Guide..............................7.1 Optical Systems................................................................7.2 F-Theta Lens........................................................................7.2 Compact Beam Expander....................................................7.3 Zoom Beam Expander..........................................................7.4 Simple Telescope Kit............................................................7.4 Gauss-to-Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens................................7.5 Continuously Variable Attenuator / Beamsplitter 990-0060....................................7.12 Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070..........................7.13 Motorized Variable Attenuator for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070M.......................7.14 Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0071..........................7.15
Motorized Variable Attenuator for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0071M.......................7.16 Precision Spatial Filter 990-1000........................................7.17 Y-Z Positioner for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives 990-0050, -0051,-0100, -0200..........................7.18 Precision Pinholes..............................................................7.19 Microscope Objectives.......................................................7.19 Unmounted Iris Diaphragms...............................................7.20 Mounted Iris Diaphragms ..................................................7.22 Motorized Iris Diaphragms .................................................7.23 Variable Wheel Attenuator 990-0604..................................7.26 Closed Variable Wheel Attenuator 990-0704......................7.27 Set of Wheel Edge Filters 990-0500 ..................................7.29 Filters Holder with 90 Flip 990-0400.................................7.30 Motorized Variable Two Wheels Attenuators 991-0602.........................................................7.31 Motorized Closed Variable Two Wheels Attenuators 991-0702.....................................7.32 Air-cooled Beam Dump 990-0800......................................7.34 Water-cooled Beam Dump 990-0820.................................7.34
Please visit
www.eksmaoptics.com
internet shopping product updates immediate quotations
Table of Contents
OptoMechanics
Opto-Mechanics Selection Guide..............................8.1
Laser lab equipment
Bases for positioning of groups of units
BASE POSITIONERS (850)..................................................8.94 Multi-Axes Tilt Platform 850-0010.......................................8.94 Kinematic Bases 850-0020, 0022.......................................8.95 Magnetic Kinematic Base 850-0030 ..................................8.95 Single Axis Tilt Stage 850-0040..........................................8.96 Adjustable Laser/Laser Head Holder 850-0095.................8.96 Adjustable Height Platform 850-0200.................................8.97
Optical tables (700).........................................................8.4 Table Tops 720740..............................................................8.4 Breadboards 704716..........................................................8.6 Pneumatic Vibration Isolation Systems 740758 ................8.8 Table Supports 765, 766 ...................................................8.11 Accessories 791795 ........................................................8.13
TRANSLATION & ROTATION STAGES (860)......................8.98

Manual translators for linear and angular translation
Translation Stages 860-00100106....................................8.98 Rotation Stages 860-01100170......................................8.124 Small Goniometer 860-0180.............................................8.129 Fiber Coupling Stage 860-0210........................................8.130 ADJUSTMENT SCREWS (870)...........................................8.131
Optional items for positioners and translators
Accessories for opto-mechanics assemblies
Brackets & RAILS (810) ..................................................8.16 Optical Rails & Rail Carriers 810-00010035.....................8.16 Large Rods 810-0040, 0050...............................................8.20 Vertical Positioner & Mounting Clamps 810-00600062A................................................................8.21 Periscopes 810-0065, 0067................................................8.23 Large Table Base 810-0070................................................8.25 Angle Brackets 810-00800160.........................................8.25
Precise and Micrometer Screws 870-00100055 ............8.131 Compact Fine Screws 870-0060 .....................................8.135 Adjustment Screws 870-00700095.................................8.135
Motorized PosiTioners and controlLers (900) ........................................................8.139

Motorized translators for linear and angular translation
BASE MOUNTS & ACCESSORIES (820).............................8.32

Bases and items for mounting to a base
Standard Rods 820-0010, 0020.........................................8.32 Collar 820-0030..................................................................8.32 Rod Translators 820-0040..................................................8.33 Rod Holders 820-00500055.............................................8.33 Movable Bases 820-00600150.........................................8.34 Riser Blocks 820-0160, 0170.............................................8.39 Rod Clamps 820-01800200..............................................8.40 Solid Base Height Extender 820-02100225.....................8.41 Table Clamps 820-0230, 0240............................................8.42 Connecting Cone, Screws, Hex Key, Washer 820-02500290......................................8.43
Adjustable and fixed dimensions optics holders
OPTICAL MOUNTS (830)......................................................8.44 Lens Mounts 830-00100040.............................................8.44 Optics & Plate Clamps 830-0050, 0055.............................8.49 Filter Holders 830-0060A0075..........................................8.50 Laser Holders 830-0080, 0090...........................................8.50 Rectangular Optics Holder 830-0100.................................8.51
Motorized Mirror Mounts 940-0050-0070.........................8.140 Motorized Vertical Translation Stages 940-02000220 ...8.142 Motorized Translation Stages 960-00500095 ...............8.144 Motorized Linear Stages 960-01000115.........................8.161 Motorized Rotation Stages 960-01300170.....................8.164 Motorized Goniometers 960-0180 ...................................8.171 Motorized Vertical Translation Stage 960-0199.................8.172 Translation Stages with DC Motor 960-0060 ...................8.173 Motorized Screws 970-00400067 ..................................8.175 Motorized Fiber Coupling Stage 970-0070 ......................8.178 Step Motor Controller Card with USB Interface 980-0030F-USB ................................8.180 Stepper Motor Controller Card for RS232 Interface 980-0030-RS232 .............................8.183 Step Motor Manual Controller Card 980-0050 .................8.184 Brushed DC Servo Motor Controllers with USB Interface 980-0060-USB...................................8.185 Power Supplies for Controllers.........................................8.186
OPTICAL POSITIONERS (840).............................................8.52

Holders for linear and angular adjustment of an optical element
Large Optical Mounts 840-00050007...............................8.52 Mirror & Beamsplitter Mounts 840-00100155...................8.54 Prism Holders 840-0160, 0170...........................................8.81 Polarizer Holders 840-01800199......................................8.82 Kinematic Optical Mounts 840-02070230.........................8.90
Appendixes
Useful Formulas & Constants.................................................. A.2 Optical Components Cleaning Instructions............................. A.4 Tweezers / Forceps for Optical Components.......................... A.4 Crystals Handling Safety Guide................................................ A.5
Our partner
Solid State Pulsed Lasers

High energy mode-locked picosecond lasers PL series solid state picosecond Nd:YAG lasers are the basicresearchindustry-leading source of high energy picosecond pulses for R&D applications. They have excellent output parameters, are reliable and still remain simple and convenient to use.
Nanosecond q-switched Nd:YAG lasers Electro-optically Q-switched nanosecond lasers feature compact size, stable output characteristics and high pulse energy. Their simple and proven design allows offering of models for both regular and novel research and industrial needs.
Optical parametric generators OPO/OPA/OPG High conversion efficiency and wide wavelength tunability from UV to IR are distinguishing features of EKSPLA parametric systems. Offering hands-free operation and good long-term stability, tunable parametric systems made by EKSPLA are an excellent choice for various R&D applications.
Nanosecond tunable laser system NT series tunable laser system comprises a nanosecond optical parametric oscillator and Q-switched pump laser in a single housing. The system features high conversion efficiency, hands-free wavelength tuning from UV to IR, easy maintenance and separate output for pump laser beam.
Diode pumped lasers Short pulse duration, compact and robust design as well as turn-key operation makes diode pumped lasers an excellent choice for many scientific and OEM applications.
Spectrometers EKSPLA is the leading manufacturer of SFG spectrometers. Deep knowledge combined with long term experience in laser spectroscopy enables to design and manufacture systems for various needs. EKSPLA product portfolio includes SFG spectrometers, THZ spectrometers and other systems for science and technology.
Custom systems From single component to complete system designed and produced according to customer requirements. Since its foundation EKSPLA has established a strong position in design and manufacturing of custom laser systems and components. Separate products as well as complete systems answer diverse science and technology needs like chemistry, biology and material processing.
Visit www.ekspla.com for product information
Our partner
Industrial DPSS lasers Picosecond mode-locked as well as nanosecond q-switched solid state diode pumped lasers are designed to be a versatile tool for variety industrial material processing applications. Rugged body made from the machined aluminum and sealed cavity ensures stable and reliable operation in diverse conditions. Short pulse duration, innovative design as well as costeffective operation makes DPSS lasers an excellent choice for wide range of micromachining and other material processing applications.
Ultrafast fiber lasers The new LightWire series ultrafast fiber lasers are all in fiber design and requires no maintenance making it very competitive alternative to the conventional systems. Wide range of models featuring femtosecond or picosecond pulse durations and tailored for specific applications are available.
Power Supplies and Optoelectronics

Flashlamp drivers Flashlamp drivers, manufactured at EKSPLA, are used for pumping of solid state lasers. Featuring more than 25 years experience and wide model range, including one channel, two channel and variable pulse duration flash lamp drivers, EKSPLA gained trust of many OEM laser system manufacturers. Models for powering high energy laser systems are available as well. Laser diode drivers Laser diode drivers are designed for powering single diode and laser diode arrays. LDD series diode drivers has been designed as OEM product with easy integration. They have all protective features for reliable and safe long term operation. Laser cooling units EKSPLA design and produce cooling units for flashlamp pumped lasers. PS series cooling units provide effective heat removal and high stability of laser rod temperature. This enables long term operation of laser at maximum efficiency. Units are assembled in 19 case and may be used completing the powering group of laser systems. Drivers for Pockels Cells Wide range of standard and custom Pockels cells drivers for CW laser pulse slicing, cavity dumping in mode-locked lasers and Q-switching of nanosecond lasers. Versions with built in high voltage power supplies are available. Please visit www.ekspla.com or contact local distributor to learn more about lasers and laser systems from EKSPLA
Nonlinear Crystals Ovens Pump Chambers
Visit www.ekspla.com for product information
Optical Components
Optical Components Selection Guide
1.1
Coatings Windows & Filters Mirrors Lenses Prisms Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics
See page
Coatings
High Reflectivity Coatings Partial Reflecting Coatings Laser Harmonic Separators Anti-Reflection Coatings Metallic Coatings
1.31.6
1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6
See page
Windows & Filters

Curved Windows Elliptical Windows Flat Windows Precision Thin Round Windows Precision Windows Optical Flats Crystalline Materials for Optical UV Band Pass Filters Neutral Density Absorption Type Filters Neutral Density Reflective Type Filters Color Glass Filters Laser Safety Eyewear Visualizator 990-0840
1.71.16
1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.10 1.12 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.16
See page
Mirrors
Laser Mirrors Metal Coated Mirrors Dichroic Mirrors
1.171.21
1.17 1.19 1.21
Optical ComponentS Cleaning Instructions
See page
A.4
Products Selection Guide
See page
Lenses (UV FS, BK7, CaF2)

Plano-Convex Lenses Biconvex Lenses Plano-Concave Lenses Biconcave Lenses
See page
1.221.36
1.22 1.25 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.35 1.36
Windows & Filters UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms Lenses Mirrors
See page
1.28
Prisms
Wedge Prisms Laser Dispersing Prisms Pellin-Broca Prisms Right Angle Prisms Corner Cubes Non-Polarizing Cube Beamsplitters Fixed Ratio Cube Beamsplitters
1.371.42
1.37 1.38 1.39 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.42
Conical Lenses (Axicons) Plano-Cylindrical Lenses Lens Kits Simple Telescope Kit
Polarizing Optics
Brewster Windows Thin Film Laser Polarizers Cube Polarizing Beamsplitters Glan Laser Polarizing Prisms Wollaston Prisms Rochon Polarizing Prisms Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates Zero Order Air-Spaced Plates Achromatic Air-Spaced Waveplates Zero Order Dual Wavelength Plates Low Order Plates Multiple Order Plates Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates Polarization Plane Rotators Fresnel Rhombs
1.431.54
1.43 1.43 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.47 1.48 1.49 1.49 1.50 1.51 1.51 1.52 1.53 1.54
See page
UV & IR Optics
Lithium Fluoride (LiF) Components Magnesium Fluoride (MgF2) Components Calcium Fluoride (CaF2) Components Barium Fluoride (BaF2) Components Sapphire (AI2O3) Components Zinc Selenide (ZnSe) Components Silicon (Si) Components Germanium (Ge) Components
1.551.62
1.55 1.56 1.57 1.58 1.59 1.60 1.61 1.62
Coatings
1.2
Optical Components
Coatings
High Reflectivity Coatings
These multilayer coatings are stacks intended to achieve the highest possible reflectivity at specific laser line wavelengths at normal or 45 degrees incidence. Laser line high reflectivity coatings are intended for external beam manipulation applications where even slight losses may be intolerable.
For appropriate coating, please add the number of the chosen coating to the required optical component catalogue number.
Percent transmission
T, %
1.3
Laser Line Coatings

Coating number AOI=0
3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 740 760 780 800 Wavelength, nm 820 840
AOI=45 1005-i45 1007-i45 1009-i45 1011-i45 1013-i45 1015-i45 1017-i45 1019-i45 1021-i45 1023-i45 1024-i45 1025-i45 1027-i45 1029-i45 1030-i45 1031-i45 1032-i45 1033-i45 1034-i45 1035-i45 1037-i45 1039-i45 1045-i45 1047-i45 1049-i45
Wavelength, nm 193 226 248 266 308 325 337 355 400 473 488-515 532 589 616 633 780 800 830 852 946 1064 1320 1550 2000 2100
Reflectivity, % AOI=0 >96 >99 >99 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99.8 >99 >99 AOI=45 >95 >99 >99 >99 >99.2 >99.2 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99 >99
Recommended substrate UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, Sapphire UV FS, Sapphire
Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Price, EUR 25 / 50 100 / 122 89 / 111 89 / 111 78 / 100 78 / 100 78 / 100 78 / 100 61 / 78 67 / 83 67 / 83 67 / 83 45 / 58 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 45 / 58 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72 56 / 72
1005-i0 1007-i0 1009-i0 1011-i0 1013-i0 1015-i0 1017-i0 1019-i0 1021-i0 1023-i0 1024-i0 1025-i0 1027-i0 1029-i0 1030-i0 1031-i0 1032-i0 1033-i0 1034-i0 1035-i0 1037-i0
1000 1020 1040 1060 Wavelength, nm 1080
1031. HR>99.5% @ 780 nm, AOI = 45.
3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 980
1039-i0 1045-i0 1047-i0 1049-i0
1037. HR>99.8% @ 1064 nm, AOI = 0.
Contact us for other wavelengths and AOI's values.
Broadband Coatings
Coating number AOI=0
5 4 3 2 1 0 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 Wavelength, nm
AOI=45 1106-i45 1110-i45 1114-i45 1116-i45 1118-i45
Wavelength, nm 220-250 260-340 350-450 420-680 450-600
Reflectivity, % AOI=0 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 AOI=45 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99 >99
Recommended substrate UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7
Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Price, EUR 25 / 50 111 / 133 105 / 127 100 / 122 100 / 122 100 / 122 100 / 122 105 / 127 105 / 127 105 / 127 100 / 122 78 / 100 89 / 111
1106-i0 1110-i0 1114-i0 1116-i0 1118-i0
1122-i0 1122-i45 500-700 1126-i0 1126-i45 500-800 1130-i0 1130-i45 600-900 1132-i0 1132-i45 720-880 1134-i0 1134-i45 750-1000 1138-i0 1138-i45 780-900 1142-i0 1142-i45 900-1100
1130. HR>99% @ 600900nm, AOI= 0.
Coatings
Partial Reflecting Coatings

Partial reflecting coatings are durable multilayer dielectric coatings intended for efficient beam splitting as well as for output coupling in laser cavities. They are used in high power laser applications. Please refer to the Substrates for Laser Mirrors or Windows section for substrates for these coatings.
Coating number AOI = 0 2012-i0 2015-i0 2017-i0 2022-i0 2025-i0 2027-i0 2032-i0 2035-i0 2037-i0 2042-i0 2045-i0 2047-i0 2052-i0 2055-i0 2057-i0 2062-i0 2065-i0 2067-i0 2069-i0 2070-i0 2071-i0 2072-i0 2075-i0 2077-i0 2079-i0 2080-i0 2081-i0 2082-i0 2085-i0 2087-i0 2089-i0 2090-i0 2091-i0 AOI = 45 2012-i45 2015-i45 2017-i45 2022-i45 2025-i45 2027-i45 2032-i45 2035-i45 2037-i45 2042-i45 2045-i45 2047-i45 2052-i45 2055-i45 2057-i45 2062-i45 2065-i45 2067-i45 2069-i45 2070-i45 2071-i45 2072-i45 2075-i45 2077-i45 2079-i45 2080-i45 2081-i45 2082-i45 2085-i45 2087-i45 2089-i45 2090-i45 2091-i45 Wavelength, Reflectivity, Recommended nm % substrate 248 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 253 503 753 UV FS
266
UV FS
308
UV FS
70 s-pol 60 Ave
355
UV FS
AOI = 45
Percent reflection
50 40 p-pol 30 20 10 0 550 650 750 Wavelength, nm 850 950
400
UV FS
532
UV FS, BK7
633
UV FS, BK7
1.5
800
UV FS, BK7
852
UV FS, BK7
1064
UV FS, BK7
1550
UV FS, BK7
67 / 89 72 / 94 78 / 100 56 / 78 61 / 83 67 / 89 56 / 78 61 / 83 67 / 89 50 / 72 50 / 72 50 / 72 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 45 / 67 45 / 67 45 / 67 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 56 / 78 45 / 67 45 / 67 45 / 67 55 / 77 55 / 77 55 / 77
Percent reflection
These harmonic separators comprise a dichroic reflector coating and should be applied on the front surface of high precision windows. They are used to separate the various harmonic components of
frequency doubled laser systems by selec-
100 80 60 40 20 0 400 600 800 1000 Wavelength, nm 1200 1400
tive spectral reflection and transmission. In all cases one wavelength is selected out by reflection and the other wavelengths are transmitted.
2518
2534
Coating number AOI = 0 2506-i0 2510-i0 2514-i0 2518-i0 2522-i0 2526-i0 2530-i0 2534-i0 AOI = 45 2506-i45 2510-i45 2514-i45 2518-i45 2522-i45 2526-i45 2530-i45 2534-i45
Wavelength, nm 200-220 / 390-450 355 / 532+1064 380-420 / 720-880 532 / 1064 600 / 1200 800 / 400 1064 / 400-700 1064 / 532
AOI = 0 R, % >90.0 >99.0 >99.0 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 T, % >85 >93 >90 >95 >95 >90 >85 >93
AOI = 45 R, % >90.0 >99.0 >99.0 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 >99.5 T, % >80 >90 >90 >95 >95 >90 >80 >90
Recommended substrate UV FS UV FS UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7 UV FS, BK7
Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Price, EUR 25 / 50 111 / 133 74 / 96 83 / 105 67 / 89 89 / 111 83 / 105 72 / 105
UV & IR Optics
83 / 105
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Laser Harmonic Separators
Lenses
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns
Price, EUR 25 / 50
1.4
Optical Components
Anti-Reflection Coatings Laser Line Anti-Reflection Coatings

These multilayer anti-reflection coatings are designed for reducing the reflectivity of a component to near-zero for one very specific wavelength. Therefore, valuable laser energy is efficiently transferred through complex optical systems rather than being lost to glare and scatter. Our AR coatings are intended for use at normal incidence, and when used in this way will achieve maximum efficiency transmission.
Coating number AOI = 0 3005-i0 3007-i0 3009-i0 3011-i0 3015-i0 3017-i0 3021-i0 3025-i0 3027-i0 3031-i0 3033-i0 3035-i0 3037-i0 3041-i0 3045-i0 AOI = 45 3005-i45 3007-i45 3009-i45 3011-i45 3015-i45 3017-i45 3021-i45 3025-i45 3027-i45 3031-i45 3033-i45 3035-i45 3037-i45 3041-i45 3045-i45 Wavelength, nm 193 248 266 308 351-355 400 488-514 532 633-650 780 800 850 1064 1320 1547 Reflectivity, % AOI = 0 < 1.0 < 0.8 < 0.4 <0.3 < 0.25 < 0.25 < 0.3 < 0.2 < 0.25 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2 <0.3 <0.5 AOI = 45 <2.0 <1.5 <1.0 <0.6 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <1.0 Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 4 Price, EUR 25 / 50 60 / 71 50 / 61 45 / 56 45 / 56 39 / 50 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45 34 / 45
Percent reflection
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
Percent reflection
R, %
1.5

1.4 1.2
1.0 1.5
0.5
0 330 340 350 360 Wavelength, nm 370 380
0 720 760 800 840 Wavelength, nm 880
3015. R<0.25% @ 351355 nm, AOI = 0.
3033. R<0.2% @ 800 nm, AOI = 0.
Dual Band Anti-Reflection Coatings

Coating number AOI = 0 3106-i0 3110-i0 3114-i0 3118-i0 3122-i0 3126-i0 3130-i0 3134-i0 AOI = 45 3106-i45 3110-i45 3114-i45 3118-i45 3122-i45 3126-i45 3130-i45 3134-i45 Wavelength, nm 266 + 532 355 + 532 355 + 1064 400 + 800 532 + 1064 670 + 1064 1064 +1320 1064 +1570 Reflectivity, % AOI = 0 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.25 <0.25 <0.25 <0.3 <0.3 AOI = 45 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1.5 2 2 3 4 4 4 3 Price, EUR 25 / 50 56 / 67 50 / 61 50 / 61 50 / 61 45 / 56 45 / 56 45 / 56 49 / 59
1.5
1.0
0.5
0 500
510
520
530
540
550 Wavelength, nm
1020
1040
1060
1080
1100
3122. R<0.25% @ 532 +1064 nm, AOI = 0.
Coatings
Broad Band Anti-Reflection Coatings

Coatings
750
Coating number AOI = 0 3205-i0 3207-i0 3209-i0 3211-i0 3213-i0 3215-i0 3217-i0 3219-i0 3221-i0 3223-i0 3224-i0 3225-i0 3227-i0 3229-i0 3231-i0
new
AOI = 45 3205-i45 3207-i45 3209-i45 3211-i45 3213-i45 3215-i45 3217-i45 3219-i45 3221-i45 3223-i45 3224-i45 3225-i45 3227-i45 3229-i45 3231-i45 3233-i45 3235-i45
Wavelength, nm 210-400 250-350 300-400 350-500 350-900 400-550 400-700 420-680 450-750 500-800 500-1000 600-900 750-900 800-1200 1000-1400 1060-1700 1300-1700 1500-2000
Reflectivity, % AOI = 0 <1.5 <1.2 <1.0 <0.8 <1.5 <0.4 <0.9 <0.5 <0.5 <0.6 <1.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.7 <0.7 <1.0 <0.7 <0.7 AOI = 45 <2.5 <2.5 <2.0 <1.6 <3.0 <0.8 <1.8 <1.0 <1.0 <1.2 <3.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.4 <1.4 <1.4 <1.4
Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5
Price, EUR 25 / 50 67 / 78 67 / 78 61 / 74 61 / 74 67 / 78 56 / 67 56 / 67 56 / 67 61 / 72 61 / 72 57 / 68 57 / 68 61 / 72 63 / 74 76 / 89 63 / 74 65 / 76
3232-i0 3233-i0 3235-i0

5
3.5 3.0
3.5 3.0 2.5
4
2.5
Percent reflection
Percent reflection
Percent reflection
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
400
500
600
700
800
900
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
3232-i0. R<1%@1060-1700 nm, AOI=0
3213. R<1.5% @ 350900 nm, AOI = 0.
3217. R<0.9% @ 400700 nm, AOI = 0.
Metallic Coatings
100
Reflection, %
Protected gold Protected aluminium Protected silver Enhanced aluminium Protected metallic coatings provide a moderate level of reflection over a very broad spectral range and are widely used as mirrors. These coatings are protected by a thin layer of dielectric material in order to make them durable. Enhanced metallic coatings provide greater reflection across the operating bandwidth. These coatings are enhanced by adding a mul ti layer dielectric stack. Metal coatings modify the state of polarization of an incident beam of light and are therefore inappropriate for most polarization sensitive applications.
Wavelength, nm 250350 450650 300IR 400IR 900IR Average reflection, % >88 >91 >86 >96 >98
80
protected aluminum protected silver protected gold
60
40
20
200
400
600
800
1000 Wavelength, nm
1500
2000
Type UV enhanced aluminium VIS enhanced aluminium Protected aluminium Protected silver Protected gold
1025 1025 1025 500 300
0005 0010 0015 0025 0030
34 / 52 25 / 40 17 / 28 56 / 76 82 / 107
Please contact us for other wavelengths and AOIs.
UV & IR Optics
Damage threshold at 1064 nm 10 ns, mJ/cm2
Coating number
Price, EUR 25 / 50
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
56 / 67
1.6
Optical Components
Windows & Filters

CURVED WINDOWS
Made from BK7 glass or UV grade fused silica Polished to high surface quality Standard substrates are available with a variety of radii of concave curvature We offer two substrate materials spanning a range of thermal expansion coefficients. For applications in which thermal shock is absent and thermal stability is not critical, BK7 glass is a suitable and inexpensive material. For applications requiring high thermal stability or involving severe thermal shock, UV grade fused silica is a good choice.
ET
1.7
Specifications
Material S1/S2 Surface Quality BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm 1% +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.2 mm
D R F=R/2
S1/S2 Surface Flatness Curved Surface Radius Tolerance Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance
Plano-concave windows
Presented substrates are uncoated. For appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Catalogue number BK7 010-0103 010-0105 010-0107 010-0108 010-0110 010-0115 010-0120 010-0201 010-0207 010-0202 010-0203 010-0204 010-0205 010-0206 010-0209 010-0210 010-0212 010-0215 010-0216 010-0220 010-0222 010-0225 010-0227 010-0503 010-0505 010-0510 010-0515 010-0520 010-0525 UV FS 010-1103 010-1105 010-1107 010-1108 010-1110 010-1115 010-1120 010-1201 010-1207 010-1202 010-1203 010-1204 010-1205 010-1206 010-1209 010-1210 010-1212 010-1215 010-1216 010-1220 010-1222 010-1225 010-1227 010-1503 010-1505 010-1510 010-1515 010-1520 010-1525 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Edge thickness ET, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 ROC, mm -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -250 -300 -400 -500 -600 -750 -800 -1000 -1500 -2000 -3000 -250 -500 -750 -1000 -2000 -5000 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 32 / 57 32 / 57 32 / 57 32 / 57 32 / 57 32 / 57 32 / 57 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 110 / 210 110 / 210 110 / 210 110 / 210 110 / 210 110 / 210
We provide a wide selection of shapes and sizes, with plano, spherical or cylindrical surfaces.
Most of Curved Windows are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Housing accessories
Kinematic Mirror Mount 840-0020
See page 8.54
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for English. Call us for other size, radius of curvature, or precision requirements.
Windows & Filters
Plano-convex windows
Presented substrates are uncoated. For appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section.
BK7 011-0201 011-0207 011-0202 011-0203 011-0204 011-0205

25.4
UV FS 011-1201 011-1207 011-1202 011-1203 011-1204 011-1205 011-1206 011-1209 011-1210 011-1212 011-1215 011-1216 011-1220 011-1222 011-1225 011-1227
Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
+50 +75 +100 +150 +200 +300 +400 +500 +600 +800 +1000 +1500 +2000 +3000 +4000 +5000
55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98 55 / 98
011-0209 011-0210 011-0212

6
011-0215 011-0216 011-0220 011-0222 011-0225 011-0227
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for English.
ELLIPTICAL WINDOWS
Bend light at precise angles with minimum wave distortion Elliptical windows bend light at precise angles with minimum wave distortion due to elongated major axis. Precision 45 degree elliptical flat mirrors are ideal for technical and astronomical applications.
Type B Major axis Type A Major axis
Specifications
Surface Quality Surface Flatness Axis Tolerance
Minor axis T
20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.25 mm
Thickness Tolerance
T Minor axis
Presented substrates are uncoated. For appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Material BK7 Catalogue number 020-0183 020-0254 020-0304 020-1183 UV FS 020-1254 020-1304 Minor axis, mm 18.0 25.0 30.0 18.0 25.0 30.0 Major axis, mm 25.0 35.0 42.5 25.0 35.0 42.5 Thickness T, mm 3.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 Price, EUR 43 49 56 71 92 99
UV & IR Optics
Please add letter A to the catalogue number for type A and letter B for type B. Contact us for other size or precision requirements.
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Standard High Reflectivity Coatings see page 1.3 for more information
Lenses
Material
BK7, UV FS
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
011-0206
55 / 98
Coatings
Catalogue number
Diameter D, mm
Edge thickness ET, mm
ROC, mm
Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS
1.8
Optical Components
Flat WINDOWS
T
1.9
Have high transmittance, low wavefront distortion and low scatter Are durable and strong BK7 glass is an economical and ideal choice for high-quality visible applications UV FS has the deepest UV range and the highest transmittance
T W L
Only homogeneous and inclusion free materials are used.
Windows are used to allow optical radiation to pass from one environment to another without allowing other components of these environments to mix. Consi derations in selecting windows may include transmission, scattering, wavefront distortion and resistance to certain environments. An ideal window allows an optical beam to pass from one medium to the next without changing the wavelength distribution of the beam, the transmitted wavefront
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism
or scatter any of the light out of the beam. We offer windows made from three different materials, from which you may choose in view of the properties you need: BK7 or UV grade fused silica.
Windows can be anti-reflection coated. For a required coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Diameters of up to 250 mm are available on request.
BK7, UV FS 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) >80% of the diameter +0.00 -0.5 mm 0.2 mm 1 per inch @ 633 nm 2 arcmin
Please contact us if you can not find the exact size or shape of a window you need. A wide variety of other shapes and sizes can be supplied upon request.
Round Windows
Catalogue number BK7 210-0102 UV FS 210-1102 210-1103 210-1202 210-1203 210-1402 210-1403 210-1502 210-1503 210-1703 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 75.0 English 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 76.2 Thickness T, mm 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 6.3 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 9 / 18 10 / 19 15 / 25 16 / 26 23 / 40 24 / 41 28 / 48 29 / 49 90 / 150
Housing accessories
See page 8.54
210-0103 210-0202 210-0203 210-0402 210-0403 210-0502 210-0503 210-0703
Rectangular Windows
Housing accessories
Rectangular Optics Holders 830-0100, 830-0110
See page 8.51
Catalogue number BK7 215-0122 215-0222 215-0232 215-0252 215-0552 215-0556 UV FS 215-1122 215-1222 215-1232 215-1252 215-1552 215-1556
Rectangular dimensions Width W, mm 15.0 25.4 20.0 25.4 50.8 50.8 Length L, mm 20.0 25.4 30.0 50.8 50.8 50.8
Thickness T, mm 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 6.3
Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 11 / 20 15 / 25 16 / 26 20 / 32 28 / 48 33 / 53
Windows & Filters
Precision Thin Round Windows

Coatings UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms Lenses
T W L D
T
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) >90% of the diameter +0.00 / -0.12 mm 0.2 mm /4 or /10 @ 633 nm <1 arcmin or <30 arcsec
Catalogue number UV FS 226-1111 226-1121 226-1191 226-1201 226-1211 226-1221 226-1531 226-1116 226-1126 226-1216 226-1226 226-1516 226-1526 226-1536
Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 20.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 20.0 20.0 25.4 25.4 50.8 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8
Thickness T, mm 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
Flatness /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4
Parallelism 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin
Price, EUR 66 59 92 82 108 97 42 38 61 55 179 161 145
Housing accessories
Optical Component Mount 830-0037
See page 8.48
Plate Clamp 830-0055

See page 8.49
Universal Plate Holder 830-0075

See page 8.50
Precision Windows
T
Manufactured from the high quality UV FS and BK7 Precision polished on both surfaces and held parallel up to 3 arcsec These windows are designed to be used in precision optical systems. The optical transmission is high with little distortion of the transmitted signal. /10 transmitted wavefront distortion is usually preferred but /4 is offered as an option when this is not an issue.
Windows can be anti-reflection coated. For required coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Diameters of up to 250 mm are available on request.
Specifications
Material Surface quality BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) >90% of the diameter +0.00 / -0.12 mm 0.2 mm /4 or /10 @ 633 nm <1 arcmin, <30 arcsec or <3 arcsec
Please refer to the UV and IR Optics section for windows made from other materials: LiF, ZnSe, Ge, Sapphire, etc.
Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism
Mirrors
215
Windows & Filters
1.10
Optical Components
Round Windows
Catalogue number Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 20.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 75.0 75.0 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 40.0 50.0 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 75.0 75.0 English 12.7 12.7 20.0 20.0 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 76.2 76.2 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 38.1 50.8 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 76.2 76.2 BK7 220-0101 220-0161 220-0191 220-0211 220-0231 220-0201 220-0462 UV FS 220-1101 220-1161 220-1191 220-1211 220-1231 220-1201 220-1462 220-1402 220-1562 220-1582 220-1502 220-1722 220-1752 220-1103 220-1163 220-1193 220-1203 220-1293 220-1403 220-1503 220-1106 220-1166 220-1236 220-1206 220-1466 220-1406 220-1566 220-1586 220-1786 220-1726 Thickness T, mm 3.0 6.0 3.0 5.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.7 15.0 3.0 6.0 10.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 12.7 Flatness /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 /4 Parallelism 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 3 arcsec 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 28 / 53 25 / 50 35 / 69 31 / 63 44 / 87 39 / 79 56 / 134 51 / 122 78 / 194 71 / 176 65 / 160 165 / 231 150 / 210 44 / 62 41 / 56 37 / 50 69 / 94 62 / 84 89 / 139 119 / 185 19 / 34 17 / 31 23 / 50 22 / 49 38 / 90 37 / 89 55 / 131 52 / 128 145 / 198 135 / 180
1.11
Coatings Windows & Filters
220-0402 220-0562 220-0582 220-0502 220-0722 220-0752 220-0103 220-0163 220-0193 220-0203 220-0293 220-0403 220-0503 220-0106 220-0166 220-0236 220-0206 220-0466 220-0406 220-0566 220-0586 220-0786 220-0726
Housing accessories
Mirrors Lenses Prisms Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics
Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0030-02

See page 8.54
Rectangular Windows
Surface flatness: /10 @633nm. Parallelism: <30 arcsec
Catalogue number BK7 225-0123 225-0126 225-0226 225-0236 225-0250 225-0550 UV FS 225-1123 225-1126 225-1226 225-1236 225-1250 225-1550 Rectangular dimensions Width W, mm 15.0 15.0 25.4 20.0 25.4 50.8 Length L, mm 20.0 20.0 25.4 30.0 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 45 / 88 40 / 80 43 / 86 46 / 110 59 / 135 83 / 189
Related products
We offer AR Coated Precision Windows for Nd:YAG laser applications
See page 4.11

See page 8.51
For applications where fine adjusment is required, use Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170
See page 8.81
Windows & Filters
Optical Flats
Flatness of reference surface /20 Optical flats are used for testing and evaluating other optical elements. An interference pattern is formed in the air between the flat and object being evaluated, and this pattern is usually more easily seen through the flat than through the object. The pattern consists of alternating bright and dark bands or fringes which are a contour map of the thickness of the air film. If the surface of the optic is significantly flatter than the surface being evaluated, it is correct to interpret the interference pattern directly as a contour map of the surface being evaluated. If the flat is used on the top of the object, and the interference pattern viewed through the flat, it is advantageous to have an anti-reflection coating on the top surface of the flat (the surface which does not touch the object being evaluated).
For an appropriate AR coating, please refer to the Coatings section (see pages 1.5-1.6). Specifications
Catalogue number UV FS 230-1208 230-1410 Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 40.0 English 25.4 38.1 Thickness T, mm 8.0 10.0 Price, EUR 112 149 Material Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness: 1st surface 2nd surface UV FS +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.2 mm /20 @ 633 nm 2 @ 633 nm
T D
Crystalline Materials for Optical UV Band Pass Filters

Almost all UV radiation (especially 240 280 nm) is absorbed by the Earths ozone layer, and UV radiation that is created by some objects near the Earth surface can be detected only using special ozone filters. Crystalline materials are robust substrates from which optical filters of high purity and optical homogeneity can be fabricated. Available crystalline materials: NiSO4*6H2O (NSH) and K2Ni(SO4)2*6H2O (KNSH).
100 Solar radiation 80
Specifications
Surface quality Surface flatness Parallelism Side surfaces Coating 60-40 scr/dig -/2 @ 633 nm 1 arcmin fine grinding uncoated
60
T, %
40
20
0 190
400
600 800 Wavelength, nm

100
1000
Polished cylinders of NiSO4*6H2O measuring up to 60x40 mm are available. Polished cylinders of K2Ni(SO4 measuring up to 60x40 mm are available. )2*6H
2O
T, %
80
Ni5-04 #1, 12 mm Ni5-04 #2, 8 mm Ni5-04 #3, 4 mm
60
40
20
0 200 300 400 500 Wavelength, nm 600 700 800
Typical spectral transmittance curves of different thickness NiSO4*6H2O elements
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
For metric dimensions please add to catalogue number letter M, for English letter E.
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.12
Optical Components
NEUTRAL DENSITY ABSORPTION TYPE FILTERS AT 450-650 nm

Neutral density absorption type filters decrease the intensity of light without altering the relative spectral distribution of energy. They are used to filter the entire visible spectrum evenly, allowing light reduction without influencing the colour or contrast. Attenuation is accomplished by using light-absorbing glass.
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Parallelism Diameter tolerance Clear aperture Design wavelength Optical density tolerance
100 90
1.13
Neutral density colour glass 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 1 per inch @ 633 nm 3 arcmin +0.0, -0.2 mm 90% of the diameter 450-650 nm 5% of density
External transmission curves (include reflections from uncoated surfaces)
80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 300 400 500
OD0.1
OD0.2 OD0.3 OD0.5 OD1.0 OD2.0 600 700 800 Wavelength, nm 900 1000 1100
Optical Density 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Internal Transmittance, % @ 633 nm 80 63 50 32 10 1.0 0.1 0.01
Code 25.4 mm 240-2501 240-2502 240-2503 240-2505 240-2510 240-2520 240-2530 240-2540 25.4x25.4 mm 240-2601 240-2602 240-2603 240-2605 240-2610 240-2620 240-2630 240-2640 50.8 mm 240-5001 240-5002 240-5003 240-5005 240-5010 240-5020 240-5030 240-5040 50.8x50.8 mm 240-5601 240-5602 240-5603 240-5605 240-5610 240-5620 240-5630 240-5640
Price, EUR 25.4 / 25.4x25.4 / / 50.8 / 50.8x50.8 21 / 22 / 56 / 55 21 / 22 / 56 / 55 21 / 22 / 56 / 55 21 / 22 / 56 / 55 21 / 22 / 56 / 55 22 / 23 / 57 / 56 23 / 24 / 58 / 57 24 / 25 / 59 / 58
Related products
Variable Wheel Attenuator 990-0604
See page 7.26
Filter Holder 830-0060A, 830-0070A

See page 8.50
Windows & Filters
NEUTRAL DENSITY REFLECTIVE TYPE FILTERS AT 400-2000 nm

Neutral density reflective type filters of 1 (25.4 mm) size with optical density that varies from 0.1 to 2.5 are available. Neutral density filters of Corning 7059 glass provide spectrally uniform attenuation from 400 nm to 2000 nm. The reflective coatings enable to reduce thermal effects when these filters are used with moderate power lasers.
Specifications
Glass Material Surface Quality Surface Flatness Parallelism Outer Diameter Thickness Coating Damage Threshold Design Wavelength Optical Density Tolerance Corning 7059 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) @ 633 nm <2 arcmin 25.4 mm +0.0/-0.2 mm 1.1 mm 0.1 mm Reflective 20 mJ/cm2 (10 ns pulse) 400-2000 nm 10% Nominal
Transmission, T %
4 5 90 80
Transmission, T %
70 60 50 40 30 20 10 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Wavelength, nm 1600 1800 2000
245-2501 245-2502 245-2503 245-2504 245-2505 245-2510
245-2515 245-2520 245-2525
400
600
800
1000
1600
1800
2000
Catalogue Number 245-2501 245-2502 245-2503 245-2504 245-2505 245-2510 245-2515 245-2520 245-2525
Optical Density 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Transmission T, % @ 550 nm 79 63 50 40 32 10 3 1 0.3
Price, EUR 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
Related products
See page 8.49
See page 8.50
See page 7.26
See page 7.30
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Plate Clamp 830-0055
Universal Plate Holder 830-0075
Variable Wheel Attenuator 990-0604-02
Filters Holder with 90 Flip 990-0400
Lenses
29
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
100
1.14
Optical Components
COLOR GLASS FILTERS

Color glass filters are made from optically polished highest quality Schott coloured optical glass. The spectral properties of these filters are uniform over the entire aperture and independent of the angle of incidence. Color glass filters can be used alone or in conjunction with monochromators or interference filters to isolate various spectral regions.
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Parallelism Diameter tolerance Thickness Clear aperture Schott colour glass 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 1 per inch @ 633 nm 3 arcmin +0.0, -0.2 mm 90% of the diameter
External transmission, %
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Wavelength, nm 900 1000 1100 1200
BG3 BG39 UG5
100 90
KG1 KG3 KG5
See page 8.50
See page 8.51
1.15
80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 Wavelength, nm 900 1000
1100
1200
3.0 0.2 mm
Custom sizes and shapes are available upon request.
Related products
Filter Holders 830-0070A Rectangular Optics Holders 830-0100, 830-0110
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 200 300 400 500
WG320 GG475 OG530 OG570 RG715 RG780 RG830 RG850 RG1000
600 700 800 Wavelength, nm
900
1000
1100
1200
Material BG3 UG5 BG39 KG1 KG3 KG5 WG320 GG475 OG530 OG570 RG715 RG780 RG830 RG850 RG1000
Code 25.4 mm 241-2003 241-2005 241-2039 242-2001 242-2003 242-2005 243-2320 243-2475 243-2530 243-2570 243-2715 243-2780 243-2830 243-2850 243-2990 25.425.4 mm 241-3003 241-3005 241-3039 242-3001 242-3003 242-3005 243-3320 243-3475 243-3530 243-3570 243-3715 243-3780 243-3830 243-3850 243-3990 50.8 mm 241-5003 241-5005 241-5039 242-5001 242-5003 242-5005 243-5320 243-5475 243-5530 243-5570 243-5715 243-5780 243-5830 243-5850 243-5990 50.850.8 mm 241-6003 241-6005 241-6039 242-6001 242-6003 242-6005 243-6320 243-6475 243-6530 243-6570 243-6715 243-6780 243-6830 243-6850 243-6990
Price, EUR 25.4 / 25.425.4 / 50.8 / 50.850.8 27 / 26 / 51 / 53 45 / 44 / 89 / 88 32 / 31 / 63 / 62 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 27 / 26 / 51 / 50 28 / 27 / 52 / 51 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 24 / 23 / 47 / 46 28 / 27 / 52 / 51 28 / 27 / 52 / 51 28 / 27 / 52 / 51 24 / 23 / 47 / 46
Windows & Filters
Laser safety eyewear

Laser emitted light can be hazardous for eyesight even if the laser power is low. Laser radiation can affect injury for retina and cornea. Working with laser requires additional safety in order to avoid eyes damage. EKSMA OPTICS offers two different kinds of laser safety eyewear in two different styles: spectacles and goggles. The eyewear are amber colour and suitable for safe operation with Nd:YAG, Ti:Sapphire, Yb:KGW/KYW fundamental, second, third, fourth harmonics. The eyewear absorbs laser radiation and gives perfect visibility. Both goggles and spectacles can be worn on prescription glasses. The goggles have air vents that prevent fogging. Laser beam cannot pass through the air vents. Goggles and spectacles come with protective case. The models match the requirements for health and protection mentioned in the Directive of the European Community on Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 89/686/EEC.
8
10 8 6 4
251-1064 Goggles
6
OD
OD
2 0
0 200 400 600 Wavelength, nm 800 1000
200
400
1000
250-0800 Spectacles
Nd:YAG and Harmonics, VLT 24%
Nd:YAG + Ti:Sapphire and Harmonics, VLT 11%
Wide spectrum of visibility Corresponding to the EN207 Comfort and universal fit Eye protection garuanteed For Nd:YAG, Yb/KGW/KYW, Ti:sapphire applications
250-1064, 251-1064 Wavelength, nm 190534 9101070 8701070 Code 250-0800 251-0800 250-1064 251-1064 Optical Density 6.5+ 6+ 5+
250-0800, 251-0800 Wavelength, nm 190534 7201064 7401064 Description Spectacles for Nd:YAG + Ti:Sapphire applications Goggles for Nd:YAG + Ti:Sapphire applications Spectacles for Nd:YAG applications Goggles for Nd:YAG applications Optical Density 6+ 6+ Price, EUR 170 170 150 150
Visualizator990-0840
Laser Beam Visualizer 990-0840 is used for visualization of CW or pulsed laser radiation with wavelength 880-1070 nm. When CW or pulsed laser radiation of wavelength 880-1070 nm falls onto the working surface, the latter glows in the second harmonic of the beam. Use this item to adjust and check a shape of a laser beam. It helps to see the structure of a laser beam intensity distribution. Working surface diameter 35 mm. Laser Beam Visualizer 990-0841 visualize IR and UV coherent and incoherent radiation from various light sources, lasers and others. Made of rare-earth materials, it is an eco-friendly ceramic tablet. Laser Beam Visualizer 990-0842 combines 990-0840 and 990-0841 in one for user convenience. One side visualizes radiation with wavelength 190-1600 nm by emitting red color and the other side visualizes radiation with 880-1070 nm by emitting green color.
Threshold sensitivity, W/cm2 0.02 0.01 0.01 / 0.02 Price, EUR 80 99 135
990-0840
Produces a diffused second-harmonic reflection (visible) from an infrared (invisible) beam High mechanical durability High sensitivity to laser radiation Damage threshold for pulse laser 1 W/cm2 Damage threshold for CW laser (of average power) 400 W/cm2
990-0840
new new
880-1070 190-1090 + 1470-1600 190-1090 + + 1470-1600/880-1070
Green Red Red / Green
990-0841 990-0842
UV & IR Optics
Catalogue number
Spectral range, nm
Emitted light colour
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Lenses
5+
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.16
Optical Components
Mirrors
Laser Mirrors
Laser mirrors are dielectric reflectors providing an optimised performance at stated wavelengths. High polishing quality is important for low wave front distortion, low scattering and high damage threshold. Mirrors are designed to work at 0 or 45 degrees.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Wedge Chamfer UV grade fused silica or BK7 glass /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 3 min 0.3 mm at 45 typical
1.17
Mirrors provided are of AOI=45. Mirrors with AOI=0 can be ordered by adding -i0 to catalogue number. Reflectivity R (s+p)/2 for AOI=0 is 99.8%. The examples: 031-0350-i0, 037-0400-i0.
Mirrors of 76.2 mm and 101.6 mm are available upon request
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold Coated Surface Flatness Angle of Incidence Electron beam multilayer dielectric or Ion beam sputtering Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter 6 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over 85% of diameter available 0 or 45
Laser Line Wavelength

Substrate material: BK7, grade A.
Wavelength, nm 351-361 380-420 442 488-515 500-530 527-532 589 633-670 694 760-840 780 852 980 1000-1060 1047-1064 1300-1320 1520-1570 Application Nd:YAG 3H Ti: Sa 2H HeCd Ar+ Yb:KGW/KYW 2H Nd:YAG 2H Dye HeNe+Diode Ruby Ti:Sa 1H Diode Diode Diode Yb:KGW/KYW 1H Nd:YAG 1H YAG Diode R, % (s+p)/2 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 25.4 6 mm 50.8 8 mm 031-0350 031-0400 031-0442 031-0490 031-0515 031-0530 031-0590 031-0630 031-0694 031-0800 031-0780 031-0850 031-0980 031-1030 031-1060 031-1300 031-1550 032-0350 032-0400 032-0442 032-0490 032-0515 032-0530 032-0590 032-0630 032-0694 032-0800 032-0780 032-0850 032-0980 032-1030 032-1060 032-1300 032-1550 035-0350 035-0400 035-0442 035-0490 035-0515 035-0530 035-0590 035-0630 035-0694 035-0800 035-0780 035-0850 035-0980 035-1030 035-1060 035-1300 035-1550 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 59 / 95 / 128 57 / 89 / 133 57 / 83 / 133 57 / 83 / 133 56 / 74 / 110 56 / 74 / 110 56 / 82 / 122 56 / 75 / 122 56 / 75 / 122 61 / 85 / 133 57 / 83 / 122 57 / 83 / 133 57 / 83 / 122 61 / 75 / 110 57 / 75 / 110 61 / 85 / 137 61 / 90 / 139
BK7 76.2x12.7 mm
Wavelength, nm 380-420 500-530 527-532 760-840 1000-1060 1047-1064 Application Ti: Sa 2H Yb:KGW/KYW 2H Nd:YAG 2H Ti: Sa 1H Yb:KGW/KYW 3H Nd:YAG 1H R, % (s+p)/2 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 037-0400 037-0515 037-0530 037-0800 037-1030 037-1060 Price, EUR 199 185 185 199 185 185
Mirrors
Substrate material: UV grade Fused Silica.

Wavelength, nm 244-248 262-266 257-275 308 325 333-353 347 351-361 380-420 500-530 527-532 760-840 1000-1060 1047-1064 Application KrF Nd:YAG Ti:Sa 3H XeCl HeCd Yb:KGW/KYW 3H Ruby Nd:YAG 3H Ti:Sa 2H Yb:KGW/KYW 2H Nd:YAG 2H Ti:Sa 1H Yb:KGW/KYW 1H Nd:YAG 1H R, % (s+p)/2 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.2 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.9 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.9 99.5 99.8 99.5 99.5 99.9 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 25.4 6 mm 50.8 8 mm 041-0240 041-0260 041-0266 041-0300 041-0325 041-0343 041-0347 041-0350 041-0400 041-0515 041-0530 041-0800 041-1030 041-1060 042-0240 042-0260 042-0266 042-0300 042-0325 042-0343 042-0347 042-0350 042-0350HHR 042-0400 042-0515 042-0530 042-0530HHR 042-0800 042-0080HHR 042-1030 042-1060 042-1060HHR 045-0240 045-0260 045-0266 045-0300 045-0325 045-0343 045-0347 045-0350 045-0400 045-0515 045-0530 045-0800 _ 045-1030 045-1060 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 81 / 111 / 216 81 / 111 / 207 81 / 111 / 207 79 / 109 / 207 75 / 105 / 181 77 / 107 / 187 75 / 105 / 181
75 / 101 / 181 74 / 91 / 169 72 / 102 / 169 / 145 / 75 / 97 / 181 / 175 / 75 / 92 / 169 72 / 102 / 169 / 145 /
Mirrors provided are of AOI=45. Mirrors with AOI=0 can be ordered by adding -i0 to catalogue number. Reflectivity R (s+p)/2 for AOI=0 is 99.8%. The examples: 042-0240-i0, 047-0266-i0.
Wavelength, nm 257-275 333-353 351-361 380-420 500-530 527-532 760-840 1000-1060 1047-1064
Application Ti:Sa 3H Yb:KGW/KYW 3H Nd:YAG 3H Ti:Sa 2H Yb:KGW/KYW 2H Nd:YAG 2H Ti:Sa 1H Yb:KGW/KYW 1H Nd:YAG 1H
R, % (s+p)/2 99.0 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5
Catalogue number (AOI=45) 047-0266 047-0343 047-0350 047-0400 047-0515 047-0530 047-0800 047-1030 047-1060
Price, EUR 290 281 281 272 258 258 272 258
Dual Laser Line Mirrors

Substrate: BK7, grade A.
Wavelength, nm 390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060 532+1064 633+1064 Application Ti:Sa 2H+1H Yb:KGW/KYW 2H+1H Nd:YAG 2H+1H HeNe:Nd:YAG 1H R, % (s+p)/2 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 051-4080 051-5103 051-5306 051-6306 25.4 6 mm 052-4080 053-5103 052-5306 052-6306 50.8 8 mm 055-4080 055-5103 055-5306 055-6306 76.2 12.7 mm 057-4080 057-5103 057-5306 057-6306 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / / 50.8 76.2 85 / 103 / 151 / 227 85 / 103 / 151 / 227 85 / 103 / 151 / 227
Mirrors provided are of AOI=45. Mirrors with AOI=0 can be ordered by adding -i0 to catalogue number. The price remains the same as for AOI=45. An example: 042-4080-i0.
Substrate material: UV grade Fused Silica.

Wavelength, nm 355+532 390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060 532+1064 633+1064 An example: 062-3553-i0. Application Nd:YAG 3H+2H Ti:Sa 2H+1H Yb:KGW/KYW 2H+1H Nd:YAG 2H+1H HeNe:Nd:YAG 1H R, % (s+p)/2 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.9 99.5 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 061-3553 061-4080 061-5103 061-5306 061-6306 25.4 6 mm 062-3553 062-4080 062-5103 062-5306 062-5306HHR 062-6306 50.8 8 mm 065-3553 065-4080 065-5103 065-5306 065-6306 76.2 12.7 mm 067-3553 067-4080 067-5103 067-5306 067-6306 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / / 50.8 76.2 115 / 139 / 215 / 323 110 / 128 / 214 / 321 110 / 128 / 214 / 321 109 / 134 / 209 / 318 / 180 / / 109 / 134 / 209 / 318
Mirrors provided are of AOI=45. Mirrors with AOI=0 can be ordered by adding -i0 to catalogue number. The price remains the same as for AOI=45.
Most of Laser Mirrors are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
85 / 103 / 151 / 227
Lenses
258
Mirrors
Substrate material: UV grade Fused Silica 76.2x12.7 mm
Windows & Filters
Most of Laser Mirrors are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
77 / 107 / 187 / 175 /
Coatings
1.18
Optical Components
Broad Band Laser Mirrors

Substrate: BK7, grade A. Damage threshold: 1 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical.
Wavelength, nm 360440 420540 520650 600850 730950 8001100 Application Ti:Sa 2H Dye Dye Diode Ti:Sa Diode,YAG R, % (s+p)/2 99 99 99 99 99 99 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 071-3644 071-4254 071-5265 071-6085 071-7395 071-8011 25.4 6 mm 072-3644 072-4254 072-5265 072-6085 072-7395 072-8011 50.8 8 mm 075-3644 075-4254 075-5265 075-6085 075-7395 075-8011 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 89 / 107 / 151 85 / 103 / 145 85 / 103 / 145 85 / 103 / 145 86 / 104 / 147 86 / 104 / 147
Reflection, %
1.19
Coatings Windows & Filters Mirrors Lenses Prisms Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics Specifications
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Clear Aperture BK7, UV FS
Related Products
Broadband Ultrafast Ti:Sapphire Laser Mirrors
See page 5.6
Substrate: UV grade Fused Silica. Damage threshold: 1 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical.
Wavelength, nm 220-250 260-380 360-440 420-540 520-650 600-850 730-950 800-1100 Application Spectroscopy Spectroscopy Ti:Sa 2H Dye Dye Diode Ti:Sa Diode, YAG R, % (s+p)/2 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 Catalogue number (AOI=45) 12.7 3 mm 081-2225 081-2638 081-3644 081-4254 081-5265 081-6085 081-7395 081-8011 25.4 6 mm 082-2225 082-2638 082-3644 082-4254 082-5265 082-6085 082-7395 082-8011 50.8 8 mm 085-2225 085-2638 085-3644 085-4254 085-5265 085-6085 085-7395 085-8011 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 145 / 165 / 264 135 / 155 / 249 115 / 139 / 215 110 / 128 / 214 110 / 128 / 214 110 / 128 / 214 130 / 148 / 234 120 / 138 / 224
Kinematic Mirror/ Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0056

See page 8.62
Metal Coated Mirrors

EKSMA OPTICS offers various size round, rectangular, spherical mirrors protected gold, silver or aluminium. Metallic mirrors are widely used due to a moderate level of reflection over a very broad spectral range. Protected gold coatings have the highest reflectance in IR, silver is most efficient in VIS, while aluminium is economical reflector over entire 300-IR region. A layer of dielectric material protects the coatings of the mirrors in order to make them durable. Enhanced metallic coatings provide greater reflection across the operating bandwidth. As metallic coatings modify the state of polarization of an incident beam, they are inappropriate for polarization sensitive applications.
Type Protected aluminium Protected silver Protected gold
100
Average reflection, % >86 >96 >98
Wavelength, nm 300IR 400IR 900IR
Damage threshold at 1064 nm 10 ns, mJ/cm2 1025 500 300
80
protected aluminum protected silver protected gold
60
40
20
/10 @ 633 nm 40-20 scratch&dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish >90% of the diameter
0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 Wavelength, nm 1500 2000
Related Products
Uncoated Windows. See page 1.7 Kinematic Mirror Mount 840-0010
See page 8.54
Adapter for Mirror at 45 840-0115

See page 8.72
Mirrors
Metal Coated Flat Round Mirrors

Substrate type: plano-plano.
T
Diameter D, mm 12.7 25.4
Thickness T, mm 3.0 6.0 8.0 12.7 3.0 6.0 8.0 12.7
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Protected Aluminium Catalogue number 091-0015 092-0015 095-0015 097-0015 091-3015 092-3015 095-3015 097-3015 Price, EUR 20 25 80 160 30 35 120 195
Protected Silver Catalogue number 091-0025 092-0025 095-0025 097-0025 091-3025 092-3025 095-3025 097-3025 Price, EUR 26 39 90 180 36 44 130 215
Protected Gold Catalogue number 091-0030 092-0030 095-0030 097-0030 091-3030 092-3030 095-3030 097-3030 Price, EUR 35 43 115 210 45 155 245
50.8 76.2 12.7 25.4 50.8 76.2
Metal Coated Flat Rectangular Mirrors

Substrate type: plano-plano.
T W L
Width W, mm 15.0 20.0 25.4 25.4 50.8 15.0 20.0 25.4 25.4 50.8
Length L, mm 20.0 30.0 25.4 50.8 50.8 20.0 30.0 25.4 50.8 50.8
Thickness T, mm 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Protected Aluminium Catalogue number 091-0315 092-0315 093-0315 094-0315 095-0315 091-3315 092-3315 093-3315 094-3315 095-3315 Price, EUR 22 29 27 60 90 36 47 45 95 135
Protected Silver Catalogue number 091-0325 092-0325 093-0325 094-0325 095-0325 091-3325 092-3325 093-3325 094-3325 095-3325 Price, EUR 36 48 46 70 100 50 66 64 105 145
Protected Gold Catalogue number 091-0330 092-0330 093-0330 094-0330 095-0330 091-3330 092-3330 093-3330 094-3330 095-3330 Price, EUR 55 65 95 130 69 87 83 130 175
Specifications
Non Standard Metal Coated Mirrors are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Material S1 (curved) Surface Flatness S1 (curved) Surface Quality S2 (plane) Surface Quality Clear Aperture Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance
BK7, UV FS /10 @ 633 nm 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish >90% of the diameter 0.00 / -0.13 mm 0.2 mm
Diameter: 25.4 mm; Edge thickness: 6.0

Substrate type Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave
25.4
Radius, mm -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Protected Aluminium Catalogue number 092-0015 092-0115R-50 092-0115R-100 092-0115R-150 092-0115R-200 092-0115R-250 092-0115R-500 092-0115R-1000 092-0115R-2000 092-0115R-2500 092-0115R-4000 092-0115R-5000 092-3015 092-3115R-50 092-3115R-100 092-3115R-150 092-3115R-200 092-3115R-250 092-3115R-500 092-3115R-1000 092-3115R-2000 Price, EUR 25 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 35 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Protected Silver Catalogue number 092-0025 092-0125R-50 092-0125R-100 092-0125R-150 092-0125R-200 092-0125R-250 092-0125R-500 092-0125R-1000 092-0125R-2000 092-0125R-2500 092-0125R-4000 092-0125R-5000 092-3025 092-3125R-50 092-3125R-100 092-3125R-150 092-3125R-200 092-3125R-250 092-3125R-500 092-3125R-1000 092-3125R-2000 Price, EUR 39 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 44 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Protected Gold Catalogue number 092-0030 092-0130R-50 092-0130R-100 092-0130R-150 092-0130R-200 092-0130R-250 092-0130R-500 092-0130R-1000 092-0130R-2000 092-0130R-2500 092-0130R-4000 092-0130R-5000 092-3030 092-3130R-50 092-3130R-100 092-3130R-150 092-3130R-200 092-3130R-250 092-3130R-500 092-3130R-1000 092-3130R-2000 Price, EUR 43 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 48 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave
Plano-concave Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave
UV & IR Optics
110
Polarizing Optics
95
Prisms
Metal Coated Spherical Mirrors
Lenses
Mirrors
69
Windows & Filters
48
Coatings
1.20
Optical Components
Protected Aluminium Catalogue number 092-3115R-2500 092-3115R-4000 092-3115R-5000 092-0215R+100 092-0215R+200 092-0215R+500 092-0215R+1000 092-0215R+2000 092-0215R+4000 092-3215R+100 092-3215R+200 092-3215R+500 092-3215R+1000 092-3215R+2000 092-3215R+4000 Price, EUR 70 70 70 59 59 59 59 59 59 75 75 75 75 75 75 Protected Silver Catalogue number 092-3125R-2500 092-3125R-4000 092-3125R-5000 092-0225R+100 092-0225R+200 092-0225R+500 092-0225R+1000 092-0225R+2000 092-0225R+4000 092-3225R+100 092-3225R+200 092-3225R+500 092-3225R+1000 092-3225R+2000 092-3225R+4000 Price, EUR 80 80 80 69 69 69 69 69 69 85 85 85 85 85 85 Protected Gold Catalogue number 092-3130R-2500 092-3130R-4000 092-3130R-5000 092-0230R+100 092-0230R+200 092-0230R+500 092-0230R+1000 092-0230R+2000 092-0230R+4000 092-3230R+100 092-3230R+200 092-3230R+500 092-3230R+1000 092-3230R+2000 092-3230R+4000 Price, EUR 110 110 110 99 99 99 99 99 99 115 115 115 115 115 115
Substrate type Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex

25.4
Radius, mm -2500 -4000 -5000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000
Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
1.21
6
100 95 90 3 2 1 0
Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex
Most of Metal Coated mirrors are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Dichroic Mirrors
Laser Damage Threshold: > 2 J/cm2, 8 ns pulse, 1064 nm typical for BK7 substrates > 5 J/cm2, 8 ns pulse, 1064 nm typical for UV FS substrates Back side antireflection coated: R < 0.5% Parallelism: 30 arcsec
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV grade fused silica or BK7 glass /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS
790 810 980 1020 Wavelength, nm 1060
Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter 2 J/cm2, 8 ns pulse, 1064 nm typical 5 J/cm2, 8 ns pulse, 1064 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over 85% of diameter available
031-6800. HR > 99.5% @ 1064 nm, HT > 95% @ 808 nm, AOI = 0
Coated Surface Flatness
Reflected wavelength, Transmitted nm, R > 99.5% wavelength, nm 633 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 633 808 808 808 808
Transmission, % >90 >90 >95 >95 >95 >95
AOI 45 45 0 45 0 45
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS
Code 12.7x3 mm 041-6105 041-6605 031-6800 031-6805 041-6800 041-6805 25.4x6 mm 042-6105 042-6605 032-6800 032-6805 042-6800 042-6805
Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 90 / 115 95 / 120 95 / 120 95 / 120 120 / 150 120 / 150
Housing accessories
Non Standard Dichroic Mirrors are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
See page 8.54
Kinematic Beamsplitter Mount 840-0030-02

See page 8.54
Lenses
(UV FS, BK7, CaF 2 )
Plano-Convex Lenses
Positive focal length Converge incident light Form both real and virtual images Very close to the form minimising spherical aberration for infinite conjugate applications These simplest form lenses have flat surface on one side and spherical surface on the other. They are widely used in telescopes, microscopes, collimators, optical transceivers, magnifiers, condenser systems and eyepieces.
Upon customers request, lenses may be anti-reflection coated. For a required coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface irregularity Surface irregularity for CaF2 Concentricity BK7, UV FS, CaF2 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.5 mm /8 @ 633 nm /4 @ 633 nm 3 arcmin BK7 Paraxial focal length UV FS CaF2 2% @ 546 nm 2% @ 355 nm 2% @ 2940 nm
CT
ET F
Please contact us if you can not find the lens that you need. We can provide a wide range of special focal lengths, diameters and coatings.
Catalogue number BK7 110-0105 110-0107 110-0109 110-0111 110-0115 110-0117 110-0121 110-0123 110-0125 110-0129 110-0135 110-0145
Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7
Focal length F, mm 25.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0
Centre thickness CT, mm 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.1 2.1 2.1
Edge thickness ET, mm 2.7 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.0 2.0 2.1
Price, EUR 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
UV & IR Optics
15
Polarizing Optics
BK7 Plano-Convex Lenses
Prisms
Most of the Lenses are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Lenses
Standard lenses have a range of focal lengths from 25mm to 10000mm, and diameters from 12.5 mm to 50.8 mm.
90% of the diameter
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
Lenses
1.22
Optical Components
Catalogue number BK7 110-0205 110-0207 110-0209 110-0211 110-0215 110-0219 110-0223 110-0227 110-0231 110-0235 110-0239 110-0241 110-0243 110-0245 110-0247 110-0251 110-0255 110-0259 110-0263 110-0265 110-0267 110-0271 110-0275 110-0281 110-0285 110-0289 110-0295 110-0405 110-0407 110-0409 110-0411 110-0415 110-0417 110-0419 110-0423 110-0427 110-0435 110-0445 110-0455 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511 110-0515 110-0519 110-0523 110-0525 110-0527 110-0529 110-0531 110-0535 110-0545 110-0555 110-0565 Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Focal length F, mm 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 450.0 500.0 700.0 800.0 1000.0 1200.0 1300.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0 3000.0 4000.0 5000.0 10000.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 700.0 1000.0 5000.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 700.0 800.0 1000.0 2000.0 5000.0 10000.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 8.5 6.1 5.0 4.4 4.0 3.5 3.2 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 7.3 6.5 5.1 4.3 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 12.3 10.4 7.2 6.1 5.4 5.0 4.7 5.5 5.2 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 Edge thickness ET, mm 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.7 3.1 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.8 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.4 4.7 4.9 4.9 Price, EUR 25 20 19 19 19 19 19 19 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 37 32 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 28 28 28 55 49 46 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
1.23
Housing accessories
Self-Centering Lens Mounts 830-0010, 830-0020
See page 8.44
Lenses
UV FS Plano-Convex Lenses
Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8
110-1105 110-1109 110-1111 110-1115 110-1119 110-1123 110-1127 110-1203 110-1205 110-1209 110-1211 110-1216 110-1217 110-1219 110-1221 110-1223 110-1227 110-1233 110-1239 110-1245 110-1255 110-1265
25.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 30.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 750.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 5000.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 1000.0 1500.0 5000.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 600.0 800.0 1000.0 2000.0 2500.0
4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 9.75 6.0 4.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 13.5 8.6 6.9 5.4 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 12.2 9.6 6.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
2.2 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.0 2.3 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.9 4.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.8 2.2 2.5 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.5 3.7 3.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 3.3 3.7 4.3 4.7 4.9 4.8 5.3 5.7 5.7
48 48 48 48 47 47 47 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 69 69 69 69 113 113 113 113 113 111 111 111 111 111 111 111 141 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138
110-1275 110-1405 110-1409 110-1411 110-1415 110-1419 110-1423 110-1427 110-1431 110-1435 110-1439 110-1445 110-1455 110-1475 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 110-1519 110-1523 110-1527 110-1531 110-1535 110-1545 110-1555 110-1565
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for English. We can supply custom cutting, edging, coating or complete fabrication if required. If you do not find what you need in our list of stock items, please send your specification or drawings for a custom quotation.
Coated Lenses Ordering Information

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price. Example:
UV & IR Optics
BK7 pl/cx lens 12.7 mm, F=1500 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=0 Code: 110-0145 E + 3217-i0, Price: 15 + 56 EUR= 71 EUR/pc.
Lens code Coating code Lens price Coating price English or Metric Dimensions. Can be omitted if not important
For lenses 12.5 25.4 mm please add 25 coating price For lenses 38.1 50.8 mm please add 50 coating price
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
138
Lenses
113
Mirrors
70
Windows & Filters
70
Coatings
Catalogue number UV FS
Diameter D, mm
Focal length F, mm
Centre thickness CT, mm
Price, EUR
1.24
Optical Components
CaF2 Plano-Convex Lenses

Catalogue number CaF2 110-5105 110-5109 110-5111 110-5115 110-5119 110-5123 110-5127 110-5135 110-5205 110-5209 110-5211 110-5217 110-5219 110-5221 110-5223 110-5227 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Focal length F, mm 25.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 500.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 500.0 1000.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 4.1 3.0 2.6 2.5 2.3 2.2 2.2 2.1 7.3 5.7 5.0 4.3 4.0 3.8 3.4 3.2 Edge thickness ET, mm 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Price, EUR 89 76 76 68 68 68 68 68 120 115 110 95 95 95 95 95
1.25
Housing accessories
See page 8.44
Biconvex Lenses
Have positive focal lengths Converge incident light Form both real and virtual images Minimise spherical aberration as well as cancel coma and distortion at a unit conjugate ratio Biconvex lenses are all symmetrical, having equal radii on both sides. They are recommended for virtual imaging of real objects and for positive conjugate ratios from 0.2 up to 5. Outside this ratio range plano-convex lenses are usually more suitable. Biconvex lenses are used as magnifiers, objectives, some condensing systems. Since both surfaces contribute to the power of biconvex lenses, they have shorter focal lengths than plano-convex lenses of equal diameter and surface radius.
Upon customers request, lenses may be anti-reflection coated. For a required coating please refer to Coatings section.
CT
ET F
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface irregularity Concentricity Paraxial focal length BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.5 mm /8 @ 633 nm 3 arcmin BK7 UV FS 2% @ 546 nm 2% @ 355 nm
Lenses
BK7 Biconvex Lenses

Coatings UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms Lenses Mirrors Windows & Filters
Catalogue number BK7 111-0104 111-0108 111-0114 111-0116 111-0118 111-0120 111-0124 111-0128 111-0132 111-0136 111-0140 111-0144 111-0148 111-0204 111-0206 111-0208 111-0210 111-0214 111-0216 111-0218 111-0222 111-0226 111-0228 111-0234 111-0240 111-0250 111-0404 111-0410 111-0414 111-0418 111-0422 111-0426 111-0430 111-0434 111-0440 111-0450 111-0504 111-0508 111-0510 111-0512 111-0514 111-0518 111-0522 111-0526 111-0534 111-0544 111-0550 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Focal length F, mm 12.7 25.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 25.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 500.0 700.0 1000.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 700.0 1000.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 750.0 1000.0 1200.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 4.8 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 9.0 7.5 6.0 6.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 10.5 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 15.0 10.0 8.5 6.1 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 Edge thickness ET, mm 1.2 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.4 3.0 3.0 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.7 3.8 3.8 2.2 2.0 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.2 4.5 4.6 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.6 4.0 3.4 4.4 4.5 Price, EUR 16 16 16 16 16 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 21 21 21 21 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 30 30 30 51 48 48 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price. Examples: 1) BK7 bi/cx lens 12.7 mm, F=400 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 111-0148 E + 3217-i45, Price: 15 + 56 EUR= 71 EUR/pc.
For lenses 12.5 25.4 mm please add 25 coating price
2) BK7 bi/cx lens 40.0 mm, F=1000 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 111-0450 M + 3217-i45, Price: 30 + 67 EUR= 97 EUR/pc.
1.26
Optical Components
UV FS Biconvex Lenses
Catalogue number UV FS 111-1104 111-1108 111-1114 111-1118 111-1122 111-1126 111-1204 111-1207 111-1210 111-1214 111-1218 111-1222 111-1226 111-1230 111-1234 111-1238 111-1240 111-1250 111-1260 111-1404 111-1410 111-1414 111-1418 111-1422 111-1426 111-1430 111-1434 111-1440 111-1460 111-1504 111-1508 111-1514 111-1517 111-1520 111-1522 111-1526 111-1530 111-1534 111-1550 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Focal length F, mm 12.7 25.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 25.0 40.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 750.0 1000.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 400.0 500.0 700.0 1000.0 50.0 75.0 100.0 150.0 175.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 500.0 1000.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 6.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.3 2.2 10.0 7.1 6.0 4.0 4.0 3.2 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 11.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.7 16.2 10.3 10.0 7.5 6.6 7.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Edge thickness ET, mm 1.8 1.8 2.1 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.4 2.1 2.5 1.7 2.3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.9 2.8 1.9 1.5 2.1 2.8 2.3 3.5 3.9 4.1 4.4 4.3 1.0 1.1 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.8 5.4 Price, EUR 49 48 48 48 48 48 71 71 71 70 70 70 70 69 69 69 69 69 69 116 116 116 116 114 114 114 113 113 113 149 148 147 147 147 147 147 146 146 146
1.27
Housing accessories
See page 8.44
Lenses
Plano-Concave Lenses
Have negative focal lengths Diverge collimated incident light Form only virtual images which are seen through the lens Reduce spherical aberration, coma and distortion at negative-infinite or near-infinite conjugate ratios With the concave surface facing the longest conjugate distance These lenses are thicker at the edge than in the centre and flat on one side. The plano- concave lenses are used to expand light beams or to increase focal lengths in optical systems. They are often employed for beam expansion of high peak power pulsed lasers. A beam incident on a concave surface will be focused to a point outside the instrument. Air heating and ionisation at the unwanted focal point are possible with corresponding mode disruption or material damage. To avoid this problem, the input lens should be reversed so that no concave surface faces a parallel beam.
A variety of anti-reflection coatings is available for these lenses. For an appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface irregularity Surface irregularity for CaF2 Concentricity Paraxial focal length BK7, UV FS, CaF2 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.5 mm /8 @ 633 nm /4 @ 546 nm BK7 UV FS CaF2 2% @ 546 nm 2% @ 355 nm 2% @ 2940 nm
CT ET
BK7 Plano-Concave Lenses

Catalogue number BK7 112-0105 112-0109 112-0115 112-0117 112-0119 112-0121 112-0123 112-0125 112-0209 112-0215 112-0219 112-0223 112-0227 112-0231 112-0235 112-0239 112-0243 112-0247 112-0259 112-0409 112-0411 112-0415 112-0419 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 Focal length F, mm -25.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -300.0 -400.0 -500.0 -1000.0 -100.0 -150.0 -200.0 -300.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 1.9 2.7 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.0 2.7 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.6 3.7 3.8 2.0 3.3 4.1 4.7 Edge thickness ET, mm 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 5.0 4.5 4.0 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 4.0 4.0 4.0 7.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Price, EUR 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 28 28 28 28 18
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
14
Lenses
Mirrors
3 arcmin
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.28
Optical Components
UV FS Plano-Concave Lenses
Catalogue number UV FS 112-1105 112-1109 112-1111 112-1115 112-1117 112-1119 112-1123 112-1127 112-1205 112-1209 112-1211 112-1215 112-1217 112-1219 112-1221 112-1223 112-1227 112-1233 112-1245 112-1411 112-1415 112-1419 112-1427 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 Focal length F, mm -25.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -300.0 -400.0 -500.0 -1000.0 -100.0 -150.0 -200.0 -300.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 1.3 2.1 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 1.9 3.1 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.8 2.4 3.0 3.0 4.3 Edge thickness ET, mm 3.2 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.6 5.5 4.7 4.0 4.2 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 7.0 6.0 5.2 5.7 Price, EUR 47 47 46 46 46 46 46 46 70 70 70 70 70 69 69 69 69 69 69 110 110 110 110
1.29
CaF2 Plano-Concave Lenses

Catalogue number CaF2 112-5105 112-5109 112-5111 112-5115 112-5120 112-5125 112-5130 112-5135 112-5205 112-5209 112-5211 112-5217 112-5219 112-5223 112-5230 112-5235 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Focal length F, mm -25.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -500.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -500.0 -1000.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 1.9 2.0 2.4 2.5 2.7 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.7 2.8 3.0 2.7 3.0 3.2 2.6 2.8 Edge thickness ET, mm 4.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 7.0 5.5 5.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 Price, EUR 94 81 81 73 73 73 73 73 125 120 105 99 99 99 99 99
We can supply custom cutting, edging, coating or complete fabrication if required. If you do not find what you need in our catalogue, please send your specification or drawings for a custom quotation.
Housing accessories
Adjustable Lens Mounts 830-0030 See page 8.47

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price. Example: BK7 pl/cv lens 12.7 mm, F=-250 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 112-0125 E + 3217-i45, Price: 14 + 56 EUR= 70 EUR/pc.
For lenses 12.5 25.4 mm please add 25 coating price For lenses 38.1 50.8 mm please add 50 coating price
Lenses
Biconcave Lenses
Have negative focal lengths, diverge collimated incident light Form only virtual images which are seen through the lens Minimise spherical aberration, coma and distortion at unit conjugate ratio These lenses are symmetrical, having equal radii on both sides. Biconcave lenses are often used to expand light beams or to increase focal lengths in optical systems, and are normally used in combination with other lenses. Among the many devices utilising biconcave lenses are laser beam expanders, optical character readers, viewers and projection systems.
A variety of anti-reflection coatings is available for these lenses. For appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Coatings
D 2% @ 546 nm 2% @ 355 nm 5.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 8.3 6.1 6.0 5.0 4.7 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 14 14 14 19 19 19 19 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 14 Coating price ET CT
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface irregularity Concentricity Paraxial focal length BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.5 mm /8 @ 633 nm 3 arcmin BK7 UV FS
BK7 Biconcave Lenses

Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4
114-0104 114-0106 114-0108 114-0110 114-0112 114-0114 114-0118 114-0120 114-0124 114-0128 114-0132 114-0204 114-0206 114-0208 114-0210 114-0212 114-0214 114-0218 114-0220 114-0224
-12.7 -25.0 -40.0 -50.0 -60.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -25.0 -40.0 -50.0 -60.0 -75.0 -100.0 -125.0 -150.0 -200.0 -250.0 -400.0 -500.0
3.2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.8 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 4.8 2.7 4.4 2.6 3.7 3.2 3.1 3.0 2.8 2.9 3.2 3.2
Housing accessories
Variable Lens Holder 830-0040
See page 8.49
114-0228 114-0234 114-0238

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price.
BK7 bi/cv lens 12.7 mm, F=-250 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 114-0132 E + 3217-i45, Price: 14 + 56 EUR= 70 EUR/pc.
Lens code Coating code Lens price English or Metric Dimensions. Can be omitted if not important
UV & IR Optics
Example:
Polarizing Optics
18
Prisms
Lenses
Catalogue number BK7
Diameter D, mm
Focal length F, mm
Price, EUR
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
1.30
Optical Components
UV FS Biconcave Lenses
Catalogue number UV FS 114-1104 114-1108 114-1110 114-1114 114-1118 114-1122 114-1204 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Focal length F, mm -12.5 -25.0 -30.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -25.0 -50.0 -75.0 -100.0 -150.0 -200.0 Centre thickness CT, mm 3.7 2.3 1.3 2.6 2.7 2.8 5.3 4.2 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.0 Edge thickness ET, mm 5.8 3.2 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 9.5 6.0 5.0 4.5 4.5 3.9 Price, EUR 49 49 49 49 49 47 71 71 71 71 71 70
1.31
D ET
114-1208 114-1212 114-1216 114-1220 114-1224
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for English. Please contact us for other size, focus or precision requirements.
Conical Lenses (Axicons)

Can be made from most optical materials
We can supply custom cutting, edging, coating or complete fabrication if required. If you cannot find your axicons needed, please send your specification or drawings for a custom quotation.
An axicon with a spherical lens produces an annular focus.
Two axicons together produce a thick-walled hollow pipe of light.
Specifications
Material BK7, UV FS 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.5 1 @ 633 nm Diameter D, mm 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 30.0 30.0 30.0 Apex angle , deg 140 160 165 170 175 178 160 165 170 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 160 / 283 160 / 283 160 / 283 160 / 283 160 / 283 160 / 283 197 / 350 197 / 350 197 / 350
Most of the Conical Lenses are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Angle tolerance Surface irregularity Catalogue number
Housing accessories
Universal Adjustable Lens/Optics Mount 830-0035
See page 8.47
BK7 130-0240 130-0260 130-0265 130-0270 130-0275 130-0278 130-0360 130-0365 130-0370
UV FS 130-1240 130-1260 130-1265 130-1270 130-1275 130-1278 130-1360 130-1365 130-1370
Please contact us for other size or precision requirements.

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price. Example: BK7 axicone 30 mm, apex 160, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 130-0360 + 3217-i45, Price: 197 + 67 EUR= 264 EUR/pc.
Lens code Coating code Lens price Coating price
For lenses 25.4 mm please add 25 coating price
For lenses 30 mm please add 50 coating price
Lenses
Plano-Cylindrical Lenses
Condense or expand light in one dimension only Ideal for producing line images, for scanning and projection We offer a selection of cylindrical lenses that are either planoconvex or plano-concave in form and rectangular in shape. These lenses are used to focus light to a thin line in laser scanners, spectroscopy, dye lasers, acousto-optics, optical processors and other similar applications. They are the best for circularisation of diode laser outputs, energy collection for linear detectors or for coupling to a slit input. Earlier remarks made about plano-convex and plano-concave spherical lenses with regard to aberrations and conjugate ratios are also applicable to cylindrical lenses.
A variety of anti-reflection coatings is available for these lenses. For an appropriate coating, please refer to the Coatings section. Coatings
B F CT ET
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Size tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface irregularity Paraxial focal length BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter 0.5 mm 0.5 mm BK7 UV FS 2% @ 546 nm 2% @ 355 nm
Please contact us for other size, focus or precision requirements. We can supply custom cutting, edging, coating or complete fabrication if required.
Catalogue number BK7 120-0105 120-0110 120-0204 120-0205 120-0209 120-0210 120-0214 120-0215 120-0219 120-0220 120-0224 120-0225 120-0229 120-0230 120-0234 120-0235 120-0239 120-0240 120-0244 120-0245
Dimensions Metric A, mm 10.0 19.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 B, mm 10.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0
Dimensions English A, mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 B, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8
Focal length F, mm 15 25 50 50 75 75 100 100 150 150 200 200 300 300 500 500 1000 1000 1500 1500
Centre thickness CT, mm 3.7 6.1 5.2 5.2 4.1 4.1 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.5 2.4 2.4 2.3 2.3 2.2 2.2
Edge thickness ET, mm 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Price, EUR 40 60 55 85 55 55 85 55 85 55 85 55 55 95 59 95 59 95
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
85
Prisms
85
Lenses
BK7 Plano-Convex Cylindrical Lenses
Mirrors
1 @ 633 nm
Windows & Filters
1.32
Optical Components
UV FS Plano-Convex Cylindrical Lenses

Catalogue number UV FS 120-1104 120-1105 120-1204 120-1205 120-1209 120-1210 120-1214 120-1215 120-1219 120-1220 120-1224 120-1225 120-1229 120-1230 120-1234 120-1235 120-1239 120-1240 120-1244 120-1245 Dimensions Metric A, mm 10.0 19.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 B, mm 10.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 Dimensions English A, mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 B, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 Focal length F, mm 15 25 50 50 75 75 100 100 150 150 200 200 300 300 500 500 1000 1000 1500 1500 Centre thickness CT, mm 4.9 8.0 7.1 7.1 5.6 5.6 4.7 4.7 4.1 4.1 4.3 4.3 4.1 4.1 3.8 3.8 2.5 2.5 2.2 2.2 Edge thickness ET, mm 2.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.3 3.3 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 2.3 2.3 2.0 2.0 Price, EUR 69 97 95 170 91 170 87 161 87 161 87 161 87 161 96 179 95 177 95 177
1.33
BK7 Plano-Concave Cylindrical Lenses

Catalogue number BK7 122-0105 122-0110 122-0204 122-0205 122-0209 122-0210 122-0214 122-0215 122-0219 122-0220 122-0224 122-0225 122-0229 122-0230 122-0234 122-0235 Dimensions Metric A, mm 10.0 19.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 B, mm 10.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 Dimensions English A, mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 B, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 Focal length F, mm -15 -25 -50 -50 -75 -75 -100 -100 -150 -150 -200 -200 -300 -300 -500 -500 Centre thickness CT, mm 1.4 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Edge thickness ET, mm 3.7 6.0 5.2 5.2 4.1 4.1 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.5 2.4 2.4 Price, EUR 40 60 55 85 55 85 55 85 55 85 55 85 55 85 59 95
Lenses
UV FS Plano-Concave Cylindrical Lenses

A, mm 10.0 19.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 B, mm 10.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 25.0 50.0 A, mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 B, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8 25.4 50.8
122-1104 122-1105 122-1204 122-1205 122-1209 122-1210 122-1214 122-1215 122-1219 122-1220 122-1224 122-1225 122-1229 122-1230 122-1234 122-1235
-15 -25 -50 -50 -75 -75 -100 -100 -150 -150 -200 -200 -300 -300 -500 -500
2.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 3.3 3.3 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.8 3.8 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
4.9 8.0 7.1 7.1 5.6 5.6 4.7 4.7 4.1 4.1 4.6 4.6 4.1 4.1 3.8 3.8
69 97 95 199 95 199 199 95 199 95 199 95 199 113 209 95

Please choose relevant coating from anti-reflection coatings section (pages 1.5 - 1.6). The coating code and price should be added to the lens code and price. Examples: 1) BK7 pl/cx cylindrical lens, dimensions: 10x10 mm, F=15 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 120-0105 E + 3217-i45, Price: 40 + 56 EUR= 96 EUR/pc.
For lenses maximum side length <25.4 mm please add 25 coating price
2) BK7 pl/cx cylindrical lens, dimensions: 25.4x50.8, F=1500 mm, coated AR/AR@400-700 nm, AOI=45 Code: 120-0245 M + 3217-i45, Price: 95 + 67 EUR= 162 EUR/pc.
For lenses maximum side length >25.4 mm please add 50 coating price
Housing accessories
See page 8.51
For applications where fine adjusment is required, use Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170
Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics
See page 8.81
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
Catalogue number UV FS
Dimensions Metric
Dimensions English
Focal length F, mm
Price, EUR
1.34
Optical Components
LENS KITS
The kits containing lenses with different focal lengths and configurations providing a selection of the most demanded lenses. Focal lengths of plano-convex and biconvex lenses range from 25 to 1000 mm. Plano-concave lenses cover a focal distance from -50 to -300 mm, biconcave lenses from -25 to -200 mm. BK7 lens kits includes 40 lenses. UV FS kits contains 36 lenses. Lens kit dimensions (WHD) 30740 cm. Kits are available with broadband multilayer antireflection coatings for UV (210-400 nm on UV FS lenses) and visible (350-900 nm on UV FS lenses) or (400-700 nm on BK7 lenses) ranges.
Uncoated Kits
Code 140-0240 140-1236 Material BK7 UV FS Price, EUR 950 1900
1.35
Coated Kits
Code 140-0237 140-0238 147-0240 145-1236 140-1237 146-1236 Material BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS Coating AR@500-1100 nm AR@1060-1700 nm AR@400-700 nm AR@350-900 nm AR@500-1100 nm AR@210-400 nm Price, EUR 2100 2200 1990 2800 2950 3300
BK7 Lens Kit

Code 110-0205 110-0207 110-0209 110-0211 110-0215 110-0219 110-0223 110-0227 110-0231 110-0235 110-0239 110-0241 110-0243 110-0247 110-0251 110-0259 111-0204 111-0206 111-0208 111-0210 111-0214 111-0216 111-0218 111-0222 111-0226 111-0228 111-0234 111-0250 112-0209 112-0215 112-0219 112-0227 112-0231 112-0239 114-0204 114-0208 114-0212 114-0214 114-0220 114-0224 Configuration Dia*, mm Plano-convex lenses (16 pcs.) pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 Biconvex lenses (12 pcs.) bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 Plano-concave lenses (6 pcs.) pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 Biconcave lenses (6 pcs.) bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 F, mm 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 700 1000 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 500 1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -300 -25 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200
UV FS Lens Kit
Code 110-1203 110-1205 110-1209 110-1211 110-1216 110-1217 110-1219 110-1221 110-1223 110-1227 110-1233 110-1245 111-1204 111-1207 111-1210 111-1214 111-1218 111-1222 111-1226 111-1230 111-1234 111-1238 111-1240 111-1260 112-1205 112-1209 112-1211 112-1217 112-1219 112-1223 114-1204 114-1208 114-1212 114-1216 114-1220 114-1224 Configuration Dia*, mm Plano-convex lenses (12 pcs.) pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 pl/cx 25.4 Biconvex lenses (12 pcs.) bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 bi/cx 25.4 Plano-concave lenses (6 pcs.) pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 pl/cv 25.4 Biconcave lenses (6 pcs.) bi/cv 25.4 bi/cv 25.4 bi/cv 25.4 bi/cv 25.4 bi/cv 25.4 bi/cv 25.4 F, mm 30 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 25 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -300 -25 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200
* Diameter tolerance: +0.0/-0.5 mm.
Related products
Tweezers/Forceps for Optical Components 260-1050
See page A.4
Please refer to Nd:YAG Laser Line (see page 4.12) or Femtoline (see page 5.13) section for lens kits with AR coated lenses for particular laser applications.
Lenses
Simple Telescope Kit

since it produces no net convergence or divergence of the beam. Two lenses at this separation form the simplest type of optical telescope. Although the system does not alter the divergence of a collimated beam, it does alter the width of the beam. The magnification of such a telescope is given by
Coatings UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms
Magnification, M 5.9 7.7 11.8 15.7 19.7 3 4 6 8 10 1.5 2 3 4 5
Din
d = f1 + f2
M =
BFL =
f2 (d f1) d (f1 + f2)
143-1008 141-1008 145-1008 148-1008
UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
355 nm, R<0.25% 532 nm + 1064 nm, R<0.5% 350-900 nm, R<1.5% 650-950 nm, R<1%
1465 1485 1685 1645
1=1+1 d f f1 f2 f1 f2
The distance from the second lens to the focal
Any other antireflection coating wavelength region is available on request.
Each kit includes 8 lenses, Aluminium Optical Rail 810-0005-02, two Aluminium Rail Carriers 8100007-06, Self Centering Lens Mounts 830-0010 and 830-0020, two Rod Holders 820-0050-02 and two Rods 820-0010-02. Net weight: 1.4 kg

Material: BK7 Lens 1 BK7 bi/cv 12.7 mm 114-0104 Lens 2 BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511 BK7 bi/cv 25.4 mm 114-0204 BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511 BK7 pl/cv 25.4 mm 112-0209 BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511 UV FS pl/cv 25.4 mm 112-1205 UV FS bi/cv 25.4 mm 114-1204 Material: UV FS Lens 1 UV FS bi/cv 12.7 mm 114-1104 Lens 2 UV FS pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 UV FS pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 UV FS pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 -50 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 25 50 100 150 200 -25 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 50 75 125 175 225 Focal length f1, mm -12.7 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 62 87 137 187 237 Focal length f2, mm Distance between lenses d=f1+f2, mm *
* Note that distance between lenses d is the distance between focal planes of the lenses and is given theoretically (the thickness of lenses is not included into calculation). It, also, depends on wavelength. The distance should be adjusted 10mm in each particular case.
Lenses
Simple lenses are subject to optical aberrations. In many cases these aberrations can be compensated for to a great extent by using a combination of simple lenses with complementary aberrations. A compound lens is a collection of simple lenses of different shapes and made of materials of different refractive indices, arranged one after the other with a common axis. If two thin lenses are separated in air by some distance d (where d is smaller than the focal length of the first lens), the focal length for the combined system is given by
If the separation distance is equal to the sum of the focal lengths (d = f1 + f2), the combined focal length and BFL are infinite. This corresponds to a pair of lenses that transform a parallel (collimated) beam into another collimated beam. This type
which is the ratio of the input beam width to the output beam width. Note the sign convention: a telescope with two convex lenses (f1 > 0, f2 > 0) produces a negative magnification, indicating an inverted image. A concave plus a convex lens (f1 < 0 < f2) produces a positive magnification and the image is upright.
Code 140-0008 141-0008 142-0008 147-0008 140-1008 144-1008 149-1008 146-1008
Material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Coating Uncoated 1064 nm, R<0.2% 532 nm + 1064 nm, R<0.5% 400-700 nm, R<0.9% Uncoated 266 nm, R<0.4% 266 nm + 355 nm, R<0.6% 210-400 nm, R<1.5%
Price, EUR 771 1075 1110 1260 1170 1470 1480 1680
Mirrors
of system is called an afocal system,
Windows & Filters
point of the combined lenses is called the back focal length (BFL).
Dout
f2 D (exit diameter) = out f1 Din (input diameter)
1.36
Optical Components
Prisms
Wedge Prisms
Steer beams in optical systems Can be used in pairs for continuous angular adjustment
T
1.37
Having selected an appropriate wedge, it is easy to create a precise beam deviation without affecting other beam parameters. If two wedges are used together with the sloping surfaces in close proximity, it is possible to produce a continuous variation of beam deviation by counter rotating the wedges. Wedge prisms are made from alternative materials, such as UV grade fused silica, and different shapes and sizes or with various anti-reflection coatings.
D Beam deviation
Wedge angle
Specifications
Material BK7, UV FS 90% of the diameter +0.00 -0.12 mm 3 arcmin Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Wedge tolerance
Contact us for other types of prisms e.g. trapezoidal, various isosceles, Dove, Amici, Penta, etc.
Standard Wedge Prisms

Surface quality: 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B). Surface flatness: /4 @633nm
Catalogue number BK7 310-0200 310-0201 310-0202 310-0203 310-0205 Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Thickness T, mm 3 3 3 3 3 Wedge, deg 0.5 1 2 3 5 Beam Deviation, deg @ 1064 0.25 0.51 1.01 1.52 2.54 @ 532 0.26 0.52 1.04 1.56 2.60 Price, EUR 46 47 47 48 49
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for english. Catalogue number UV FS 310-1200 310-1201 310-1202 310-1203 310-1205 Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Thickness T, mm 3 3 3 3 3 Wedge, deg 0.5 1 2 3 5 Beam Deviation, deg @ 1064 0.22 0.45 0.90 1.35 2.26 @ 532 0.23 0.46 0.92 1.38 2.31 @ 355 0.24 0.48 0.95 1.43 2.39 Price, EUR 69 70 70 71 72
Please add letter M to the catalogue number for metric dimensions and letter E for english.
Most of the Prisms are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
prisms
Precision Wedge Prisms

Surface quality: 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B). Surface flatness: /10 @633nm
Catalogue number BK7 311-0200 311-0201 311-0202 311-0203 311-0205 Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Thickness T, mm 6 6 6 6 6 Wedge, deg 0.5 1 2 3 5 Beam Deviation, deg @ 1064 0.25 0.51 1.01 1.52 2.54 @ 532 0.26 0.52 1.04 1.56 2.60 Price, EUR 56 57 57 58 59
Catalogue number UV FS 311-1200 311-1201 311-1202 311-1203 311-1205
Diameter D, mm Metric 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 English 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4
Thickness T, mm 6 6 6 6 6
Wedge, deg 0.5 1 2 3 5
Beam Deviation, deg @ 1064 0.22 0.45 0.90 1.35 2.26 @ 532 0.23 0.46 0.92 1.38 2.31 @ 355 0.24 0.48 0.95 1.43 2.39
Price, EUR 84 85 85 86 87
Stable Steel Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0036

See page 8.57
Laser Dispersing Prisms

Separate light by wavelength Are made so that entrance and exit beams pass through at the Brewster angle Like Brewster angle windows, laser dispersing prisms can be used inside the cavity of a laser operating on very low gain laser transitions, where even slight reflection losses may be intolerable.
Thickness Side
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Apex angle tolerance Design wavelength BK7, UV FS, SF11 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 2 arcmin 800 nm
Contact us for other types of prisms e.g. trapezoidal, various isosceles, Dove, Amici, Penta, etc. Custom fabrication also available: coating, cutting, edging, drilling according to your specification.
Material
SF11 BK7 UV FS SF11
320-8218 320-0525 320-1525 320-8525
12.0 22.0 22.0 22.0
25 50 50 50
18 25 25 25
59 67 69 59
95 140 260 195
UV & IR Optics
Catalogue number 320-0110 320-1110 320-8110 320-0218 320-1218
Maximum input beam diameter, mm 6.0 6.0 6.0 12.0 12.0
Side length, Thickness, mm mm 15 15 15 25 25 10 10 10 18 18
Apex angle 67 69 59 67 69
Price, EUR 40 72 49 69 125
BK7 UV FS SF11 BK7 UV FS
Polarizing Optics
/4 @ 633 nm
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
Housing accessories
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.38
Optical Components
Pellin-Broca Prisms
Coatings
Extremely small loss of a p-polarized beam Light separated by wavelength is conveniently turned at an 90 angle with minimum deviation UV FS prisms provide 1.26 separation between 532nm and 1064 nm In a Pellin-Broca prism, an ordinary dispersing prism is split in half along the bisector of the apex angle. Using a right angle prism, the two halves are joined to create a dispersing prism with an internal right angle bend obtained by total internal reflection. The entrance beam is deviated at an 90 angle to its initial direction.
Material BK7 UV FS Catalogue number 325-0206 325-0412 325-1206 325-1215 325-1412 A, mm 11.0 23.5 11.0 15.0 23.5 B, mm 20.0 40.0 20.0 26.0 40.0 H, mm 6.4 12.7 6.4 15.0 12.7 Price, EUR 57 63 110 121 150
a
A H
b
B
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Angles Design wavelength Dimensions Clear aperture BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm = 79.5 0.5, = 60 1 546.1 nm 0.2 mm > 80% of dimensions
1.39
Windows & Filters Mirrors Lenses Prisms Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics
Housing accessories
Tilt/Rotation Stage 860-0110
See page 8.124
Right Angle Prisms

454590 degree prisms Can be used as internal or external reflectors or as retro-reflectors These prisms are used to direct beams at 90 degrees by using a hypotenuse face in total internal reflection (TIR). Right angle prisms are often preferable to an inclined mirror in applications involving severe acoustic or inertial loads, because they are easier to mount and deform much less than a mirror in response to external mechanical stress. As long as acceptance angle limitations for TIR from the roof faces are not exceeded, right angle prisms can serve as a retro reflector, turning beams back to the original direction.
For various HR or AR coatings, please refer to the Coatings section.
A
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Clear aperture 90 angle tolerance Pyramidal tolerance Dimensions Size of face, A B mm 10.0 10.0 12.5 12.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 10.0 10.0 12.5 12.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm 80% of the face size 2 arcmin or 5 arcsec 1 arcmin or 30 arcsec 0.25 mm 90 angle tolerance 2 arcmin 2 arcmin 2 arcmin 2 arcmin 2 arcmin 5 arcsec 5 arcsec 5 arcsec 5 arcsec 5 arcsec Pyramidal tolerance 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec 30 arcsec Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 20 / 49 22 / 51 25 / 62 31 / 75 37 / 86 42 / 93 44 / 95 50 / 103 57 / 116 73 / 142
Catalogue number
Housing accessories
Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170
See page 8.81
BK7 330-0102 330-0122 330-0152 330-0202 330-0252 330-0105 330-0125 330-0155 330-0205 330-0255
UV FS 330-1102 330-1122 330-1152 330-1202 330-1252 330-1105 330-1125 330-1155 330-1205 330-1255
Custom fabrication also available: coating, cutting, edging, drilling according to your specification.
prisms
Corner Cubes
Incident light deviates by 180 degrees independently of the angle of incidence These prisms have 3 mirror surfaces making angles of 90 to each other, juxtaposed to form the corner of a cube with the entrance face perpendicular to the cube diagonal. Respective of an incident direction, all beams are reflected back to the original direction. Solid corner cubes are used in high precision applications or with lasers over very long distances. These angle insensitive mirrors therefore find frequent applications in situations where orientation is difficult or impossible to control and where a mirror would therefore be unsatisfactory.
D H
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Angle tolerances Beam deviation Diameter tolerance: Clear aperture Uncoated
BK7, UV FS 6040 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 at 633 nm 5 arcsec 18030 sec +0.0/-0.3mm
Material BK7
Catalogue Number 340-0217 340-0217M 340-0219 340-0329 340-1217 340-1217M
Diameter D, mm 22.0 25.4 25.4 38.1 22.0 25.4
Height H, mm 17.5 17.5 19.0 28.5 17.5 17.5
Price, EUR 120 140 145 175 165 185
UV FS
Mounting Suggestion
Mounting
Corner Cube 340-0217M mounted into black anodized aluminium ring
Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0056 Standard Rod 820-0010-02 Rod Holder 820-0050-04
Housing accessories
Polarizing Optics UV & IR Optics Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices
Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020

See page 8.54
Movable Base 820-0070
Prisms
Corner cube (340-0217M, 340-1217M) is mounted into black anodized aluminium ring 25.4 mm and clear aperture 17 mm.
Lenses
Most of the Coner Cubes are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Mirrors
Models 340-0217M and 340-1217M are mounted into black anodized aluminium ring 25.4mm and clear aperture 17mm.
Windows & Filters
>80%
Coatings
Specifications
1.40
Optical Components
Non-Polarizing Cube Beamsplitters

Two right angle prisms cemented together with a partially reflecting surface on the internal (protected) face All dielectric coatings of non-polarizing laser beamsplitters are opti mi sed to be insensitive to polarization at designed wavelengths. The coatings hold both the s- and p-polarization components to the same ratio of reflection-to-transmission over a specific laser wavelength region.
The four outer faces are all anti-reflection coated.
1.41
65 60 55 50 45 40 35 510 520 530 540 Wavelength, nm 550 560
a a
p-pol
Specifications
s-pol
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Clear aperture Beam deviation Dimension tolerance Splitting ratio
BK7 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm 80% of the face size 3 arcmin 0.5 mm R/T = 50/505%, |Rs-Rp|5% and |Tp-Ts|5%
Typical transmission curve @ 532 nm
65 60 55 50 45 40 45 610 620 630 640 Wavelength, nm 650 660
p-pol
s-pol
Catalogue number 350-0101 350-0151 350-0201 350-0251 350-0102 350-0152 350-0202 350-0252
Wavelength, nm 532 532 532 532 633 633 633 633 1064 1064 1064 1064
Cube side a, mm 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25
Price, EUR 155 185 205 235 155 185 205 235 155 185 205 235
65
60
p-pol
350-0106 350-0156 350-0206 350-0256
55
50
45
40
s-pol
35 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 Wavelength, nm
Please contact us if you need larger sizes or optimisation at other wavelengths.
Housing accessories
Most of the Non-Polarizing Cube Beamsplitters are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170-04
See page 8.81
prisms
Fixed Ratio Cube Beamsplitters

Two right angle prisms cemented together with a partially reflecting surface on the internal (protected) face All dielectric coatings of fixed ratio laser beamsplitters are opti mi sed to be insensitive to split only s- or only p-polarization or only unpolarized light (R=(Rs+Rp)/2 and T=(Ts+Tp)/2) at designed wavelengths.
a
a a
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Clear aperture Beam deviation Dimension tolerance Reflectance / Transmittance BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm 80% of the face size <3 arcmin 0.5 mm 50 / 50% with tolerance 5% at designed wavelengths
BK7 glass
Catalogue number 355-0100 355-0150 355-0200 355-0250 355-0101 355-0151 355-0201 355-0251 355-0102 355-0152 355-0202 355-0252 Wavelength, nm 488515 488515 488515 488515 532 532 532 532 633 633 633 633 Cube side a, mm 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 Price, EUR 110 115 120 129 110 115 120 129 110 115 120 129 Catalogue number 355-0105 355-0155 355-0205 355-0255 355-0107 355-0157 355-0207 355-0257 355-0109 355-0159 355-0209 355-0259 Wavelength, nm 800 800 800 800 1064 1064 1064 1064 1550 1550 1550 1550 Cube side a, mm 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 Price, EUR 110 115 120 110 115 120 129 110 115 120 129
UV Fused Silica
Catalogue number 355-1102 355-1152 355-1202 355-1252 Wavelength, nm 280 280 280 280 Cube side a, mm 10 15 20 25 Price, EUR 250 265 285 325 Catalogue number 355-1105 355-1155 355-1205 355-1255 Wavelength, nm 355 355 355 355 Cube side a, mm 10 15 20 25 Price, EUR 210 225 275
Housing accessories
Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170-04
See page 8.81
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
245
Prisms
Lenses
129
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.42
Optical Components
Polarizing Optics
This section describes a group of components which modify the state of polarization of optical radiation. Polarized light carries valuable information about where the light has been and the various physical parameters which have been acting upon it.
1.43
Brewster Windows
Transmit 100% p-polarization components Reflect 20% s-polarization components Brewster windows are intended for high energy laser beams intra cavity usage.
Specifications
Material BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm 90% of diameter < 10 arcsec +0.00 -0.12 mm 0.2 mm Catalogue number BK7 410-0123 410-0255 410-0408 410-0508 UV FS 410-1123 410-1255 410-1408 410-1508 Minor axis D, mm 12.5 25.0 40.0 50.0 Thickness T, mm 3.0 5.0 8.0 8.0 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS 65 / 87 75 / 145 99 / 195 130 / 250 Surface quality Wavefront distortion Clear aperture Parallelism Axis tolerance Thickness tolerance
Brewster angle D
Please contact us for other Brewster windows size or precision requirements.
Thin Film Laser Polarizers

Provide the achievement of strictly linear polarization of laser radiaton Utilise the polarization wich occurs on reflection from a plane surface Thin Film Polarizers are designed for use in the most demanding lasers. Due to a high damage threshold reaching 10 J/ cm @ 1064 nm 8 ns, they are used as an alternative to Glan laser polarizing prisms or cube polarizing beamsplitters. Typical applications are intracavity Qswitch hold-off polarizers or extracavity attenuators for Nd:YAG lasers. Thin Film Polarizers can be used at an > 40 angle of incidence, but polarization is most efficient and appears in a broad wave length range at 55 AOI (Brewster angle). Typical polarization ratio TP/TS is 200:1. Standard size is up to 50 mm (2), while max. available dimensions are 100200 mm. For optimal transmission a Thin Film Polarizer should be mounted in an appropriate holder for angular adjustment.
100 80 p-pol 60 40 20 0 s-pol
s-pol Brewster angle T
p-pol
Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Parallelism Clear aperture Angle of incidence Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Transmission efficiency BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm <30 arcsec >90% Brewster angle 2 +0.0 -0.12 mm 0.2 mm Tp>95% >200:1 10 J/cm2 10 nsec pulse at 1064 nm typical
760
770
780
820
830
Extinction ratio Tp/Ts Laser damage threshold
Polarizing Optics
BK7 Round Thin Film Polarizers

Catalogue number 420-0114 420-0124 420-0125 420-0127 420-0126 420-0136 420-0118 420-0138 420-0128 420-0244 420-0254 420-0255 420-0257 420-0256 420-0266 420-0248 420-0268 420-0258 420-0514 420-0504 420-0505 420-0507 420-0506 420-0526 420-0518 420-0528 420-0508 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness Wavelength, T, mm nm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 515 532 633 775 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 515 532 633 775 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 515 532 633 775 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 Price, EUR 108 108 108 108 108 160 115 160 115 128 128 128 128 128 189 155 189 155 206 206 206 215 305 309 255 335 255
BK7 Rectangular Thin Film Laser Polarizers

Coatings UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms Lenses Mirrors Windows & Filters
Catalogue Rectangular dimensions Thickness Wavelength, Price, number Length, mm Width, mm T, mm nm EUR 420-0274 420-0284 420-0285 420-0287 420-0286 420-0296 420-0278 420-0298 420-0288 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 515 532 633 775 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 142 142 142 142 142 220 170 220 170
Most of Thin Film Polarizers are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Related Products
Glan Laser Polarizing Prims
See page 1.46
Wollaston Prisms
See page 1.47
UV FS Round Thin Film Laser Polarizers

Catalogue number 420-1112 420-1122 420-1123 420-1114 420-1124 420-1126 420-1136 420-1118 420-1138 420-1128 420-1242 420-1252 420-1253 420-1244 420-1254 420-1256 420-1266 420-1248 420-1268 420-1258 420-1512 420-1502 420-1503 420-1514 420-1504 420-1506 420-1526 420-1518 420-1528 420-1508 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness Wavelength, T, mm nm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 343 355 400 515 532 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 343 355 400 515 532 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 343 355 400 515 532 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 Price, EUR 164 164 131 131 131 131 196 145 196 145 182 182 154 154 154 154 231 180 231 180 325 325 295 295 295 305 404 315 404 315
UV FS Rectangular Thin Film Laser Polarizers

Catalogue Rectangular dimensions Thickness Wavelength, Price, number Length, mm Width, mm T, mm nm EUR 420-1272 420-1282 420-1283 420-1274 420-1284 420-1286 420-1296 420-1278 420-1298 420-1288 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 343 355 400 515 532 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 1064 255 255 215 215 215 215 315 225 315 225
Housing accessories
Adapters for Polarizer at 56 840-0117, 840-0118
See page 8.74
Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070, -0071

See page 7.13
1.44
Optical Components
Cube Polarizing Beamsplitters

Durable and convenient Optimised for popular laser wavelengths Polarizing film is coated on the internal face of a cube beamsplitter. Thin film polarizers utilize the polarization which occurs on reflection deviated by 90 angle. Cube polarizing beamsplitters can be optimized for a particular wavelength to give superior performance for laser application can be optimised for a particular wavelength to give superior performance for laser applications.
1.45
s-pol
a p-pol a a
Please contact us for polarizing cubes with an extinction ratio of up to Tp/Ts>500:1

Specifications
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Clear aperture Beam deviation Dimension tolerance Laser Damage Threshold BK7, UV FS 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm 90% of the face size <3 arcmin 0.3 mm 0.3 J/cm2 10 ns pulses at 1064 nm
100 80 60 40 20 0 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 Wavelength, nm 1060 1070 1080 1090 s-pol p-pol
BK7 glass, Tp/Ts>200:1

Catalogue number Unmounted 430-0101 430-0151 430-0201 430-0251 430-0102 430-0152 430-0202 430-0252 430-0103 430-0153 430-0203 430-0253 Mounted 430-0101-M2Ps 430-0151-M2P 430-0201-M2P 430-0251-M2P 430-0102-M2Ps 430-0152-M2P 430-0202-M2P 430-0252-M2P 430-0103-M2Ps 430-0153-M2P 430-0203-M2P 430-0253-M2P Wavelength range, nm 532 532 532 532 780 780 780 780 1064 1064 1064 1064
Reflection s-pol, % Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5 Rs>99.5
Transmission p-pol, % Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95 Tp>95
Side aa, mm 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25
Price, EUR Unmounted 135 165 185 215 135 165 185 215 135 165 185 215 Mounted 185 215 235 265 185 215 235 265 185 215 235 265
UV FS, Tp/Ts>100:1
Catalogue number Unmounted 430-1103 430-1153 430-1203 430-1105 430-1155 430-1205 430-1107 430-1157 430-1207 Mounted 430-1103-M2Ps 430-1153-M2P 430-1203-M2P 430-1105-M2Ps 430-1155-M2P 430-1205-M2P 430-1107-M2Ps 430-1157-M2P 430-1207-M2P Wavelength range, nm 280 280 280 308 308 308 355 355 355 Reflection s-pol, % Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Rs>99 Transmission p-pol, % Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Tp>90 Side aa, mm 10 10 15 15 20 20 10 10 15 15 20 20 10 10 15 15 20 20 Price, EUR Unmounted 290 350 390 280 340 380 270 330 380 Mounted 340 400 440 330 390 430 320 380 430
Housing accessories
for unmounted cube polarizing beamsplitters
Prism Holders 840-0160, 840-0170

See page 8.81
Please contact us if you need polarizing beamsplitters of other wavelengths, other sizes or other configurations.
Cube Polarizing Beamsplitters mounted in black aluminium mounts M2P or M2Ps are available.
For drawing of mount and mounting suggestion, see page 1.46.
Polarizing Optics
Glan Laser Polarizing Prisms

Transmit a linearly polarized extraordinary beam without deviation from its initial direction Reflect an ordinary ray out of the prism into either the black glass or the escape port Air-spaced prisms Available with two, one or no escape ports in mounts for extra power capacity Glan laser polarizers are manufactured from the finest optical grade natural calcite or -BBO. They are useful in applications requiring a high degree of polarization purity, high total transmission and low, medium or high power requirements.
Coatings
A B
We also provide Glan Thompson, Beamsplitting Thompson prisms, Beam Displacers, Laser Polarizing Beamsplitters, etc. Please contact us for more information.
Natural Calcite Glan Laser Prisms

Catalogue number unmounted 440-2010 440-2012 440-2014 440-2020 mounted 440-2010-M2Ps 440-2012-M2Ps 440-2014-M2P 440-2020-M2P Price, EUR unmounted 422 525 710 1575 mounted 472 575 760 1625
Material Surface quality Wavefront distortion Beam deviation Wavelength range Extinction ratio
Natural calcite 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 at 633 nm <3 arcmin 2202300 nm 1:10-5
Standard dimensions A B, mm 10 10 12 12 14 14 20 20
Adjustable Polarizer Holder of Side Driver 840-0195
Example of M2P mount for Glan Laser Polarizing prisms of 2020 mm standard dimensions.
M2Ps Mount
45
18
M2P mount can be used with 840-0180, 840-0195, 840-0020.

Glan Laser Polarizing Prism Standard Rod 820-0020-20 Solid Base Height Extender 820-0210
M3
Glan Laser Polarizing Prism
Rod Holders 820-0050-02 Solid Base Height Extenders 820-0210
5 35
Drawings of M2P and M2Ps for prisms of other dimensions are available on request.
UV & IR Optics
M2Ps mount can be used with 840-0180, 840-0020.
9.8 25.4
Standard Rod 820-0010-02
12
Polarizing Optics
Example of M2Ps mount for Glan Laser Polarizing prisms of 1010 mm dimensions.
15
23
Prisms
M3
19.8 25.4 M27x1
22
M2P Mount
Polarizer Holders 840-0180-A1
10
31
Lenses
Mounting Suggestion
Mounting
Mirrors
Specifications
Windows & Filters
1.46
Optical Components
-BBO Glan Laser Prisms

SPECIFICATIONS Coatings
Material Transmittance wavelength range Extinction ratio Surface quality Wavefront distortion Beam deviation Angular field Coating Mount -BBO 2003500 nm 1:10-5 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 at 633 nm <3 arcmin >6 deg Single layer MgF2 Black anodized aluminium Catalogue number 441-2108 441-2110 441-2115 441-2208 441-2210 441-2215 441-2308 441-2310 441-2315 Operating wavelength range, nm 200270 200270 200270 260340 260340 260340 300400 300400 300400 Clear aperture , mm 8.0 10.0 15.0 8.0 10.0 15.0 8.0 10.0 15.0 Outer mount , mm 25.4 25.4 30.0 25.4 25.4 30.0 25.4 25.4 30.0 Price, EUR 510 595 845 490 580 830 490 580 830
1.47
Housing accessories
Polarizer Holders 840-0180
See page 8.82
Wollaston Prisms
Split a beam into two orthogonaly polarized divergent beams Made from the finest optical grade natural calcite Wollaston prism polarizers consist of two equal calcite prisms. Both output beams are almost equaly deviated. Angular separation of output beams depends on wavelength. The use of highest grade calcite provides useful transmission covering the 3002200 nm range.
Specifications
A
Material
Natural calcite 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 3002200 nm 1:10-5 10 or 20 deg 0.25 mm Price, EUR unmounted 428 517 545 468 555 582 mounted 478 567 595 518 605 632
Surface quality Wavelength range Extinction ratio Separation angle Dimension tolerance
Catalogue number unmounted 450-2101 450-2121 450-2141 450-2102 450-2122 450-2142 mounted 450-2101-M2Ps 450-2121-M2Ps 450-2141-M2P 450-2102-M2Ps 450-2122-M2Ps 450-2142-M2P
Standard dimensions A B, mm 10 10 12 12 14 14 10 10 12 12 14 14
Beam separation , deg 10 10 10 20 20 20
Prisms mounted in black aluminium mounts M2P or M2Ps are available.

For drawing of mount and mounting suggestion, see page 1.46.
Other sizes, better quality, different spectral ranges or AR coatings are available on request.
To order wollaston prism with a AR coating (see page 1.5) add the catalogue number and coating price to the prism code and price.
Rochon Polarizing Prisms

Rochon polarizer is made of two -BBO prisms cemented together. The first prism, cut parallel to the optic axis, receives the light; the second, with the optic axis at right angles, transmits the ordinary ray without deviation but the extraordinary ray is deflected. A Rochon prism can be used to produce plane-polarized light and it can also be used with ultraviolet light. Any separation angle can be designed for specific wavelength upon request.
Catalogue number 455-2108 455-2110 455-2115
SPECIFICATIONS
Material Wavelength range Extinction ratio Surface quality Wavefront distortion Beam deviation Separation angle Coating Mount Clear aperture , mm 8.0 10.0 15.0 -BBO 2003500 nm 1:10-5 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 at 633 nm <3 arcmin 814 deg (8 deg @1064nm) Single layer MgF2 Black anodized aluminium Outer mount , mm 25.4 25.4 30.0 Price, EUR 549 699 950
Polarizing Optics
Quartz Retardation Plates

Made from high quality optical grade crystalline quartz Quarter wave and half wave retardation versions available Multiple-order, low-order or zero-order plates Suitable for high and low power laser applications
Coatings UV & IR Optics Polarizing Optics Prisms Lenses
Price, EUR 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 270 270 280 280
They rotate the direction of polarization (/2) or convert linear into circular polarization or vice versa (/4).
Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates

Easily aligned Temperature insensitive Moderately insensitive to wavelength These are formed from two thin sections which are polished to different thicknesses to have a retardation difference exactly equal to the required. These component plates have orthogonal optic axis directions, so that the roles of the ordinary and extraordinary rays are interchanged in passing from one plate to the other. Retardation error versus wavelength is reduced, therefore they are suitable for fs lasers or laser diode applications.
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter (other dimensions on request) 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 1.52.5 mm /10 @ 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.4% > 0.5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical Retardation /4 Catalogue number 460-4401 460-4405 460-4406 460-4408 460-4410 460-4413 460-4415 460-4420 460-4421 460-4425 460-4428 460-4430 460-4431 460-4432 460-4433 460-4435 460-4440 460-4441 460-4445 460-4446 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 270 270 280 280
Most of the Retardation Plates are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Wavefront distortion Surface Quality Parallelism AR Coating Laser damage threshold Wavelength, nm 1550 1064 1053 1030 950 852 800 780 770 633 589 532 527 Retardation /2 Catalogue number 460-4201 460-4205 460-4206 460-4208 460-4210 460-4213 460-4215 460-4220 460-4221 460-4225 460-4228 460-4230 460-4231 460-4232 460-4233 460-4235 460-4240 460-4241 460-4245 460-4246 Price, EUR
Retardation plates are supplied mounted and have a multilayer dielectric anti-reflection coating on both sides maximising transmission.
Housing accessories
Adjustable Polarizer Holder of Side Drive 840-0195
See page 8.87

See page 8.82
515 488 400 355 343 266 257
Please contact us for other wavelength, size or precision requirements.
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
1.48
Optical Components
ZERO ORDER AIR-SPACED PLATES

For high power laser application
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Wavefront distortion Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0 / -0.12 mm /10 @ 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm
Retardance, waves
0.26 0.24 0.22 0.20 450
Retardance, waves
1.49
Most of the Retardation Plates are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Center wavelength, nm 1064 1030 800 780 532 515 400 355 343 266 257
Retardation /2 Catalogue no. 464-4205 464-4208 464-4215 464-4220 464-4230 464-4232 464-4235 464-4240 464-4241 464-4245 464-4246 Price, EUR 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 335 335 345 345
Retardation /4 Catalogue no. 464-4405 464-4408 464-4415 464-4420 464-4430 464-4432 464-4435 464-4440 464-4441 464-4445 464-4446 Price, EUR 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 335 335 345 345
Housing accessories
See page 8.82
Achromatic Air-Spaced Waveplates

Specifications
Material Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Ring mount thickness Retardation tolerance Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz and MgF2 12.7 mm 25.4 +0.0 / -0.2 mm 8.0 0.2 mm </100 over wavelength range 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) </8 @ 632 nm < 1 arcmin R < 0.8% >3 J/cm2 , 10 nsec, 1064 nm typical
Achromatic waveplates are made from two different materials: crystal quartz and magnesium fluoride with highly efficient broadband antireflection coatings in an air spaced design. Retardation tolerance of our achromatic waveplates is better than /100 over the entire wavelength range. The flat response of these waveplates is ideal for use with tunable lasers,multiple laser-line systems and other broad spectrum sources. Our achromatic waveplates are available for four wavelength ranges: VIS (450680 nm), NIR (700-1000 nm), 950-1300 nm, 1200-1650 nm. The waveplates are provided in a black anodized aluminum housing.
Operating wavelength, nm 450-680 700-1000 950-1300 1200-1650
Retardation /2 Catalogue no. 467-4205 467-4210 467-4215 467-4220 Price, EUR 480 480 480 480
Retardation /4 Catalogue no. 467-4405 467-4410 467-4415 467-4420 Price, EUR 480 480 480 480
Retardation Curve samples:

0.30 0.28 0.55 0.53 0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 450
500
630
680
500
630
680
/4 @ 450-680 nm
/2 @ 450-680 nm
Polarizing Optics
0.30 0.28 0.55 0.53
Retardance, waves
Retardance, waves
0.26 0.24 0.22 0.20 700
0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 700
760
940
1000
760
940
1000
0.30 0.28
0.55 0.53
Retardance, waves
0.26 0.24 0.22 0.20 950
Retardance, waves
0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 950
1020
/4 @ 950-1300 nm
/2 @ 950-1300 nm
High Precision Rotation Polarizer, Waveplate Mount 840-0186

Retardance, waves
0.30 0.28 0.26 0.24 0.22 0.20 1200
0.55 0.53
Retardance, waves
See page 8.84
0.51 0.49 0.47 0.45 1200
1290
1560
1650
1290
1560
1650
/4 @ 1200-1650 nm
/2 @ 1200-1650 nm
Zero Order Dual Wavelength Plates

When optical axis is turned by 45 degrees to input polarization, the waveplate rotates polarization of Ti:Sapphire laser fundamental (800 nm) by 90 degrees and the polarization of Ti:Sapphire second harmonic (400 nm) remains the same.
100
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser Damage Threshold: Optically Contacted (465-4211) Air-Spaced (466-4211) >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical 100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0/-0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm R<0.5%
Polarization purity, %
80 60 40 20
Code
0 400 500 600 700 Wavelength, nm 800 900
Description optically contacted; /2@800 nm + @400 nm air-spaced; /2@800 nm + @400 nm
AR coated 800+400 nm 800+400 nm
Price, EUR 345 410
465-4211 466-4211
Housing accessories
See page 8.82
UV & IR Optics
Polarization purity of zero order dual waveplate
Polarizing Optics
<10 arcsec
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
Housing accessories
1230
1300
1020
1230
1300
Windows & Filters
/4 @ 700-1000 nm
/2 @ 700-1000 nm
Coatings
1.50
Optical Components
Low Order Plates

Thinner than multiple order Less than 8 order Less temperature and wavelength dependent than multiple order
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Surface Quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR Coating Laser damage threshold Wavelength, nm 1550 1064 1053 1030 950 852 800 780 770 633 589 532 527 515 488 400 355 343 266 257 Retardation /2 Catalogue number 461-4201 461-4205 461-4206 461-4208 461-4210 461-4213 461-4215 461-4220 461-4221 461-4225 461-4228 461-4230 461-4231 461-4232 461-4233 461-4235 461-4240 461-4241 461-4245 461-4246 Price, EUR 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 192 192 196 196 Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 0.150.35 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.4% 10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical Retardation /4 Catalogue number 461-4401 461-4405 461-4406 461-4408 461-4410 461-4413 461-4415 461-4420 461-4421 461-4425 461-4428 461-4430 461-4431 461-4432 461-4433 461-4435 461-4440 461-4441 461-4445 461-4446 Price, EUR 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 192 192 196 196
1.51
Most of the Low Order Plates are available for fast off-the-shelf delivery. Check the availability at www.eksmaoptics.com
Multiple Order Plates

Made from a single crystalline plate Polished to 11.5 mm thickness Their retardation is only slightly more temperature dependent compared with the zero order ones.
45
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Surface Quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR Coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 11.5 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.4% 10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical
Polarizing Optics
Wavelength, nm 1550 1053 1064 1030 950 852 800 780 770 633 589 532 Retardation /2 Catalogue number 462-4201 462-4206 462-4205 462-4208 462-4210 462-4213 462-4215 462-4220 462-4221 462-4225 462-4228 462-4230 462-4231 462-4232 462-4233 462-4235 462-4240 462-4241 462-4245 462-4246 Price, EUR 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 143 143 153 153 Retardation /4 Catalogue number 462-4401 462-4406 462-4405 462-4408 462-4410 462-4413 462-4415 462-4420 462-4421 462-4425 462-4428 462-4430 462-4431 462-4432 462-4433 462-4435 462-4440 462-4441 462-4445 462-4446 Price, EUR 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 138 143 143 153 153
Housing accessories
See page 8.84

See page 8.82
527 515 448 400 355 343 266 257
Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates

Operate at both first and second Nd:YAG laser harmonics Retardation tolerance < /300
Specifications
Material Optical axis Wavefront distortion Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Nominal thickness of waveplate Laser damage threshold Retardation and Wavelength @ 1064nm + /2 @ 532 nm @ 1064nm + /4 @ 532 nm /2 @ 1064nm + @ 532 nm /2 @ 1064nm + /2 @ 532 nm /2 @ 1064nm + /4 @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064nm + @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064nm + /2 @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064nm + /4 @ 532 nm Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder /10 @ 633 nm 17 mm for 20 mm 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 0.2-1.2 mm 5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical Catalogue number 463-4120 463-4140 463-4210 463-4220 463-4240 463-4410 463-4420 463-4440 463-4121 463-4141 463-4211 463-4221 463-4241 463-4411 463-4421 463-4441 Price, EUR 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215
Housing accessories
See page 8.84

See page 8.82
@ 800nm + /2 @ 400nm @ 800nm + /4 @ 400nm /2 @ 800nm + @ 400nm /2 @ 800nm + /2 @ 400nm /2 @ 800nm + /4 @ 400nm /4 @ 800nm + @ 400nm /4 @ 800nm + /2 @ 400nm /4 @ 800nm + /4 @ 400nm
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
138
Coatings
138
1.52
Optical Components
Polarization Plane Rotators

Made of crystalline quartz Intended to rotate a beam polarization plane strictly to an appropriate angle using the circular birefringent effect As compared to a waveplate, a rotator has an intrinsic advantage, being independent of rotation around its own optical axis. It needs no adjustment, only to be installed normal to incident radiation. A polarization plane rotator is normally used for the specific wavelength. It is only slightly dependent on ambient temperature.
Specifications Coatings
S1 S2
Clear aperture
1.53
Polarization plane rotators for any wavelength from 200 to 2300 nm are available.
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Mount Thickness Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold
Single crystal quartz Normal to faces S1, S2 of rotator 17 mm for 20 mm diameter D = 25.4 mm (or 25.0 mm) +0.0 mm -0.12 mm T = 620 mm (depending on wavelength and rotation angle) 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 < 10 arcsec R < 0.2% both sides 5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical
Catalogue number 470-4644 470-4649 470-4904 470-4909 470-4804 470-4809 470-4784 470-4789 470-4634 470-4639 470-4534 470-4539 470-4514 470-4519 470-4414 470-4419 470-4044 470-4049 470-4354 470-4259 470-4344 470-4349 470-4264 470-4269 470-4254 470-4259 470-4244 470-4249
Center wavelength, nm 1064 1064 1030 1030 800 800 780 780 633 633 532 532 515 515 413 413 400 400 355 355 343 343 266 266 257 257 244 244
Rotation angle of polarization plane, deg 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90
Price, EUR 215 215 215 215 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 245 245 245 245 245 245
Please contact us for other size or wavelengths requirements.
Related Products
See page 8.54
Kinematic Positioning Mount 840-0193

See page 8.86
Polarizing Optics
Fresnel Rhombs
Rotate polarization, operates over a wide wavelength range /2 rhomb is two optically contacted /4 rhombs Due to unequal phase shifts arising in orthogonally polarized components of an incident wave at total internal reflec tion, Fresnel Rhombs are used to alter the polarization type of radiation. They are designed so that two full internal reflections inside a rhomb provide /2 phase difference between the ortho go nally polarized components of radiation. Hence, if there is a 45 angle between the polarization of the linearly polarized incident plane, the emerging beam is circularly polarized, i. e. the rhomb effect is similar to that of a quarter-waveplate. Therefore, two identical Fresnel rhombs, installed in series, will provide /2 phase difference similar to that of a half-waveplate, i. e. the device can rotate the beam polarization plane by 90, leaving the beam direction invariable.
Coatings
/4 Fresnel rhomb /2 Fresnel rhomb
M6 L
/2 rhomb with mount
Due to the low dispersion of the refractive index of the materials being used Fresnel rhombs are achromatic over a wide spectral range.
Specifications
Material Operating spectral range BK7, UV FS BK7: 4002000 nm UV FS: 210400 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm (all polished surfaces) 2 R < 1% > 0.5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 typical
Broad band AR coating Laser damage threshold
Unmounted Mounting Suggestion

Mounted Fresnel Rhomb Material Catalogue number 481-0210 BK7 481-0410 481-0212 481-0414 UV FS 481-1210 481-1410 Wavelength range, nm 600900 600900 400700 400700 210400 210400 Retardation /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 Clear aperture, mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 Price, EUR 368 186 186 491 296
Fresnel rhombs with other dimensions and parameters or coatings as well as unmounted rhombs are available upon request.
Rod Holder 820-0050-02 Movable Base 820-0090
Material
Catalogue number 480-0210 480-0410 480-0212 480-0414 480-1210 480-1410
Wavelength range, nm 600900 600900 400700 400700 210400 210400
Retardation /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4
Clear aperture, mm 10 10 10 10 10 10
Holder diameter D, mm 73 65 73 65 73 65
Holder lenght L, mm 55 25 55 25 55 25
Price, EUR 659 336 659 336 782 446
BK7
UV FS
UV & IR Optics
Fresnel rhombs with other dimensions and parameters or coatings as well as unmounted rhombs are available upon request.
Polarizing Optics
Standard Rod 820-0010-02
Mounted
Prisms
368
Lenses
Air-Spaced Fresnel Rhombs are available on request for high power applications.
Surface quality Surface flatness Retardation tolerance
Mirrors
Windows & Filters
140
120
1.54
Optical Components
UV & IR Optics
Lithium Fluoride (LiF) Components
100
1.55
Optically isotropic, medium hard, hygroscopic, insoluble in water Wide transmission range from 150 nm to 6000 nm Lithium fluoride crystals are well-suited for manufacturing of optical elements (mirrors, windows, lenses) for UV, visible and IR applications.
80
60
40
20
LiF is very useful for x-ray monochromators and for the study of fundamental properties and defects in crystals.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
Wavelength, m
External transmission of LiF window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
LiF lenses, Brewster windows, prisms are available upon request.
Crystal type Lattice constant, Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Refractive index @ 1.0 m Transmission band, m
cubic a = 4.026 2.64 870 n = 1.387 0.156
Housing accessories
Optical Component Mount 830-0037
See page 8.48
Specifications for LiF windows

Material Spectral range Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism optical quality LiF crystal (n/cm < 0.510-5 ) UV, VIS, IR 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.1 mm 0.2 mm /4 @ 633 nm < 3 arcmin
Diameter, mm 25.4 38.1 50.8
Thickness, mm 3.0 4.0 6.0
Substrate UV grade LiF UV grade LiF UV grade LiF
Price, EUR 102 215 315
Please contact us for other size, shape or precision requirements.
UV & IR Optics
Magnesium Fluoride (MgF2) Components

100
Very hard and rugged Resistant to mechanical and thermal shock The only optical material combining a wide spectral transmission band with the birefringence phenomenon Magnesium fluoride is a proven material for high energy lasers, and in particular for lasers operating in the UV range.
80
60
40
20
Generally all optical elements are manufactured with the working surface perpendicular to the c-axis of MgF2 crystal.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
10
Wavelength, m
External transmission of MgF2 window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
Crystal type Lattice constant, Density, g/cm3 tetragonal a = 4.60, c = 3.06 1255 no = 1.3796, ne = 1.3852 0.117.5
MgF2 lenses, windows, mirrors, prisms, are available upon request.
Melting point, C Refractive index @ 1.0 m Transmission band, m
Specifications
Material Spectral range Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism Maximum available size of optical components optical quality MgF2 crystal (n/cm < 0.510-5 ) UV, IR 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.1 mm 0.2 mm /4 @ 633 nm < 3 arcmin up to 50 mm
Diameter, mm 25.4 38.1 50.8 25.4 38.1 50.8
Thickness, mm 3.0 5.0 6.0 3.0 5.0 6.0
Substrate UV grade MgF2 UV grade MgF2 UV grade MgF2 IR grade MgF2 IR grade MgF2 IR grade MgF2
Price, EUR 230 350 110 215 350
Housing accessories
Kinematic Mirror / Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0032, 840-0033
See page 8.56
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
130
Lenses
Mirrors
3.177
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.56
Optical Components
Calcium Fluoride (CaF2) Components

100
1.57
Useful transmission over the spectral range from 0.2 to 8.0 microns Low solubility Two grades of materials are available: one for UV and the other for IR applications. Low solubility and a wide transmission range makes it useful for many applications, including: mirror substrate for UV laser systems; substrate for manufacturing windows, lenses for UV, IR applications.
80
60
40
20
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
10
Due to its composition CaF2 has a much longer useful life than most materials when used in a fluorine environment.
Wavelength, m
External transmission of CaF2 window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
Crystal type cubic a = 5.462 3.18 1418 n = 1.4289 0.12510 Lattice constant, Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Refractive index @ 1.0 m Transmission band, m
CaF2 lenses, windows, mirrors, prisms, beamsplitters and beamselectors are available upon request.
CaF2 Windows
Specifications
Material Spectral range Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism Maximum available size of optical components up to dia optical quality CaF2 crystal (n/cm < 0.510-5 ) UV, VIS, IR 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.2 mm /4 @ 633 nm 3 arcmin 120 20 mm Catalogue number 530-5253 530-5385 530-5506 530-6253 530-6385 530-6506 530-6710 Diameter, mm 25.4 38.1 50.8 25.4 38.1 50.8 70.0 Thickness, mm 3.0 5.0 6.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 10.0 Substrate UV grade CaF2 UV grade CaF2 UV grade CaF2 IR grade CaF2 IR grade CaF2 IR grade CaF2 IR grade CaF2 Price, EUR 96 190 310 84 99 175 230
IR grade CaF2 protective windows for spectroscopy application (optically polished)

Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism optical quality CaF2 crystal (n/cm < 0.510-5 ) 80-50 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.2 mm optically polished <10 arcmin Catalogue number 530-6121 Diameter, mm 12.0 Thickness, mm 1 Substrate IR grade CaF2 Price, EUR 5
Housing accessories
Flipping Mirror / Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0155
See page 8.79
UV & IR Optics
Barium Fluoride (BaF2) Components

100
Useful transmission range covers 0.26510 m Most resistant to high energy radiation among fluorides listed in this catalogue Barium fluoride is used for optical windows, prisms and lenses transmitting from ultraviolet into infrared, it can be used as an infrared laser window or lens. BaF2 is recommended for use as a vacuum ultraviolet window where high radiation resistance is required.
80
60
40
20
BaF2 is less soluble than LiF, but relatively more soluble than MgF2 and CaF2.
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
20
Wavelength, m
External transmission of BaF2 window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
Refractive index Transmission band, m
@ 0.265 m, n = 1.51217 @ 10.3 m, n = 1.39636 0.13515
BaF2 Windows
SPECIFICATIONS
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.25 mm 0.2 mm 1 per inch @ 633 nm 3 arcmin 540-7251 540-7445 25.4 44.6 3 3.5 93 100 BaF2 Catalogue number Diameter, mm Thickness, mm Price, EUR
Please contact us for other size, shape, precision or coating requirements.
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Focal length Surface irregularity Centration Maximum available size of optical components up to dia BaF2 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.5 mm 2% @ 3 m /4 @ 546 nm 3 arcmin 100 mm Catalogue number 541-7105 541-7205 541-7210 541-7212 541-7225 541-7230 541-7275 541-7250 542-7105 542-7205 542-7207 542-7210 542-7225 542-7250 Diameter, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Focal length, mm 25 50 100 125 250 300 750 1000 -25 -50 -75 -100 -250 -1000 Type plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-convex plano-concave plano-concave plano-concave plano-concave plano-concave plano-concave Price, EUR 89 134 109 109 109 109 109 89 134 120 109 109 109 109
Housing accessories
Self-Centring Lens Mounts 830-0010
See page 8.44
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
BaF2 Lenses
Lenses
Mirrors
BaF2 lenses, Brewster windows, mirrors, prisms are available on request.
Crystal type Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C
cubic 5.27 1525
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.58
Optical Components
Sapphire (AI2O3) Components

100
1.59
The hardest of the oxide crystals Excellent transparency and thermal properties Chemically inert and insoluble Can be safely made much thinner than windows from glass or other crystals Single crystal sapphire combines excellent optical, phy sical and chemical properties. Chemically inert and al most insoluble, sapphire in many ways is a superior ma terial for windows. It is transparent from 150 nm up to 6 m in the middle infrared. Sapphire exhibits anisotropy in many optical and phy sical properties. Difference in the index of refraction in orthogonal directions is 0.008.
80
60
40
20
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
2 Wavelength, m
External transmission of Al2O3 window of 1 mm thickness.
The high index of sapphire makes magnesium fluoride almost an ideal single layer anti-reflection coating.
Physical properties
Crystal type Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Refractive index Transmission range, m Hexagonal 3.98 2040 @ 0.3 m, n = 1.814 @ 5 m, n = 1.623 0.156
Exact parameters depend on the orientation of optical axis or c-axis relative to the surface.
Specifications for Sapphire windows

Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism Orientation Al2O3 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 80% of the diameter +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.2 mm 1 per inch @ 633 nm 3 arcmin C-cut
Catalogue number 550-7121 550-7122 550-7123 550-7200 550-7201 550-7202 550-7250 550-7251 550-7252 550-7253 550-7382 550-7502 550-7503
Diameter, mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 20.00 20.0 20.0 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 50.0 50.0
Thickness, mm 1 2 3 0.5 1 2 0.5 1 2 3 2 2 3
Price, EUR 25 25 25 35 35 35 45 45 45 45 109 157 165
Please contact us for other size, shape or precision requirements. Coatings are available upon request.
Housing accessories
Mirror / Beamsplitter Mount 840-0036
See page 8.57
UV & IR Optics
Zinc Selenide (ZnSe) Components

100
Low absorption in the red end of the visible spectrum Not hygroscopic Quite stable in the laboratory environment Zinc selenide is the most popular material for infrared applications. Due to a very wide transmission range covering 0.622 m chemical vapor deposition grown ZnSe as a high optical quality material is used to ma nu fac ture optical components (windows, mirrors, lenses) for high power IR lasers.
80
60
40
20
0.5
0.7
10
20
30
Because of a high refractive index, single and double layer antireflection coatings can be unusually effective.
Wavelength, m
External transmission of ZnSe window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
Crystal type cubic 5.27 @ 813 m @ 10.6 m 0.622 @ 10.6 m 8.5610-6 0.61.010-3 n = 2.4172.385 n = 2.403
Refractive index Transmission band, m Bulk absorption coefficient, cm-1 Coefficient of linear thermal expansion, C-1
ZnSe Windows
SPECIFICATIONS
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism Coating ZnSe 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.1 mm /40 per inch @ 10.6 m over clear aperture 3 arcmin both surfaces AR coated @ 10.6 m, R0.5% per surface
Uncoated
Catalogue number 560-6120 560-6121 560-6250 560-6251 560-6381 560-6501 560-6503 Diameter, mm 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 38.1 50.8 50.8 Thickness, mm 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 Price, EUR 55 57 69 73 135 270 340
Coated AR/AR@10.6 m, AOI=0

Catalogue number 560-6122 560-6253 560-6383 560-6505 560-6766 Diameter, mm 12.7 25.4 38.1 50.8 76.2 Thickness, mm 2.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 6.4 Price, EUR 85 130 205 995 410
ZnSe Plano-Convex Lenses

Specifications
Surface quality Focal length tolerance Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Coating 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 2% +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.1 mm both surfaces AR coated @ 10.6 m, R0.5% per surface
UV & IR Optics
Material
ZnSe
Polarizing Optics
Prisms
Lenses
Mirrors
ZnSe Brewster windows, mirrors, prisms, beamsplitters and beamselectors are available upon request.
Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C
1525
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.60
Optical Components
Catalogue number 561-6122 561-6192 561-6251 561-6252 561-6253 561-6254 561-6255 561-6256 Diameter, mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 Focal length, mm 25.4 38.1 50 63.5 75 100 127 150 Price, EUR 185 185 195 195 195 195 190 190 Catalogue number 561-6257 561-6258 561-6382 561-6385 561-6388 561-6502 561-6765 Diameter, mm 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 76.2 Focal length, mm 200 254 63.5 127 190.5 127 254 Price, EUR 190 190 315 308 308 580 1390
1.61
ZnSe Meniscus Lenses

Specifications
Material Surface quality Focal length tolerance Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Clear Aperture Coating ZnSe 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 2% +0.0 -0.13 mm 0.1 mm 90% of the diameter both surfaces AR coated @ 10.6 m, R0.5% per surface
Catalogue number
Diameter, mm 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 76.2
Focal length, mm 38.1 25.4 38.1 50 63.5 75 100 127 63.5 127 254 127 254
Price, EUR 215 224 224 217 217 217 217 217 345 345 345 612 1450
Housing accessories
Variable Lens Holder 830-0040
See page 8.49
565-6122 565-6251 565-6252 565-6253 565-6255 565-6256 565-6257 565-6258 565-6382 565-6385 565-6388 565-6502 565-6765
Please contact us for other size, shape, precision or coatings requirements.
Silicon (Si) Components

Coated silicon substrates are most common used as mirrors for CO2 lasers. Its advantages are good durability, thermal stability and relatively low cost. The total reflectors are used as rear reflectors and fold mirrors and externally as beam benders in beam delivery systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Material Density, g/cm3 Operation wavelength Surface quality Surface flatness Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Coating Reflectivity for unpolarised radiation Si 2.33 10.6 m 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 @ 633 nm >80% of diameter +0.0 -0.2 mm 0.25 mm protected gold > 99%
Silicon (Si) Mirrors

Catalogue number 575-6250 575-6380 575-6500 Diameter, mm 25.4 38.1 50.8 Thickness, mm 3 4 5 Price, EUR 59 94 159
UV & IR Optics
Germanium (Ge) Components

100
Wide IR transmission range covering 1.816 m Opaque in the visible range Ge based optical components are widely used for IR applications. Ge is well suited for manufacturing windows and lenses for IR applications in lasers and optical systems. Ge components are used with AR coatings because of high surface reflectivity of substrate.
80
60
40
20
The high refractive index ensures an exceptional single wavelength performance for a best form singlet constructed from germanium.
10
16
Wavelength, m
External transmission for Ge window of 10 mm thickness.
Physical properties
Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Refractive index @ 10.6 m Transmission band, m
5.33 937 n = 4.0034 1.817
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism optical quality Ge crystal (n/cm < 0.510-5 ) 60-40 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.0 -0.1 mm 0.2 mm < 1.5 per inch @ 633 nm < 3 arcmin
Diameter, mm 25.4 38.1 50.8 25.4 38.1 50.8
Thickness, mm 3.0 4.0 5.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Coating uncoated uncoated uncoated AR/AR @ 10.6 m AR/AR @ 10.6 m AR/AR @ 10.6 m
Price, EUR 99 210 159 269 370
Please contact us for other sizes or required specifications of coating.

See page 8.54
UV & IR Optics
Polarizing Optics
Housing accessories
Prisms
299
Lenses
80% of the diameter
Mirrors
Ge lenses, Brewster windows, mirrors and beamsplitters are available upon request.
Crystal type Lattice constant,
cubic a = 5.657
Windows & Filters
Coatings
1.62
Crystals
Crystals Selection Guide
2.1
Nonlinear crystals Laser crystals Terahertz Crystals Raman crystals PositionerS & HolderS Crystal Ovens
See page
Nonlinear Crystals
Lithium Triborate LBO Beta Barium Borate BBO Potassium Dideuterium Phosphate KDP, DKDP Potassium Titanyl Phosphate KTP Potassium Titanyle Arsenate KTA Lithium Iodate LiIO3 Infrared Nonlinear Crystals Ultrathin Nonlinear Crystals
2.32.17
2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.16
See page
Laser Crystals
Neodymium Doped Yttrium Aluminium Garnet Nd:YAG Yb-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate Yb:KGW, Yb:KYW Nd-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate Nd:KGW Titanium Doped Sapphire Ti:Sapphire Lead Thiogallate with Dysprosium Ions Co-doped by Alkali Metals Dy3+:PbGa2S4
2.182.21
2.18 2.19 2.20 2.20 2.21
See page
Terahertz Crystals
Organic Terahertz Crystals DSTMS, DAST,OH1 Semiconductor Terahertz Crystals GaSe, ZnTe
2.222.24
2.22 2.24
Crystals Selection Guide
See page
Raman Crystals
Crystals for Stimulated Raman Scattering KGW, Ba(NO3)2 Passive Q-switching Crystals Co2+:MgAl2O4, Cr4+:YAG
2.252.26
2.26
Laser crystals
See page
2.25
Positioners & Holders

Ring Holders for Nonlinear Crystals 830-0001 Positioning Mount 840-0056-11 Kinematic Positioning Mount 840-0193 Positioning Mount for Nonlinear Crystal Housing 840-0199
2.272.29
2.27 2.28 2.28 2.29
Crystal Ovens
Temperature Controller TC1 with Oven CO1 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH3 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH4 Oven for Nonlinear Crystals CH7 Precision Resistive Heater Kit TC2 and CO10 series Ovens
2.302.34
2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34
Crystal Ovens
PositionerS & HolderS
See page
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
Nonlinear crystals
2.2
Crystals
Nonlinear Crystals
LBO
Lithium Triborate
LBO is well suited for various nonlinear optical applications: frequency doubling and tripling of high peak power pulsed Nd doped, Ti:Sapphire and Dye lasers optical parametric oscillators (OPO) of both Type 1 and Type 2 phase-matching non-critical phase-matching for frequency con ver sion of CW and quasi-CW radiation.
2.5 2.5
Fundamental wavelength , m
Temperature, C
2.3
EKSMA OPTICS offers
wide transparency region broad Type 1 and Type 2 non-critical phase-matching (NCPM) range small walk-off angle high damage threshold wide acceptance angle high optical homogeneity
crystals length up to 50 mm and aper ture up to 4040 mm thin crystals down to 10 m thickness AR, BBAR, P-coating different mounting and repolishing services accurate quality control attractive prices and fast delivery one month customers satisfaction term.
250
Type 1
2 2
Type 2
200 150
Type 1
100 50 0
1.5
XY plane q=90 deg
1.5
YZ plane f=90 deg
Type 2
0.5 90 60 30 0 Phase-matching angle, deg
0.5 0 30 60 90 Phase-matching angle, deg
-50 0.8 1.0
1.2 1.6 1.4 Fundamental wavelength , m
1.8
SHG tuning curves of LBO
NCPM SHG temperature dependance of LBO
Physical and Optical properties

Chemical formula Crystal structure Optical symmetry Space group Density Mohs hardness Optical homogeneity Transparency region at 0 transmittance level Linear absorption coefficient at 1064 nm Refractive indices: at 1064 nm at 532 nm at 355 nm Sellmeier equations (, m) LiB3O5 orthorhombic, mm2 Negative biaxial Pna21 2.47 g/cm3 6 n = 10-6 cm-1 155 3200 nm < 0.01 % cm-1 nx 1.5656 1.5785 1.5971 ny 1.5905 1.6065 1.6275 nz 1.6055 1.6212 1.6430
nx2 = 2.4542 + 0.0113 / (2 0.0114) 0.0139 2 ny2 = 2.5390 + 0.0128 / (2 0.0119) 0.0185 2 nz2 = 2.5865 + 0.0131 / (2 0.0122) 0.0186 2
Phase matching range Type 1 SHG Phase matching range Type 2 SHG
554 2600 nm 790 2150 nm
Nonlinear crystals
NCPM SHG temperature dependence: Type 1 range 950 1300 nm Type 1 range 1300 1800 nm Type 2 range 1100 1500 nm NCPM SHG at 1064 nm Type 1 temperature NCPM SHG at 1319 nm Type 2 temperature Walk-off angle Thermal acceptance Angular acceptance Nonlinearity coefficients: Effective nonlinearity: XY plane YZ plane dooe = d32 cos T1 = - 1893.34 + 8886.63 13019.82 + 5401.5 + 863.9 T3 = - 21630.64 + 1122513 2204602 + 194153 64614.5 149 C 43 C 4 mrad (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) 6.4 Kcm (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) 6.5 mradcm (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) 248 mradcm (Type 1 NCPM SHG 1064 nm) d31 = (1.090.09) pm/V d32 = (1.170.14) pm/V
Please contact EKSMA OPTICS for special OEM and large volume pricing.
Standard specifications
Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Clear aperture /8 at 633nm < 20 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <5 arcmin <30 arcmin 90% of full aperture 0.1 mm
STANDARD CRYSTALS LIST

Code LBO-401 LBO-402 LBO-403 LBO-404 LBO-405 LBO-406 LBO-407 LBO-408 Size, mm 3x3x10 3x3x15 5x5x15 3x3x15 3x3x20 3x3x10 3x3x15 5x5x15 , deg , deg 90 90 90 90 90 42.2 42.2 42.2 11.6 11.6 11.6 0 0 90 90 90 Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm
Please contact EKSMA OPTICS for further information or nonstandard specifications.

Application SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm NCPM SHG @ 1064 nm, T = 149 C NCPM SHG @ 1064 nm, T = 149 C THG @ 1064 nm THG @ 1064 nm THG @ 1064 nm Price, EUR 245 325 765 325 245 325 765
Related Products
LBO crystals for SHG of Yb:KGW/KYW laser frequency conversion. See page 5.30 Crystal Oven TC1
See page 2.30
Nonlinear Crystal Oven CH7

See page 2.33
CH7 oven is designed to keep the crystal at the elevated temperature (4060 C) for thermostabilisation of nonlinear crystal. The elevation of working temperature also extends hygroscopic crystals lifetime. LBO crystal is slightly hygroscopic and polished faces could become foggy after some time of exposition of crystal at ambient enviroment.
Housing accessories
Ring Holders for Nonlinear Crystals
See page 2.27
Positioning Mount 840-0056

See page 2.28

See page 2.28
Crystal Ovens
149 C temperature is required to achieve Non-Critical Phase Matching (NCPM) in LBO at type 1 SHG of 1064 nm application. TC1 oven is specially designed for this purpose (see technical specifications, p. 2.30).
Raman crystals
405
Terahertz Crystals
Wide selection of non-standard size and cut angle LBO crystals is available at www.eksmaoptics.com
Laser crystals
doeo = deoo = d31 cos
Nonlinear crystals
T2 = 878.14 6954.53 + 20734.22 26378 + 12020
2.4
Crystals
BBO
Nonlinear crystals
Beta Barium Borate

As a result of its excellent properties BBO has a number of advantages for different applications: harmonic generations (up to fifth) of Nd doped lasers frequency doubling and tripling of ultrashort pulse Ti:Sapphire and Dye lasers optical parametric oscillators (OPO) at both Type 1(ooe) and Type 2 (eoe) phase-matching frequency doubling of Argon ion and Copper vapour laser radiation electro-optic crystal for Pockels cells ultrashot pulse duration measurements by autocorrelation.
2.5
EKSMA OPTICS offers
wide transparency region broad phase-matching range large nonlinear coefficient high damage threshold wide thermal acceptance bandwidth high optical homogenity
crystal aperture up to 2222 mm crystal length up to 20 mm thin crystals down to 5 m thickness AR, BBAR, P-coating BBO with gold electrodes for e/o applications different mounting and repolishing services accurate quality control attractive prices and fast delivery one month customers satisfaction term.
2.5
Laser crystals Terahertz Crystals Raman crystals PositionerS & HolderS Crystal Ovens
2.4 2 1.6
1.5
Type 2 (o-beam)
1.2 0.8 0.4 0
Type 1
Type 2
0.5
Type 1
0 0 15 30 60 45 Phase-matching angle, deg 75 90
Type 2 (e-beam)
20
25
30 40 35 Phase-matching angle, deg
45
SHG tuning curve of BBO
OPO tuning curves of BBO at 355 nm pump

Chemical formula Crystal structure Optical symmetry Space group Density Mohs hardness Optical homogeneity Transparency region at 0 transmittance level Linear absorption coefficient at 1064 nm
BBO with gold electrodes for e/o applications
BaB2O4 trigonal, 3m Negative Uniaxial (no>ne) R3c 3.85 g/cm3 5 n = 10-6 cm-1 189 3500 nm < 0.1% cm-1 no 1.6551 1.6750 1.7055 1.7571 1.8465 ne 1.5426 1.5555 1.5775 1.6139 1.6742
Refractive indices at 1064 nm at 532 nm at 355 nm at 266 nm at 213 nm Sellmeier equations (, m) Phase matching range Type 1 SHG
no2 = 2.7405 + 0.0184 / (2 0.0179) 0.0155 2 ne2 = 2.3730 + 0.0128 / (2 0.0156) 0.0044 2 410 3300 nm 530 3300 nm 55.9 mrad (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) 1.2 mrad cm (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) 70 K cm (Type 1 SHG 1064 nm) d22 = (2.220.09) pm/V d31 = (0.160.08) pm/V dooe = d31 sin d22 cos sin3 deoe = doee = d22 cos2 cos3 > 0.5 GW/cm2 at 10 ns ~ 50 GW/cm2 at 1 ps
Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Clear aperture up to /8 at 633nm < 20 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <5 arcmin <30 arcmin 0.1 mm 90% of full aperture
Phase matching range Type 2 SHG Walk-off angle Angular acceptance Thermal acceptance Nonlinearity coefficients Effective nonlinearity expressions Damage threshold for TEM00 1064 nm
Nonlinear crystals STANDARD CRYSTALS LIST

BBO-601H BBO-602H BBO-603H BBO-604H BBO-605H BBO-609H BBO-610H BBO-611H BBO-612H BBO-1001H BBO-1002H BBO-1003H BBO-1004H 660.1 660.2 660.5 661 662 660.1 660.2 660.5 661 10100.1 10100.2 10100.5 10101 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800/266 nm P/P @ 400-800/266 nm P/P @ 400-800/266 nm P/P @ 400-800/266 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm P/P @ 400-800 nm SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 THG @ 800 nm, Type 1 THG @ 800 nm, Type 1 THG @ 800 nm, Type 1 THG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm, Type 1 505 505 410 310 310 505 505 410 310 725 725 660
To order unmounted BBO crystals, please remove letter H from code and deduct 50 EUR from price for ring holder.
400
500
600 700 800 900 Wavelength , nm
1000
1100
Typical P-coating for BBO SHG@800 nm application
For safe and convenient handling of BBO crystals, we highly recommend open ring holders. Standard BBO crystals are provided mounted into 25.4 mm diameter ring holder.
200
250
300 350 Wavelength , nm
400
450
450
500
550
600 650 700 Wavelength , nm
750
800
850
Typical coating for BBO THG@800 nm or SHG@532 nm applications (output face P@266 nm)
Typical coating for BBO SHG@532 nm application (input face P@532 nm)
Related Products
Thin BBO crystals for SHG and THG of Ti:Sapphire laser wavelength
See page 5.23
Housing accessories
See page 2.27
Positioning Mount 840-0199 for Nonlinear Crystal Housing

Accepts crystals with aperture up to 12x12 mm and thichness up to 3 mm.
See page 2.29
See page 5.30
Crystal Ovens
BBO crystals for SHG of Yb:KGW/KYW laser frequency conversion
Raman crystals
P-protective coating. Its a single or two layers antireflection coating made at specified wavelength range. Typical reflection values are R2% in the mid range, R<4% at the edges. P coating is recommended for ultra short pulses applications and features low dispersion.
4 4 3
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
Terahertz Crystals
Wide selection of non-standard size and cut angle BBO crystals is available at www.eksmaoptics.com
Reflection, %
Laser crystals
625
Nonlinear crystals
Catalogue number
Size, mm
, deg
, deg
Coating
Application
Price, EUR
2.6
Crystals
KDP DKDP
Nonlinear crystals Applications
Potassium Dideuterium Phosphate

Frequency conversion applications
DKDP crystals are used for second harmonic generation of high pulse energy low repetition rate (<100 Hz) Q-switched and mode-locked Nd:YAG lasers. Cut angle of crystal for operation at room temperature is 36.6 for Type 1 phase matching and 53.7 deg for Type2 phase matching. DKDP crystals are used for third harmonic generation of high pulse energy Q-switched and mode-locked Nd:YAG lasers via sum frequency generation. Cut angle of crystal for operation at room temperature is 59.3 for Type 2 phase matching. Type 1 DKDP crystals with non-critical cut angle =90 are used for fourth harmonic generation (532 nm 266 nm) of high pulse energy Q-switched and mode-locked Nd:YAG lasers. Crystal must be heated at ~50 C temperature to match NCPM conditions. Type 1 KDP crystals with close to non-critical cut angle =76.5 are used for fourth harmonic generation (532nm 266 nm) of high pulse energy Qswitched and modelocked Nd:YAG lasers. KDP has lower absorption at UV wavelengths comparing to DKDP. KDP thin crystals are used for second harmonic generation of Ti:Sapphire laser radiation or pulse duration measurement in single shot autocorrelators. KDP possesses ~2.4 times larger spectral acceptance and correspondingly smaller group velocity mismatch comparing to BBO crystal for SHG of 800 nm, what sometime is very critical parameter for femtosecond wide spectrum pulses. KDP crystals can be supplied by EKSMA OPTICS of aperture up to 80mm. Actually KDP remains the only solution for harmonic generation of very high intensity femtosecond Ti:Sapphire lasers featuring sub-tera Watt or tera Watt peak power pulses in large >30mm diameter beams.
2.7
Laser frequency conversion harmonic generation for high pulse energy, low repetition (<100 Hz) rate lasers; Electro-optical modulation; Q-switching crystal for Pockels cells.
Electro-Optical/Q-switching application
EKSMA OPTICS offers highly deuterated D>96% electro-optic crystal DKDP for Q-switching application; Standard dimensions of electrooptic DKDP crystals for Q-switching are cylinders dia 920 mm and dia 1224mm however manufacturing of custom size and rectangular shape crystals is available; Gold evaporated or silver paste electrodes are available; Dielectric thin film AR coatings for specified laser wavelengths are available; Typical quarter wave voltage 3.4 kV at 1064 nm; Typical contrast ratio between crossed polarizers better than 1:2000; Damage threshold of AR coated DKDP surface >5 J/cm2 at 1064 nm, 10 ns pulses.
Physical and Optical Properties

Crystals Chemical formula Symmetry Hygroscopicity Density, g/cm3 Thermal conductivity, W/cmK Thermal expansion coefficients, K-1 Transmission range, m Residual absorption, cm-1 (at 1.06 m) Measured refractive index (at 1.06 m) Sellmeier coeff., wavelength in m A B C D E Nonlinear coeff. d36, pm/V (at 1.06 m) Effective nonlinear coefficient Type 1 Type 2 Laser damage threshold, GW/cm2 at 1.06 m no ne no ne no ne no ne no ne KDP KH2PO4 42 m high 2.332 k11= 1.910-2 a11= 2.510-5 a33= 4.410-5 0.181.5 0.04 no = 1.4938 ne = 1.4599
n2 = A + B
2 2
DKDP KD2PO4 42 m high 2.355 k11= 1.910-2 k33= 2.110-2 a11= 1.910-5 a33= 4.410-5 0.22.0 0.005 no = 1.4931 ne = 1.4582
C + D
2
2.259276 2.132668 13.00522 3.2279924 400 400 0.01008956 0.008637494 0.012942625 0.012281043 0.43
2.2409 2.1260 2.2470 0.7844 126.9205 123.4032 0.0097 0.0086 0.0156 0.0120 0.40
dooe = d36 sin sin2 deoe = d36 sin cos2 10 ps 100 1 ns 10 15 ns 14.4 250 ps 6 10 ns 0.5
Nonlinear crystals Phase matching angles and bandwidths for SHG of 1064 nm
Type of phase matching Cut angle , deg (angular), mrad thermal, K spectral, nm Walk off, mrad Type 1 ooe 41.2 1.1 10 21 28 Type 2 eoe 59.1 2.2 11.8 4.5 25 Type 1 ooe 36.6 1.2 32.5 6.6 25 Type 2 eoe 53.7 2.3 29.4 4.2 25
Acceptances for crystal of 1 cm length (FWHM):
Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Clear aperture /6 at 633nm < 20 arcsec 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <5 arcmin <30 arcmin 0.1 mm 90% of full aperture
ADP, DADP, RDP, CDA and DCDA crystals are available upon request!

DKDP-401 DKDP-402 DKDP-403 DKDP-404 DKDP-405 DKDP-406 KDP-401 KDP-402 15x15x13 15x15x13 12x12x20 12x12x20 15x15x20 15x15x20 12x12x5 15x15x7 36.5 53.5 59.3 53.5 53.5 59.3 76.5 76.5 45 0 0 0 0 0 45 45 AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 / 355 nm AR/AR @ 1064 / 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064 / 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 / 355 nm AR/AR @ 532/266 nm AR/AR @ 532/266 nm SHG @ 1064 nm, Type 1 SHG @ 1064 nm, Type 2 THG @ 1064 nm, Type 2 SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm THG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 532 nm SHG @ 532 nm 485 485 475 475 579 579 405 480
Related Products
PositionerS & HolderS Crystal Ovens Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices

See page 2.31
DKDP and KDP crystals are highly hygroscopic. CH3 and CH4 ovens help to protect hygroscopic crystals from moisture. The raised working temperature (40-60 C) allows to extend crystal lifetime and to keep it thermostable. This helps to stabilise SHG efficiency.

See page 2.32
Raman crystals
Wide selection of non-standard size and cut angle DKDP crystals is available at www.eksmaoptics.com
Terahertz Crystals
Code
Size, mm
, deg
, deg
Coating
Application
Price, EUR
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
Crystal
KDP
DKDP
2.8
Crystals
KTP
Nonlinear crystals
Potassium Titanyl Phosphate

EKSMA OPTICS offers EKSMA OPTICS guarantees
Crystal size up to 101020 mm Singleband and dualband AR and BBAR coatings Standard and customised mounts and housings Free technical consulting.
Accurate quality control One month customers satisfaction term Conformity of crystal specifications to highest standards Attractive prices Fast delivery.
Phase-matching angle, deg
Wavelength, m
Wavelength, m
2.9
KTP (KTiOPO4) is a nonlinear optical crystal, which possesses excellent non li near, electrooptical and acousto optical properties. A combination of high nonli n ear coefficient, wide transparency range, and broad angular as well as thermal accep tances makes KTP very attractive for different nonlinear optical and wave quide applications.
KTP is a standard crystal mostly used in extracavity confi guration when a single pass through the crystal is required. KTP crystals are optimised for SHG intracavity configuration in low peak power CW lasers. Due to the large number of passes through the crystal, low insertion losses and high homo geneity are essential for conversion efficiency. The special highest quality material selected by SHG efficiency mapping of each crystal, fine surface polishing and dual band AR coatings with very low losses allow EKSMA OPTICS to produce KTP crystals suitable for intracavity SHG application. Fig. 1 represents Type 2 SHG tuning curve of KTP in x-y plane. In x-y plane the slope (k)/ is small. This corres ponds to quasi-angular noncritical phase-matching, which ensures the double advantage of a large acceptance angle and a small walk off. Otherwise in x-z plane the slope (k)/ is almost zero for wavelengths in the range 1.52.5 m and this corresponds to quasi-wave length noncritical phasematching, which ensures a large spectral acceptance (see Fig. 2). Wavelength noncritical phase-matching is highly desirable for fre quency conversion of short pulses. As a lasing material for OPG, OPA or OPO, KTP can most usefully be pumped by Nd lasers and their second harmonic or any other source with intermediate wavelength, such as a dye laser (near 600 nm). Fig. 3 and Fig. 4 show the phasematching angles for OPO/OPA pumped at 532 nm in x-y and x-z plane respectively.
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0.98 1.00 1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10
Fundamental wavelength, m
Fig. 1. Type 2 SHG in x-y plane
90
80
70
60
50 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 Fundamental wavelength, m 3.0 3.5
Fig. 2. Type 2 SHG in x-z plane
1.3
Pump 532 nm
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Fig. 3. OPO tuning curve in x-y plane
4.0
Pump 532 nm
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Phase-matching angle, deg
Fig. 4. OPO tuning curve in x-z plane
Nonlinear crystals Physical properties

Point group Space group Lattice constants, Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Transition temperature, C Mohs hardness Thermal expansion coefficients, C-1 Thermal conductivity, W/cmC Not hygroscopic mm2 Pna21 a = 6.404, b = 10.616, c = 12.814, z = 8 3.01 1172 936 5 ax = 1110-6, ay = 910-6, az = 0.610-6 13
Optical properties
Transparency Refractive indices 3504400 nm at 1064 nm nx = 1.7404 ny = 1.7479 nz = 1.8296 Thermooptic coefficients in 0.4 1.0 m range nx/T = 1.110-5 (K)-1 ny/T = 1.310-5 (K)-1 nz/T = 1.610-5 (K)-1 Wavelength dispersion of refractive indices nx2=3.0067+0.0395/(20.04251)0.012472 ny2=3.0319+0.04152/(20.04586)0.013372 at 532 nm nx = 1.7797 ny = 1.7897 nz = 1.8877
Nonlinear properties
Phase matching range for: Type 2 SHG in x-y plane Type 2 SHG in x-z plane Walk-off Angular acceptances 0.991.08 m 1.13.4 m 4 mrad = 55 mrad cm = 10 mrad cm Thermal acceptance Spectral acceptance Up to 80% extracavity SHG efficiency Effective nonlinearity x-y plane x-z plane deoe= doee= d15sin2+d24cos2 doeo= deoo= d24sin d31= 1.95 pm/V d33= 15.3 pm/V Damage threshold d32= 3.9 pm/V d24= d32 d15= d31 T = 22 K cm = 0.56 nm cm
For Type 2, SHG @ 1064 nm, cut angle =90, =23.5
Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Clear aperture /8 at 633nm < 20 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <5 arcmin <30 arcmin 0.1 mm 90% of full aperture
>500 MW/cm2 for pulses =1064 nm, =10 ns, 10 Hz, TEM00
Code KTP-401 KTP-402 KTP-403 KTP-404
Size, mm 3x3x5 3x3x10 4x4x6 7x7x9
90 90 90 90
23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5
Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm
Application SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm SHG @ 1064 nm
Price, EUR 76 109 118 529
Related Products
Crystal Oven TC1
See page 2.30

See page 2.27

See page 2.33

See page 2.29
Crystal Ovens
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
nz2=3.3134+0.05694/(20.05941)0.0167132
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
Crystal structure
orthorhombic
2.10
Crystals
KTA
Nonlinear crystals
Potassium Titanyle Arsenate

Primary applications EKSMA OPTICS offers:
Potassium titanyle arsenate (KTiOAsO4), or KTA, is a nonlinear optical crystal for Optical Parametric Oscillation (OPO) application. It has good nonlinear optical and electro-optical properties, e.g. significantly reduced absorption in band range of 2.0-5.0 m, broad angular and temperature bandwidth, low dielectric constants.
OPO for mid IR generation up to 4 m Sum and Difference Frequency Generation in mid IR range Electro-optical modulation and Q-switching
KTA crystals size up to 151530 mm AR and BBAR coatings for VIS-IR and mid IR ranges Standard and customized mounts and housings Technical consulting
specifications Laser crystals

Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Clear aperture Transmitting wavefront distortion /8 at 633nm < 20 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <15 arcmin < 0.2 0.1 mm > 90% central area less than /8 @ 633 nm
2.11
Terahertz Crystals Raman crystals PositionerS & HolderS Crystal Ovens
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Crystal structure Point group Space group Lattice constants, Density, g/cm3 Melting point, C Mohs hardness Thermal conductivity, W/mK Not hygroscopic orthorhombic mm2 Pna21 a = 13.125, b = 6.5716, c = 10.786 3.45 1130 5 k1=1.8, k2=1.9, k3=2.1
NONLINEAR & OPTICAL PROPERTIES

Transparency Wavelength dispersion of refractive indices Electro optical constants Effective nonlinearity x-y plane x-z plane deoe = doee = d15sin2 + d24cos2 doeo = deoo = d24sin d31=2.3 pm/V, d32=3.66 pm/V, d33=15.5 pm/V d24 = 3.64 pm/V, d15 = 2.3 pm/V Damage threshold >500 MW/cm2 for pulses =1064 nm, =10 ns, 10 Hz, TEM00 3505300 nm nx2=1.90713+1.235222/(20.196922)0.010252 ny2=2.15912+1.000992/(20.218442)0.010962 nz2=2.14768+1.295592/(20.227192)0.014362 r33 = 37.5 pm/V, r23 = 15.4 pm/V, r13 = 11.5 pm/V
Nonlinear crystals
LiIO3
Applications
Lithium Iodate
70
Harmonic generators Thin LiIO3 for autocorrelation measurements

EKSMA OPTICS offers:
T=293K
60
30 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
Wavelength, nm
LiIO3 Second harmonic generation phasematching

Crystal structure Point group Density, g/cm3 Mohs hardness Transparency range, nm Absorption at 1064 nm, cm-1 Refractive indices at 1064 nm at 800 nm at 532 nm Phase matching range for Type 1 SHG, nm Acceptances for Type 1 SHG at 1064nm Angular, mradcm Spectral, cm-1cm Walk-off for Type 1 SHG at 1064nm, mrad Nonlinear optical coefficient d15, pm/V Effective nonlinearity Damage threshold, MW/cm2 Wavelength dispersion of refractive indices ( in m)
n2 o = 2.083648 + 1.332068
2 2
hexagonal 6 3.54.0 2804000 < 0.05 no = 1.8571, ne = 1.7165 no = 1.8676, ne = 1.7245 no = 1.8982, ne = 1.7480 5704000 0.77 12.74 74.30 2.2 (at 1064 nm) > 100 for TEM00, 1064nm, 10ns, 10Hz
1.245229
2 2
0.035306
0.008525
n2 e = 1.673463 +
0.028224
0.003641
specifications
Flatness Parallelism Surface quality Perpendicularity Angle tolerance ( & ) Clear aperture /6 at 633nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) <5 arcmin <30 arcmin 90% of full aperture < 30 arcsec
Housing accessories
See page 2.27
See page 2.29
Crystal Ovens
Raman crystals
dooe = d15sin
Terahertz Crystals
4.487
Laser crystals
The mass production of LiIO3 crystals Attractive discounts for OEM customers Different shapes (slabs, cylinders, Brewster ends) are available Standard open ring holders Recoating and repolishing service AR, BBAR and P - coatings according to customers choice P-coatings optimised at pump wavelengths BBAR coatings for wavelength tuned Ti:Sapphire and other lasers.
Theta, deg
50
SHG@800, q=42.55 deg
LiIO3 Type 1
40
SHG@1064, q=30 deg
Nonlinear crystals
2.12
Crystals
ZnGeP2 AgGaSe2 AgGaS2 GaSe
Infrared nonlinear crystals

ZnGeP2
ZnGeP2 (ZGP) crystal has transmission band edges at 0.74 and 12 m. However its useful transmission range is from 1.9 to 8.6 m and from 9.6 to 10.2 m. ZGP crystal has the largest nonlinear optical coefficient and relatively high laser damage threshold. The crystal is successfully used in diverse applications: up-conversion of CO 2 and CO laser radiation to near IR range via harmonics generation and mixing processes; efficient SHG of pulsed CO, CO2 and chemical DF-laser; efficient down conversion of Holmium, Thulium and Erbium and laser wavelengths to mid infrared wavelength ranges by OPO process. Crystals with high damage threshold BBAR coatings and the lowest absorption coefficient < 0.05 cm-1 at pump wavelengths 2.05 - 2.1 m o- polarisation are available for OPO applications. Typical absorption coefficient is <0.03 cm-1 at 2.5 - 8.2 m range.
1.0
Absorption, cm-1
Wavelength, m
Transmission, %
Wavelength, m
12 9 6 3 1 35
Transmission, %
Transmission, %
2.13
18 15
0.8
0.6
Optical nonlinear crystals ZnGeP2, AgGaSe2, AgGaS2, GaSe have gained tremendous interest for middle and deep infrared applications due to their unique features. The crystals have large effective optical nonli n ea r ity, wide spectral and angular accep tances, broad transparency range, non-critical requirements for tem pe rature stabilization and vibra tion control, are well mecha nically pro cessed (except GaSe).
0.4
0.2
0 1200 1600 2000 Wavelength, nm 2400
12
100
Absorption spectra of ZnGeP2 crystal near 2 m
10
80
OPO 2.1 m pump OPO 2.79 m pump Type 1 SHG
60
40
20
40
50
60 80 70 Angle of Phase Matching, deg
90
2000
8000
10000
Type 1 OPO and SHG tuning curves in ZnGeP2
Transmission spectra of 15 mm long AR coated ZnGeP2 crystal for OPO @ 2.1 m
Type 1 ZnGeP2 crystalS for OPO at 3.5-5 m range pumped at ~2.1 m

Catalogue number ZGP-401 ZGP-402 ZGP-403 Size, mm 7515 7520 7525 , deg 54 54 54 , deg 0 0 0 Coating AR @ 2.1 m + BBAR @ 3.5-5 m AR @ 2.1 m + BBAR @ 3.5-5 m AR @ 2.1 m + BBAR @ 3.5-5 m Application OPO@2.1 3.5-5 m OPO@2.1 3.5-5 m OPO@2.1 3.5-5 m
AgGaSe2
AgGaSe2 has band edges at 0.73 and 18m. Its useful transmission range of 0.916 m and wide phase matching capability provide excellent potential for OPO applications when pumped by a variety of currently available lasers. Tuning from
80 OPO 1.55 m pump OPO 2.1 m pump Type 1 SHG 100 60 80 60 40 20 0 40 80 50 50 70 Angle of Phase Matching, deg 90 0 2000 6000 10000 14000 Wavelength, nm 18000 2000 6000 10000 Wavelength, nm 14000 18000
2.512 m has been obtained when pumping by Ho:YLF laser at 2.05 m; as well as NCPM operation from 1.95.5m when pumping at 1.41.55m. Efficient SHG of pulsed CO2 laser has been demonstrated.
40
20
Type 1 OPO and SHG tuning curves in AgGaSe2
Transmission spectra of 18 mm long uncoated AgGaSe2 crystal
Transmission spectra of 25 mm long AR coated AgGaSe2 crystal
Nonlinear crystals
AgGaS2
AgGaS2 is transparent from 0.53 to 12m. Although nonlinear optical coefficient is the lowest among the above mentioned infrared crystals, its high short wavelength trans pa rency edging at 550nm is used in OPOs pumped by Nd:YAG laser; in numerous difference frequency mixing experiments using diode, Ti:Sapphire, Nd:YAG and IR dye lasers covering 312m range; direct infrared counter measure systems, and SHG of CO2 laser.
100 AR coated uncoated 80 9 12
Transmission, %
60
Wavelength, m
OPO 1.06 m pump Type 1 SHG
40
20
2000
4000
10000
12000
20
40 60 Angle of Phase Matching, deg
80
Transmission spectra of 14 mm long AR coated and uncoated AgGaS2 crystal used for OPO pumped by Nd:YAG laser
Type 1 OPO and SHG tuning curves in AgGaS2
LIST OF STANDARD AgGaS2 CRYSTALS

Code AGS-401H AGS-402H Size, mm 551 662 , deg 39 50 , deg 45 0 Coating BBAR/BBAR @ 1.1-2.6 / 2.6-11 m BBAR/BBAR @ 1.1-2.6 / 2.6-11 m Application OPO @ 1.2-2.4 m -> 2.4-11 m OPO @ 1.2-2.4 m -> 2.4-11 m Price, EUR 695 770
Crystals are mounted into open ring holders (see page 2.27).
GaSe has band edges at 0.65 and 18m. GaSe has been successfully used for efficient SHG of CO2 laser, for SHG of pulsed CO, CO2 and chemical DF-laser ( = 2.36m) radiation; up conversion of CO and CO2 laser radiation into the visible range; infrared pulses gene ration via difference frequency mixing of Neodymium
60 50
and infrared dye laser or (F-)-centre laser pulses; OPG light generation within 3.518 m; efficient Tera H ertz generation in 1001600m range. It is impossible to cut crystals for certain phase matching angles because of material structure (cleave along (001) plane) limiting areas of applications.
Z
Incident beam o polarization X axis mark on crystal holder
ext
e polarization
18 15
Transmission, %
40 30 20 10 0
Wavelength, m
10
Type 1 SHG Type 2 SHG
2000
6000
Transmission spectra of 17 mm long uncoated GaSe crystal
Type 1 and Type 2 SHG tuning curves in GaSe
GaSe, Z-Cut
Related Products
See page 2.27
Catalogue number GaSe-30 GaSe-100 GaSe-1000
Clear aperture, mm 7 7 7
Thickness, m 30 100 1000
Crystal Ovens
18000
20
40 60 Angle of Phase Matching, deg
80
90
Cleaved GaSe crystal glued into special ring holder
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
GaSe
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
2.14
Crystals Physical Properties

Crystal Crystal Symmetry Point Group Lattice Constants, Density, g/cm3 a c ZnGeP2 Tetragonal 42m 5.465 10.771 4.175 AgGaSe2 Tetragonal 42m 5.9901 10.8823 5.71 AgGaS2 Tetragonal 42m 5.757 10.305 4.56 GaSe Hexagonal 62m 3.742 15.918 5.03
2.15
OPTICAL PROPERTIES
Crystal Optical transmission, m Indices of Refraction at 1.06m 5.3m 10.6m Absorption Coefficient, cm-1 at 1.06m 2.5m 5.0m 7.5m 10.0m 11.0m 3.0 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.4 0.8 <0.02 <0.01 <0.01

ZnGeP2 0.7412 no ne no ne no ne 3.2324 3.2786 3.1141 3.1524 3.0725 3.1119
AgGaSe2 0.7318 2.7005 2.6759 2.6140 2.5823 2.5915 2.5585
AgGaS2 0.5312 2.4508 2.3966 2.3954 2.3421 2.3466 2.2924 <0.09 0.01 0.01 0.02 <0.6 0.6
GaSe 0.6518 2.9082 2.5676 2.8340 2.4599 2.8158 2.4392 0.25 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
NONLINEAR OPTICAL PROPERTIES

Crystal Laser damage threshold, MW/cm at pulse duration, ns at wavelength, m Nonlinearity, pm/V Phase matching angle for Type 1 SHG at 10.6m, deg Walk-off angle at 5.3m, deg ZnGeP2 60 100 10.6 111 76 0.57 AgGaSe2 25 50 2.05 43 55 0.67 AgGaS2 10 20 1.06 31 67 0.85 GaSe 28 150 9.3 63 14 3.4
THERMAL PROPERTIES
Crystal Melting point, C Thermal Expansion Coefficient, 10-6/K
a) at 293573 K, b) at 573873 K, c) at 298423 K, d) at 423873 K
ZnGeP2 1298 17.5(a) 9.1(b) 1.59(a) 8.08(b)
AgGaSe2 851 23.4(c) 18.0(d) -6.4(c) -16.0(d)
AgGaS2 998 12.5 -13.2
GaSe 1233 9.0 8.25
Sellmeier equations for calculation of indices of refraction

Crystal ZnGeP2 AgGaSe2 AgGaS2 GaSe no ne no ne no ne no ne A 8.0409 8.0929 6.8507 6.6792 3.3970 3.5873 7.443 5.76 B 1.68625 1.8649 0.4297 0.4598 2.3982 1.9533 0.405 0.3879 C 0.40824 0.41468 0.15840 0.21220 0.09311 0.11066 0.0186 -0.2288 D 1.2880 0.84052 0.00125 0.00126 2.1640 2.3391 0.0061 0.1223 E 611.05 452.05 950.0 1030.7 3.1485 1.855 F 2194 1780 Expression n2 = A + B2 / (2 C) + D2 / (2 E ) n2 = A + B / (2 C) D2 n2 = A + B / (1 C /2) + D / (1 E /2) n2= A + B/2 + C/4 + D/6 + E/(1 F/2)
Nonlinear crystals
Thin crystals are used in different applications with femtosecond pulses: Harmonic generation (SHG, SFG) Optical parametric generation and amplification (OPG, OPA) Difference frequency generation (DFG) Pulse width measurements by auto and cross correlation THz frequency generation (in GaSe crystal) The propagation of a ultrashort optical pulses through the crystal results in a delay of the pulses because of Group Velocities Mismatch (GVM), a duration broadening because of Group Delay Dispersion (GDD) and a frequency chirp. Unfortunately those effects forces to limit nonlinear crystal thickness in frequency generation schemes. For two collinearly propagating pulses with different group velocities their quasistatic interaction length (Lqs) is defined as distance over which they separate by a path equal to the one of the pulses duration (or to the desired pulse duration): Lqs = /GVM ; where GVM is the group velocity mismatch and is the duration of the pulse. GVM calculations are presented for the most popular Type 1 phase matching applications for different crystals in Table 2. Optimal BBO, LBO, KDP and LiIO3 crystal thicknesses which are limited by GVM for Type 1 SHG of 800 nm at different fundamental pulse duration are presented in the Table 3. Also effective coefficients and phase matching angles at room temperature (20 C) are calculated. If longer crystal will be used this will cause second harmonic pulse broadening to the duration longer than fundamental pulse duration (or desired pulse duration). Group delay dispersion (GDD) has an important impact on the propagation of pulses, because a pulse always has certain spectral width, so that dispersion will cause its frequency components to propagate with different velocities. In case of crystals where we have normal dispersion when refractive index decreases with increasing wavelength this leads to a lower group velocity of higher-frequency components, and thus to a positive chirp. The frequency dependence of the group velocity also has an influence on the pulse duration. If the pulse is initially unchirped, dispersion in a crystal will always increase its duration. This is called dispersive pulse broadening. For an originally unchirped Gaussian pulse with the duration 0, the pulse duration is increased according to:
4 ln 2 D L t = 0 1+ 02
Crystal BBO LBO KDP LiIO3
D at 800 nm 75 fsec2/mm 47 fsec2/mm 27 fsec2/mm 196 fsec2/mm
D at 400 nm 196 fsec2/mm 128 fsec2/mm 107 fsec2/mm 589 fsec2/mm
We may calculate that spectrum limited initial 30fsec Gaussian pulse at 400 nm will be broadened to 35fsec pulse after passing 1 mm thickness BBO crystal.
Table 2. Group velocity mismatch between shortest and longest wave pulse for Type 1 phase matching
Crystal BBO LBO KDP LiIO3 AgGaS2 SFM 800+266 nm 2074 fs/mm SFM 800+400 nm 737 fs/mm 448 fs/mm 370 fs/mm SHG 800 nm 194 fs/mm 123 fs/mm 77 fs/mm 559 fs/mm SHG 1030 nm 94 fs/mm 51 fs/mm 1 fs/mm 285 fs/mm SHG 1064 nm 85 fs/mm 44 fs/mm -7 fs/mm 262 fs/mm DFG 1.26-2.18 3 m 170 fs/mm DFG 1.48-1.74 10 m -10 fs/mm
Table 3. Quasistatic interaction length for Type 1 SHG of 800 nm

BBO LBO KDP LiIO3 1.0 mm 1.6 mm 2.6 mm 0.4 mm 0.5 mm 0.8 mm 1.3 mm 0.18 mm 0.26 mm 0.4 mm 0.6 mm 0.01 mm 0.1 mm 0.16 mm 0.26 mm 0.04 mm 0.05 mm 0.08 mm 0.13 mm 0.018 mm 29.2, 90 90, 31.7 44.9, 45 42.5, 0 2.00 pm/V 0.75 pm/V 0.30 pm/V 3.59 pm/V
Crystal Ovens
Crystal
200 fs
100 fs
50 fs
20 fs
10 fs
Cut angles ,
Coefficient deff
Raman crystals
Table 1. D parameter for Type 1 SHG @ 800 nm orientation crystals for 800 nm (o-pol) and 400 nm (e-pol) pulses
L thickness of the crystal in mm. D second order group delay dispersion or dispersion parameter. Table 1 gives D parameter for Type 1 phase matching SHG @ 800 nm for 800 nm pulse with o polarization and 400 nm pulse with e polarization in different crystals.
Terahertz Crystals
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
BBO LBOKDP AgGaS2 GaSe LiIO3
Ultrathin Nonlinear Crystals
2.16
Crystals
Free standing crystals

The crystals of thickness down to 100m can be can be supplied as free standing crystals not attached to the support. However the ring mounts are highly recommended for safe handling of these thin crystals. The tolerance is
Crystal BBO LBO KDP LiIO3 AgGaS2 GaSe Minimal aperture 55 mm 55 mm 44 mm 44 mm 55 mm 5 mm
50m for crystals of thickness down to 300 m and 20 m for crystals of thickness down to 100 m. GaSe crystal is supplied glued in to dia 40 mm ring holder only.
Maximal aperture 2020 mm 3030 mm 100100 mm 5050 mm 1515 mm 7 mm Minimal thickness 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 0.1 mm* 0.1 mm* 0.1 mm 0.01 mm
2.17
* the thickness should be about 0.5 mm for max aperture KDP and LiIO3
Optically contacted crystals

BBO crystals of thick ness less than 100 m can be supplied optically contacted on UV Fused Silica substrates sizes 10102 mm
Crystal BBO Minimal aperture 55 mm
or 12122mm. Other sizes of substrates are also available on request. The to le ran ces of BBO crystal thickness is +10/-5 m.
Maximal aperture 1010 mm Minimal thickness 105 m
EKSMA OPTICS provides various AR, BBAR and protective coatings for all free standing crystals and optically contacted crystals. Ring mounts made from anodized alum inium and teflon are available for safe and convenient handling of ultrathin crystals.
Standard specifications of crystals
Crystals Flatness Parallelism Angle tolerance Surface quality BBO, LBO /6 at 633 nm < 10 arcsec < 15 arcmin 10/5 scratch/dig KDP, LiIO3, AgGaS2 /4 at 633 nm < 30 arcsec < 30 arcmin 20/10 scratch/dig GaSe cleaved perpendicularly to optical axis. Polish is not available
Related Products
Other Ultrahin BBO crystals available. See pages 5.23; 5.30 Ring Holders for Nonlinear Crystals
See page 2.27

See page 2.29
Laser crystals
Nd:YAG
Neodymium Doped Yttrium Aluminium Garnet

Properties of 1.0% Nd:YAG at 25C
Formula Crystal structure Density Melting point Mohs hardness Transition Fluorescence lifetime Thermal conductivity Specific heat Thermal expansion n/t Youngs modulus Poisson ratio Thermal shock resistance Refractive index Y2.97Nd0.03Al5O12 Cubic 4.55 g/cm3 1970 C
4F 4I 3/2 11/2
@ 1064 nm
230 s for 1064 nm 0.14 Wcm-1K-1 0.59 Jg-1K-1 6.9 10-6 C-1 7.3 10-6 C-1 3.17 104 Kg/mm-2 0.25 790 Wm-1 1.818 @ 1064 nm
Code E-Y-3-0.8-A/A E-Y-3-1.1-A/A E-Y-4-0.8-A/A E-Y-4-1.1-A/A E-Y-6.35-1.1-A/A E-Y-8-1.1-A/A E-Y-10-1.1-A/A E-Y-12-0.8-A/A E-Y-12-1.1-A/A
Diameter, mm 3 3 4 4 6.35 8 10 12 12
Length, mm 65 65 65 65 85* 85* 85* 100* 100*
Doping, % 0.8 1.1 0.8 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.8 1.1
Wedge of the ends, deg 0/0 0/0 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel
Price, EUR 265 325 410 410 875 1065 1695 2280 2280
Please contact EKSMA OPTICS for further information or non-standard specifications.
* rods with barrel grooving, except 10 mm at both ends of the rod without grooving.
SPECIFICATIONS OF STANDARD Nd:YAG LASER RODS
Related Products
Laser Safety Eyewear
See page 1.16
Nd Doping Level Orientation Surface Quality Surface Flatness Parallelism Perpendicularity Diameter Tolerance Length Tolerance Clear Aperture Chamfers Coating Barrel grooving
0.8% or 1.1% <111> crystalline direction 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 at 633 nm < 10 arcsec < 5 arcmin for plano/plano ends +1/-0.5 mm > 90 % of full aperture 0.1 mm at 45 deg both sides coated AR @ 1064 nm, R < 0.2%, AOI = 0 deg all dia 6.35, 8, 10, 12 mm rods with barrel grooving +0/-0.05 mm
Visualizator 990-0840
See page 1.16
Crystal Ovens
Raman crystals
Nd:YAG crystal is the most popular lasing media for solid-state lasers. EKSMA OPTICS offers standard specifications high optical quality Nd:YAG rods with high damage threshold AR @ 1064 nm coatings.
STANDARD RODS SIZES
Terahertz Crystals
8.5
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
Laser Crystals
2.18
Crystals
Yb:KGW Yb:KYW
Nonlinear crystals
Cross section, 10-20 cm2
Yb-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate

Applications
Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW thin (100150 m) crystals are used as lasing mate rials to gene ra te ultrashort (hundreds of fsec) high power (>22 W) pulses. Standard pumping @ 981 nm, output: 10231060 nm Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW can be used as ultra short pulses amplifiers Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW are some of the best materials for high power thin disk lasers
Properties of Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW
Name Yb3+ concentration Crystal structure Point group Lattice parameters Thermal expansion Thermal conductivity Density Mohs hardness Melting temperature Transmission range Refractive indices (=1.06 m) n/t Laser wavelength Fluorescence lifetime Stimulated emission cross section (Ea) Absorption peak and bandwidth Absorption cross section Lasing threshold Stark levels energy (in cm-1) of the 2F5/2 manifolds of Yb3+ @ 77K Stark levels energy (in cm-1) of the 2F7/2 manifolds of Yb3+ @ 77K
Custom manufacturing capabilities
Various shapes (slabs, rods, cubes) Different dopant levels Diversified coatings
2.19
high absorption coefficient @ 981 nm high stimulated emission cross section low laser threshold extremely low quantum defect pump/se broad polarized output at 10231060 nm high slope efficiency with diode pumping (~ 60%) high Yb doping concentration Yb-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate (Yb:KGd(WO4)2) and Yb-doped Potassium Itrium Tung state (Yb:KY(WO4)2) single crys tals are the laser crystals for diode or laser pumped solid-state laser applications.
Yb:KGW 0.55% monoclinic C2/c a=8.095 , b=10.43 , c=7.588 , =94.43 a=410-6 /C, b=3.610-6 /C, c=8.510 Ka=2.6 W/mK, Kb=3.8 W/mK, Kc=3.4 W/mK 7.27 g/cm3 45 1075 C 0.355.5 m ng=2.037, np=1.986, nm=2.033 0.410-6 K-1 10231060 nm 0.3 ms 2.610-20 cm2 a=26 cm-1, =981 nm, =3.7 nm 1.210-19 cm2 35 mW 10682, 10471, 10188 535, 385, 163, 0
Yb:KYW 0.5100% monoclinic C2/c a=8.05 , b=10.35 , c=7.54 , =94 6.61 g/cm3 45 0.355.5 m 0.410-6 K-1 10251058 nm 0.3 ms 310-20 cm2 a=40 cm-1, =981 nm, =3.5 nm 1.3310-19 cm2 70 mW 10695, 10476, 10187 568, 407, 169, 0
15
absorbtion emission
10
12
absorbtion
E || a
15 10 5 0
emission
E || a
E || a
8 4 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2 0 880 920 960 1000 1040
E || b
E || b
0 3
E || c
E || c
E || b
2
920
960
1000
1040
1080
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
Absorption and emission spectrae of Yb(5%):KGW

0
900 950 1000 1050
Wavelength, nm
Absorption and emission spectra of Yb(5%):KYW
Laser crystals
Nd:KGW
Nd-Doped Potassium Gadolinium Tungstate

The efficiency of Nd:KGW lasers is 35 times higher than the one of Nd:YAG lasers. Nd:KGW laser medium is one of the best choices ensuring effective laser generation at low pump energies (0.5 1J). These crystals supplied by EKSMA OPTICS feature high optical quality and great value of bulk resistans for laser radiation.
Orientation Dopant concentration Diameter tolerance Length tolerance Chamfer Flatness Parallelism Perpendicularity Surface Quality Absorption losses [010] 30 min 2-10 at % +0.0/-0.1 mm +1.0/-0.0 mm 45(10) deg 0.2(0.1) mm /10 @ 633 nm better than 30 arcsec better than 15 arcmin 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 0.005 cm-1 Refractive index Transition Laser wavelength Fluorescence lifetime Fluorescent width Emission cross-section Emission temperature drift
physical and laser properties

Chemical formula Lattice constants Optical orientation Angle between optical axis Density Mohs hardness Thermal conductivity KGd(WO4):Nd a = 8.095 , b = 10 , c = 7.588 ng = b, npc = 20 deg 86.5 angular grad 7.27 g/cm3 5 2.8 W/(mgrad) [100] 2.2 W/(mgrad) [010] 3.5 W/(mgrad) [001]
Thermal expansion Phase transition Melting point Transmission range
Nd:KGW crystals are low lasing threshold, highly efficient laser ma terial exceptionally suitable for laser rangefinding applications.
1005 C 1075 C 0.355.5 m ng = 2.033 @ 1.067 m np = 1.937 @ 1.067 m nm = 1.986 @ 1.067 m

4F 4I 3/2 11/2
1.0672 m 24 cm-1 4.310-19 cm-2 8.510-4 nm, K-1
Ti:Sapphire
Titanium Doped Sapphire

Al2O3:Ti3+ indefinitely long stability and useful lifetime added to the lasing over entire band of 6601050 nm challenge dirty dyes in variety of applications. Medical laser systems, lidars, laser spectroscopy, direct femtosecond pulse generation by Kerr-type mode-locking there are few of existing and potential applications.
Ti2O3 wt % 0.03 0.05 0.07 a, cm-1 @ 490 nm 0.7* 1.1 1.5 2.2 2.6 3.3 4.3 5.4 a, cm-1 @ 514 nm 0.6 0.9 1.3 1.9 2.2 2.8 3.7 4.6 a, cm-1 @ 532 nm 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.7 2.0 2.5 3.4 4.1
Intensity, a.u.
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 400
0.12 0.15 0.20 0.25
absorption
500
fluorescence
600 700 Wavelength, nm 800 900
* Presented values are given with 0.05 cm-1 accuracy.
physical and laser properties

Chemical formula Ti3+:Al2O3 Hexagonal a=4.748, c=12.957 3.98 g/cm3 9 0.11 cal/(Cseccm) 2050 C 4-Level Vibronic 3.2 sec (T=300K) 6601050 nm 400600 nm 795 nm 488 nm 1.76 @ 800 nm 0.10 cal/g Crystal structure Lattice constants Density Mohs hardness Thermal conductivity Specific heat Melting point Laser action Fluorescence lifetime Tuning range Absorbtion range Emission peak Absorption peak Refractive index
Orientation Ti2O3 concentration Figure Of Merit Size End configurations Flatness Parallelism Surface Quality Wavefront distortion optical axis C normal to rod axis 0.030.25 wt % >150 (>300 available on special requests) up to 20 mm dia and up to 130 mm length flat/flat or Brewster/Brewster ends /10 @ 633 nm 10 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4 inch
Crystal Ovens
Al2O3:Ti3+ titanium-doped sapphire crystals combine outstanding physical and optical properties with broadest lasing range.
0.10
Raman crystals
The absorption band of Ti:Sapphire centered at 490 nm makes it suitable for variety of laser pump sources argon ion, frequency doubled Nd:YAG and YLF, copper vapour lasers. Because of 3.2 s fluorescence lifetime Ti:Sapphire crystals can be effectively pumped by short pulse flashlamps in powerful laser systems.
Terahertz Crystals
120 s
Laser crystals
410-6 grad-1 [100] 3.610-6 grad-1 [010] 8.510-6 grad-1 [001]
Nonlinear crystals
2.20
Crystals
Dy3+:PbGa2S4
lead thiogallate with dysprosium ions co-doped by alkali metals

Physical propertieS
Transmission range Dy3+ concentration in crystal Non hygroscopic
8000
Absorption cross-section, 10-20 cm2
Energy, cm-1
Intensity
Output energy, mJ
1.5
Output energy, mJ
2.21
0.44-12 microns 0.5 mol. %
H9/2+ F11/2 H11/2
4
6
H15/2- H9/2+ F11/2
6000
3
6
H15/2-6H7/2+6F9/2
4000
E || Fast axis || Fast axis E
EKSMA OPTICS offers novel unique crystal lead thiogallate (PbGa2S4) with dysprosium ions (Dy3+) co-doped by alkali metals. Crystal shows efficient laser emission at room temperature in mid IR range at 4.3-5.5 micron wavelengths.
H13/2
2
6
H15/2-6H11/2
2000
H15/2
0 1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Wavelength, nm
Energy diagram of Dy3+ ion Polarized absorption cross-section spectrum of Dy3+ ions in PbGa2S4 crystal
1.0
Oscillations Fluorescence
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500
Wavelength, nm
Emission cross-section and oscillation spectrum of Dy3+ions in PbGa2S4 crystal
Lasing properties with free running 1.318 m Nd:YAG laser pump

Obtained oscillation wavelengths: Absorption at pump Cross-section at 4.3 mm Lasing threshold Lasing pulse duration Laser efficiency 4.3 m; 4.53 m; 4.65 m, 5.5 m ~ 1 m-1 110-20 cm2 < 20 mJ < 1 ms up to 2%
2.5
2.0
R=95%, sl=1.2% R=85%, sl=1.8%
R=85%, sl=2%
6
1.0
0.5
40
80
120
160
0 0 100 200 300 400 500
Absorbed energy, mJ
Absorbed energy, mJ
THz crystals
DSTMSDASTOH1
Organic TerahertZ Crystals

EKSMA OPTICS offers organic DSTMS, DAST, OH1 crystals for THz generation and detection using different femtosecond laser pump sources.
ORGANIC TERAHERTZ GENERATORS AND DETECTORS:
DAST OH1
Applications of organic DSTMS, DAST and OH1 crystals:
Efficient THz generation and detection Fast electro-optic modulation (>200 GHz) Optical parametric generation Efficient doubling of 1.55 microns radiation
12 10 8 6 4 2 0 120
Absorbtion coefficient, cm-1
Absorbtion coefficient, cm-1
80
40
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
0 0 1 2 3
Wavelength, m
Frequency, THz
Absorption Spectrum of DSTMS, DAST THz crystals
Absorption Spectrum of OH1 crystals
Physical Properties of Organic TERAHERTZ CRYSTALS

Crystal Point group symmetry Melting temperature, C Refractive indices Nonlinear optical coefficients DSTMS m 250 n1 = 2.07 @ 1550 nm n2 = 1.64 @ 1550 nm d111 = 21420 pm/V @ 1990 nm d122 = 314 pm/V @ 1990 nm d212 = 354 pm/V @ 1990 nm r111 = 373 pm/V @ 1990 nm DAST m 256 n1 = 2.519 @ 720 nm n2 = 1.720 @ 720 nm n3 = 1.635 @ 720 nm d11 = 1010 pm/V @ 1318 nm d11 = 290 pm/V @ 1542 nm d26 = 39 pm/V @ 1542 nm r11 = 92 pm/V @ 720 nm r11 = 53 pm/V @ 1313 nm r11 = 47 pm/V @ 1535 nm OH1 mm2 212 n2 = 1.58 @ 1319 nm n3 = 2.15 @ 1319 nm d333 = 12010 pm/V @ 1990 nm d223 = 132 pm/V @ 1990 nm d322 = 8.52 pm/V @ 1990 nm r333 = 1094 pm/V @ 633 nm r333 = 757 pm/V @ 785 nm r333 = 562 pm/V @ 1064 nm r333 = 527 pm/V @ 1319 nm
Electro-optic coefficients
Crystal Ovens
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
DSTMS
DSTMS efficient terahertz generation in 0.3-15 THz range DAST efficient terahertz generation in 0.1-17 THz range OH1 efficient terahertz generation in 0.1-3 THz range
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
Terahertz Crystals
2.22
Crystals
10 10
10
DAST
8 8
DSTMS
8
OH1
Frequency, THz
Conversion Efficiency, a.u.
DAST DSTMS OH1
THz energy, nJ
2.23
Frequency, THz
Frequency, THz
Best phasematching for fs pump lasers
Best phasematching for fs pump lasers
Best phasematching
1000 1200 1400 1600
0 800
1000
1200
1400
1600
0 800
1000
1200
1400
1600
0 800
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
Best phase-matching
1000 8
100
10
0 0 1 2 3 4
1 0 5 10 15
Frequency, THz
Frequency, THz
THz Conversion Efficiency in DAST, DSTMS and OH1 crystals
THz generation in DAST
Organic TerahertZ Crystals

Catalogue number DSTMS THz Crystals for fsec lasers pump. Diagonal cut. DSTMS-150 DSTMS-200 DSTMS-400 DSTMS-500 DAST-150 DAST-200 DAST-400 DAST-500 OH1-150 OH1-200 OH1-400 C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 150-200 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 200-400 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 400-800 microns Description
DSTMS THz crystals for fsec lasers pump. Perpendicular cut. With perpendicular cut, 34 mm aperture. Thickness 500 microns to 1 mm DAST THz Crystals for fsec lasers pump. Diagonal cut. C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 150-200 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 200-400 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 400-800 microns
DAST THz crystals for fsec lasers pump. Perpendicular cut. With perpendicular cut, 34 mm aperture. Thickness 500 microns to 1 mm OH1 THz Crystals for fsec lasers pump. Diagonal cut. C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 150-200 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 200-400 microns C-plates, with diagonal cut. Thickness 400-800 microns
THz crystals
GaSe ZnTe
ZnTe
Semiconductor Terahertz Crystals

Nonlinear crystals Crystal Ovens Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices PositionerS & HolderS Raman crystals Terahertz Crystals Laser crystals
ZnTe (Zinc Telluride) crystals with <110> orientation are used for THz generation by optical rectification process. Optical rectification is a difference frequency generation in media with large second order susceptibility. For femtosecond laser pulses which have large bandwidth the frequency components interact with each other and their difference produce bandwidth from 0 to several THz. Detection of the THz pulse occurs via freespace electro-optic detection in another <110> oriented ZnTe crystal. The THz pulse and the visible pulse are propagated collinearly through the ZnTe crystal. The THz pulse induces a birefringence in ZnTe crystal which is read out by a linearly polarized visible pulse. When both the visible pulse and the THz pulse are in the crystal at the same
ZnTe, <110> Cut
Catalogue number ZnTe-100 ZnTe-200 ZnTe-500 ZnTe-1000 Size, mm 1010 1010 1010 1010
time, the visible polarization will be rotated by the THz pulse. Using a /4 waveplate and a beamsplitting polarizer together with a set of balanced photodiodes, it is possible to map THz pulse amplitude by monitoring the visible pulse polarization rotation after the ZnTe crystal at a variety of delay times with respect to the THz pulse. The ability to read out the full electric field, both amplitude and delay, is one of the attractive features of time-domain THz spectroscopy. ZnTe are also used for IR optical components substrates and vacuum deposition. NOTE: ZnTe crystal contains micro bubbles and they are visible in projection of illuminated crystal. However this does not affect the THz generation. We do not accept complains on presence of bubbles in crystal.
Thickness, mm 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0
GaSe
GaSe (Gallium Selenide) crystals used for THz generation shows a large bandwidth of up to 41 THz. GaSe is a negative uniaxial layered semiconductor with a hexagonal structure of 62 m point group and a direct bandgap of 2.2 eV at 300K. GaSe crystal features high damage threshold, large nonlinear optical coefficient (54pm/V), suitable transparent range, and low absorption coefficient, which make it an alternative solution for broadband mid infrared electromagnetic waves generation. Due to broadband THz
GaSe, Z-Cut
Catalogue number GaSe-30 GaSe-100 GaSe-1000 Clear aperture, mm 7 7 7 Thickness, m 30 100 1000
generation and detection using a sub-20 fs laser source, GaSe emitter-detector system performance is considered to achieve comparable or even better results than using thin ZnTe crystals. In order to achieve frequency selective THz wave generation and detection system, GaSe crystals of appropriate thickness should be used. NOTE: because of material structure it is possible to cleave GaSe crystal along (001) plane only. Another disadvantage is softness and fragility of GaSe.
2.24
Crystals
Raman Crystals
KGW Ba(NO3)2
Crystals for Stimulated Raman Scattering
EKSMA OPTICS offers crystalline materials Barium Nitrate Ba(NO 3) 2 and undo ped potassium gadolinium tungstate KGd(WO4)2 or KGW which have attrac t ed much interest for stimulated Raman scattering (SRS). These materials can be used for frequency conversion in lasers for exten ding the tuning range. SRS in crystals is compatible with current all-solid-state technology and provides a very simple, compact means of frequency conversion. Ba(NO3)2 has a highest Raman gain coefBa(NO3)2 PHYSICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES
Crystal symmetry Transmission range Density Hardness Mohs Refractive indices @ 1064 nm Raman shift Raman gain, pump 1064 nm Thermal conductivity, W/mK n/T Optical Damage Threshold cubic, P213 0.351.8 m 3.25 g/cm3 2.53 n = 1.555 1048 cm-1 11 cm/GW 1.17 -2010-6 K-1 ~ 0.4 GW/cm2 Thermal conductivity, W/mK n/T Optical Damage Threshold Raman gain, pump 1064 nm
2.25
ficient. The gain coefficient affects the threshold for Raman laser. However, the thermal lensing is particularly strong in this material. This is indicated by the large value n/T and low thermal con ductivity. Thermal effects are significantly smaller in KGW. This along with the high damage threshold make the crystal an excellent candidate for power scaling. Comparing Ba(NO3)2 and KGW for Raman application Ba(NO3)2 is more optimal in case of ns and longer pulses, KGW in case of shorter pulses.
KGW PHYSICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES

Crystal symmetry Transmission range Density Hardness Mohs Refractive indices @ 1064 nm Raman shift monoclinic, C2/c 0.355.5 m 7.27 g/cm3 4-5 ng = 2.061; nm = 2.010; np = 1.982 901 cm-1 (p[mm]p) 768 cm-1 (p[gg]p) 3.3 cm/GW (901 cm-1) 4.4 cm/GW (768 cm-1) Ka=2.6; Kb=3.8; Kc=3.4 0.4 10-6 K-1 > 10 GW/cm2
Raman wavelengths in KGW crystal (oscillation coefficient 901.5 cm-1) and Ba(NO3)2 crystal (oscillation coefficient 1048.6 cm-1) are given in the table below.
Stokes 1 Stoke 2 Stoke 3 Stoke 4 Stoke 1 Antistoke KGW pumped @ 532 nm 558 588 621 658 507 KGW pumped @ 1064 nm 1177 1316 1494 1726 970 Ba(NO3)2 pumped @ 532 nm 563 598 638 684 503 Ba(NO3)2 pumped @ 1064 nm 1197 1369 1599 1924 957 Typical efficiency, % 3570 2040 1015 <10 1030
Standard Specifications
Ba(NO3)2 Surface Quality, scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Flatness @ 633 nm Maximal element dimensions, mm 40-20 /4 1010100 KGW 10-5 /8 101080
Raman crystals
EKSMA OPTICS offers a wide choice of solid-state satur able absorbers such as: Co2+:MgAl2O4, Cr4+:YAG.
100
Absorption coefficient, cm-1
80
Transmission, %
60
40
20
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 Wavelength, m 1.6 2.0
500
700
1300
1500
Fig. 1. Absorption spectra of the Co2+:MgAl2O4 crystal
Fig. 2. Transmission of AR coated at 1064 nm Cr:YAG Q-switch with initial transmission of 80% at 1064 nm
SpecificationS
Co:MgAl2O4 Working wavelength range, m Absorption cross-section, cm2 Initial transmittance, % Aperture, mm Thickness, mm Coatings* 1.2 1.6 3.510-19 (at 1.54 m) 3099 512 15 AR @ 1.54 m, R<0.2% Cr4+:YAG 0.8 1.2 2099 5, 8, 9.5 15 AR @ 1.06 m, R<0.15% 510-18 (at 1.06 m)
Fe:ZnSe, Cr:ZnSe, Co:ZnS solid-state saturable absorbers also are available upon request
PositionerS & HolderS Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices Crystal Ovens
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
Laser crystals
Co2+:MgAl2O4 is a relatively new material for passive Q-swit c hing in lasers emitting from 1.2 to 1.6 m, in particular, for eye-safe 1.54 m Er:glass laser, but also works at 1.44 m and 1.34 m wavelengths. High absorption cross section (3.510-19 cm2) permits Q-switching of Er:glass laser without intracavity focusing both with flash-lamp and diode-laser pumping. Negligible excited-state absorption results in high contrast of Q-switch, i.e.
the ratio of initial (small signal) to saturated absorption is higher than 10 (Fig. 1). Cr 4+:YAG is one of the best passive Q-switch for high power lasers emitting at ~1 m wavelength. Standard diameter apertures 5, 8, 9.5 mm and various initial transmission (or optical density) are available upon request. Also Cr4+:YAG laser rods for ultra-short pulse solid-state lasers are available.
Nonlinear crystals
Co2+:MgAl2O4 Cr4+:YAG
Passive Q-switching Crystals
2.26
Crystals

830-0001
Black anodized aluminium body Teflon or white anodized aluminium adapter for particular crystal size Easy assembling and disassembling
830-0001-10
25.4 C.A.*
Part No 830-0001-06 830-0001-10 830-0001-13 830-0001-17 830-0002-10 830-0002-13 830-0002-17
25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 30 30 30
6 10.5 13.5 17.5 10.5 13.5 17.5
12120.5 12123 12126 121215 15153 15156 151515
50 50 50 90 50 50 90
25.4
2.27
830-0001-06
Ring mounts made from black anodized aluminum and Teflon or white anodized aluminium adapter are available for safe and convenient handling of nonlinear crystals. The crystals are glued into white anodized aluminium adapter (830-0001-06). No glue is used for fixation of the crystal into open ring holder with teflon adapter. The standard sizes are 25.4 or 30 mm and thickness 6, 10.5, 13.5 or 17.5 mm depending on crystal size.
10.5
* C.A. - depends on crystal aperture 830-0001-10
Phase matching plane marking
Please indicate the exact crystal size when ordering.

Diameter, mm Thickness, mm Max. acceptable crystal size, mm Price, EUR
Housing accessories
See page 2.29
830-0001-06
840-0056-11
Positioning Mount
Tilt range 9 Travel range 4 mm Mounting on either of 2 sides Sensitivity of 3 arcsec and 1 m Kinematic with clear edge design A screw pushes via seat of hardened stainless steel
37
.5 32 .5 28
fixing screw
54
26
kn ob
See page 8.141
Code 840-0056-11
Price, EUR 75
fixing screw 3
for 25.4 (1") optics
77 max
7.5
M4 2 holes
29
22
55
Code 840-0193
Weight, kg 0.12
Price, EUR 87
Crystal Ovens
2 contact lines
29
2 3
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) ring holders Kinematic design Tilt/tip range 2 Sensitivity 3 arcsec Both tilt and tip controlled from aside the optical path Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws
Raman crystals
840-0193
Kinematic Positioning Mount
Terahertz Crystals
Kinematic Mount 840-0056-11 is used for precise angular and linear alignment of 1 ring holders with nonlinear crystals. Mount has a resting flange to stop the holder. One fixing screw secures the optics against 2 contact lines, which make 2 contact points. To prevent damage to the holder, the tip of the fixing screw is made of plastic. Platform of 840-0056-11 is preloaded by two strong coil springs, ensuring tight kinematic fit. A thick base of the mount adds stability. This allowed to eliminate part of the mount, keeping clear one edge. As standard, mount 840-0056-11 comes with the screws 870-0080.
56
16
26
2 contact lines
RELATED PRODUCTS
Motorized version 940-0060-01
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
2.28
Crystals
840-0199
Positioning Mount For Nonlinear Crystal Housing

Accepts 25.4 mm and up to 10.5 mm thickness ring housings Kinematic design Wedge and ball drive mechanism Tilt/tip range: 2 Sensitivity: 3 arcsec Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws Rotation range: 360 Scale gradation: 2 Compact and robust design Material: black anodized aluminum This kinematic mount accepts crystal housings of 25.4 mm and thickness up to 10.5 mm. The housing is stopped by a rest-flange inside the central aperture of the platform, and is secured by a threaded retaining ring. The rotation position (X axis) is indicated on 360 angular scale with a gradation of 2. The rotation platform has a remov able rod that allows continuous 360 rotation without obscuring the aperture. This removable rod can be fitted into any of the four holes on the perimeter of rotation platform. Angular adjustment range of tilt/tip (Z, Y axes) is 2.5. Two high resolution stainless steel vertical-drive screws with a pitch of 0.25 mm and wedge and ball mechanism ensure smooth and precise angular tilt/tip adjustment with 3 arc sec sensitivity. For tilting, the platform it is preloaded against the base with high quality springs. Large knobs on the adjusting screws relieve the strain on operator fingers during adjustment. Both screws protrude from the top allowing convenient adjustment outside the laser beam path and providing easy access for adjustments in densely packed optical set-ups. An extra M4 tapped hole on the side of the base allows you to operate the mount as a side-drive adjustment control mount. The mount is made of black anodized aluminium to help minimize reflections. A retaining ring M271, two Teflon rings and a tightening key to fix the crystal ring housing is included.
2.29
Code 840-0199
Weight, kg 0.12
Price, EUR 165
Crystal Ovens
TC1 CO1
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER TC1 WITH OVEN CO1

TC1 and CO1 is high temperature set (up to 200 C) consisting of thermocontroller TC1 and crystal oven CO1. TC1 has two independent outputs and can control two CO1 ovens simultaneously. Trough RS232 computer interface it can be controlled from PC. Actual crystal temperature is shown on LED display. The nonlinear crystal is mounted into adapter before insertion into oven CO1. Such design facilitates handling and replacement of the crystal. The nonlinear crystal can be sealed with fused silica windows in order to provide extra protection. The standard adapters are 15, 30 and 50 mm length with apertures of 33, 44, 55, 66 mm size. Customized adapters for crystals up to 1212mm size are available. In addition, adapters for Brewster-cut and PPLN crystals are available too.
Specifications
Model TC1+CO1-30 2 RT 200 C 121230 mm 121250 mm FS windows 0.5 C 0.1 C 90264 V, 4766 Hz 45 W PT1000 DB9 RS232 (DB 9) 5252 mm 5272 mm TC1+CO1-50 1 Quantity of ovens possible to connect to one controller TC1 Temperature tuning range
52 52
3-11
34
19 M6
Cable to TK1 controller
Maximum crystals dimensions Sealing (optional) Accuracy Long-term stability Resolution Powering requirements Power consumption Sensor type Output connector Serial interface Dimensions, DiaD
M6 mounting thread
TC1 and CO1 dimensions
Specifications are subject to changes without advance notice.
Code **
Description, features
Price, EUR
Thermocontroller TC1
TC1 Thermocontroller, Fuzzy logic, RT-200 C, can control two CO1 ovens, long-term stability 0.1 K, worldwide mains 711
Crystal Ovens for TC1

For crystal length up to 30 mm CO1-30-y/y CO1-30-y/z CO1-30S-y/y
* Sizes 33, 44, 55, 66,1212 are standard.
Standard crystal sizes * Custom crystal sizes Sealed, standard crystal sizes *
** y/y, y/z crystal size.
570 625 860
Crystal Ovens
20
50
R2.5
0.1 C
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
Laser crystals
Many of widely used nonlinear crystals are susceptible to ambient humidity, for example KD*P, BBO, LBO. Protective coatings applied to the surface can reduce degradation to some extent only. To improve the protection of surfaces of the crystals from the degradation it is desirable to keep the crystals at higher than ambient tem-
perature, which helps avoid condensation on the crystal surfaces. In addition, if the crystal is used for harmonics generation, the phase-matching angle depends on crystal temperature. For example, the output power of second harmonics generator based on KD*P crystal can decrease by 50 % if the crystal tem-
perature changes just by one degree, hence for good laser stability precise crystal temperature stabilization is necessary. EKSMA OPTICS offers various solutions for precise crystal heating. CH series crystal ovens provide reliable, stable per formance and can accommodate wide range of crystals.
Nonlinear crystals
Crystal Ovens
2.30
Crystals
Code ** Description, features Price, EUR
Crystal Ovens for TC1

For crystal length up to 50 mm CO1-50-y/y CO1-50-y/z CO1-50S-y/y For Brewster-angle cut crystal CO1-30BA-y/y CO1-30BAS-y/y For PPLN crystals CO1-30PP-y/y For PPLN crystals 656 For Brewster-angle cut crystal Sealed, for Brewster-angle cut crystal 719 969 Standard crystal sizes * Custom crystal size Sealed, standard crystal sizes * 699 713
2.31
Nonlinear crystals Laser crystals
Mounting accessories
Crystal holders AD1 AD2 Mounting stages for crystals ovens MS-4 Adapter for CO1 oven mounting on tilt stage. Tilt stage should be ordered separately
** y/y, y/z crystal size.
Spare crystal holder for CO1-30 oven Spare crystal holder for CO1-50 oven
98 116
* Sizes 33, 44, 55, 66,1212 are standard.
CH3
Terahertz Crystals Raman crystals PositionerS & HolderS Crystal Ovens
OVEN for nonlinear crystals

CH3-15 is compact oven with build-in thermocontroller for temperature up to 60 C. It is ideal for larger aperture crystals like KD*P. The crystals with up to 15 15 mm dimensions can be mounted. CH3-30 model can fit crystals with up to 30 mm length. Each oven is made exactly for specified crystal, so it cannot be used for different size crystals.
9
15
52 44
15
crystal center
16
Specifications
Model Temperature tuning range near preset Maximum crystals dimensions Preset temperature Long-term stability CH3-15 5 C 151515 mm 151530 mm 30-60 (80) C 0.2 C 12-15 V DC 6W NTC Thermo resistor Molex 2 pin 484426 mm 484436 mm
48 26
CH3-30
3.5 7.5
mounting hole
mounting hole
7.5 3.5
On request we can manufacture ovens for crystals with aperture up to 6060 mm or even larger.
Powering requirements Power consumption Sensor type Output connector Dimensions, WHD
CH3 dimensions
Code **
Price, EUR
CH3-15 fixed temperature crystal ovens, temperature tuning range 5 K, crystal length up to 15 mm CH3-15-y/y-x CH3-15-y/z-x CH3-15-y/y-80 Standard crystal sizes * Non-standard crystal size For temperature up to 80 C 374 425 450
CH3-30 fixed temperature crystal ovens, temperature tuning range 5 K, crystal length up to 30 mm CH3-30-y/y-x CH3-30-y/z-x CH3-30-y/y-80 Mounting accessories MS-1 MS-2 MS-3 Two axis tilt adjustment 5 degrees range, suitable for all types of CH3, CH4 or CH7 crystal ovens Two axis tilt stage, adjustment in 5 degree range, fits two pc. of CH3, CH4 or CH7 ovens Adapter for CH3, CH4 or CH7 mounting on rotary stage, 15 degrees fine tuning, angle read-out. Rotary stage should be ordered separately 180 310 70 Standard crystal sizes * Non-standard crystal size Version for temperature up to 80 C 425 476 489
Power supply PS-12 PS-12

* Sizes 33, 44, ...,1515 are standard.
Power supply for CH3, CH4 or CH7 crystal oven, 100-240 VAC mains, +12 VDC output
64
** y/y, y/z crystal size, x preset temperature in degrees of Celsius (30-60 C range).
Crystal Ovens
CH4

CH4 oven has identical mechanical design as CH3. The pre-set temperature can be adjusted in 5C range by the help of potentiometer. The current temperature is not indicated. In addition, CH4 has temperature ready output signal, changing state when pre-set temperature is reached. CH4-50 model can fit crystals with up to 50mm length.
Nonlinear crystals Crystal Ovens PositionerS & HolderS Raman crystals Terahertz Crystals Laser crystals
70 64
15
50 44
15
crystal center
16
9 3.5 7.5 26
mounting hole
mounting hole
7.5 3.5 48
CH4 dimensions
Specifications
Model Temperature tuning range near preset Maximum crystals dimensions Preset temperature Long-term stability Temperature OK output signal Powering requirements Power consumption Sensor type Output connector Dimensions, WHD 484426 mm
CH4-15 151515 mm
CH4-30 5 C 151530 mm 30-60 (80) C 0.2 C Present 12-15 V DC
CH4-50 151550 mm
6W
6W NTC Thermo resistor Binder 719, 3 pin 485036 mm
9W
485056 mm
Code **
Price, EUR
CH4-15 Provides READY signal, stability 0.2 K, crystal length up to 15 mm CH4-15-y/y-x CH4-15-y/z-x CH4-15-y/y-80 Standard crystal sizes * Non-standard crystal sizes Version for temperature up to 80 C 399 450 476
CH4-50 Provides READY signal, stability 0.2 K, crystal length up to 50 mm CH4-50-y/y-x CH4-50-y/z-x CH4-50-y/y-80 Mounting accessories MS-1 MS-2 MS-3 Power supply PS-12 PS-12 Power supply for CH3, CH4 or CH7 crystal oven, 100-240 VAC mains, +12 VDC output Two axis tilt adjustment 5 degrees range, suitable for all types of CH3, CH4 or CH7 crystal ovens Two axis tilt stage, adjustment in 5 degrees range, fits two pc. of CH3, CH4 or CH7 ovens Adapter for CH3, CH4 or CH7 mounting on rotary stage, 15 degrees fine tuning, angle read-out. Rotary stage should be ordered separately 180 310 Standard crystal sizes * Non-standard crystal sizes Version for temperature up to 80 C 501 554 568
* Sizes 33, 44, ...,1515 are standard. ** y/y, y/z crystal size, x preset temperature in degrees of Celsius (30-60 C range).
2.32
Crystals
CH7
Nonlinear crystals

CH7 is compact oven with build-in thermocontroller for temperature up to 60 C. CH7 oven provides more crystal mounting options in comparison to CH3 or CH4. Like in CO1, each crystal is mounted into adapter before insertion in oven. CH7 and CO1 crystal adapters are compatible. Maximum crystal size for this model is 1212 mm and the length of the crystal 30 mm.
Specifications
Model Temperature tuning range near preset Maximum crystals dimensions 121215 mm FS windows 30-60 (80) C 0.2 C Present 12-15 V DC 6W NTC Thermo resistor Binder 719, 3 pin 485044 mm 485056 mm CH7-15 5 C 121230 mm CH7-30
The pre-set temperature can be adjusted in 5C range by the help of potentiometer. The current temperature is not indicated. CH7 has temperature ready signal, changing state when pre-set temperature is reached. For additional protection of crystal surfaces from the dust or other contamination, we offer windowed version CH7-20.
2.33
crystal center crystal center
48 48
Sealing (optional) Preset temperature Long-term stability Temperature OK output signal Powering requirements Power consumption Sensor type Output connector Dimensions, WHD
50 23 23 50
56 56
48 3.5
mounting hole mounting hole
Code **
Price, EUR
12.5 12.5
48 3.5 36 36 12.5 12.5 3.5

CH7 dimensions
3.5
CH7-20 Provides READY signal, with AR coated windows for crystal protection CH7-20-y/y-x CH7-20-y/y-80 Power supply PS-12 PS-12-CH7 Power supply for CH3, CH4 or CH7 crystal oven, 100-240 VAC mains, +12 VDC output 64 Fixed temperature in RT-60 C range, crystal size limited to 101020 mm Version for temperature up to 80 C 838 901
Mounting stages for crystal ovens MS-1 MS-2

* Sizes 33, 44, ...,1212 are standard. ** y/y, y/z crystal size, x preset temperature in degrees of Celsius (30-60 C range).
180 310
Related products
Mount MS-1 for fine tuning of CH3, CH4 or CH7 angle is available. The tuning range is 2.5. MS-2 type mount can fit two CH3, CH4 or CH7 type ovens and is ideal for holding second and third or fourth harmonics generators.
Crystal Ovens
With combination of temperature controller, CO10 series ovens are designed specifically for tuning and conditioning the periodically poled bulk devices (PPSLT, PPLN & PP-MgO:LN) and other nonlinear crystals. The oven is designed to hold the crystal with dimensions of 30161 mm. Custom made oven is also available. The crystal heater provides temperature stabilization for crystals with an accuracy of 0.1C. The crystal temperature can be changed from 50C to 200 C.
Applications
Fast temperature tuning of generated wavelengths in periodically oriented and noncritical phase-matching nonlinear crystals Temperature tuning of Bragg grating wavelengths Thermostat of tuning temperature
Oven CO11 Heating-Cooling diagrams of CO11
Oven CO12
Heating-Cooling diagrams of CO12
Specifications
Code Description, features Thermocontroller for CO10, CO11, CO12 fast temperature tuning PPLN crystall ovens Water cooled fast temperature control oven for PPLN crystals Air cooled fast temperature control oven for PPLN crystals Cooled by mounting on heat transfering body fast temperature control oven for PPLN crystals Price, EUR Model Resolution, C Long term stability, C 926 Basic accuracy, C Temperature sensor type General specifications: controllability 1494 mains max power consumption, W TC2 controller dimensions (HWD), mm 1468 weight, kg operating temperature storage temperature 1661 connectors Temperature control range, C Cooling type Heating time, s Cooling time (190 C -50/60 C), s Cooling temperature change velocity, C/s * Heating temperature change velocity, C/s * Set heater temperature, C Dimensions (HWD), mm
* Depends on temperature.
CO10
CO11 0.1 0.5 PT1000 0.1
CO12
Thermocontroller TC2
manual or via RS232 port 90-264 VAC; 50/60 Hz 45 67155160 1.5 -15 C to +35 C -40 C to +70 C 15-pin D-sub receptacle or 9-pin D-sub plug 50-200 Water 130 (50-190 C) 305 1.1-0.25 1.5-0.7 50 857165 60-200 Air 120 (60-190 C) 290 1.0-0.1 1.5-0.7 60 957165 70-200 110 (70-190 C) 290 1 -0.1 1.5-0.7 70 9190.556
CO10
CO11
CO12
Crystal Ovens
Heatsink
Raman crystals
Terahertz Crystals
Crystals temperature stabilization Fast temperature control using active cooling External temperature is kept low by insulation no need for gloves No alignment is required when crystal is removed and replaced 4 screws to remove to exchange crystals Crystals can be replaced without removing the oven from the experiment LabVIEW based software included
Oven CO10
Heating-Cooling diagrams of CO10
Laser crystals
Nonlinear crystals
TC2 CO10 CO11 CO12
Precision Resistive Heater kit TC2 and CO10 series ovens
2.34
Pockels Cells
Pockels Cells Selection Guide

Pockels Cells
See page
Pockels cells
KTP Pockels Cells KD*P Pockels Cells BBO Pockels Cells
Pockels Cells Drivers
3.23.5
3.3 3.4 3.5
See page
Pockels cells drivers

High Repetition Rate Pockels Cells Driver for Q-Switching DQ Cavity Dumping & Pulse Picking Pockels Cells Drivers DPS/DPD High Voltage Pockels Cells Driver DPB Cavity Dumper Drive DP Pockels Cells Driver For Q-Switching for Flashlamp Pumped Lasers DQF High Voltage Power Supply PS
Pockels Cells Kits
3.73.14
3.7 3.8 3.12 3.13 3.13 3.14
3.1
Pockels Cells Selection Guide
See page
Pulse Picker & Q-Switching Kits

BBO Pockels Cells Pulse Picker Kit OEM DKDP Pockels Cells Kit for Lamp Pumped Nanosecond Lasers BBO Pockels Cell Kit for High Repetition Rate Lasers
3.153.16
3.15 3.16 3.16
See page
Mounting Stages
Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 25.4 mm PCH1 Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 35 mm HPR
3.6
3.6 3.6
Pockels Cells Kits
Pockels Cells
3.2
Pockels Cells
Pockels Cells
Pockels Cells
PCK
KTP Pockels cells

New PCK series KTP Pockels developed at EKSMA OPTICS are based on specially grown high resistivity KTP crystals. KTP crystals have better optical homogeneity and higher damage threshold comparing to RTP crystals. The outstanding feature is possibility to operate KTP Pockels cells at high duty cycles or even to keep at high voltage for the longer time.
PCK4
new
Specifications
Model Clear aperture diameter, mm Crystal size (WHL), mm Quantity of crystals Half-wave voltage (@ 1064 nm), kV DC Capacitance, pF Optical transmission, % Contrast ratio Cell size, mm PCK4 3.5 4410 2 <1.8 4 > 98 >1:500 25.442.2
3.3
Pockels Cells Drivers Pockels Cells Kits
More than twice smaller HV requirement comparing to double BBO Pockels cells Operates at high duty cycles Very low piezo-electric resonances Standard available apertures: 33, 44, 66 and 88 mm
Applications Q-switching for high repetition rate lasers 1 kHz 1 MHz Pulse picking of high repetition rate lasers
12
Crimp Barrel
25.4
42.2
Related Products
Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 25.4 mm
See page 3.6
DQ High Repetition Rate Pockels Cell Driver for Q-Switching

See page 3.7
DPD Cavity Dumping & Pulse Picking Pockels Cell Drivers

See page 3.8
Pockels Cells
PC D-compact
KD*P Pockels Cells
D-compact/12
D-compact/9
PC10S
Economically priced Compact size Low absorption Transmission from 400 nm to 1100 nm Applications Q-switching of the laser cavity Cavity Dumping
Pockels cells are used to change the polarization state of light passing through it when a voltage is applied to the electrodes of electro-optic crystals such as KD*P. When used in conjunction with polarizer, Pockels cells can be used as fast optical switches. Typical applications include Q-switching of the laser cavity, laser cavity dumping and coupling light into and from regenerative amplifiers. KD*P based Pockels cells are routinely used for Q-switching applications
from the 400 nm to about 1.1 m. Most of commercial flashlamp pumped Nd:YAG lasers and low repetition rate DPSS Nd:YAG lasers are equipped with KD*P based Pockels cell for laser cavity Q-switching. Electro-optical KD*P crystals have high laser power resistant dielectric AR coatings. Additionally PC12SR and D-compact series Pockels cells have AR coated windows for improved lifetime and protection in less user friendly environment.
Model Clear aperture, mm Crystal size, (WHL) mm Quantity of crystals /2 voltage (@ 1064 nm), kV DC Capacitance, pF Optical transmision, % Contrast ratio 1) Cell size, mm
PC5S 4.54.5 5516 1 <6.5 1.5 > 1:2000 181425
PC5D 4.54.5 5516 2 <3.4 3 >1:1000 231652
PC10S 9.59.5 101025 1 <6.8 4
PC12SR 11 1224 1 <6.8 6 >97 >1:2000 3541.6
D-compact/9 8 920 1 <6.8 6 >1:2000 25.435
D-compact/12 1224 1 <6.8 6 >1:2000 25.439
>1:2000 221833
1) Measured by crossed polarizers method. Specifications are subject to change without advance notice.
All crystals are coated AR/AR@1064 nm. Other antireflection coatings are available under request. Damage threshold >5 J/cm2 for 10 ns pulses at 1064 nm.
12
HV pin recept
35 12 HV pin recept 25.4 12 HV pin recept 25.4
35 41.6
39
Outline drawing of PC12SR
Outline drawing of D-compact/9
Outline drawing of D-compact/12
18
33
Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 25.4 mm.

See page 3.6
Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 35 mm.

See page 3.6
PIN RECEPTICLES

Outline Drawing of PC10S
See page 3.7
DQF Pockels Cell Driver for Q-Switching for Flashlamp Pumped Lasers
See page 3.13
18
Pockels Cells Kits
Related Products
22
11
11
Pockels Cells
3.4
Pockels Cells
PCB
BBO Pockels Cells

Pockels cell are used to change the polarization state of light passing through it when a voltage is applied to the electrodes of electro-optic crystals such as BBO. When used in conjunction with polarizer, Pockels cells can be used as fast optical switches. Typical applications include Q-switching of the laser cavity, laser cavity dumping and coupling light into and from regenerative amplifiers. BBO based Pockels cells can be useful at wavelengths from the UV to more than 2 m. Low piezoelectric ringing makes these Pockels cells attractive for the control of high-power and high pulse repetition rate lasers. Fast switching electronic drivers properly matched to the cell are
Specifications
PCB3D
PCB3D-C
Minimal piezoelectric ringing Low absorption Broad trasmission range from 200 nm to 2000 nm Compact size Applications High repetition rate DPSS Q-switch High repetition rate regenerative amplifier control Cavity dumping Beam chopper
available for Q-switching, cavity dumping and other applications. Pockels cells of PCB series are transverse field devices. Low electro-optical coefficient of BBO results in high operating voltages. The quarter-wave voltage is proportional to the ratio of electrode spacing and crystal length. As a result, smaller aperture devices have lower quarter-wave, however even for 2.5 mm aperture devices the quarter-wave voltage is as high as 4kV @ 1064 nm. Double crystal design is employed to reduce required voltages and to allow operation in half-wave mode with fast switching times.
25.4
57.2 25.4 57.2
12
3.5
Pockels Cells Pockels Cells Drivers Pockels Cells Kits
Model Clear aperture diameter, mm Crystal size (WHL), mm Quantity of crystals /4 voltage (@ 1064 nm), kV DC Capacitance, pF Optical transmission, % Contrast ratio 1) Dimensions, mm
1)
PCB3S 2.5 3320 1 <3.4 4 > 98 >1:1000 25.437.2
PCB3D 2.5 3320 2 <1.7 6 >98 >1:500 25.457.2
PCB4S 3.5 4420 1 <4.6 3 >98 >1:1000 25.437.2
PCB4D 3.5 4420 2 <2.3 6 >97 >1:500 25.457.2
Measured by crossed polarizers method. All crystals are coated AR/AR@1064 nm. Other antireflection coatings are available on request. Damage threshold >5 J/cm2 for 10 ns pulses at 1064 nm.
12 Crimp Barrel 17.6
12 Connection terminals 17.6
Crimp Barrel
25.4
18.6 37.2
For window cleaning ceramic aperture can be easily removed
PCB3D, PCB4D outline drawing
PCB3S, PCB4S outline drawing
BBO Pockels Cells with ceramic aperture are available. Please append letter C to code for ceramic aperture.
An example: PCB3S-C BBO Pockels cell with ceramic aperture
Related Products
See page 3.6

See page 3.7
DPD Cavity Dumping & Pulse Picking Pockels Cell Drivers

See page 3.8
Pockels Cells
PCH1

PCH1 series mounting stage for Pockels cells of 25.4 mm of diameter.
Specifications
Adjusting angle allong X and Y axis Rotation angle along Z-axis for D-Compact series Pockels cells Rotating angle along Z-axis for BBO Pockels cells 8 12 22
Pockels cell 25.4 For M4 screw 2 holes
50
25
Lock screw 25 M6 2 threads 50
MAX 57
Adjustment screw Sensitivity 1.5 m Compact fine screw Sensitivity 1.3 m Ultra fine adjustment screw Sensitivity 0.5 m
MAX 59
MAX 56
38
PCH1 standard mounting stage includes adjustment screws of 1.5 m sensitivity. Compact fine screws or Ultra fine adjustment screws are available on request.
Catalogue Number PCH1-2-0.5 PCH1-2-0.35 PCH1-2-0.25 PCH1-3-0.5 PCH1-3-0.35 PCH1-3-0.25 Description 25.4 mm; with 2 adjustment screws thread M6x0.5 25.4 mm; with 2 adjustment screws thread M6x0.35 25.4 mm; with 2 adjustment screws thread M6x0.25 25.4 mm; with 3 adjustment screws thread M6x0.5 25.4 mm; with 3 adjustment screws thread M6x0.35 25.4 mm; with 3 adjustment screws thread M6x0.25 Price, EUR 230 265 292 250 306 349
HPR
Mounting Stages for Pockels Cells of 35 mm

HPR series mounting stage for pockels cell is used for housing of Pockells cells in diameter of 35 mm.
Pockels Cells Kits Specifications
Model Suitable for pockels cells housing diameters, mm Adjusting angle along X and Y axis, deg Rotating angle along Z-axis, deg Beam high above breadboard, mm
Other side
HPR-35 35 9 20 50
HPR series mounting stage for Pockels cell. KDP Pockels cell (available additionaly) is mounted.
Catalogue Number HPR-35
Price, EUR 250
Pockels Cells
3.6
Pockels Cells

Pockels Cells
DQ
High Repetition Rate Pockels Cells Driver for Q-Switching

DQ series high repetition rate Pockels cell driver has been designed for use in mode-locked lasers for cavity dumping or for cavity Q-switching of solid-state nanosecond lasers. Fast HV (less than 7ns) edge ensures excellent pre- and post-pulse contrast. Ability to operate at high pulse repetition rates makes this driver perfect fit for most of diode-pumped nanosecond lasers. For pulse repetition rates up to 10 kHz heatsink is not required. For high repetition rates the driver should be attached to the heatsink with thermal resistance of at least 0.4 C/W for room temperature (25 C) operation. The driver should be mounted into dielectric box (not provided) providing electrical insulation. Low voltage power supply is required to internal triggering circuit, while tuning of HV power supply voltage.
3.7
Pulse repetition rate up to 100 kHz Fast HV rise time <7 ns for 4 kV pulse HV pulse amplitude up to 4 kV
Specifications
Catalogue Number Maximum high voltage (HV) pulse amplitude Polarity HV pulse rise time HV pulse fall time HV pulse duration Maximum HV pulse repetition rate HV pulse jitter
Oscillogram of DQ driver operation
DQ-100-4 4.0 kV Positive < 7 ns ~2 s 1) 180 ns 1) 100 kHz < 0.5 ns 100-1000 ns 3-5 V (50 ) < 10 ns 35-40 ns 0 - 4.0 kV, 9 mA max 2) 9 - 24 V, 500 mA max 2) 0-35 C 3) 1045225 mm
External triggering pulse duration requirement External triggering pulse amplitude requirement External triggering pulse rise & fall time HV pulse delay External powering requirements: high voltage supply low voltage DC supply Operating temperature Size
1) 2) 3)
Fast edge of HV pulse in detail
Typical value. Test conditions :PRR = 100 kHz, C = 6 pF, U = 4 kV. Heatsink temperature should be bellow 35 C at 100 kHz pulse repetition rate.
DPS/DPD Series
Cavity Dumping & Pulse Picking Pockels Cell Drivers
Fig. 1. OEM version of DPS/DPD series Pockels cell driver
Fig. 2. Encased version of DPS/DPD series Pockels cell driver
Fast HV rise/fall time <4 8 ns HV pulse amplitude up to 3.6 kV Pulse repetition rate up to 3.5 MHz
Fig. 3. Control timing charts for two-pulses controlled drivers
General specifications table for DPS/DPD series drivers

Driver model Maximal HV rated voltage (for testing only) Maximal HV operating voltage Polarity (except DPD/DPS-1000-2.7-Al driver) Polarity (DPD/DPS-1000-2.7-Al driver) HV pulse rise time HV pulse fall time HV pulse duration for single driver Max HV pulse duration for full-bridge configuration Maximal HV pulse repetition rate 3.8 kV
1)
DPS/DPD series <90 % from rated voltage Positive Bipolar < 4-8 ns (Fig. 7) < 4-8 ns (Fig. 8) 120 - 5000 ns 0 - 5000 ns 3.5 MHz >100 ns 3-5 V (50 load) < 20 ns 10 cm Fig. 4 Fig. 3
Fig. 4. Control timing charts for single pulse controlled drivers
External triggering pulse duration requirement External triggering pulse amplitude requirement External triggering pulse rise & fall time Maximal length of leads to Pockels cell Control diagram options: single triggering pulse control two trigger pulses control HV pulse delay External powering requirements: 2) high voltage supply (depends on required output voltage) low voltage DC supply
1) Specifications
Output pulse, kV
up to 3.6 kV 120.5 V, <150 mA 14 25 V, <150 mA, on request
Fig. 5. Operating possibility chart for DPS/DPD standard and enhanced rate drivers. You may easy choose version of customized driver for inquiry within green area of chart
are given for Pockels cell with capacity <6 pF. Not all combinations of parameters can be possible at the same time. Specifications are subject to changes without advance notice.
DPS-1000-2.7-Al and DPD-1000-2.7-Al model drivers external powering requirements are as follows: High voltage supply positive: up to +1.35 kV, 40mA; High voltage supply negative: up to -1.35 kV, 40mA; Low voltage DC supply: 24 V, < 300 mA.
2) For
Pockels Cells Kits
40-50 ns
DPD series Pockels cell drivers are designed for wide range of applications and operating modes. Repetition rate can be up to 500 kHz for standard range of drivers, up to 1 MHz enhanced and up to 3.5 MHz high rate. Standard range of possible pulse durations is from 100 ns to 5 s. It can be extended to infinity using pulse regeneration technique. Connection diagram can be PUSH-PULL configuration using stand-alone driver, as well as FULL BRIDGE using two drivers for one Pockels cell. FULL BRIDGE configuration gives such advantages as repetition rate doubling to reach up to 7 MHz rate, pulse duration shortening down to zero or voltage doubling on pockels cell.
Most of DPS/DPD series units are available in two versions: open frame which is ideal for OEM manufacturers incorporating drivers in their own systems and encased in aluminum housings. Encasing of Pockels cell driver in aluminum housing solves two problems: shields both humans and electronics from high voltage impact from operating Pockels cell driver, and protects driver itself from potentially harmful external contact ensuring safe operation and driver longevity. The housed option is especially handy for researchers and custom product manufacturers who use these drivers during their own systems build-up.
Pockels Cells
3.8
Pockels Cells
28.4
10
116 94
3.4
63
63 45
34
57
45
88 88 3.4 94
Fig. 12. Outline drawing of DPS/DPD series driver with general purpose pad
Fig. 13. Outline drawing of DPS/DPD series drivers with conductive pad
3.9
57
26.5
Fig. 6. Typical output pulse shape
Fig. 7. Typical rising front of output pulse in detail
Fig. 8. Typical falling front of output pulse in detail
OEM version
Configuration samples of OEM version of DPS/DPD series drivers
Catalogue Number of Driver Maximal HV rated voltage Maximal HV operating voltage Maximal HV repetition rate Pulse duration HV pulse rise time, typical HV pulse fall time, typical Output polarity HV power consumption 12V/24V power consumption Dimensions Cooling DPS-50-3.5 DPD-50-3.5 3.8 kV 3.5 kV 50 kHz 120-5000 ns <7 ns <7 ns positive <20 W 1W see Fig. 13 conductive DPS-400-1.5 DPD-400-1.5 1.6 kV 1.5 kV 400 kHz 120-5000 ns <5.5 ns <5.5 ns positive <20 W 5.5 W see Fig. 12 conductive or water DPS-200-3.5 DPD-200-3.5 3.8 kV 3.5 kV 200 kHz 120-5000 ns <7 ns <7 ns positive <65 W 4W see Fig. 12 conductive or water DPS-250-2.5 DPD-250-2.5 2.6 kV 2.5 kV 250 kHz 120-5000 ns <6 ns <6 ns positive <40 W 4.5 W see Fig. 12 conductive or water DPS-500-2.5 DPD-500-2.5 2.6 kV 2.5 kV 500 kHz 120-5000 ns <6.5 ns <6.5 ns positive <80 W 6W see Fig. 12 conductive or water DPS-1000-1.8 DPD-1000-1.8 2 kV 1.8 kV 1000 kHz 120-5000 ns <6 ns <6 ns positive <80 W 9W see Fig. 12 conductive or water
DPS in code indicates that driver is controlled by 1 sync pulse, DPD in code indicates that driver is controlled by 2 sync pulses.
Fig. 10. OEM version of DPS/DPD series driver with general purpose pad
Fig. 11. OEM version of DPS/DPD series driver with conductive pad. Suitable for repetition rate up to 50 kHz
Encased version
Configuration samples of encased version of DPS/DPD series drivers
Catalogue Number of Driver Maximal HV rated voltage Maximal HV operating voltage Maximal HV repetition rate Pulse duration HV pulse rise time, typical HV pulse fall time, typical Output polarity HV power consumption 12V/24V power consumption Dimensions Cooling DPS-200-3.5-Al DPD-200-3.5-Al 3.8 kV 3.5 kV 200 kHz 120-5000 ns <7 ns <7 ns positive <65 W 4W see Fig. 16 water DPS-250-2.5-Al DPD-250-2.5-Al 2.6 kV 2.5 kV 250 kHz 120-5000 ns <6 ns <6 ns positive <40 W 4.5 W see Fig. 16 water DPS-500-2.5-Al DPD-500-2.5-Al 2.6 kV 2.5 kV 500 kHz 120-5000 ns <6.5 ns <6.5 ns positive <80 W 6W see Fig. 16 water DPS-1000-1.8-Al DPD-1000-1.8-Al 2 kV 1.8 kV 1000 kHz 120-5000 ns <6 ns <6 ns positive <80 W 9W see Fig. 16 water DPS-1000-2.7-Al DPD-1000-2.7-Al 2.8 kV 2.7 kV 1000 kHz <7.5 ns <7.5 ns bipolar <120 W 9W see Fig. 17 water
Fig. 14. Encased version of driver DPS/DPD models DPS/DPD-200-xx, DPS/DPD-250-xx, DPS/DPD-500-xx, DPS/DPD-1000-1.8
Fig. 15. Encased version of driver DPS/DPD model DPS/DPD-1000-2.7
3.4
114 98.5
158
81 69
73
66
145
50
145 135 4.5
31
Fig. 16. Outline drawing of encased version of driver DPS/DPD models DPS/DPD-200-xx, DPS/DPD-250-xx, DPS/DPD-500-xx, DPS/DPD-1000-1.8
Fig. 17. Outline drawing of encased version of driver DPS/DPD model DPS/DPD-1000-2.7
Pockels Cells Kits
10.5
27
58
68
3 48.5
Pockels Cells
120-5000 ns
3.10
Pockels Cells
Full-bridge version
Configuration examples of FULL-BRIDGE configuration drivers
Catalogue Number of Full-Bridge Driver Base driver Maximal HV operating voltage, kV Maximal HV repetition rate, kHz HV pulse duration range HV pulse rise time, ns HV pulse fall time, ns HV power consumption, W Case Cooling 2DPS-400-3.5-Al 2DPD-400-3.5-Al DPS-200-3.5 DPD-200-3.5 3.5 400 0 5000 ns <7 <7 <130 2DPS-1000-2.5-Al 2DPD-1000-2.5-Al DPS-500-2.5 DPD-500-2.5 2.5 1000 0 5000 ns <6.5 <6.5 <160 see Fig. 21 water 2DPS-2000-1.8-Al 2DPD-2000-1.8-Al DPS-1000-1.8 DPD-1000-1.8 1.8 2000 0 5000 ns <6 <6 <160
72
PH2
3
PH3
50
PH4
OUT1
OUT2
PC voltage
Fig. 20. Principle of 4-phase control of full-bridge driver configuration
22
Fig. 21. Outline drawing of case for full-bridge drivers
3.11
98
PH1
60
PH1
DPD OUT 1
PH2 Pockels Cell PH3 DPD OUT 2 PH4
Fig. 18. Diagram of Pockels cell full-bridge connection to driver
Fig. 19. External view of full-bridge driver
210 3.4 202
DPB
High Voltage Pockels Cell Driver

Specifications
Catalogue Number Maximum high voltage (HV) pulse amplitude to cell Output polarity HV pulse rise time, typical HV pulse fall time, typical HV pulse duration 6.5 ns 6.5 ns 120-3000 ns 10 kHz > 50 ns 3-5 V (50 load) < 20 ns 40 ns 2.1 kV, 5W 14-25 V, < 150 mA (0.5 A inrush current). Optionaly 12 V, 220 mA (0.5 A inrush current) 2.8 kV, 5 W 14-25 V, < 150 mA (0.5 A inrush current) 5 kHz DPB-10-4.2 4.2 kV bipolar 7.5 ns DPB-5-5.6 5.6 kV 7.5 ns
DPB series driver mounted with HV power supply PS-5
Maximal HV pulse repetition rate External triggering pulse duration requirement (for DPB-10-4.2D & DPB-5-5.6D controlled by two sync pulses) External triggering pulse amplitude requirement External triggering pulse rise & fall time HV pulse delay External powering requirements: HV power supply* low voltage DC supply Dimensions ( L x W x H): driver board driver board mounted with PS-5 power supply
HV pulse amplitude up to 5.6 kV HV pulse amplitude doubling layout Repetition rate up to 10 kHz Easy integration with HV power supply
135 x 70 x 25 mm 135 x 70 x 55 mm
* Typical voltage control limits for PS-5 are 1.8 to 2.8 kV. We accept other limits on your request.
SYNC in DPS OUT 1 SYNC in OUT 1 GND Pockels Cell
OUT 2 OUT 2
143
16
Diagram of pockels cell connection to driver and timing charts of driver controlled by 1 sync pulse DPB-10-4.2S or DPB-5-5.6S
SYNC in 1
DPD
SYNC in 2 OUT 1
52
SYNC in 1
OUT 1 GND Pockels Cell
143
SYNC in 2 OUT 2 OUT 2
151
Outline drawing
Diagram of pockels cell connection to driver and timing charts of driver controlled by 2 sync pulses DPB-10-4.2D or DPB-5-5.6D
ORDERING INFORMATION
Catalogue Number DPB-5-5.6S DPB-5-5.6D DPB-10-4.2S DPB-10-4.2D Description Controlled by 1 sync pulse; Maximal HV pulse amplitude to cell 5.6 kV; Maximal HV pulse repetition rate 5 kHz Controlled by 2 sync pulses; Maximal HV pulse amplitude to cell 5.6 kV; Maximal HV pulse repetition rate 5 kHz Controlled by 1 sync pulse; Maximal HV pulse amplitude to cell 4.2 kV; Maximal HV pulse repetition rate 10 kHz Controlled by 2 sync pulses; Maximal HV pulse amplitude to cell 4.2 kV; Maximal HV pulse repetition rate 10 kHz
Pockels Cells Kits
35
76
Pockels Cells
3.12
Pockels Cells
DP
Cavity Dumper Driver

Specifications
Catalogue Number Maximum high voltage (HV) pulse amplitude HV pulse fall time HV pulse rise time HV pulse duration Maximum HV repetition rate Jitter External triggering pulse duration requirement External triggering pulse amplitude requirement External triggering pulse rise & fall time HV pulse delay External powering requirements: high voltage supply low voltage DC supply Size
1)
DP-3-4.2 4.2 kV < 7 ns ~0.1 ms
DP-3-5.2 5.2 kV < 9 ns
from 3 to 100 s 1) 3 kHz < 0.5 ns 100-1000 ns 3-5 V (50 ) < 20 ns 35-40 ns 4.4 kV, 0.2 mA max 5.5 kV, 0.2 mA max 2.5 kHz
3.13
Pockels Cells
DP has been designed for use in modelocked lasers for cavity dumping or for cavity Q-switching of solid-state nano second lasers. Fast HV (less than 7 ns) edge ensures excellent pre- and postpulse contrast. Two versions are available: DP-3-4.2 and DP-3-5.2.
24-28 V, 50 mA max 100 x 50 x 40 mm
According to customers request.
Oscillogram of DP driver operation: whole HV pulse
Oscillogram of DP driver operation: HV pulse fall
Time diagram of DP cavity dumping driver
DQF
Pockels Cells Driver For Q-Switching for Flashlamp Pumped Lasers

DQF-0.2-5 is designed for Q-switching of nanosecond lasers without use of phase retardation plate. High voltage is applied
Specifications
Catalogue Number Maximum high voltage to cell (HV) pulse amplitude (U1 + U2) U1 value (Fig 1) U2 value (Fig 1) HV pulse fall time HV pulse rise time, typical HV pulse duration, typical HV pulse repetition rate HV pulse delay External triggering pulse duration requirement External triggering pulse amplitude requirement External triggering pulse rise & fall time Board dimensions 3.2 mm mounting holes location External powering requirements DC supply HV supply
* Keep gap at least 5 mm from any side of board to other conductive parts.
to Pockels cell in order to inhibit oscillation. Pockels cell is opened by negative polarity pulse allowing laser to radiate.
DQF-0.2-5 5 kV equal to HV powering voltage equal to 0.25U1 (optionally 0 V) < 15 ns 60 s 1200 s 200 Hz 40 ns 100 1200 s 3 5 V (50 ) < 20 ns 92 70 22 mm* 84 62 mm 12 24 V, max 200 mA 4 kV, 1 mA
Fig. 1. Time diagram of DQF-0.2-5 driver
PS
High Voltage Power Supply

Power supply PS series is designed for powering pockels cell driver with appropriate power and voltage requirement. Due to its performance and reliable design, PS is good choice for OEM customers.
Pockels Cells Pockels Cells Kits Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices Pockels Cells Drivers
PS-40 power supply
PS-120, PS2-60 power supply
Specifications
Catalogue Number Maximal output high voltage* Voltage control limits Maximal output power at maximal output voltage External powering requirements Dimensions (L W H) Mounting holes 3.4 mm location 5W 24 V, <15 W ** 1357030 mm 12535 mm PS-5 4 kV PS-40 4 kV 40 W 24 V, <50 W 1607040 mm 15060 mm PS-120 4 kV 120 W 24 V, <150 W 17511045 mm 165100 mm PS2-60 + 2 kV; -2 kV 260W 24 V, <150 W 17511045 mm 165100 mm
-1 kV from maximal value
* Matching to pockels driver voltage requirement is desirable by ordering ** Optionally 12 V, <15 W
Catalogue Number PS-5 PS-5C PS-40 PS-40C PS-120 PS-120C PS2-60 PS2-60C Description 5W HV supply, controlled by internal trimmer 5W HV supply, controlled by CAN* 40W HV power supply, controlled by internal trimmer 40W HV power supply, controlled by CAN* 120 W HV supply, controlled by internal trimmer 120 W HV supply, controlled by CAN* 2x60W HV supply, controlled by internal trimmer 2x60W HV supply, controlled by CAN*
* Requires USB-CAN converter for computer control that is sold separately
3.14
Pockels Cells
Pulse Picker & Q-Switching Kits

Pockels Cells
BBO Pockels Cells Pulse Picker Kit

Robust design Hermetically sealed Pockels cell Low absorption BBO crystal High speed electro-optical shutter
BBO Pockels Cell Kit for Pulse Picking Includes:
High repetition rate Pockels Cell driver see page 3.12 Power supply for Pockels Cell driver see page 3.14 BBO Pockels cells see page 3.5
BBO Pockels Cells Pulse Picker Kit
Code PPK-01 Description for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 2.5 mm; repetition rate up to 1000 kHz for 1030 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 2.5 mm; repetition rate up to 1000 kHz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 3.5 mm; repetition rate up to 500 kHz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 3.5 mm; repetition rate up to 1000 kHz
3.15

Laser
PPK-02 PPK-03 PPK-04
Dumper
Pulsed optical output Polarizer Pockels Cell Kit Polarizer
Pockels Pockels Cells Kits Kits EKSMA OPTICS Tel.: +370 5 272 99 00 Fax: +370 5 272 92 99 info@eksmaoptics.com www.eksmaoptics.com
Pockels Cells Kits
OEM DKDP Pockels Cells Kit for lamp pumped nanosecond lasers
Robust design M2 for fast switching Q-switching without retardation plate EKSMA OPTICS offers Pockels cells kit for lamp pumped nanosecond lasers. High voltage through Pockels cell driver DQF is applied to Pockels cell in order to inhibit oscillation. Pockels cell is opened by negative polarity pulse allowing laser to radiate.
DKDP Pockels Cells Q-Switching Kit Includes: Pockels Cells
Output Mirror
Low repetition rate Pockels Cell driver see page 3.13 Power supply for Pockels Cell driver see page 3.14 DKDP Pockels cells see page 3.4
OEM DKDP Pockels Cell Kits
Code QKD-01 QKD-02 QKD-03 QKD-04 QKD-05 Description for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 4.54.5 mm; repetition rate up to 200 Hz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 9.59.5 mm; repetition rate up to 200 Hz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 11 mm; repetition rate up to 200 Hz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 8 mm; repetition rate up to 200 Hz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 11 mm; repetition rate up to 200 Hz
Time diagram of DQF Pockels cell driver
Rear Mirror
Pockels Cell Kit
Thin Film Polarizers
Lamp Pumped Laser Head
BBO Pockels Cell Kit for High Repetition Rate Lasers

Robust design Pulse repetition rate up to 100kHz Up to 10 kHz no external cooling is required Fast HV rise time EKSMA OPTICS offers BBO Pockels cell kit for Q-Switching of high repetition rate nanosecond lasers and mode locked lasers.
BBO Pockels Cells Q-Switching Kit Includes:
High repetition rate Pockels Cell driver see page 3.7 Power supply for Pockels Cell driver see page 3.14 BBO Pockels cell see page 3.5
BBO Pockels cells PHR Series kit
Code QKB-01 QKB-02 Description for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 2.5 mm; repetition rate up to 100 kHz for 1064 nm, /4 operation; clear aperture 3.5 mm; repetition rate up to 100 kHz
Pockels Pockels Cells Kits Kits
3.16
Components Selection Guide
4.1
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
See page
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Laser Mirrors Laser Harmonic Separators Laser Output Couplers Laser Rear Mirrors Laser Beamsplitters Laser Line Anti-Reflection Coated Precision Windows AR coated Lens Kits Thin Film Laser Polarizers Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates Zero Order Air-Spaced Plates Low Order Plates Multiple Order Plates Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates Polarization Plane Rotators Variable Attenuators for Nd:YAG Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070, -0071
Nd:YAG Laser and Nonlinear Crystals
4.34.19
4.3 4.5 4.6 4.8 4.9 4.11 4.12 4.14 4.15 4.15 4.16 4.16 4.17 4.17 4.18
See page
A.4
See page
Nd:YAG Laser & NONLINEAR Crystals

Nd:YAG Crystals (Standard Rods) Nonlinear Crystals for SHG@1064 nm Nonlinear Crystals for THG@1064 nm Nonlinear Crystals for 4HG@1064 nm
4.204.22
4.20 4.21 4.22 4.22
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
4.2
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Laser Mirrors
Our Nd:YAG laser mirrors are suitable for fundamental Nd:YAG laser 1064 nm, frequency-doubled 532 nm, frequency-tripled 355 nm and frequency quadrupled 266 nm wavelength application. Two kinds of substrate material are available. Laser line mirrors are designed for 45 angle of incidence. Featuring high polishing quality, low scattering and high damage threshold, our dielectric reflectors enables perfect beam steering for Nd:YAG lasers.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Wedge Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 at 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 3 min 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 laser line mirrors UV FS laser line mirrors BK7 dual line mirrors UV FS dual line mirrors Coated Surface Flatness Angle of Incidence 5 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical 8 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical 1 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical 2 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture 0 or 45 Electron beam multilayer dielectric or Ion Beam Sputtering Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter

Substrate material: BK7 grade A
Size 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm
4 3
4.3
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 031-0350-i0 031-0530-i0 031-1060-i0 031-0350 031-0530 031-1060
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 59 / 59 56 / 56 57 / 57
351361 527532 10471064
T, %
2 1 0
Size 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm
960 980 1000 1020 1040 1060 Wavelength, nm 1080 1100
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 95 / 95 74 / 74 75 / 75
351361 527532 10471064
HR 1064 nm, AOI = 45
Size 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm 351361 527532 10471064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 035-0350-i0 035-0530-i0 035-1060-i0 035-0350 035-0530 035-1060 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 128 / 128 110 / 110 110 / 110
Size 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm 527532 10471064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 037-0530-i0 037-1060-i0 037-0530 037-1060 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 185 / 185 185 / 185
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Substrate material: UV grade Fused Silica
4 3
Size 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm 262266 351361 527532 10471064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99 / 99 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 041-0260-i0 041-0350-i0 041-0530-i0 041-1060-i0 041-0260 041-0350 041-0530 041-1060 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 81 / 81 77 / 77 72 / 72 72 / 72
T, %
2 1 0
Size 25.4 6 mm
240 250 260 270 Wavelength, nm 280 290
Wavelength, nm 262266 351361 527532 10471064
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99 / 99 99.8 / 99.5 / 99.9 99.8 / 99.5 99.9 / 99.9 99.8 / 99.5 99.9 / 99.9
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 042-0260-i0 042-0350-i0 042-0530-i0 042-0530HHR-i0 042-1060-i0 042-1060HHR-i0 042-0260 042-0350 042-0350HHR 042-0530 042-0530HHR 042-1060 042-1060HHR
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 107 / 107

new
/ 175 102 / 102 145 / 145 102 / 102 145 / 145
new
new
Size 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm 262266 351361 527532 10471064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99 / 99 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 045-0260-i0 045-0350-i0 045-0530-i0 045-1060-i0 045-0260 045-0350 045-0530 045-1060 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 207 / 207 187 / 187 169 / 169 169 / 169
Size 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm 351361 527532 10471064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 047-0350-i0 047-0530-i0 047-1060-i0 047-0350 047-0530 047-1060 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 281 / 281 258 / 258 258 / 258

4 3
Size 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 051-5306-i0 051-6306-i0 051-5306 051-6306 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 85 / 85 85 / 85
T, %
2 1 0
Size 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 532+1064
500 520 540 560 1000 Wavelength, nm 1040 1080
99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
051-5306-i0 051-6306-i0
051-5306 051-6306
103 / 103 103 / 103
633+1064
HR 532+1064 nm, AOI = 45
Size 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 051-5306-i0 051-6306-i0 051-5306 051-6306 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 151 / 151 151 / 151
Related Products
Prisms
See page 1.37
532+1064 633+1064
Size 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 051-5306-i0 051-6306-i0 051-5306 051-6306 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 227 / 227 227 / 227
Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0056

See page 8.62
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
HR 266 nm, AOI = 45
111 / 111
4.4

Size 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 355+532 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 061-5306-i0 061-6306-i0 061-3553-i0 061-5306 061-6306 061-3553 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 109 / 109 109 / 109 115 / 115
Size 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 355+532 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.9 / 99.9 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 062-5306-i0 062-6306-i0 062-3553-i0 062-5306
new
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 134 / 134 180 / 180 134 / 134 139 / 139
062-5306HHR-i0 062-5306HHR 062-6306 062-3553
4.5
Nd:YAG Laser Optics Nd:YAG Laser and Nonlinear Crystals
Size 50.8 8 mm
Related Products
Laser Line and Dual Laser Line Mirrors of other wavelengths
See page 1.17
Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 355+532
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 209 / 209 209 / 209 215 / 215
Size 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm 532+1064 633+1064 355+532 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 067-5306-i0 067-6306-i0 067-3553-i0 067-5306 067-6306 067-3553 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 318 / 318 318 / 318 323 / 323
Metal Coated Mirrors

See page 1.19
LASER HARMONIC SEPARATORS

Offered on 0.5 or 1 inch substrates of BK7 or UVFS with surface flatness /10 Harmonic separators are dichroic beamsplitters that reflect one wavelength and transmit the others. Reflectance is better than 99.5% for the wavelength of interest and transmittance is at least 90% for the rejected wavelengths. The rear surface of harmonic separators is antireflection coated.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Related Products
Pellin-Broca Prisms
See page 1.39
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS Coated Surface Flatness Back side antireflection coated
Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter >5 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical >8 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture AOI 45, R<0.5% AOI 0, R<0.1%
100 98 96 94 4 3 2 1 0 500 520 540 560 1020 1040 1060 1080 Wavelength, nm
100 95 90 4 3 2 1 0 520 530 540 1000 Wavelength, nm 1040 1080
031-5105. HR > 99.5% @ 532 nm, HT > 95% @ 1064 nm, AOI = 45
031-6500. HR > 99.5% @ 1064 nm, HT > 93% @ 532 nm, AOI = 0
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Reflected wavelength, Transmitted nm, R > 99.5% wavelength, nm 355 355 355 355 355 355 532 532 532 532 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532+1064 532+1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 Transmission, % >95 >95 >95 >95 >90 >90 >95 >95 >95 >95 >93 >93 >93 >93 AOI, deg 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS Code 12.7x3 mm 041-3100 041-3105 041-3500 041-3505 041-3510 041-3515 031-5100 031-5105 041-5100 041-5105 031-6500 031-6505 041-6500 041-6505 25.4x6 mm 042-3100 042-3105 042-3500 042-3505 042-3510 042-3515 032-5100 032-5105 042-5100 042-5105 032-6500 032-6505 042-6500 042-6505 Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 125 / 155 125 / 155 90 / 115 90 / 115 115 / 145 115 / 145 95 / 120 120 / 150 120 / 150
Housing accessories
Adapter for Beamsplitter at 45 840-0116
See page 8.72

See page 8.54
LASER OUTPUT COUPLERS

An output coupler is a partially reflecting dielectric mirror used in a laser cavity. It transmits a part of the circulating intracavity power for generating a useful output from the laser. A low transmission output coupler leads to a low laser threshold, but also possibly to poor laser efficiency if the losses due to output coupling do not dominate over other parasitic losses in the laser cavity. The output coupler transmission is often chosen to maximize the achieved output power, although its optimum value may be lower or higher if there are other design purposes (minimizing the intracavity intensities or suppressing Q-switching instabilities in a passively mode-locked laser).
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 typical at 633 nm +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS Coated Surface Flatness Angle of Incidence Back side antireflection coated >3 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical >6 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture 0-8 (normal) R<0.2% Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter
2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B)
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
95 / 120
4.6
Laser Output Couplers

Size 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm
58 54 50
Reflection, % 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5
Transmission, % 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Code 031-0050 031-0060 031-0065 031-0070 031-0075 031-0080 031-0085 031-0090 031-0095 031-0097 031-0098 031-0099 041-0050 041-0060 041-0065 041-0070 041-0075 041-0080 041-0085 041-0090 041-0095 041-0097 041-0098 041-0099
Price, EUR 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 82 82 89 89 96 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 102 102 109 109 116
1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064

940 980 1020 Wavelength, nm 1060 1100
T, %
46 42 38 34
1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064
T, %
T, %
T, %
4.7
R = 602% @ 1064 nm, AOI=0
31.0
30.5
30.0 29.5 29.0 1045
1050
1065
1070
1064 1064 1064
R = 703% @ 1064 nm, AOI=0
35
Size 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064
1040 1060 Wavelength, nm 1080 1100
Reflection, % 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5
Transmission, % 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Code 032-0050 032-0060 032-0065 032-0070 032-0075 032-0080 032-0085 032-0090 032-0095 032-0097 032-0098 032-0099 042-0050 042-0060 042-0065 042-0070 042-0075 042-0080 042-0085 042-0090 042-0095 042-0097 042-0098 042-0099
Price, EUR 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 102 102 109 109 116 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 122 122 129 129 136
30
25
20 1020
1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064
R = 753% @ 1064 nm, AOI=0
40
30
20 10 0
980
1000
1020
1080
1100
1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064
R = 902% @ 1064 nm, AOI=0
Related Products
Uncoated Flat Windows
See page 1.9

See page 8.54
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Laser REAR Mirrors

High reflectivity (R>99.8%) coatings are applied on laser rear mirrors. The UV FS substrates are suggested for pulsed and CW high power fundamental Nd:YAG laser application.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm-0.12 mm 0.25 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS Angle of Incidence Reflectivity >2 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm >5 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm 0-8 (normal) R>99.8% Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter
Wavelength, nm 10471064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 10471064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064
Substrate type Plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex
Radius, mm -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000
Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Code 25.46 mm 032-8000 032-8005 032-8010 032-8015 032-8020 032-8025 032-8050 032-8100 032-8200 032-8250 032-8400 032-8500 042-8000 042-8005 042-8010 042-8015 042-8020 042-8025 042-8050 042-8100 042-8200 042-8250 042-8400 042-8500 032-9010 032-9020 032-9050 032-9100 032-9200 032-9400 042-9010 042-9020 042-9050 042-9100 042-9200 042-9400
Price, EUR 75 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 102 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 109 93 93 93 93 93 93 113 113 113 113 113 113
Related Products
Uncoated Curved Windows
See page 1.7

See page 8.54
109
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
4.8
Laser Beamsplitters
Designed for average polarization: R=(Rs+Rp)/2 and T=(Ts+Tp)/2 Beamsplitter splits average polarized laser beam in two beams separated 90 from each other.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV FS, BK7 /10 at 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 at 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm-0.12 mm 0.25 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
4.9
Coating
Related Products
Uncoated Flat Windows
See page 1.9
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS Angle of Incidence Backside antireflection coated
Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter >2 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm >5 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm 453 degrees R<0.5%
Designed for average polarization: R=(Rs+Rp)/2 and T=(Ts+Tp)/2

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 355 355 355 355 355 266 266 266 266 266 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Size 12.7x3 mm 031-7120A 031-7130A 031-7150A 031-7170A 031-7180A 031-7220A 031-7230A 031-7250A 031-7270A 031-7280A 041-7120A 041-7130A 041-7150A 041-7170A 041-7180A 041-7220A 041-7230A 041-7250A 041-7270A 041-7280A 041-7320A 041-7330A 041-7350A 041-7370A 041-7380A 041-7920A 041-7930A 041-7950A 041-7970A 041-7980A 25.4x6 mm 032-7120A 032-7130A 032-7150A 032-7170A 032-7180A 032-7220A 032-7230A 032-7250A 032-7270A 032-7280A 042-7120A 042-7130A 042-7150A 042-7170A 042-7180A 042-7220A 042-7230A 042-7250A 042-7270A 042-7280A 042-7320A 042-7330A 042-7350A 042-7370A 042-7380A 042-7920A 042-7930A 042-7950A 042-7970A 042-7980A Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145
Nd:YAG Laser Optics Designed for S- polarization

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 355 355 355 355 355 266 266 266 266 266 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Size 12.7x3 mm 031-7120S 031-7130S 031-7150S 031-7170S 031-7180S 031-7220S 031-7230S 031-7250S 031-7270S 031-7280S 041-7120S 041-7130S 041-7150S 041-7170S 041-7180S 041-7220S 041-7230S 041-7250S 041-7270S 041-7280S 041-7320S 041-7330S 041-7350S 041-7370S 041-7380S 041-7920S 041-7930S 041-7950S 041-7970S 041-7980S 25.4x6 mm 032-7120S 032-7130S 032-7150S 032-7170S 032-7180S 032-7220S 032-7230S 032-7250S 032-7270S 032-7280S 042-7120S 042-7130S 042-7150S 042-7170S 042-7180S 042-7220S 042-7230S 042-7250S 042-7270S 042-7280S 042-7320S 042-7330S 042-7350S 042-7370S 042-7380S 042-7920S 042-7930S 042-7950S 042-7970S 042-7980S Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145
Designed for P- polarization

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 355 355 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Size 12.7x3 mm 031-7120P 031-7130P 031-7150P 031-7170P 031-7180P 031-7220P 031-7230P 031-7250P 031-7270P 031-7280P 041-7120P 041-7130P 041-7150P 041-7170P 041-7180P 041-7220P 041-7230P 041-7250P 041-7270P 041-7280P 041-7320P 041-7330P 041-7350P 041-7370P 041-7380P 041-7920P 041-7930P 041-7950P 041-7970P 041-7980P 25.4x6 mm 032-7120P 032-7130P 032-7150P 032-7170P 032-7180P 032-7220P 032-7230P 032-7250P 032-7270P 032-7280P 042-7120P 042-7130P 042-7150P 042-7170P 042-7180P 042-7220P 042-7230P 042-7250P 042-7270P 042-7280P 042-7320P 042-7330P 042-7350P 042-7370P 042-7380P 042-7920P 042-7930P 042-7950P 042-7970P 042-7980P Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 75 / 95 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 73 / 93 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 95 / 115 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 93 / 113 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 105 / 135 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 115 / 145 73 / 93
Housing accessories
Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0030-02
See page 8.54

See page 8.72
Flipping Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0155

See page 8.79
355 355 355 266 266 266 266 266
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
95 / 115
4.10
Laser Line Anti-Reflection Coated Precision Windows

Made of premium quality UV FS and BK7 AR coated at 266 nm, 355 nm, 532 nm, 1064 nm
Specifications
Material Surface quality Clear aperture Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Surface flatness Parallelism BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) 90% of the diameter +0.00-0.12 mm 0.2 mm /10@633 nm 30 arcsec or 3 arcsec
Precision windows are mostly used in laser systems. High quality AR multilayer coatings are applied on windows for fundamental Nd:YAG laser 1064 nm, frequency-doubled 532 nm, frequencytripled 355nm and frequency-quadrupled 266nm applications. Featuring high optical transmission with little distortion of the transmitted signal, precision windows are a good solution for applications that require protective windows.
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Damage Threshold: BK7 UV FS Angle of Incidence Coated Surface Flatness >5 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm >10 J/cm2, 8 nsec pulse, 1064 nm 0 degrees /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter
Reflection, %
1.5 1.0 0.5 0 940 980 1020 1060 1100 Wavelength, nm
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
0.6 0.4 0.2 0 330
Reflection, %
4.11
2.5 2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0 510 530 550 570 590 Wavelength, nm
R<0.25%@1064 nm AOI=0
1.0 0.8
R<0.25%@532 nm AOI=0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5 0 250
340
380
390
260
290
300
R<0.25%@355 nm, AOI=0
R<0.4%@266 nm, AOI=0
Parallelism 30 arcsec
Catalogue number BK7 222-0101 221-0101 222-0201 221-0201 222-0402 221-0402 222-0502 221-0502 UV FS 224-1101 223-1101 222-1101 221-1101 224-1201 223-1201 222-1201 221-1201 224-1402 223-1402 222-1402 221-1402 224-1502 223-1502 222-1502 221-1502 Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS / 98 / 92 56 / 87 56 / 87 / 124 / 118 66 / 113 66 / 113 / 178 / 172 86 / 167 86 / 167 / 216 / 210 99 / 205 99 / 205
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Parallelism 3 arcsec
Catalogue number BK7 222-0103 221-0103 222-0203 221-0203 222-0403 221-0403 222-0503 221-0503 UV FS 224-1103 223-1103 222-1103 221-1103 224-1203 223-1203 222-1203 221-1203 224-1403 223-1403 222-1403 221-1403 224-1503 223-1503 222-1503 221-1503 Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 266 355 532 1064 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 38.1 38.1 38.1 38.1 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 Price, EUR BK7 / UV FS / 107 / 101 70 / 96 70 / 96 / 139 / 133 93 / 128 93 / 128 / 195 121 / 184 121 / 184 / 241 / 235 148 / 230 148 / 230
Related Products
Uncoated Precision Windows
See page 1.10
AR Coated Lens Kits

The lens kits consist of four basic types of lenses with various focal lengths. Focal lengths of plano-concave lenses range from -50 to -300 mm, biconcave lenses from -25 to -200. Plano-convex and biconvex lenses cover a focal distance from 25 to 1000 mm. The lenses are 25.4 diameter. Kits are available with multilayer anti-reflection coatings for Nd:YAG laser fundamental and harmonics wavelength: 266 nm or 355 nm or 532 nm or 1064 nm. Lenses are placed in a hardwood box. Size of the box is 30740 cm (WHD). The lens kits are available from two kinds of substrate material: BK7 lens kit includes 40 lenses UV FS lens kit includes 36 lenses.
Code 140-0237 140-0239 141-0240 142-0240 140-1237 140-1239 141-1236 142-1236 143-1236 144-1236 Material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Coating AR@500-1100 nm AR@532+1064 nm AR@1064 nm AR@532 nm AR@500-1100 nm AR@532+1064 nm AR@1064 nm AR@532 nm AR@355 nm AR@266 nm Price, EUR 2100 2000 1900 1900 2950 2850 2750 2750 2870 2960
5 4
2.5 2.0
2.0
Reflection, %
1.5
3 2 1 0 500 600 700 800 900 Wavelength, nm 1000 1100 1200
1.5 1.0 0.5 0 940 980 1020 1060 1100 Wavelength, nm
1.0
0.5
0 510 530 550 570 590 Wavelength, nm
R<1.5%@500-1100 nm, AOI=0
R<0.25%@1064 nm AOI=0
1.0
R<0.25%@532 nm AOI=0
2.0
1.5
0.8
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
1.5
0.6 0.4 0.2
1.0
Reflection, %
1.0
0.5
0.5 0 250
0 500 510 520 530 540 550 1020 1040 1060 1080 1100 Wavelength, nm
0 330
340
380
390
260
290
300
R<0.5%@532 nm+1064 nm, AOI=0
R<0.25%@355 nm, AOI=0
R<0.4%@266 nm, AOI=0
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
/ 189
4.12
List of the lenses in BK7 series lens kits

Code 110-0205 110-0207 110-0209 110-0211 110-0215 110-0219 110-0223 110-0227 110-0231 110-0235 110-0239 110-0241 110-0243 110-0247 110-0251 110-0259 111-0204 111-0206 111-0208 111-0210 111-0214 111-0216 111-0218 111-0222 111-0226 111-0228 111-0234 111-0250 112-0209 112-0215 112-0219 112-0227 112-0231 112-0239 114-0204 114-0208 114-0212 114-0214 114-0220 114-0224 Configuration pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv Dia*, mm 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 F, mm 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 700 1000 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 150 200 250 500 1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -300 -25 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 Plano-convex lenses (16 pcs.)
List of the lenses in UV FS series lens kits

Code 110-1203 110-1205 110-1209 110-1211 110-1216 110-1217 110-1219 110-1221 110-1223 110-1227 110-1233 110-1245 111-1204 111-1207 111-1210 111-1214 111-1218 111-1222 111-1226 111-1230 111-1234 111-1238 111-1240 111-1260 112-1205 112-1209 112-1211 112-1217 112-1219 112-1223 114-1204 114-1208 114-1212 114-1216 114-1220 114-1224 Configuration pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv Dia*, mm 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 F, mm 30 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 25 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -300 -25 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 Plano-convex lenses (12 pcs.)
4.13
Biconvex lenses (12 pcs.)
Plano-concave lenses (6 pcs.)
Biconcave lenses (6 pcs.)
Related Products
Uncoated Lens Kits
See page 1.35
Beam Expanders
See page 7.3

See page 8.44

See page A.4
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Rs>99.5%, Tp>95% for 1064 nm Rs>99.5%, Tp>95% for 532 nm Rs>99.5%, Tp>93% for 355 nm Thin Film Polarizers separate the s- and p-polarization components. Thin Film Polarizers can be used as an alternative to Glan-Taylor laser polarizing prisms or cube polarizing beamsplitters because of the high damage threshold that reaches 6 J/cm2 at 1064 nm, 8 ns. Thin Film Polarizers are used in high energy lasers. They can be used as extracavity attenuators for Nd:YAG laser fundamental and its harmonics or intracavity Q-switch hold-off polarizers. The most efficient way to use thin film polarizers is at Brewster angle 56 with minimal 2 losses. Typical polarization ratio Tp/Ts is 200:1.
s-pol Brewster angle T
p-pol
Material Surface quality Surface flatness Parallelism Clear aperture Angle of incidence Diameter tolerance Thickness tolerance Laser damage threshold
BK7, UV FS 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm <30 arcsec >90% Brewster angle 2 +0.0 -0.12 mm 0.2 mm 6 J/cm2 10 nsec pulse at 1064 nm typical
We provide Thin Film Laser Polarizers with Tp>99% under customer request.
100
100
80 60 40
p-pol
80
p-pol
60 40 20 0
s-pol 20 0
s-pol
340
345
360
365
990
1010
1070
1090
Material BK7
Catalogue number 420-0124 420-0128 420-0254 420-0258 420-0504 420-0508 Diameter D, mm Metric English 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 Wavelength, nm 532 1064 532 1064 532 1064 Price, EUR 108 115 128 155 206 255
Material UV FS
Catalogue number 420-1122 420-1124 420-1128 420-1252 420-1254 420-1258 420-1502 420-1504 420-1508 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 Wavelength, Price, nm EUR 532 1064 142 170 Diameter D, mm Metric English 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Wavelength, nm 355 532 1064 355 532 1064 355 532 1064 Price, EUR 164 131 145 154 180 325 295 315 182
Please add letter M to the catalogue code for metric dimensions or E for English. Catalogue Rectangular dimensions number Length, mm Width, mm 420-0284 420-0288 28.6 28.6 14.3 14.3
Please add letter M to the catalogue code for metric dimensions or E for English. Catalogue Rectangular dimensions number Length, mm Width, mm 420-1282 420-1284 420-1288 28.6 28.6 28.6 14.3 14.3 14.3 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 Wavelength, Price, nm EUR 355 532 1064 255 215 225
Related Products
Thin Film Laser Polarizers of other wavelengths
See page 1.43
Glan and Wollaston Prisms

See page 1.46

See page 8.74
Variable Attenuator for Nd:YAG linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070

See page 4.18
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Specifications
4.14

Quartz Retardation Plates are made of material enabling linear birefringence. These plates are made of high quality optical grade crystalline quartz, featuring high damage threshold. Retardation plates rotate polarizations direction (/2) or convert linear into circular polarization or vice versa (/4). Quartz retardation plates are supplied mounted and AR coated.
Zero Order optically contacted Plates

Zero order plates are comprised of two different plates cut parallel to their optical axis. This construction make plates less dependent on temperature. The plates are polished to different thicknesses enabling to achieve required retardation difference. These component plates have orthogonal optic axis directions, so that the roles of the ordinary and extraordinary rays are interchanged in passing from one plate to another. The thickness of the plate determines the phase shift between the ordinary and extraordinary beams for any specific wavelength. Zero Order Plates for Nd:YAG fundamental and its harmonics Easily aligned Temperature insensitive Moderately insensitive to wavelength
Retardation /2 Catalogue number 460-4205 460-4230 460-4240 460-4245 Price, EUR 245 245 270 280 Retardation /4 Catalogue number 460-4405 460-4430 460-4440 460-4445 Price, EUR 245 245 270 280
4.15
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Wavelength, nm 1064 532 355 266
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter (other dimensions on request) 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 1.52.5 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.4% > 0.5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical
Related Products
Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates of other wavelengths
See page 1.48

See page 1.49

Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Wavefront distortion Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0 / -0.12 mm /10 @ 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% >10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical
For high power laser application
Laser damage threshold
Wavelength, nm 1064 532 355 266
AR coating range, nm 10351095 515545 345365 257275
Retardation /2 Catalogue number 464-4205 464-4230 464-4240 464-4245 Price, EUR 310 310 335 345
Retardation /4 Catalogue number 464-4405 464-4430 464-4440 464-4445 Price, EUR 310 310 335 345
Related Products
Polarizer Holder 840-0180
See page 8.82
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Low Order Plates

Thickness 0.150.35 mm Thinner than multiple order Low order plates are less temperature sensitive and temperature dependent than multiple order plates. These plates are suitable for high and low power applications.
Wavelength, nm 1064 532 355 266 Retardation /2 Catalogue number 461-4205 461-4230 461-4240 461-4245 Price, EUR 160 160 192 196 Retardation /4 Catalogue number 461-4405 461-4430 461-4440 461-4445 Price, EUR 160 160 192 196
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Wavefront distortion Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter (others dimensions on request) 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 0.150.35 mm /10 @ 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) R < 0.4% 10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical < 10 arcsec
Related Products
Low Order Plates of other wavelengths
See page 1.51

See page 8.84
Multiple Order Plates

Polished to 1-1.5 mm thickness Made from a single crystalline plate Multiple order plates are more dependent on the temperature changes than zero order plates. A change of 1% from the designed wavelength of multiple order plate can result in difficulties in retardation. Contrary, with zero order plates 1% and even 2% change from the designed wavelength can cause only small retardation change.
45
Specifications
Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Nominal thickness of waveplate Normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm for 20 mm diameter (others dimensions on request) 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 0.81.5 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.4% 10 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical Retardation /2 Catalogue number 462-4205 462-4230 462-4240 462-4245 Price, EUR 138 138 143 153 Retardation /4 Catalogue number 462-4405 462-4430 462-4440 462-4445 Price, EUR 138 138 143 153
Related Products
Multiple Order Plates of other wavelengths
See page 1.51
Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold
Adjustable Polarizer Holder of Side Drive 840-0195

See page 8.87
Wavelength, nm 1064 532 355 266
Material
Single crystal quartz
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
4.16
Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates

Operate at both first and second Nd:YAG laser harmonics Retardation tolerance < /300
Specifications
Material Optical axis Wavefront distortion Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Nominal thickness of waveplate Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder /10 @ 633 nm 17 mm of 20 mm 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0 -0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 0.2-1.2 mm 5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical Catalogue number 463-4120 463-4140 463-4210 463-4220 463-4240 463-4410 463-4420 463-4440 Price, EUR 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215
4.17
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Retardation and Wavelength @ 1064 nm + /2 @ 532 nm @ 1064 nm + /4 @ 532 nm /2 @ 1064 nm + @ 532 nm /2 @1064 nm + /2 @ 532 nm /2 @1064 nm + /4 @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064 nm + @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064 nm + /2 @ 532 nm /4 @ 1064 nm + /4 @ 532 nm

Made of crystalline quartz Intended to rotate a beam polarization plane strictly to an appropriate angle using the circular birefringent effect Compared to a waveplate, a rotator has an intrinsic advantage, being independent of rotation around its own optical axis. It needs no adjustment, only to be installed normal to incident radiation. A polarization plane rotator is normally used for the specific wavelength. It is only slightly dependent on ambient temperature.
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Single crystal quartz Normal to faces S1, S2 of rotator 17 mm for 20 mm diameter D = 25.4 mm (or 25.0 mm) +0.0 mm -0.12 mm T = 620 mm (depending on wavelength and rotation angle) 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 < 10 arcsec R < 0.2% both sides 5 J/cm2, 10 nsec pulse, 1064 nm typical
S1 S2
Clear aperture
Related Products
Polarization plane rotators of other wavelengths
See page 1.53
Mount Thickness Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold

See page 8.54
Wavelength, nm 266 266 355 355 532 532 1064 1064
Rotation angle of polarization plane, deg 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90
Price, EUR 245 245 195 195 195 195 215 215

See page 8.86
470-4359 470-4534 470-4539 470-4644 470-4649
Please contact us for other size or wavelengths requirements.
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
Variable Attenuator for Nd:YAG Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical Adapter and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0197. Two thin film brewster type polarizers, which reflect s-polarized light while transmitting p-polarized light, are housed into adapter. A quartz multiple order half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. PS-pol Thin Film Polarizer Linearly polarized beam Thin Film Polarizer
attenuation range ~0.2599.0%
polarization could be selected for maximum
transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust angle of incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizers by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
80
Transmission, %
60
40
42.1 P-pol
20
Half Waveplate
20
40 60 Waveplate angle, deg
80
100
Specifications
Note: Movable base 820-0090, Rod Holder 820-0050-02 and standard rod should be ordered seperately.
Aperture diameter Damage threshold Polarization Contrast (after 1st polarizer) Polarization Contrast (after 2nd polarizer)
17 mm 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical >1:200 >1:500
Divides laser beam into two parallel beams of manually adjustable intensity ratio Large dynamic range Negligible beam deviation High Optical damage threshold Weight 0.35 kg
Catalogue number 990-0070-266 990-0070-355 990-0070-532 990-0070-1064
Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064
Price, EUR 850 750 650 650
Neutral Density Filters

See page 1.13
Thin Film Laser Polarizers for Nd:YAG applications

See page 4.14
Motorized Variable Attenuator for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070M

See page 7.14
Beam dumps 990-0800, 990-0820

See page 7.34
Related Products
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
4.18
Variable Attenuator for Nd:YAG Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0071

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical adapter for polarizer at 56 840-0117A or 840-0118A and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0197. Thin Film Brewster type polarizer, which reflect s-polarized light at 56 while transmitting p-polarized light, is housed into adapter for polarizer at 56. Quartz multiple order half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizer by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
Attenuation range 5%-99.5%
Transmission, %
68
4.19
Nd:YAG Laser Optics

Note: Solid Base Height Extender 820-0210 and Standard Rod 820-0020-20 should be ordered separately
80
60
sp ol.
ppol. Attenuation range 0.5%-95%
Linear polarized light
40
Light direction
Divides laser beam into separated by 68 angle two beams of manually adjustable intensity ratio Large dynamic range Negligible transmitted beam deviation High Optical damage threshold Weight 0.25 kg
Specifications
Aperture diameter Damage threshold Polarization Contrast 10 mm 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical >1:200
Multiple order half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197.
56
20
20
Half waveplate
80
100
Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064
Price, EUR 510 475 445 445
Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Laser and Nonlinear Nonlinear Crystals Crystals
Related Products
See page 7.16
Multiple Order Plates for Nd:YAG applications

See page 4.16
Thin Film Laser Polarizers for Nd:YAG applications

See page 4.14
Nd:YAG Laser & Nonlinear Crystals
Nd:YAG Laser Crystals

Nd:YAG Crystals (Standard Rods)
SPECIFICATIONS OF STANDARD Nd:YAG LASER RODS
Nd Doping Level Orientation Surface Quality Surface Flatness Parallelism Perpendicularity Diameter Tolerance Length Tolerance Clear Aperture Chamfers 0.8% or 1.1% <111> crystalline direction 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 at 633 nm < 10 arcsec < 5 arcmin for plano/plano ends +0/-0.05 mm +1/-0.5 mm > 90 % of full aperture 0.1 mm at 45 deg Both sides coated AR @ 1064 nm, R < 0.2%, AOI = 0 deg All dia 6.35, 8, 10, 12 mm rods with barrel grooving
EKSMA OPTICS offers standard specifications high optical quality Nd:YAG rods with high damage threshold AR @ 1064 nm coatings.
Coating Barrel Grooving
Code E-Y-3-0.8-A/A E-Y-3-1.1-A/A E-Y-4-0.8-A/A E-Y-4-1.1-A/A E-Y-6.35-1.1-A/A E-Y-8-1.1-A/A E-Y-10-1.1-A/A E-Y-12-0.8-A/A E-Y-12-1.1-A/A
Description Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Nd:YAG
Diameter, mm 3 3 4 4 6.35 8 10 12 12
Length, mm 65 65 65 65 85* 85* 85* 100* 100*
Doping, % 0.8 1.1 0.8 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.8 1.1
Wedge of the ends, deg 0/0 0/0 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel 3/3 parallel
Coating AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm AR/AR @ 1064 nm
Application Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm Generation @ 1064 nm
Price, EUR 265 410 410 875 1065 1695 2280 2280 325
* rods with barrel grooving, except 10 mm at both ends of the rod without grooving.
Related Products
Laser Safety Eyewear
See page 1.16
Visualizator 990-0840
See page 1.16
Pockels Cells for Q-Switching

See page 3.4
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
4.20
Nonlinear Crystals for SHG@1064 nm LBO crystals

LBO crystals feature the highest damage threshold, small walk-off and have high efficiency. These crystals are the best choice for harmonics generation of relatively high power and high repetition rate Q-switched or mode-locked lasers.
Catalogue number LBO-401 LBO-402 LBO-403 LBO-404 LBO-405 Size, mm 3x3x10 3x3x15 5x5x15 3x3x15 3x3x20 Orientation Theta, deg 90 90 90 90 90 Phi, deg 11.6 11.6 11.6 0 0 Type Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm Application SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm NCPM SHG@1064 nm, T=149 C NCPM SHG@1064 nm, T=149 C Price, EUR 245 325 765 325 405
4.21
Nd:YAG Laser Optics Nd:YAG Nd:YAG Laser and Nonlinear Nonlinear Crystals Crystals
KTP crystals
KTP crystals feature the highest efficiency and are suited for low average power or CW lasers applications. These crystals are temperature change insensitive and operate with sharply focused or highly divergent laser beams.
Catalogue number KTP-401 KTP-402 KTP-403 KTP-404 Orientation Theta, deg 90 90 90 90 Phi, deg 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 Price, EUR 76 109 118 529
Size, mm 3x3x5 3x3x10 4x4x6 7x7x9
Type Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2
Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532 nm
Application SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm
DKDP crystals
Large aperture DKDP crystals are used for high energy Q-switched lasers with large beam diameters.
Catalogue number DKDP-401 DKDP-402 DKDP-404 DKDP-405 Size, mm 15x15x13 15x15x13 12x12x20 15x15x20 Orientation Theta, deg 36.5 53.5 53,5 53,5 Phi, deg 45 0 0 0 Type Type 1 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Coating AR/AR @ 1064/1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064/1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064/1064+532 nm AR/AR @ 1064/1064+532 nm Application SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm SHG@1064 nm Price, EUR 485 485 475 579
Related Products
Ovens with thermocontrollers and heaters for different crystal sizes
See pages 2.302.34
Nd:YAG Laser & Nonlinear Crystals
Nonlinear Crystals for THG@1064 nm LBO crystals

Catalogue number LBO-406 LBO-407 LBO-408 Size, mm 3x3x10 3x3x15 5x5x15 Orientation Theta, deg 42.2 42.2 42.2 Phi, deg 90 90 90 Type Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm Application THG@1064 nm THG@1064 nm THG@1064 nm Price, EUR 245 325 765
Catalogue number DKDP-403 DKDP-406
Size, mm 12x12x20 15x15x20
Orientation Theta, deg 59.3 59.3 Phi, deg 0 0
Type Type 2 Type 2
Coating AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm AR/AR @ 1064+532/355 nm
Application THG@1064 nm THG@1064 nm
Price, EUR 475 579
Nonlinear Crystals for 4HG@1064 nm BBO crystals

Catalogue number BBO-700 Size, mm 7x7x6 Orientation Theta, deg 47.6 Phi, deg 90 Type Type 1 Coating P/P @ 532/266 nm Application SHG@532 nm Price, EUR 807
KDP crystals
Catalogue number KDP-401 KDP-402 Size, mm 12x12x5 15x15x7 Orientation Theta, deg 76.5 76.5 Phi, deg 45 45 Type Type 1 Type 1 Coating AR/AR @ 532/266 nm AR/AR @ 532/266 nm Application SHG@532 nm SHG@532 nm Price, EUR 408 480
Housing Accessories
See page 2.27

See page 2.29
Nd:YAG Laser Optics
DKDP crystals
4.22
Components Selection Guide
5.1
FemtoLine Laser Optics FemtoLine Laser and Nonlinear Crystals
See page
Femtoline Optics
Laser Mirrors Dual Line Laser Mirrors Broadband Ultrafast Ti:Sapphire Laser Mirrors Laser Harmonic Separators Laser Output Couplers Laser Rear Mirrors Laser Beamsplitters AR Coated Lens Kits Thin Film Laser Polarizers Zero Order Optically Contacted Plates Zero Order-Air Spaced Plates Zero Order Dual Wavelength Plates Low Oder Plates Multiple Order Dual Wavelength Plates Polarization Plane Rotators Group Velocity Delay (GVD) Compensation Plates Variable Attenuator for Femtosecond Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070, -0071
5.35.21
5.3 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.11 5.13 5.14 5.16 5.16 5.17 5.17 5.18 5.18 5.19 5.20
See page A.4
See page
Femtoline Crystals
Ti:Sapphire Laser Line and Harmonics Thin BBO Crystals for SHG and THG of Ti:Sapphire Laser Wavelength Femtokits for Third Harmonic Generation of Femtosecond Ti:Sapphire Laser Thin AgGaS2 Crystals for DFG 2.5-1.3 m Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW Crystals Laser Lines and Harmonics BBO and LBO Crystals for SHG of Yb:KGW/KYW Laser Frequency Conversion
5.225.30
5.22 5.23 5.26 5.28 5.29 5.30
Mounted Femtokit FK Series

see page 5.26
FemtoLine Laser and Nonlinear Crystals
FemtoLine Laser Optics
5.2

Laser Mirrors
Laser mirrors for femtosecond applications are designed to have a broad operating wavelength range and linear phase versus frequency characteristics (low reflectance group delay dispersion (GDD)). The coating is a single layer dielectric and has no phase shift over the operating wavelength region. High reflectivity mirrors always have higher reflection, broader operating region and lower pulse distortion for spolarization than for p-polarization for the same dielectric coating. If possible use the mirrors with s-polarized beam. Our standard mirrors are suitable for fundamental Ti:Sapphire and Yb:KGW or KYW lasers and their doubled, tripled or quadrupled frequencies.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Wedge Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 3 min 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Coating Angle of Incidence Designed for average polarization Laser Damage Threshold Coated Surface Flatness Electron beam multilayer dielectric or Ion beam sputtering Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter Hard dielectric High Reflection R>99.5% 0 or 453 R=(Rs+Rp)/2 >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture

Size: 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm 380-420 500-530
100 80 Polarization
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 031-0400-i0 031-0515-i0 031-0800-i0 031-1030-i0 031-0400 031-0515 031-0800 031-1030
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 57 / 57 56 / 56 61 / 61 61 / 61
Reflectance GDD, fs2
5.3
760-840
s p
1000-1060
Reflection, %
60 40 20 0 360 380 400 420 Wavelength, nm 440 460
Size: 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 380-420 500-530 760-840 1000-1060 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 032-0400-i0 032-0515-i0 032-0800-i0 032-1030-i0 032-0400 032-0515 032-0800 032-1030 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 89 / 89 74 / 74 85 / 85 75 / 75
HR>99,5%@380-420 nm, AOI=45
Size: 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm
s p
80 40 0 -40 -80 360 380
Polarization
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 133 / 133 110 / 110 133 / 133 110 / 110
380-420 500-530 760-840 1000-1060
Size: 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm
400 420 Wavelength, nm 440
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 199 / 199 185 / 185 199 / 199 185 / 185
380-420 500-530 760-840 1000-1060
HRsp@380-420 GDD, AOI=45

Size: 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm 257-275
100 80 Polarization
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.0 / 99.0 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 041-0266-i0 041-0343-i0 041-0400-i0 041-0515-i0 041-0800-i0 041-1030-i0 041-0266 041-0343 041-0400 041-0515 041-0800 041-1030
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 81 / 81 77 / 77 75 / 75 74 / 74 75 / 75 75 / 75
333-353 380-420
s p
500-530 760-840 1000-1060
Reflection, %
60 40 20 0 460 480 500 520 540 Wavelength, nm 560 580 600
Size: 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 257-275 333-353 380-420 500-530 760-840
s p
99.0 / 99.0 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.9 / 99.8 99.8 / 99.5
042-0266-i0 042-0343-i0 042-0400-i0 042-0515-i0 042-0800-i0 042-0800HHR-i0 042-1030-i0
042-0266 042-0343 042-0400 042-0515 042-0800 042-0800HHR 042-1030

new
111 / 111 107 / 107 101 / 101 91 / 91 97 / 97 145 / 145 92 / 92
HR>99.5%@500-530 nm, AOI=45
80
Polarization
760-840 1000-1060
40 0
Size: 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm
-40 -80 460 480 500 520 540 Wavelength, nm 560 580
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.0 / 99.0 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 045-0266-i0 045-0343-i0 045-0400-i0 045-0515-i0 045-0800-i0 045-1030-i0 045-0266 045-0343 045-0400 045-0515 045-0800 045-1030
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 207 / 207 187 / 187 181 / 181 169 / 169 181 / 181 169 / 169
257-275 333-353 380-420 500-530 760-840 1000-1060
Size: 76.2 12.7 mm

Wavelength, nm 257-275 333-353 380-420 500-530 760-840 1000-1060 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.0 / 99.0 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 047-0266-i0 047-0343-i0 047-0400-i0 047-0515-i0 047-0800-i0 047-1030-i0 047-0266 047-0343 047-0400 047-0515 047-0800 047-1030 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 290 / 290 281 / 281 272 / 272 258 / 258 272 / 272 258 / 258
Recommended for high power laser applications operating in UV region.
100 80 Polarization
100 80 Polarization
60 40 20 0 700 740 780 820 Wavelength, nm 860 900
60 40 20 0 920 960 1000 1040 1080 Wavelength, nm 1120 1160 1200
HR>99.5% @ 760-840 nm, AOI=45
HR>99.5% @ 1000-1060 nm, AOI=45

s p s p
Related Products
80 40 0 -40 -80 750
Polarization
80
Polarization
Adapter for Mirror at 45 840-0115

See page 8.72
40 0 -40 -80
800 Wavelength, nm
850
900
1000 Wavelength, nm
1100
HRsp@1000-1060 GDD, AOI=45
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
s p
s p
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45
5.4
Dual line Laser Mirrors

Specifications
Coating Angle of Incidence Designed for average polarization Laser Damage Threshold Hard dielectric High Reflection R>99.5% 0 or 453 R=(Rs+Rp)/2 >50 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Wedge Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glas /10 at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 3 min 0.3 mm at 45 typical

Size: 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm
3.0 2.5 2.0
T, %
T, %
5.5
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 051-4080-i0 051-5103-i0 051-4080 051-5103
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 85 / 85 85 / 85
390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060
Size: 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm 390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060 R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 052-4080-i0 052-5103-i0 052-4080 052-5103 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 103 / 103 103 / 103
1.5 1.0 0.5 0 480 500 520 1000 540 Wavelength, nm 1050 1100
Size: 50.8 8 mm
HR>99.5% @ 500-530 nm+1000-1060 nm, AOI = 45
Size: 76.2 12.7 mm


Size: 12.7 3 mm
Wavelength, nm R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5 Catalogue number AOI=0 AOI=45 061-4080-i0 061-5103-i0 061-4080 061-5103 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 110 / 110 110 / 110
Recommended for high power laser applications operating in UV region.
390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060
Size: 25.4 6 mm
Wavelength, nm
4
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 128 / 128 128 / 128
390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060
Size: 50.8 8 mm
Wavelength, nm 390-410+780-820 500-530+1000-1060
360 400 440 780 800 Wavelength, nm 820 840
R, % (s+p)/2 AOI=0 / AOI=45 99.8 / 99.5 99.8 / 99.5
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 214 / 214 214 / 214
1 0
Size: 76.2 12.7 mm

HR>99% @ 400 nm + 800 nm, AOI = 45
Related Products
Laser Line and Dual Laser Line Mirrors of other wavelengths
See page 1.17
Prisms
See page 1.37
Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0056

See page 8.62
BROADBAND ULTRAFAST Ti:Sapphire LASER MIRRORS

High reflectivity and low group velocity dispersion in broad region centered at 800 nm
Specifications
Coating Angle of Incidence Designed for average polarization Laser Damage Threshold Hard Dielectric High Reflection or Ion Beam Sputtering 0 or 453 R=(Rs+Rp)/2 >50 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Wedge Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glas 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 3 min 0.3 mm at 45 typical /10 at 633 nm

Catalogue number AOI = 0 071-7288-i0 072-7288-i0 074-7288-i0 075-7288-i0 077-7288-i0 AOI = 45 071-7288 072-7288 074-7288 075-7288 077-7288 Diameter, mm 12.7 25.4 38.1 50.8 76.2 Thickness T, mm 3.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 12.7 Wavelength, nm 720-880 720-880 720-880 720-880 720-880 R, % (s+p)/2 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 86 / 86 104 / 104 127 / 127 147 / 147 215 / 215

Catalogue number AOI = 0 081-7288-i0 082-7288-i0
new
AOI = 45 081-7288 082-7288 084-7288 085-7288 087-7288
Diameter, Thickness T, Wavelength, mm mm nm 12.7 25.4 25.4 38.1 50.8 76.2 3.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 12.7 720-880 720-880 720-880 720-880 720-880 720-880
R, % (s+p)/2 99.0 99.0 99.9 / 99.8 99.0 99.0 99.0
Price, EUR AOI=0 / AOI=45 111 / 111 129 / 129 185 / 185 170 / 170 210 / 210 317 / 317
082-7288HHR-i0 082-7288HHR 084-7288-i0 085-7288-i0 087-7288-i0
Related Products
Metallic Coated Mirrors
See page 1.19
100 80 100 Polarization s p
Reflection GDD, fs2
Kinematic Mirror / Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0056

See page 8.62
Reflectance, %
Polarization 60 40 20 0 700 750
s p average
50
-50
900
950
-100 700
750
800 Wavelength, nm
850
900
HR>99% @720-880nm, AOI=45
5.6
LASER HARMONIC SEPARATORS

Offered on 0.5 or 1 inch UV FS substrates with surface flatness /10 Harmonic separators are dichroic beamsplitters that reflect one wavelength and transmit others. Reflectance is better than 99.5% for the wavelength of interest and transmittance is at least 90% for the rejected wavelengths. The rear surface of harmonic separators is antireflection coated. If possible use shorter wavelength for reflection and longer wavelengths for transmission in order to have higher reflection/ transmission coefficients.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm < 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
5.7
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Coated Surface Flatness Back side antireflection coated Laser Damage Threshold Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter /10 at 633 nm over clear aperture AOI 45, R<0.5% AOI 0, R<0.25% >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Reflected wavelength, Transmitted nm, R > 99.5% wavelength, nm 257-275 257-275 257-275 257-275 257-275 257-275 390-410 390-410 800 800 333-353 333-353 333-353 333-353 333-353 333-353 500-530 500-530 1030 1030 780-820 780-820 390-410 390-410 400+800 400+800 780-820 780-820 400 400 1000-1060 1000-1060 500-530 500-530 515+1030 515+1030 1000-1060 1000-1060 515 515
Transmission, % >95 >95 >95 >95 >90 >90 >95 >95 >93 >93 >95 >95 >95 >95 >90 >90 >95 >95 >93 >93
AOI 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45 0 45
Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Catalogue number 12.7x3 mm 041-2800 041-2805 041-2400 041-2405 041-2480 041-2485 041-4800 041-4805 041-0840 041-0845 041-3130 041-3135 041-3450 041-3455 041-3530 041-3535 041-5130 041-5135 041-6510 041-6515 25.4x3 mm 042-2800 042-2805 042-2400 042-2405 042-2480 042-2485 042-4800 042-4805 042-0840 042-0845 042-3130 042-3135 042-3450 042-3455 042-3530 042-3535 042-5130 042-5135 042-6510 042-6515 50.8x8 mm 045-2800 045-2805 045-2400 045-2405 045-2480 045-2485 045-4800 045-4805 045-0840 045-0845 045-3130 045-3135 045-3450 045-3455 045-3530 045-3535 045-5130 045-5135 045-6510 045-6515
Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 145 / 175 / 265 145 / 175 / 265 145 / 175 / 265 145 / 175 / 265 145 / 175 / 275 145 / 175 / 275 145 / 175 / 265 145 / 175 / 265 140 / 170 / 255 140 / 170 / 255 135 / 165 / 245 135 / 165 / 245 135 / 165 / 245 135 / 165 / 245 155 / 185 / 275 155 / 185 / 275 135 / 165 / 245 135 / 165 / 245 140 / 170 / 255 140 / 170 / 255
Related Products
Pellin-Broca Prisms
See page 1.39

See page 8.72

See page 8.54
LASER OUTPUT COUPLERS

Low reflectance Group Delay Dispersion An output coupler is a partially reflecting dielectric mirror used in a laser cavity. It transmits a part of the circulating intracavity power for generating a useful output from the laser. A low transmission output coupler leads to low laser threshold and possibly to poor laser efficiency if the losses due to output coupling do not dominate other parasitic losses in the laser cavity. The output coupler transmission is often chosen to maximize the output power, although its optimum value may be lower or higher if there are other design purposes (minimizing intracavity intensities or suppressing Q-switching instabilities in a passively mode-locked laser). The standard substrates are parallel within 30 arcsec. If you need wedged substrates, please, choose from chapter Wedge Prisms (page 1.37).
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 typical at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm -0.12 mm 0.25 mm 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Angle of Incidence Parallelism Back side antireflection coated Laser Damage Threshold Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter 0-8 30 arcsec R < 0.25% >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Wavelength, nm 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
Reflection, % 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5 503 603 653 703 753 803 853 902 952 971 981 99.00.5
Transmission, % 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5 503 403 353 303 253 203 153 102 52 31 21 1.00.5
Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
Catalogue number 12.7 3 mm 041-0150 041-0160 041-0165 041-0170 041-0175 041-0180 041-0185 041-0190 041-0195 041-0197 041-0198 041-0199 041-1150 041-1160 041-1165 041-1170 041-1175 041-1180 041-1185 041-1190 041-1195 041-1197 041-1198 041-1199 25.4 6 mm 042-0150 042-0160 042-0165 042-0170 042-0175 042-0180 042-0185 042-0190 042-0195 042-0197 042-0198 042-0199 042-1150 042-1160 042-1165 042-1170 042-1175 042-1180 042-1185 042-1190 042-1195 042-1197 042-1198 042-1199 50.8 8 mm 045-0150 045-0160 045-0165 045-0170 045-0175 045-0180 045-0185 045-0190 045-0195 045-0197 045-0198 045-0199 045-1150 045-1160 045-1165 045-1170 045-1175 045-1180 045-1185 045-1190 045-1195 045-1197 045-1198 045-1199
Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 112 / 132 / 220 112 / 132 / 220 119 / 139 / 245 119 / 139 / 245 126 / 146 / 255 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 112 / 132 / 220 112 / 132 / 220 119 / 139 / 245 119 / 139 / 245 126 / 146 / 255 105 / 125 / 205
Related Products
Uncoated Elliptical Mirrors
See page 1.8

See page 8.54
5.8
Laser REAR Mirrors

High reflectivity (R>99.8%) dielectric coatings with high laser damage threshold are applied on laser rear mirrors. UVFS substrates are recommended for high power laser applications.
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Chamfer UV grade Fused Silica or BK7 glass /10 at 633 nm 2010 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Commercial polish +0.00 mm-0.12 mm 0.25 0.3 mm at 45 typical
Back side can be AR coated to avoid back reflection from second surface on request.
Wavelength, nm 103030 103030 103030 103030
4
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Clear Aperture Angle of Incidence Coating Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter 0-8 (normal) Hard dielectric High Reflection R>99.8%
Laser Damage Threshold >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Substrate type Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex
Radius, mm -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000
Catalogue number Substrate material 25.46 mm 50.810 mm BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS 012-8000 012-8005 012-8010 012-8015 012-8020 012-8025 012-8050 012-8100 012-8200 012-8250 012-8400 012-8500 022-8000 022-8005 022-8010 022-8015 022-8020 022-8025 022-8050 022-8100 022-8200 022-8250 022-8400 022-8500 012-9010 012-9020 012-9050 012-9100 012-9200 012-9400 022-9010 022-9020 022-9050 022-9100 022-9200 022-9400 015-8000 * 015-8005 015-8010 015-8015 015-8020 015-8025 015-8050 015-8100 015-8200 015-8250 015-8400 015-8500 025-8000 * 025-8005 025-8010 025-8015 025-8020 025-8025 025-8050 025-8100 025-8200 025-8250 025-8400 025-8500 015-9010 015-9020 015-9050 015-9100 015-9200 015-9400 025-9010 025-9020 025-9050 025-9100 025-9200 025-9400
Price, EUR 25.4 / 50.8 75 / 110 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 102 / 169 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219
103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030

920 960 1000 1040 Wavelength, nm 1080 1120
T, %
1 0
103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030
HR>99.8% @ 103030 nm, AOI=0
5.9
103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030 103030
* Thickness of plano-plano rear mirrors of 50.8 is 8 mm.

Wavelength, nm 80020 80020 80020
4
Substrate type Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-plano Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-concave Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex Plano-convex
Radius, mm -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 -50 -100 -150 -200 -250 -500 -1000 -2000 -2500 -4000 -5000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000 +100 +200 +500 +1000 +2000 +4000
Catalogue number Substrate material 25.46 mm 50.810 mm BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS 062-8000 062-8005 062-8010 062-8015 062-8020 062-8025 062-8050 062-8100 062-8200 062-8250 062-8400 062-8500 082-8000 082-8005 082-8010 082-8015 082-8020 082-8025 082-8050 082-8100 082-8200 082-8250 082-8400 082-8500 062-9010 062-9020 062-9050 062-9100 062-9200 062-9400 082-9010 082-9020 082-9050 082-9100 082-9200 082-9400 065-8000 * 065-8005 065-8010 065-8015 065-8020 065-8025 065-8050 065-8100 065-8200 065-8250 065-8400 065-8500 085-8000 * 085-8005 085-8010 085-8015 085-8020 085-8025 085-8050 085-8100 085-8200 085-8250 085-8400 085-8500 065-9010 065-9020 065-9050 065-9100 065-9200 065-9400 085-9010 085-9020 085-9050 085-9100 085-9200 085-9400
Price, EUR 25.4 / 50.8 75 / 110 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 99 / 145 95 / 169 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 119 / 209 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 103 / 155 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219 123 / 219
80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020

700 740 780 820 Wavelength, nm 860 900
T, %
1 0
80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020 80020
HR>99.8% @ 80020 nm, AOI=0
* Thickness of plano-plano rear mirrors of 50.8 is 8 mm.
Related Products
See page 1.7

See page 8.54

See page 8.54
Uncoated Curved Mirrors
5.10
Laser Beamsplitters
Beamsplitter splits average polarized laser beam in two beams separated 90 from each other. The standard substrate thickness is 3mm. If you need thinner substrate, please, choose from chapter Precision Thin Round Windows (page 1.10).
Substrate
Material S1 Surface Flatness S1 Surface Quality S2 Surface Flatness S2 Surface Quality Diameter Tolerance Thickness Tolerance Parallelism Chamfer UV FS /10 at 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 at 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) +0.00 mm-0.12 mm 0.25 30 arcsec 0.3 mm at 45 typical Clear Aperture Angle of Incidence Back side antireflection coated Laser Damage Threshold
Coating
Technology Adhesion and Durability Electron beam multilayer dielectric Per MIL-C-675A. Insoluble in lab solvents Exceeds central 85% of diameter 453 R<0.5% >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Please contact us for wedged beamsplitters or choose wedged substrates from Wedge Prisms (page 1.37)
5.11
Designed for average polarization: R=(Rs+Rp)/2 and T=(Ts+Tp)/2

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 515 515 515 515 515 343 343 343 343 343 800 800 800 800 800 400 400 400 400 400 266 266 266 266 266 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Catalogue number 12.7 3 mm 031-7420A 031-7430A 031-7450A 031-7470A 031-7480A 031-7520A 031-7530A 031-7550A 031-7570A 031-7580A 031-7620A 031-7630A 031-7650A 031-7670A 031-7680A 041-7720A 041-7730A 041-7750A 041-7770A 041-7780A 041-7820A 041-7830A 041-7850A 041-7870A 041-7880A 041-7920A 041-7930A 041-7950A 041-7970A 041-7980A 25.4 3 mm 032-7420A 032-7430A 032-7450A 032-7470A 032-7480A 032-7520A 032-7530A 032-7550A 032-7570A 032-7580A 032-7620A 032-7630A 032-7650A 032-7670A 032-7680A 042-7720A 042-7730A 042-7750A 042-7770A 042-7780A 042-7820A 042-7830A 042-7850A 042-7870A 042-7880A 042-7920A 042-7930A 042-7950A 042-7970A 042-7980A 50.8 8 mm 035-7420A 035-7430A 035-7450A 035-7470A 035-7480A 035-7520A 035-7530A 035-7550A 035-7570A 035-7580A 035-7620A 035-7630A 035-7650A 035-7670A 035-7680A 045-7720A 045-7730A 045-7750A 045-7770A 045-7780A 045-7820A 045-7830A 045-7850A 045-7870A 045-7880A 045-7920A 045-7930A 045-7950A 045-7970A 045-7980A Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265
Designed for S- polarization

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 515 515 515 515 515 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Catalogue number 12.7 3 mm 031-7420S 031-7430S 031-7450S 031-7470S 031-7480S 031-7520S 031-7530S 031-7550S 031-7570S 031-7580S 25.4 3 mm 032-7420S 032-7430S 032-7450S 032-7470S 032-7480S 032-7520S 032-7530S 032-7550S 032-7570S 032-7580S 50.8 8 mm 035-7420S 035-7430S 035-7450S 035-7470S 035-7480S 035-7520S 035-7530S 035-7550S 035-7570S 035-7580S Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 343 343 343 343 343 800 800 800 800 800 400 400 400 400 400 266 266 266 266 266 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Catalogue number 12.7 3 mm 031-7620S 031-7630S 031-7650S 031-7670S 031-7680S 041-7720S 041-7730S 041-7750S 041-7770S 041-7780S 041-7820S 041-7830S 041-7850S 041-7870S 041-7880S 041-7920S 041-7930S 041-7950S 041-7970S 041-7980S 25.4 3 mm 032-7620S 032-7630S 032-7650S 032-7670S 032-7680S 042-7720S 042-7730S 042-7750S 042-7770S 042-7780S 042-7820S 042-7830S 042-7850S 042-7870S 042-7880S 042-7920S 042-7930S 042-7950S 042-7970S 042-7980S 50.8 8 mm 035-7620S 035-7630S 035-7650S 035-7670S 035-7680S 045-7720S 045-7730S 045-7750S 045-7770S 045-7780S 045-7820S 045-7830S 045-7850S 045-7870S 045-7880S 045-7920S 045-7930S 045-7950S 045-7970S 045-7980S Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265
Designed for P- polarization

Wavelength, Reflection, Transmission, nm % % 1030 1030 1030 1030 1030 515 515 515 515 515 343 343 343 343 343 800 800 800 800 800 400 400 400 400 400 266 266 266 266 266 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 203 303 503 703 803 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 803 703 503 303 203 Substrate material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS Catalogue number 12.7 3 mm 031-7420P 031-7430P 031-7450P 031-7470P 031-7480P 031-7520P 031-7530P 031-7550P 031-7570P 031-7580P 031-7620P 031-7630P 031-7650P 031-7670P 031-7680P 041-7720P 041-7730P 041-7750P 041-7770P 041-7780P 041-7820P 041-7830P 041-7850P 041-7870P 041-7880P 041-7920P 041-7930P 041-7950P 041-7970P 041-7980P 25.4 3 mm 032-7420P 032-7430P 032-7450P 032-7470P 032-7480P 032-7520P 032-7530P 032-7550P 032-7570P 032-7580P 032-7620P 032-7630P 032-7650P 032-7670P 032-7680P 042-7720P 042-7730P 042-7750P 042-7770P 042-7780P 042-7820P 042-7830P 042-7850P 042-7870P 042-7880P 042-7920P 042-7930P 042-7950P 042-7970P 042-7980P 50.8 8 mm 035-7420P 035-7430P 035-7450P 035-7470P 035-7480P 035-7520P 035-7530P 035-7550P 035-7570P 035-7580P 035-7620P 035-7630P 035-7650P 035-7670P 035-7680P 045-7720P 045-7730P 045-7750P 045-7770P 045-7780P 045-7820P 045-7830P 045-7850P 045-7870P 045-7880P 045-7920P 045-7930P 045-7950P 045-7970P 045-7980P Price, EUR 12.7 / 25.4 / 50.8 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 110 / 140 / 245 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 105 / 125 / 205 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 103 / 123 / 200 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265 115 / 145 / 265
Related Products
Uncoated Elliptical Mirrors
See page 1.8
Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 8 40-0030-02

See page 8.54

See page 8.72
Flipping Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0155

See page 8.79
5.12
AR Coated Lens Kits

Lens kits consist of four basic types of lenses with various focal lengths. Focal lengths of plano-concave lenses range from -50 to -300 mm, biconcave lenses from -25 to -200. Plano-convex and biconvex lenses cover focal distances from
Code 141-1235 142-1235 143-1235 144-1236 148-1236 149-1236 140-1237 Material UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS
25 to 1000 mm. The lenses are 25.4 mm diameter. Kits are available with laser line or broadband coatings. Lenses are placed in a hardwood box. Size of the box is 30740 cm (WHD). Lens kit includes 36 lenses.
Coating AR@1030 nm AR@515 nm AR@ 343 nm AR@266 nm AR@760-840 nm, R<0.5% AR@700-900 nm, R<0.8% AR@500-1100 nm, R<1.5% Price, EUR 2650 2650 2770 2960 2650 2800 2950
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
Reflection, %
5.13

1.5 1.0 0.5 0 720 4 3 2 1 0 600 5
List of the lenses in lens kits

Code 110-1203 110-1205 110-1209 110-1211
760 800 840 Wavelength, nm 880
Configuration pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx pl/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx bi/cx pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv pl/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv bi/cv
Dia*, mm 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4
F, mm 30 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 25 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 1000 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200 -300 -25 -50 -75 -100 -150 -200
Plano-convex lenses (12 pcs.)
110-1216 110-1217 110-1219 110-1221 110-1223 110-1227 110-1233 110-1245 111-1204 111-1207 111-1210 111-1214 111-1218 111-1222 111-1226 111-1230 111-1234 111-1238 111-1240 111-1260 112-1205
R<0.5% @ 760-840 nm, AOI= 0
700
1000
1100
R<0.8% @ 700-900 nm, AOI= 0
4 3 2 1 0

500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wavelength, nm 1100 1200
112-1209 112-1211 112-1217 112-1219 112-1223 114-1204 114-1208 114-1212 114-1216 114-1220 114-1224
R<1.5% @ 500-1100 nm, AOI=0
Related Products
Uncoated Lens Kits
See page 1.35

See page A.4

See page 8.44

See page 7.4

Thin Film Polarizers seperate s- and p-polarization components. Thin Film Polarizers can be used as an alternative to Glan-Taylor laser polarizing prisms or cube polarizing beamsplitters due to high damage threshold reaching 100 mJ/cm2, at 800 nm, 50 fsec. Thin film polarizers are used in high energy lasers. They can be used for Yb:KYW/KGW or Ti:Sapphire laser fundamental wavelength and its harmonics or intracavity Q-switch hold-off polarizers. The most efficient way to use thin film laser polarizers is at Brewster angle 562 with minimal losses. Typical horizontal polarization ratio Tp/Tsis 200:1.
Material Surface quality Transmission efficiency Extinction ratio Tp/Ts Laser damage threshold s-pol Brewster angle T
p-pol
Specifications
We provide Thin Film Laser Polarizers with Tp>99% per customer request.
BK7, UV FS 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) Tp>95% >200:1 >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Material BK7
Catalogue number 420-0114 420-0126 420-0136 420-0118 420-0138 420-0244 420-0256 420-0266 420-0248 420-0268 420-0514 420-0506 420-0526 420-0518 420-0528 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Wavelength, nm 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 108 108 160 115 160 128 128 189 155 189 206 215 309 255 335
Please add letter M to the catalogue code for metric dimensions or E for English. Catalogue number 420-0274 420-0286 420-0296 420-0278 420-0298 Rectangular dimensions Length, mm 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 Width, mm 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Wavelength, nm 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 142 142 220 170 220
100 80 60 40 20 0 700 740 780 820 Wavelength, nm 860 Polarization s p
100 98
Transmission, %
Transmission, %
96 94 92 4 3 2 1 0 1000 1010 1020
Polarization s p
1060
1070
Transmission curve @ 780-820 nm, AOI=56
Transmission curve @ 1010-1050 nm, Rs>99%, Tp>95%, AOI= 56
5.14
Material UV FS
Catalogue number 420-1112 420-1123 420-1114 420-1126 420-1136 420-1118 420-1138 420-1242 420-1253 420-1244 420-1256 420-1266 420-1248 420-1268 420-1512 420-1503 420-1514 420-1506 420-1526 420-1518 420-1528 Diameter D, mm Metric 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 English 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 50.8 Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 Wavelength, nm 343 400 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 343 400 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 343 400 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 164 131 131 131 196 145 196 182 154 154 154 231 180 231 325 295 295 305 404 315 404
5.15
Please add letter M to the catalogue code for metric dimensions or E for English.
Please contact us if you need thin film laser polarizers of other wavelengths or other types of substrates.
Catalogue number 420-1272 420-1283 420-1274 420-1286 420-1296 420-1278 420-1298
Rectangular dimensions Length, mm 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 28.6 Width, mm 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3
Thickness T, mm 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Wavelength, nm 343 400 515 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050
Price, EUR 255 215 215 215 315 225 315
Related Products
Glan Laser Polarizing, Wollaston Prisms
See page 1.46

See page 8.74
Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070

See page 5.20

Quartz Retardation Plates are made of material enabling linear birefringence. These plates are made of high quality optical grade crystalline quartz, featuring high damage threshold. Retardation plates rotate polarizations direction (/2) or convert linear into circular polarization or vice versa (/4). Quartz retardation plates are supplied mounted and AR coated.
Zero Order optically contacted Plates

Easily aligned Temperature insensitive Moderately insensitive to wavelength Zero order plates are comprised of two different plates cut parallel to their optical axis. This construction makes plates less dependent on temperature. The plates are polished to different thicknesses enabling one to achieve required retardation difference. These component plates have orthogonal optic axis directions, so that the roles of the ordinary and extraordinary rays are interchanged in passing from one plate to another. The thickness of the plate determines the phase shift between the ordinary and extraordinary beams for any specific wavelength.
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0 -0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% > 10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Retardation /4 Catalogue no. 460-4408 460-4415 460-4420 460-4432 460-4435 460-4441 460-4445 460-4446 Price, EUR 245 245 245 245 245 270 280 280
Related Products
See page 1.49

See page 8.82
Center wavelength, nm 1030 800 780 515 400 343 266 257
AR coating range, nm 1000-1060 760-840 740-820 500-530 380-420 333-353 257-275 250-265
Retardation /2 Catalogue no. 460-4208 460-4215 460-4220 460-4232 460-4235 460-4241 460-4245 460-4246 Price, EUR 245 245 245 245 245 270 280 280

See page 8.84

For high power laser applications
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Wavefront distortion Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Center wavelength, nm AR coating range, nm 1000-1060 760-840 740-820 500-530 380-420 333-353 257-275 250-265 Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0 / -0.12 mm /10 @ 633 nm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Retardation /4 Catalogue no. 464-4408 464-4415 464-4420 464-4432 464-4435 464-4441 464-4445 464-4446 Price, EUR 310 310 310 310 310 335 345 345
Housing Accessories
See page 8.82
1030 800 780 515 400 343 266 257
5.16

When optical axis is turned by 45 degrees to input polarization, the waveplate rotates polarization of Ti:Sapphire laser fundamental (800 nm) by 90 degrees and the polarization of Ti:Sapphire second harmonic (400 nm) remains the same.
100
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser Damage Threshold: Optically Contacted (465-4211) Air-Spaced (466-4211) >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical 100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0/-0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm <10 arcsec R<0.5%
Polarization purity, %
80 60 40 20
5.17
Code
0 400 500 600 700 Wavelength, nm 800 900
Description optically contacted; /2@800 nm + @400 nm air-spaced; /2@800 nm + @400 nm
AR coated 800+400 nm 800+400 nm
Price, EUR 345 410
465-4211 466-4211
Polarization purity of zero order dual waveplate
Housing Accessories
See page 8.82
Low Order Plates

Thickness 0.150.35 mm Thinner than multiple order Low order plates are less temperature sensitive and temperature dependent than multiple order plates. These plates are suitable for high and low power applications.
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder 17 mm 25.4 +0.0/-0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical
Center wavelength, nm 1030 800 780 515 400 343 266 257
AR coating range, nm 1000-1060 760-840 740-820 500-530 380-420 333-353 257-275 250-265
Related Products
Low Order Plates of other wavelengths
See page 1.51

See page 8.84
Multiple Order Dual Wavelength plates

Specifications
Material Optical axis Wavefront distortion Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Parallelism AR coating Nominal thickness of waveplate Single crystal quartz normal to facet on circumference of retarder /10 @ 633 nm 17 mm of 20 mm 25.4 (or 25.0) +0.0/-0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Catalogue number 463-4121 463-4141 463-4211 463-4221 463-4241 463-4411 463-4421 463-4441 Price, EUR 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 215 0.2-1.2 mm
Related Products
Dual Wavelength Plates of other wavelengths
See page 1.52
Laser damage threshold Retardation and Wavelength @ 800 nm + /2 @ 400 nm @ 800 nm + /4 @ 400 nm /2 @ 800 nm + @ 400 nm /2 @ 800 nm + /2 @ 400 nm /2 @ 800 nm + /4 @ 400 nm /4 @ 800 nm + @ 400 nm /4 @ 800 nm + /2 @ 400 nm /4 @ 800 nm + /4 @ 400 nm

See page 8.84

Made of crystalline quartz Intended to rotate a beam polarization plane strictly to an appropriate angle using circular birefringent effect Compared to a waveplate, a rotator has an intrinsic advantage, being independent of rotation around its own optical axis. It needs no adjustment, only to be installed normal to incident radiation. A polarization plane rotator is normally used for the specific wavelength. It is only slightly dependent on ambient temperature.
S1 S2
Specifications
Material Optical axis Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Laser damage threshold Single crystal quartz Normal to faces S1, S2 of rotator 17 mm 25.4 +0.0/-0.12 mm 20-10 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /10 @ 633 nm < 10 arcsec R < 0.5% 100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical Catalogue number 470-4904 470-4909 470-4804 470-4809 470-4784 470-4789 470-4514 470-4519 470-4044 470-4049 470-4344 470-4349 470-4264 470-4269 470-4254 470-4259 Center wavelength, nm 1030 1030 800 800 780 780 515 515 400 400 343 343 266 266 257 257 Rotation angle of polarization plane, deg 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90 45 90
Clear aperture
AR coating range, nm 1000-1060 1000-1060 760-840 760-840 740-820 740-820 500-530 500-530 380-420 380-420 333-353 333-353 257-275 257-275 250-265 250-265
Price, EUR 215 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 245 245 245 245
Related Products
Polarization plane rotators of other wavelengths
See page 1.53

See page 8.54

See page 8.86
215
5.18
Group Velocity Delay (GVD) Compensation plates

Compensation plates are made of Calcite. Plates are available with different orientation for different Group Velocity Delay compensation starting from tens of femtosecond up to tens of picosecond delay compensation. Standard GVD compensation plates are adjusted for required compensation by angular tuning changing the angle of incidence. Suggested AOI is -5 to +5 deg, however they also can operate at larger AOI. Standard plates are made of 1614 mm aperture, clear aperture dia 12 mm and mounted in to 1 ring holder. The optical axis is at special orientation non parallel to faces of plate. AR coatings for custom wavelengths are also available.
Specifications
Material Clear aperture Ring mount outer diameter Surface quality Wavefront distortion Parallelism AR coating Natural Calcite 12 mm 25.4 +0.0/-0.12 mm 40-20 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) /4@ 633 nm <3 arc min R<0.5% 760-840 nm and R<1% at 380-420 nm
Standard Calcite plates for delay compensation between 800 nm ("o" polarization) and 400 nm ("e" polarization) pulses
Code 225-2113 225-2114 225-2115 GVD compensation range* 310 450 fsec 370 520 fsec 440 630 fsec Coatings BBAR @ 800+400 nm BBAR @ 800+400 nm BBAR @ 800+400 nm Price, EUR 470 470 470
GVD compensation, fsec
5.19
*GVD compensation range at Angle Of Incidence from -5 to +5.
-240 -270 -300 -330 -360 -390 -420 -450 -480 -510 -10 -8 -6 0 6 8 -4 -2 2 4 AOI of 800 nm and 400 nm beams, deg 10
-290 -320 -350 -380 -410 -440 -470 -500 -530 -560 -590 -10 -8 -6 0 6 8 -4 -2 2 4 AOI of 800 nm and 400 nm beams, deg 10
225-2113.
-350 -390 -430 -470 -510 -550 -590 -630 -670 -710 -10 -8 -6 0 6 8 -4 -2 2 4 AOI of 800 nm and 400 nm beams, deg 10
225-2114.
Group velocity delay between 800 nm and 400 nm pulses in compensation plates at different angle of incidence. 400 nm pulse (e pol) is faster than 800 nm pulse (o pol).
225-2115.
Related Products
Thin BBO Crystals for SHG and THG of Ti:Sapphire laser wavelengths
See pages 5.23
Femtokits for THG of Femtosecond Ti:Sapphire Lasers

See page 5.26

See page 2.29
Variable Attenuator for Femtosecond Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0070

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical Adapter and precision opto-mechanical Holder 840-0197. Two Thin Film Brewster type polarizers, which reflect s-polarized light while transmitting p-polarized light, are housed into Adapter. Quartz Half Waveplates are housed in rotating holder 840-0197 The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizers by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
80
Transmission, %
60
S-pol Thin Film Polarizer Linearly polarized beam Thin Film Polarizer
40
42.1 P-pol
20
Half Waveplate
20
80
100
Specifications
Aperture diameter Damage threshold for high power laser applications Time dispersion Polarization Contrast (after 1st polarizer) Polarization Contrast (after 2nd polarizer)
17 mm >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical t<4 fs for 100 fs Ti:Sapphire laser pulses >1:200 >1:500
Divides laser beam into two parallel beams of manually adjustable intensity ratio Large dynamic range Negligible beam deviation High Optical damage threshold Weight 0.35 kg
For High Power Femtosecond Laser Applications

Catalogue number 990-0070-343 990-0070-400 990-0070-400B 990-0070-515 990-0070-515B 990-0070-800 990-0070-800B 990-0070-1030 990-0070-1030B Wavelength, nm 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 840 740 890 740 890 740 890 740 890 Catalogue number 990-0070-266H 990-0070-343H 990-0070-400H 990-0070-400HB 990-0070-515H 990-0070-515HB 990-0070-800H 990-0070-800HB 990-0070-1030H 990-0070-1030HB Wavelength, nm 266 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 1020 815 965 815 965 815 965 815 965
Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in rotating holder for high power femtosecond applications (Laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical).
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in rotating holder for high power femtosecond applications (Laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical).
Related Products
Femtoline Zero Order Optically Contacted/Air-Spaced Plates
See page 5.16
Femtoline Thin Film Laser Polarizers

See page 5.14

See page 7.14
Beam dumps 990-0800, 990-0820

See page 7.34

See page 1.13
915
5.20
Variable Attenuator for Femtosecond Linearly Polarized Laser Beam 990-0071

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical adapter for polarizer at 56 840-0117A or 840-0118A and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0197. Thin Film Brewster type polarizer, which reflect s-polarized light at 56 while transmitting p-polarized light, is housed into adapter for polarizer at 56. Quartz Half Waveplates are housed in rotating holder 840-0197. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizer by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
Transmission, %
68
5.21

80
60
sp ol.
ppol. Attenuation range 0.5%-95%
40
Light direction
Specifications
Aperture diameter Damage threshold for high power laser applications Time dispersion Polarization Contrast 10 mm >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse, 800 nm typical t<4 fs for 100 fs Ti:Sapphire laser pulses >1:200
For Femtosecond Applications

Catalogue number 990-0071-343 990-0071-400 990-0071-400B 990-0071-515 990-0071-515B 990-0071-800 990-0071-800B 990-0071-1030 990-0071-1030B Wavelength, nm 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 600 550 650 550 650 550 650 550 650
56
20
20
Half waveplate
80
100
Related Products
See page 1.13
Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 (laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical).

Catalogue number 990-0071-266H 990-0071-343H 990-0071-400H 990-0071-400HB 990-0071-515H 990-0071-515HB 990-0071-800H 990-0071-800HB 990-0071-1030H 990-0071-1030HB Wavelength, nm 266 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 690 665 615 715 615 715 615 715 615 715
Femtoline Zero Order Optically Contacted / Air-Spaced Plates

See page 5.16
Femtoline Thin Film Laser Polarizers

See page 5.14

See page 7.16
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 (laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical).
FemtoLine Laser & Nonlinear Crystals
FemtoLine Laser Crystals

Ti:Sapphire (Titanium Doped Sapphire Ti:Al2O3) laser line and harmonics
Ti:Sapphire laser crystal is used as a gain medium for tunable lasers and femtosecond solid-state lasers. Lasers based on Ti:Sapphire crystal are mainly used to generate ultrashort femtosecond pulses. The lasing band of Ti:Sapphire is 6601050nm, while common pump wavelength is frequency doubled Nd:YAG laser line at 532nm or Argon Ion laser lines at 490-514nm. The peak of emission in Ti:Sapphire is at 790-800nm wavelength.
1.0 0.8
Intensity, a.u.
0.6 0.4 0.2 0 400
absorption
500
fluorescence
600 700 Wavelength, nm 800 900
Material physical and laser properties

Chemical formula Crystal structure Lattice constants Density Mohs hardness Thermal conductivity Specific heat Melting point Laser action Fluorescence lifetime Tuning range Absorbtion range Emission peak Absorption peak Refractive index Ti3+:Al2O3 Hexagonal a=4.748, c=12.957 3.98 g/cm3 9 0.11 cal/(Cseccm) 0.10 cal/g 2050 C 4-Level Vibronic 3.2 sec (T=300K) 6601050 nm 400600 nm 795 nm 488 nm 1.76 @ 800 nm
Standard product specifications

Orientation Ti2O3 concentration Figure of Merit Size End configurations End flatness Parallelism Surface finishing Wavefront distortion optical axis C normal to rod axis 0.030.25 wt % >150 up to 20 mm dia and up to 130 mm length flat/flat or Brewster/Brewster /10 @ 633 nm 10 arcsec 10-5 scratch & dig /4 inch
Note: To inquire or order a finished Ti:Sa laser rod, please provide detailed specifications. Dopant concentration, size of crystal and end configuration are essential specifications.
Frequency Conversion of Ti:Sapphire laser wavelengths

Frequency doubling and tripling allow access to the green, blue and ultraviolet spectral regions. While the frequency conversion by Optical Parametric Generation offers wide tuning range in the nearinfrared spectral region, it is often sufficient to tune the Ti:sapphire wavelength for tuning the OPO, rather than tuning the OPO itself, e.g. by actively affecting the phase-matching conditions. Further wavelength extension to mid infrared range is possible by Difference Frequency Generation employing signal and idler wavelength pulses obtained from OPO.
Crystals selection for Ti:Sapphire laser frequency conversion

Thin BBO crystals for SHG @ 800 nm Thin BBO crystals for THG @ 800 nm Thin BBO crystals for OPG/OPA @ pump 800 nm Thin BBO crystals for OPG/OPA @ pump 400 nm AgGaS2 crystals for DFG 350 450 nm range 230 300 nm range 1050 2300 nm range 480 2300 nm range 2500-12000 nm range
FemtoLine FemtoLine Laser Laser and Nonlinear Nonlinear Crystals Crystals
5.22
Thin BBO crystals for SHG and THG of Ti:Sapphire laser wavelength
Free Standing BBO Crystals The crystals down to 100 m can be supplied as free standing crystals not attached to the support. However, ring mounts are highly recommended for safe handling of these thin crystals. Minimum aperture of free standing BBO is 55mm, maximum aperture is 2222mm. The tolerance is 50 m for crystals of thickness down to 300 m and 20 m for crystals of thickness down to 100 m. Optically contacted crystals BBO crystals less than 100 m thickness can be supplied optically contacted on UV Fused Silica substrate sizes 10101 mm
Standard specifications of ultrathin BBO crystals
Flatness Parallelism Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Surface quality Clear aperture /8 @ 633 nm < 5 arcmin < 30 arcmin 0.1 mm 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) >90% of full aperture
Reflection, %
or 12122 mm. Other sizes of substrates are also available on request. Minimum aperture of optically contacted BBO is 55mm, maximum aperture is 1010mm. The tolerance of crystal thickness is +10/-5 microns. Protective Coatings for BBO crystals P-protective coating is a single or two layer antireflection coating made at specified wavelength range. Typical reflection values are R<2% in the mid range, R<4% at the edges. P coating is highly recommended for ultrashort pulse applications and features low dispersion and very high laser damage threshold.
5.23
FemtoLine Laser Optics FemtoLine FemtoLine Laser Laser and Nonlinear Nonlinear Crystals Crystals
< 20 arcsec
400
500
600 700 800 900 Wavelength , nm
1000
1100
Typical P-coating for BBO SHG@800 nm application
EKSMA OPTICS recommends the following thickness BBO crystals depending on application and fundamental wavelength pulse duration, assuming it is spectrum limited Gausian pulse.
Application Pulse duration, fs 10 Type 1, SHG @ 800 nm =29.2, =90 20 50 100 200 10 Type 1, THG @ 800 nm =44,3, =90 20 50 100 200 Thickness, mm 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2
BBO for SHG @ 800 nm

BBO crystal, Thickness = 0.05 mm*
Code BBO-600H BBO-800H BBO-1000H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 UV FS support size, mm 10102 10102 12122 , deg 29.2 29.2 29.2 , deg 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm Price, EUR 790 825 925
* All BBO crystals of thickness less than 100 m are optically contacted onto UV FS support. All crystals are mounted into open ring holders.
SHG BBO crystals, Thickness = 0.1 mm

Code BBO-601H BBO-801H BBO-1001H BBO-1201H BBO-1501H BBO-2001H BBO-2201H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 , deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm Price, EUR 505 710 725 1010 1580 2955 3780
SHG BBO crystal, Thickness = 0.2 mm FemtoLine Laser Optics FemtoLine FemtoLine Laser Laser and Nonlinear Nonlinear Crystals Crystals
SHG BBO crystal, Thickness = 0.5 mm

SHG BBO crystal, Thickness = 1 mm

SHG BBO crystal, Thickness = 2 mm

Code BBO-605H BBO-805H BBO-1005H BBO-1205H BBO-1505H BBO-2005H
400 500 600 700 800 900 Wavelength , nm 1000 1100
Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222
, deg 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2 29.2
, deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
Coating P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm P/P@400-800 nm
Price, EUR 310 620 830 1200 1420 2770 3410
Reflection, %
BBO-2205H
P-protective coating curve of Type 1 (=29.2, =90) BBO crystal used for SHG@800 nm
Housing Accessories
See page 2.27

See page 2.29
5.24
BBO for THG @ 800 nm

BBO crystal, Thickness = 0.01 mm
Code BBO-606H BBO-806H BBO-1006H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 UV FS support size, mm 10102 10102 12122 , deg 44.3 44.3 44.3 , deg 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 Price, EUR 855 890 985

Reflection, %
5.25

Code BBO-609H BBO-809H BBO-1009H BBO-1209H BBO-1509H BBO-2009H BBO-2209H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 Code BBO-611H BBO-811H BBO-1011H BBO-1211H BBO-1511H BBO-2011H BBO-2211H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3

THG BBO crystal, Thickness = 0.1 mm

, deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 Price, EUR 505 710 725 1010 1580 2955 3780

Code BBO-610H BBO-810H BBO-1010H BBO-1210H BBO-1510H BBO-2010H BBO-2210H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 , deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 Price, EUR 505 710 725 980 1550 2900 3725

, deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 Price, EUR 410 625 660 940 1485 2750 3515
THG BBO crystal, Thickness = 1 mm

Code BBO-612H BBO-812H BBO-1012H BBO-1212H BBO-1512H BBO-2012H BBO-2212H Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 44.3 , deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 P/P@400-800/266 Price, EUR 310 560 625 910 1300 2335 2980
For very high power (TW) laser systems LBO and KDP crystals can be supplied with Clear Apertures up to 35 mm and 60 mm diameters respectively.
Note
Related Products
See page 5.17
200
250
400
450

See page 2.27

See page 2.29
P-protective coating curve of Type 1 (=44.3, =90) BBO crystal's exit face used for THG@800 nm
Femtokits for third harmonic generation of femtosecond Ti:Sapphire laser

Kits consist of set of components required for efficient third harmonic generation of femtosecond Ti:Sapphire laser. The schemes of the third harmonic generation in basic and extended Femtokits are presented below.
Basic Femtokit FK Series

Basic Femtokit FK series includes: Type 1 SHG BBO crystal with 66 mm aperture, P-coated @ 400-800 nm, Type 1 THG BBO crystal with 66 mm aperture, P-coated @ 400-800/266 nm, Calcite plate for group velocity delay compensation CP, AR coated @ 800+400 nm, Zero order dual waveplate W1, optically contacted, AR coated @ 800+400 nm, All above four components are mounted in to 1 inch ring holders for convenient handling. The thickness of SHG BBO crystal, THG BBO crystal and group delay compensation plate is different in each kit and is optimal for certain pulse duration of fundamental harmonic to avoid harmonic pulses broadening.
Angular adjustment axis
Mounted Femtokit FK Series
W1 Zero order /2 @ 800 nm and @ 400 nm dual waveplate
800 nm
400 nm 800 nm
800 nm 400 nm 800 nm 400 nm
400 nm 800 nm
vertical
266 nm
Type 1 SHG BBO
CP Group Delay compensation plate
Type 1 THG BBO
200 fsec 100 fsec 50 fsec 20 fsec
FK-800-200 FK-800-100 FK-800-050 FK-800-020
1510 1610 1975 2040
FK-800-200-M FK-800-100-M FK-800-050-M FK-800-020-M
2458 2558 2923 2988
Non-standard kits with larger apertures of BBO crystals and thicknesses optimal for other pulse durations are available on request.
Fundamental pulse duration
Basic FemtoKit FK Series Code Price, EUR
Basic Mounted FemtoKit FK Series Code Price, EUR
5.26
Extended FemtoKit FKE Series

W2 Zero order /2 @ 800 nm waveplate Angular adjustment axis W1 Zero order /2 @ 800 nm and @ 400 nm dual waveplate

400 nm 800 nm
HS1
HS2
M1
800 nm
400 nm 800 nm
800 nm 400 nm 800 nm 400 nm
800 nm
vertical
266 nm
Type 1 SHG BBO
CP Group Delay compensation plate
Type 1 THG BBO

266 nm 400 nm 800 nm
5.27
Extended Femtokit FKE series includes: All components from basic kit, Additional zero order waveplate W2, optically contacted, AR coated @ 800nm, Harmonic Separator HS1 HR @ 266nm and HT @ 800+400 nm at AOI=45 deg, Harmonic Separator HS2 HR @ 400nm and HT @ 800 nm at AOI=45 deg, Laser mirror M1, HR at 800 nm at AOI=45deg.
Fundamental pulse duration 200 fsec 100 fsec 50 fsec 20 fsec Extended FemtoKit FKE Series Code FKE-800-200 FKE-800-100 FKE-800-050 FKE-800-020 Price, EUR 2190 2290 2655 2720 Extended Mounted FemtoKit FKE Series Code FKE-800-200-M FKE-800-100-M FKE-800-050-M FKE-800-020-M Price, EUR 3910 4010 4375 4440
Non-standard kits with larger apertures of BBO crystals and thicknesses optimal for other pulse durations are available on request.
Up to 50% SHG conversion efficiency which was achieved in 0.5 mm SHG BBO crystal with Ti:Sapphire Super Spitfire laser operating at 1 kHz, 130 fs, 20-100 J @ 800 nm and effective beam diameter 0.9 mm. THG efficiency was reached up to 8% from fundamental using FKE-800-100 Femtokit.
Extended Mounted Femtokit FKE Series
Thin AgGaS2 Crystals for DFG 2.5-1.3 m

Flatness Parallelism Perpendicularity Angle tolerance Aperture tolerance Surface quality Clear aperture /6 @ 633 nm < 20 arcsec < 10 arcmin < 30 arcmin 0.1 mm 10-5 scratch & dig (MIL-PRF-13830B) >90% of full aperture
BBAR Coatings for AgGaS2 crystals

BBAR coating is multilayer dialectric antireflection coating made at specified wavelength range. Standard coating is designed to reduce reflection losses at input side at 1.1-2.6 micron range and output side at 2.6-11 micron range Typical reflection values are R<0.5% in the mid range, and up to reflection values of uncoated crystal at the edges of given ranges. BBAR coating is designed to minimise dispersion of ultrashort pulses and also features high damage threshold.
Coating BBAR/BBAR @ 1.1-2.6 / 2.6-11 m BBAR/BBAR @ 1.1-2.6 / 2.6-11 m Application OPO @ 1.2-2.4 m -> 2.4-11 m OPO @ 1.2-2.4 m -> 2.4-11 m Price, EUR 695 770
AgGaS2 AGS-401H AGS-402H
Size, mm W 5 6 H 5 6 L 1 2
Orientation 39 50 45 0
Crystals are mounted into open ring holders (see page 2.27).
12
12
Generated wavelength, microns
Generated wavelength, microns
10
10
32
34
36 38 40 42 Phase matching angle, deg
44
46
36
40
44
48 52 56 60 64 Phase matching angle, deg
68
72
Type 1 DFG (e-o=o) in AGS. DFG of signal and idler generated in BBO pumped at 800 nm
Type 2 DFG (e-o=e) in AGS. DFG of signal and idler generated in BBO pumped at 800 nm
Housing Accessories
See page 2.27

See page 2.29
5.28
Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW Crystals laser lines and harmonics

Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW crystals have broad emission bandwidths and are used as lasing materials to generate ultrashort (~100-200 fs) high power pulses. Direct pump of Yb:KGW/KYW crystals with laser diodes operating at 981 nm supports compact laser systems. Yb:KGW/KYW laser generates pulses at 1023-1060 nm wavelength range. Also Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW can be used as ultrashort pulse amplifiers. We believe that Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW are some of the best materials for high power thin disk lasers generating femtosecond pulses.
Properties of Yb:KGW and Yb:KYW
Name Yb3+ concentration Crystal structure Point group Lattice parameters Thermal expansion Thermal conductivity Density Mohs hardness Melting temperature Transmission range Refractive indices (=1.06 m) n/t Laser wavelength Fluorescence lifetime Stimulated emission cross section (Ea) Absorption peak and bandwidth Absorption cross section Lasing threshold Stark levels energy (in cm-1) of the 2F5/2 manifolds of Yb3+ @ 77K Stark levels energy (in cm-1) of the 2F7/2 manifolds of Yb3+ @ 77K Yb:KGW 0.55% monoclinic C2/c a=8.095 , b=10.43 , c=7.588 , =94.43 a=410-6 /C, b=3.610-6 /C, c=8.510 Ka=2.6 W/mK, Kb=3.8 W/mK, Kc=3.4 W/mK 7.27 g/cm3 45 1075 C 0.355.5 m ng=2.037, np=1.986, nm=2.033 0.410-6 K-1 10231060 nm 0.3 ms 2.610-20 cm2 a=26 cm-1, =981 nm, =3.7 nm 1.210-19 cm2 35 mW 10682, 10471, 10188 535, 385, 163, 0 Yb:KYW 0.5100% monoclinic C2/c a=8.05 , b=10.35 , c=7.54 , =94 6.61 g/cm3 45 0.355.5 m 0.410-6 K-1 10251058 nm 0.3 ms 310-20 cm2 a=40 cm-1, =981 nm, =3.5 nm 1.3310-19 cm2 70 mW 10695, 10476, 10187 568, 407, 169, 0
Custom manufacturing capabilities
Various shapes (slabs, rods, cubes, disks) Different dopant levels Diversified coatings Attractive prices for introductory quantities to OEMs
, *10-19 cm2
5.29
High absorption coefficient at 981 nm High stimulated emission cross section Low laser threshold Extremely low quantum defect pump / se Broad polarized output at 10231060 nm High slope efficiency with diode pumping (~ 60%) High Yb doping concentration
E || Nm
2 1 0 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0
880 920 960 1000
Emission Absorption
12 8 4 0 6 4 2 0 6 4 2
absorbtion
E || a
15 10 5 0
emission
E || a
E || Np
E || b
E || b
E || Ng
E || c
E || c
1040
1080
0 880 920 960 1000 1040
Wavelength, nm
920
960
1000
1040
1080
Wavelength, nm
Wavelength, nm
Absorption and stimulated emission cross sections of Yb:KYW
Absorption and emission spectrae of Yb(5%):KGW
BBO and LBO crystals for SHG of Yb:KGW/KYW frequency conversion

EKSMA OPTICS recommends the following thickness BBO and LBO crystals for Type 1 SHG at 1030 nm depending on fundamental wavelength pulse duration, assuming it is spectrum limited Gausian pulse.
50 fs 100 fs 150 fs 200 fs 0.5 mm 1 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm 0.9 mm 1.9 mm 2.8 mm 3.7 mm
2 0 12 10 8 6 4
Reflection,%
SHG@1030 nm
BBO crystal thickness
LBO crystal thickness
LBO crystals can be supplied with Clear Aperture up to 35 mm diameter.
Note
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
Wavelength, ,nm
Typical AR@1030+515 nm coating for LBO or BBO SHG@1030 nm application
SHG LBO crystals

SHG LBO crystals, Type 1, Thickness = 0.9 mm
Code LBO-601 LBO-801 LBO-1001 LBO-1201 LBO-1501 LBO-2001 LBO-2201 Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 , deg 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8 Coating AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm Price, EUR 515 620 650



SHG BBO crystals

SHG BBO crystals, Type 1, Thickness = 0.5 mm
Code BBO-651 BBO-851 BBO-1051 BBO-1251 BBO-1551 BBO-2051 BBO-2251 Aperture, mm 66 88 1010 1212 1515 2020 2222 , deg 23.4 23.4 23.4 23.4 23.4 23.4 23.4 , deg 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Coating AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm AR/AR@515+1030 nm Price, EUR 490 625 650
SHG BBO crystals, Type 1, Thickness = 1 mm

SHG BBO crystals, Type 1, Thickness = 1.5 mm

SHG BBO crystals, Type 1, Thickness = 2 mm

5.30
Optical Systems
Optical Systems Selection Guide
F-Theta Lens
page 7.2
Compact Beam Expander

page 7.3
Zoom Beam Expander

page 7.4

page 7.4
Gauss-to-Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens

page 7.5
990-0060
page 7.12
990-0070
page 7.13
990-0070M
page 7.14
990-0071
page 7.15
990-0071M
page 7.16
990-1000
page 7.17
7.1
Optical Systems
990-0100, 990-0200
page 7.18
990-0050, 990-0051
page 7.18
Precision Pinholes
page 7.19
Microscope Objectives
page 7.19
Unmounted Iris Diaphragms

page 7.20
Mounted Iris Diaphragms

page 7.22
Motorized Iris Diaphragms 995 Series

page 7.23

page 7.24

page 7.25
990-0604
page 7.26
990-0704
page 7.27
990-0400
page 7.30
991-0602
page 7.31
991-0702
page 7.32
990-0800
page 7.34
990-0820
page 7.34
Optical Systems
F-Theta Lens
X-mirror
M851
72
47
m1
36
Y-mirror
m2
The F-Theta Lens is designed to provide a flat field on the image plane for scanning and engraving applications where a high power laser and set of rotating mirrors are used to scan across a given field.
m1=1220 m2=1220
41.5 50
90
A. Lens Diameter 90 mm
X-mirror
M851
72
104
Best mirror places m1/m2
16/16 mm
47
Screw Size
M851
m1
Specifications
Y-mirror
m2
m1=1220 m2=1220
41.5 59.8
B. Lens Diameter 104 mm
Wavelength 1064 nm, Lens Diameter 90 mm

Catalogue number 150-1001 150-1601 150-2101 150-2541 150-2901 150-3301 150-4201 Focus length, mm 100 160 210 254 290 330 420 Working distance S, mm 115 176 230 284 324 346 467 Max. scan area, mm2 7070 110110 145145 175175 200200 220220 300300 Max. scan angle, max 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 Input beam diameter, mm 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 Spot size, m 16 26 34 31 31 40 50 Drawing A A A A A A A Price, EUR 420 420 420 420 420 420 420

Catalogue number 150-1002 150-1602 Focus length, mm 100 160 Working distance S, mm 115 186 Max. scan area, mm2 7070 110110 Max. scan angle, max 28 28 Input beam diameter, mm 12 12 Spot size, m 10 16 Drawing A A Price, EUR 460 460
Wavelength 355 nm
Catalogue number 150-1003 150-1603 Focus length, mm 100 160 Working distance S, mm 136 199 Max. scan area, mm2 7070 110110 Max. scan angle, max 28 28 Input beam diameter, mm 7 7 Spot size, m 10 15 Drawing B A Price, EUR 930 930
Optical Systems
7.2
Optical Systems
24
X-mirror
M851
64
50
m1
Y-mirror
m2
Specifications
Screw Size Best mirror places m1/m2 M851 24/24 mm
m1=1830 m2=1630
C. Lens Diameter 104 mm

S

Catalogue number 151-1631 151-2101 151-2541 151-4201 151-6501 Focus length, mm 163 210 254 420 650 Working distance S, mm 185 255 285 467 697 Max. scan area, mm2 110110 150150 175175 300300 400400 Max. scan angle, max 28 28 28 28 25 Input beam diameter, mm 20 20 20 20 20 Spot size, m 17 24 31 55 85 Drawing C C C C C Price, EUR 520 520 520 520 520
Compact Beam Expander

Optical Systems
8
104
L
Expansion ratio - 2X, 2,5X, 3X, 4X, 5X, 6X, 8X
A laser beam expander is designed to increase the diameter of a collimated input beam to a larger collimated output beam. EKSMA OPTICS offers compact Galilean type beam expanders for 1064nm, 532nm and 355 nm wavelengths. Compact beam expander has the possibility to be adjusted for the input beam divergence angle to obtain collimated, divergent or focused beam at the output.
Specifications
Lens material Screw Size AR coated Fused Silica Lenses M220.75
Catalogue number 160-0021 160-0251 160-0031 160-0041 160-0051 160-0061 160-0081 160-0101 160-0022 160-0252 160-0032 160-0042 160-0052 160-0062 160-0082 160-0102 160-0043 160-0063 160-0083 160-0103
Wavelength, nm 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 532 532 532 532 532 355 355 355 355
Expansion ratio 2X 2.5X 3X 4X 5X 6X 8X 10X 2X 2.5X 3X 4X 5X 6X 8X 10X 4X 6X 8X 10X
Beam expander size L, mm 51 51 68 75 73 75 77 70 51 51 68 75 73 75 77 70 75 75 68 71
Transmission, % >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96 >96
Price, EUR 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 250 250 250 250
Related Product
Large Rod Small Mounting Clamp (aluminium) 810-0062A
See page 8.23
Compact beam expanders of other expansion ratio are available upon request.
7.3
M220.75
21.6
27
Optical Systems
Zoom Beam Expander

EKSMA OPTICS offers compact Galilean type zoom beam expanders for Nd:YAG lasers fundamental and harmonics wavelength: 1064 nm, 532 nm and 355 nm.
Catalogue number 165-0281 165-1181* 165-0131 165-1282* 165-1182* Wavelength, nm 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 355 355 Expantion ratio 2x-8x 1x-8x 1x-3x 2x-8x 1x-8x 1x-3x 2x-8x 1x-8x
Zoom beam expander provides variable expansion ratio of 2x-8x, 1x-8x, 1x-3x with adjustable focus to correct for laser beam divergence.
Output Clear Aperture, mm 30 32 29 32 32 20 32 32 Length, mm 142-149 167-202 117 186.7 162-196 85 157-191 180.3 Price, EUR 500 650 650 650 850 650 800 1100
Input Clear Aperture, mm 10 12 14 12 12 10 12 12
Adjustable expansion ratio Adjustable divergence Galilean design
165-0132 165-1283* 165-1183*
* made of quartz; other zoom beam expanders are made of BK7
Drawings are available upon request.
Related Product
Universal Adjustable Optics Mount 830-0035
See page 8.47
Simple lenses are subject to optical aberrations. In many cases these aberrations can be compensated for to a great extent by using a combination of simple lenses with complementary aberrations. A compound lens is a collection of simple lenses of different shapes and made of materials of different refractive indices, arranged one after the other with a common axis. If two thin lenses are separated in air by some distance d (where d is smaller than the focal length of the first lens), the focal length for the combined system is given by
combined focal length and BFL are infinite. This corresponds to a pair of lenses that transform a parallel (collimated) beam into another collimated beam. This type of system is called an afocal system, since it produces no net convergence or divergence of the beam. Two lenses at this separation form the simplest type of optical telescope. Although the system does not alter the divergence of a collimated beam, it does alter the width of the beam. The magnification of such a telescope is given by
1=1+1 d f f1 f2 f1 f2
The distance from the second lens to the focal point of the combined lenses is called the back focal length (BFL).
M =
f2 D (exit diameter) = out f1 Din (input diameter)
BFL =
f2 (d f1) d (f1 + f2)
If the separation distance is equal to the sum of the focal lengths (d = f1 + f2), the
Din
which is the ratio of the input beam width to the output beam width. Note the sign convention: a telescope with two convex lenses (f1 > 0, f2 > 0) produces a negative magnification, indicating an inverted image. A concave plus a convex lens (f1 < 0 < f2) produces a positive magnification and the image is upright.
d = f1 + f2
Dout
Optical Systems
7.4
Optical Systems Lens material: BK7

Lens 1 BK7 bi/cv 12.7 mm 114-0104 Focal length f1, mm -12.7 Lens 2 Focal length f2, mm +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 Distance between lenses d=f1+f2, mm 62 87 137 187 237 50 75 125 175 225 25 50 100 150 200 Magnification, M 5.9 7.7 11.8 15.7 19.7 3 4 6 8 10 1.5 2 3 4 5 Code 140-0008 141-0008 142-0008 147-0008 140-1008 144-1008 149-1008 146-1008 143-1008 141-1008 145-1008 148-1008 Material BK7 BK7 BK7 BK7 UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UV FS UVFS pl/cv 25.4 mm 112-1205 -50 UVFS bi/cv 25.4 mm 114-1204 -25
Lens material: UVFS

Lens 1 UVFS bi/cv 12.7 mm 114-1104 Focal length f1, mm -12.7 Lens 2 Focal length f2, mm +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 +75 +100 +150 +200 +250 Coating Uncoated 1064 nm, R<0.2% 532 nm + 1064 nm, R<0.5% 400-700 nm, R<0.9% Uncoated 266 nm, R<0.4% 266 nm + 355 nm, R<0.6% 210-400 nm, R<1.5% 355 nm, R<0.25% 532 nm + 1064 nm, R<0.5% 350-900 nm, R<1.5% 650-950 nm, R<1% Distance between lenses d=f1+f2, mm 62 87 137 187 237 50 75 125 175 225 25 50 100 150 200 Magnification, M 5.9 7.7 11.8 15.7 19.7 3 4 6 8 10 1.5 2 3 4 5 Price, EUR 771 1075 1110 1260 1170 1470 1480 1680 1465 1485 1685 1645
BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511
UVFS pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517 110-1505 110-1509 110-1511 110-1515 110-1517
BK7 bi/cv 25.4 mm 114-0204
-25
BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511
UVFS pl/cx 50.8 mm
BK7 pl/cv 25.4 mm 112-0209
-50
BK7 pl/cx 50.8 mm 110-0502 110-0505 110-0507 110-0509 110-0511
UVFS pl/cx 50.8 mm
Note that distance between lenses d is the distance between focal planes of the lenses and is given theoretically (the thickness of lenses is not included into calculation). It, also, depends on wavelength. The distance should be adjusted 10mm in each particular case. Each kit includes 8 lenses, Aluminium Optical Rail 810-0005-02, two Aluminium Rail Carriers 810-0007-06, Self Centering Lens Mounts 830-0010 and 830-0020, two Rod Holders 820-0050-02 and two Rods 820-0010-02. Net weight: 1.4 kg
3.0
Top-Hat size, mm
2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 0
GTH
-5-2
50-4
7.5
Optical Systems
Any other antireflection coating wavelength region is available on request.
Gauss-to-Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens

Gauss-to-Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens is special form lens used to distribute energy of Gaussian beam to Top Hat profile.
Lens Specifications
Material LF5 Schott glass n = 1.5659 @ 1060 nm, n = 1.5848 @ 546 nm, n = 1.6192 @ 365 nm 11.0 mm >3 J/cm2 @ 532 nm, 10 ns Mounted in to 1 ring holder
4.0 3.5
Clear aperture Damage threshold (uncoated) Mounting
GT
H-4
-2.2
FA
-3.6 -1.7 5FA
GTH
200
400
600
800
1000
Working distance. mm
Optical Systems
GTH-5-250-4
Gauss-to-Top-Hat Beam Shaping Lens

GTH-5-250-4 Operation Specifications
Recommended operation wavelength range Input beam Output beam Working distance Beam energy distribution efficiency Beam homogenity Lens diameter Thickness Description uncoated lens VIS coated lens (400-700 nm (R<1% per face)) IR coated lens (700-1300 nm (R<1% per face)) 400-1500 nm TEM00, diameter (1/e): 5.0 0.15 mm Top hat size at 250 mm working distance: 4 4 mm (adjustable with additional lens) 250 mm (adjustable with additional lens) > 95% of input energy within Top Hat profile 5 % (rel. to average intensity within top hat) 12.0 +0.0/-0.1 mm 4.0 0.1 mm Price, EUR 450 495 495
Square top hat size and correspondingly working distance can be changed by placing extra lens or objective behind beam shaping lens GTH-5-250-4. Dependence of square size and working distance vs focal length of additional lens or objective:
Focal length, mm +50 +100 +200 +300 -1000 -500 Top hat square size, mm 0.67 x 0.67 1.1 x 1.1 1.8 x 1.8 2.2 x 2.2 5.3 x 5.3 8.0 x 8.0 Working distance, mm 42 71 111 136 333 500 Catalogue number GTH-5-250-4 GTH-5-250-4-VIS GTH-5-250-4-IR
Other specific laser wavelengths are available on request.
GTH-5-250-4 Operation Instructions

Principles of Beam Shaper Operation and Lens Shape Adjustment of Square Top Hat Size by Additional Spherical Lens
Top Hat beam shaper lens additional spherical lens square Top Hat profile with size of < (44) mm2 at distance d1 square Top Hat profile with size of > (44) mm2 at distance d2
input beam
Energy of Gaussian input beam is redistributed to a Top Hat beam profile by beam shaper lens (mapping).
Surface contour plot of beam shaper lens (free form optic).
nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 5 mm
working distance d1 < d = 250 mm, working distance d2 > d = 250 mm, focal length f of additional focal length f of additional convex lens > 0 mm concave lens < -250 mm
Optical Setup for Gauss-toTop Hat Beam Shaper Lens

Top Hat beam shaper lens square Top Hat profile with size of (44) mm2 at distance d = 250 mm
The working distance and the size of the Top Hat profile can be changed (same ratio) by an additional spherical lens. For a convex lens the size of the Top Hat profile and the working distance becomes smaller. For a concave lens the size of the Top Hat profile and the working distance becomes bigger. The new working distance and the size of the Top Hat profile can be calculated:
250 mm f Working distance = 250 mm + f
for focal length f>0 mm (additional convex lens) respectively focal length f<-250mm (additional concave lens); s->0
collimated input beam
working distance d = 250 mm, with collimated input beam
If a collimated Gaussian beam is used the Top Hat beam shaper lens delivers at the working distance d = 250 mm a square Top Hat beam profile with the size of (44) mm2. The Top Hat beam shaper lens works also for divergent and convergent Gaussian beams. Important: One has to consider that input beam diameter at beam shaper lens plane must be 5mm @ 1/e2. For divergent (or convergent) beams the size of Top Hat and working distance increase (or decrease).
Square Top Hat Size =
4mm working distance 2 4mm f 2 = 250 mm 250 mm + f

Top Hat size > (44) mm2
beam shaper lens input beam spherical lens f < -250 mm spherical lens f > 0 mm nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 5 mm s
nce g dista mm workin = 250 d > d2

Top Hat size (44) mm2 working distance d = 250 mm
wo d1 < rking d d = istan 250 ce mm
Top Hat size 2 < (44) mm
Optical Systems
7.6
Optical Systems
Homogeneous Line Generation with Top Hat Beam Shapper Lens and Additional Cylindrical Lens
By introducing an additional cylindrical lens behind the Top Hat distance l > focal length input beam beam shaper lens of cylindrical lens (thereby one has to consider that working distance d = 250 mm, nessesary diameter of Gaussian input the distance l bewith collimated input beam beam @1/e : 5 mm tween cylindrical lens and working plane must be bigger or same as focal length of cylindrical lens) its possible to generate a line profile at working plane. Along the long axis the intensity profile is homogeneous. Along short axis, which is focused by cylindrical lens, the profile is near Gaussian.
Top Hat beam shaper lens additional cylindrical lens homogeneous line with 4 mm length at distance d
2
Adjustment of Length of Homogeneous Line by Additional Spherical Lens

line length > 4 mm
cylindrical lens f<l beam shaper lens input beam spherical lens f < -250 mm spherical lens f > 0 mm nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 5 mm s
nce g dista workin = 250 mm d > d2 l

line length = 4 mm working distance d = 250 mm l
work d1 < ing dista d=2 n 50 m ce m l
line length < 4 mm
input beam
beam shaper lens
cylindrical lens distance l fcylindrical
homogeneus line profile with 4 mm length
working distance d = 250 mm
distance l1 > l fcylindrical
By varying the distance l the width of line profile (short axis) can be changed from near diffraction limited size to several millimiters.
7.7
Optical Systems
GTH-4-2.2FA

GTH-4-2.2FA Operation Specifications
Recommended operation wavelength range Input beam Achievable Top Hat size Full fan angle of Top-Hat generation Beam energy distribution efficiency Beam homogenity Lens diameter Lens thickness 400-1550 nm TEM00, diameter (1/e): 4.0 0.15 mm 6x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm, 12x diffraction limited @ 532 nm 2.2 mrad > 95% of input energy within Top Hat profile 5 % (rel. to average intensity within Top Hat) 12.0 +0.0/-0.1 mm 4.0 0.1 mm
Working distance is given by focal length of additional lens which is needed always. Top Hat appears always at focal plane of additional lens. For instance if an additional lens f = 100 is used, Top Hat appears at 100mm behind additional lens. So GTH-4-2.2FA could be easily put in front of objectives for example. The distance between GTH-4-2.2FA and additional lens is not critical (up to several tens of centimeters). The full fan angle of Top-Hat generation for GTH-4-2.2FA is 2.2mrad. This leads to Top-Hat sizes: 110110 m for lens with f = 50 at 50 mm distance 220220 m for lens with f = 100 at 100 mm distance 2.22.2 mm for lens with f = 1000 at 1000 mm distance 4.44.4 mm for lens with f = 2000 at 2000 mm distance
Catalogue number GTH-4-2.2FA GTH-4-2.2FA-VIS GTH-4-2.2FA-IR
Description uncoated lens VIS coated lens (400-700 nm (R<1% per face)) IR coated lens (700-1300 nm (R<1% per face))
Price, EUR 450 495 495
Optical Systems
GTH-4-2.2FA Operation Instructions

General function of Top-Hat beam shaper GTH-4-2.2FA
Top-Hat beam shaper lens
full fan angle 2.2 mrad
beam expander. Initially the necessary input beam diameter of 4 mm @ 1/e is passing the GTH. Afterwards the beam is expanded and focused on working plane. The initial diffraction limited Gaussian spot at focal plane will be transformed into a square homogeneous Top-Hat profile. The resulting Top-Hat size is given by:
4 m 6x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (12x @ 532 nm) NA NA represents the numerical aperture of focused beam and is given by: beam radius @ focusing optic NA = focal length of focusing optic
distance => infinity
The Top-Hat beam shaper GTH-4-2.2FA generating a square Top-Hat profile with a full fan angle of 2.2 mrad. To get best results it is necessary to use a Gaussian TEM00 input beam with a diameter of 4 mm @ 1/e. For all setups using GTH beam shaper the user have to consider that the free aperture along the total beam path have to be at least 2.2 (better 2.5) times bigger than the beam diameter@1/e.
3. Beam shaper within beam expander (Top Hat size <100m) Top Hat size is determined by numerical aperture (NA) of focused beam and can be calculated as follows:
Optical setup for Top-Hat beam shaper GTH-4-2.2FA

There are different possibilities to integrate the GTH-4-2.2 beam shaper into an optical setup. 1. Beam shaper directly in front of focusing optic/objective (Top Hat size >100m). Top Hat size is determined by focal length (f) of focusing optic/ 2.2 objective and can be calculated as follows: f 1000
Top-Hat beam shaper lens free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e additional focusing lens/objective
4 m 6x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (12x @ 532 nm) NA

Top-Hat beam shaper lens focusing lens/objective free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e radius of beam @ focusing optic
free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e
nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 4 mm diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: <4 mm
collimated input beam distance = f1 = 50 mm nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 4 mm
Top-Hat size 110 110 m
Top-Hat size 1.65 1.65 mm full fan angle 2.2 mrad
distance = f2= 750 mm distance => infinity
A further and even more flexible possibility is to introduce GTH-42.2FA into the beam path within a beam expander. The user has the possibility for an easy fine tuning of beam diameter at the position of GTH-4-2.2FA by shifting shaper along z-axis. Its just necessary to consider that the beam diameter at the position of GTH is 4mm @ 1/e. The resulting Top-Hat size is given by:
4 m 6x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (12x @ 532 nm) NA NA represents the numerical aperture of focused beam and is given by: beam radius @ focusing optic NA = focal length of focusing optic
By introducing the GTH-4-2.2FA into the beam path in front of a lens/objective the initial diffraction limited Gaussian spot will be transformed into a square homogeneous Top-Hat profile. The necessary beam diameter at the position of GTH-4-2.2FA is 4mm@1/e. 2.2 The resulting Top-Hat size is given by: focal length, for 1000 example with f= 50mm => 110m. 2. Beam shaper in front of beam expander (Top Hat size <100m) Top Hat size is determined by numerical aperture (NA) of focused beam and can be calculated as follows:
Homogeneous line generation with additional cylindrical lens

Line thickness fixed, near diffraction limited.
input beam beam shaper lens additional spherical lens/objective homogeneous line profile
cylindrical lens distance l
4 m 6x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (12x @ 532 nm) NA

Top-Hat beam shaper lens focusing lens/objective free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e radius of beam @ focusing optic
working distance d = ffocusing lens
distance l1 > I
beam expander
focal length
To realize Top Hat sizes smaller than 100m its recommended to introduce the GTH-4-2.2FA into the beam path in front of a
If an additional cylindrical lens is used, one can generate homogeneous line profiles. By varying the distance l the width of line profile (short axis) can be changed from near diffraction limited size to several millimeters. We recommend the use of a cylindrical lens with a focal length of f = 2.25 m.
Optical Systems
z position of beam shaper beam expander
focal length
7.8
Optical Systems
GTH-3.6-1.75FA

GTH-3.6-1.75FA Operation Specifications
Recommended operation wavelength range Necessary free aperture Input beam Achievable Top Hat size @ 1/e Full fan angle of Top-Hat generation Beam energy distribution efficiency Beam homogenity Lens diameter Lens thickness 400-1550 nm always 2.2x beam diameter @ 1/e, along total beam path TEM00, diameter (1/e): 3.6 0.15 mm 5x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm, 10x diffraction limited @ 532 nm 1.75 mrad > 95% of input energy within Top Hat profile 5 % (rel. to average intensity within Top Hat) 12.0 +0.0/-0.1 mm 2.0 0.1 mm
Working distance is given by focal length of additional lens which is always needed. Top Hat appears always at focal plane of additional lens. For instance if an additional lens f = 100 is used, Top Hat appears at 100 mm behind additional lens. So GTH-3.6-1.75FA could be easily put in front of objectives for example. The distance between GTH-3.6-1.75FA and additional lens is not critical (up to several tens of centimeters). The full fan angle of Top-Hat generation for GTH-3.6-1.75FA is 1.75 mrad. This leads to Top-Hat sizes: 8888 m for lens with f = 50 at 50 mm distance 175175 m for lens with f = 100 at 100 mm distance 1.751.75 mm for lens with f = 1000 at 1000 mm distance
Catalogue number GTH-3.6-1.75FA GTH-3.6-1.75FA-VIS GTH-3.6-1.75FA-IR
Description uncoated lens VIS coated lens (400-700 nm (R<1% per face)) IR coated lens (700-1300 nm (R<1% per face))
Price, EUR 450 495 495
GTH-3.6-1.75FA Operation Instructions

General function of Top-Hat beam shaper GTH-3.6-1.75FA
Optical Systems
Top-Hat beam shaper lens
full fan angle 1.75 mrad
By introducing the GTH-3.6-1.75FA into the beam path in front of a lens/objective the initial diffraction limited Gaussian spot will be transformed into a square homogeneous Top-Hat profile. The necessary beam diameter at the position of GTH-3.6-1.75FA is 3.6mm @ 1/e. 1.75 The resulting Top-Hat size is given by: focal length, for 1000 example with f= 50mm => 87.5m. 2. Beam shaper in front of beam expander (Top Hat size @ 1/e < 90m). Top Hat size is determined by numerical aperture (NA) of focused beam and is given by:
nessesary diameter of Gaussian input 2 beam @1/e : 3.6 mm
distance => infinity
The Top-Hat beams haper GTH-3.6-1.75FA generating a square Top-Hat profile with a full fan angle of 1.75mrad. To get best results it is necessary to use a Gaussian TEM00 input beam with a diameter of 3.6 mm @ 1/e. For all setups using GTH beam shaper the user have to consider that the free aperture along the total beam path have to be at least 2.2 (better 2.5) times bigger than the beam diameter @ 1/e.
3.2 m 5x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (10x @ 532 nm) NA

Top-Hat beam shaper lens focusing lens/objective radius of beam @ focusing optic
Optical setup for Top-Hat beam shaper GTH-3.6-1.75FA

There are different possibilities to integrate the GTH-3.6-1.75FA beam shaper into an optical setup. 1. Beam shaper directly in front of focusing optic/objective (Top Hat size @ 1/e > 90 m). Top Hat size is determined by focal length (f) of focusing optic/ 1.75 objective and can be calculated as follows: f 1000
Top-Hat beam shaper lens additional focusing lens/objective
nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 3.6 mm
beam expander
focal length
collimated input beam distance = f1 = 50 mm
Top-Hat size 87.5 87.5 m
Top-Hat size 1.31 1.31 mm full fan angle 1.75 mrad
To realize Top Hat sizes smaller than 90m its recommended to introduce the GTH-3.6-1.75FA into the beam path in front of a beam expander. Initially the necessary input beam diameter of 3.6mm @ 1/e is passing the GTH. Afterwards the beam is expanded and focused on working plane. The initial diffraction limited Gaussian spot at focal plane will be transformed into a square homogeneous Top-Hat profile. The resulting Top-Hat size is given by:
3.2 m 5x diffraction limited @ 1064 nm (10x @ 532 nm) NA NA represents the numerical aperture of focused beam and is given by: beam radius @ focusing optic NA = focal length of focusing optic
distance = f2= 750 mm distance => infinity
7.9
Optical Systems
3. Beam shaper within beam expander (Top Hat size @ 1/e < 90 m). Top Hat size is determined by numerical aperture (NA) of focused beam and is given by:
NA represents the numerical aperture of focused beam and is given by: beam radius @ focusing optic NA = focal length of focusing optic

Top-Hat beam shaper lens focusing lens/objective free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e
Homogeneous line generation with additional cylindrical lens

input beam beam shaper lens additional spherical lens/objective cylindrical lens distance l homogeneous line profile
nessesary diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: 3.6 mm diameter of Gaussian input beam @1/e2: <3.6 mm
radius of beam @ focusing optic

focal length
working distance d = ffocusing lens
A further and even more flexible possibility is to introduce GTH3.6-1.75FA into the beam path within a beam expander. The user has the possibility for an easy fine tuning of beam diameter at the position of GTH-3.6-1.75FA by shifting shaper along z-axis. Its just necessary to consider that the beam diameter at the position of GTH is 3.6 mm @ 1/e. The resulting Top-Hat size is given by:
distance l1 > I
If an additional cylindrical lens is used, one can generate homogeneous line profiles. By varying the distance l the width of line profile (short axis) can be changed from near diffraction limited size to several millimeters. We recommend the use of a cylindrical lens or lens system with a focal length of = 1.8 m.
FBS
New Diffractive Beam Shaping Concept ! based on Fourier methods Transforming Gaussian TEM00 beam into square or round homogeneous Top-Hat profile Top Hat size is near diffraction limited and is given by: ~ /NA Achievable Top Hat sizes: 1 m 200 m
Top Hat Beam Shaping Lens

Optical Systems Specifications
Material Diameter Input Beam Necessary Free Aperture Top Hat Size Homogenity Wavelength Transmission Efficiency Damage Threshhold Scope Of Delivery Free Aperture Accessories fused silica 25.4 mm TEM00, different models for diameter@1/e: 2.0, 3.0 or 10 mm 2.2x (or better 2.5x) beam diameter@1/e 1.5x diffraction limited Gaussian spot +/- 2.5% different models for: 1064 nm, 532 nm or 355 nm > 99% > 95% 4 J/cm @ 532 nm, 10 ns beam shaper mounted in x/y-holder 23 mm beam expander tolerance 0.1 mm tolerance 5% along total beam path square form (round optional) rel. to average intensity within tophat others on request AR/AR coating of input energy within tophat profile
FBS Operation Instructions

FBS Top-Hat Fundamental Beam Mode Shaper
Input: Gaussian profile Input: Gaussian profile Focusing system d Focusing system
F FBS
Without FBS Beam Shaper: Gaussian-profile at focal plane
With FBS Beam Shaper: Top-Hat-profile at focal plane FBS works together with focusing system (FS) Top Hat size just depends on wavelength () and numerical aperture (NA) of focused beam Distance d between FBS and FS up to several meters
7.10
Optical Systems
Intensity distribution at focal plane

Main FBS advantages: Smallest achievable Top-Hat size: always 1,5x of diffraction limited Gaussian-spot @ 1/e Achievable Top Hat profiles: square or round Diffraction efficiency: > 95% of energy in Top Hat Homogeneity: modulation < 2.5% Depth of focus: similar as for Gaussian beam Insensitive to misalignment, ellipticity and input diameter variation: 5-10%
2. Beam shaper in front of a beam expander

FBS beam shaper free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e focusing lens/objective radius of beam @ focusing optic
beam expander
focal length
Without FBS shaper: diffraction limited Gaussian profile
There is also the possibility to introduce the FBS beam shaper into the beam path in front of a beam expander. This leads to a higher numerical aperture of focused beam and to a smaller Top Hat profile. Example: A Gaussian beam with a diameter of 5 mm@1/e illuminates the FBS beam shaper and is afterwards increased by a beam expander to a beam diameter of 8 mm. With an focusing optic with f=50 mm the user can generate a Top Hat with a diameter of 7 m. The needed free aperture increases with the expanded beam. For a beam with a diameter of 8 mm the free aperture have to be at least 18 mm.
3. Beam shaper within a beam expander

FBS beam shaper free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e free aperture 2.2x beam diameter @1/e focusing lens/objective radius of beam @ focusing optic
7.11
Optical Systems
With FBS shaper: near diffraction limited Top Hat profile
Optical setup for FBS Top-Hat beam shaper

Independent of optical setup the user has to consider that: The free aperture along the total beam path have to be at least 2.2x (better 2.5x) bigger than the beam diameter @ 1/ e The Top Hat size is always given by: NA is the used wavelength; NA is the numerical aperture beam radius @ focusing optic of focused beam and is given by: focal length of focusing optic There are different possibilities to integrate the FBS beam shaper into an optical setup. 1. Beam shaper directly in front of a focusing optic/objective
ITO
FBS beam shaper additional focusing lens/objective radius of beam @ focusing optic
focal length
A further and even more flexible possibility is to introduce the FBS beam shaper into the beam path within a beam expander. The user has the possibility for an easy fine tuning of beam diameter at the position of FBS beam shaper by shifting shaper along z-axis.
Scribing of CIGS-solar cells

P2 P3
CdS Cu(InGa)Se2 Mo
focal length
Polymer substrate
P1
By introducing the FBS beam shaper into the beam path in front of a lens/objective the initial diffraction limited Gaussian spot will be transformed into a homogeneous Top-Hat profile. When a Gaussian TEM00 input beam with a diameter of 5 mm@ 1/e is used the diameter of the free aperture along the total beam path have to be at least 11 mm (better 13 mm). If for example a wavelength with 532 nm, a Gaussian TEM00 input beam with a diameter of 5 mm@1/e and a focusing lens with f=160 mm is used, ones will get a homogeneous Top Hat profile with a diameter of 34 m.
Wasted area, reducing efficiency need of smallest scribing lines Cut quality influence efficiency need of small HAZ, no debris, smooth edges High scanning speed for high throughput need of small pulse overlap
Optical Systems
P1 Scribing
P3 Scribing
Gaussian Profile
FBS-Top-Hat Profile
small overlap, smooth edges
Gaussian Profile
FBS-Top-Hat Profile
small HAZ, smooth edges
Removal of a front contact in ZnO(1 m)/CIGS/Mo/PI structure. Laser PL10100/SH, 10 ps, 370 mW, 100 kHz, 532 nm; scanning speed 4.3 m/s, single pass.
Tilted SEM pictures of the P3 scribe in ZnO(1 m)/CIGS/ Mo/PI structure. Laser PL10100/SH, 10 ps, 370 mW, 100 kHz, 532nm; scanning speed 60 mm/s, single pass. Raciukaitis et. al, JLMN-Vol. 6, No. 1, 2011
990-0060
Continuously Variable Attenuator / Beamsplitter

Divides laser beam into two beams of manually adjustable intensity ratio Convenient 90 angle between reflected and transmitted beams Negligible beam deviation Large dynamic range Broadband transmission Weight 0.16 kg precision opto-mechanical holder 8400197. Variable attenuator/beamsplitter incorporates a high-performance Polarizing Cube Beamsplitter which reflects s-polarized light at 90 while transmitting p-polarized light. A rotating /2 waveplate is placed in the incident polarized laser beam. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, and their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. Pure p-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or pure s-polarization for maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam.
Continuously Variable Attenuator/Beamsplitter is designed for down to 100 fs laser pulses. It consists of 2 high-performance polarizing optics components placed in
Multiple Order Half Waveplate and Cube Polarizing Beamsplitters

Specifications
Damage threshold Antireflection coating Extinction ratio Catalogue number 990-0061-10 990-0061-15 990-0061-20 990-0064-10 990-0064-15 990-0064-20 990-0065-10 990-0065-15 990-0065-20 200 mJ/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical R < 0.25% all entrance and exit surfaces Ts/Tp < 1:200 Central wavelength, nm 1064 1064 1064 532 532 532 355 355 355 Clear aperture, mm 9 14 17 9 14 17 9 14 17 Price, EUR 465 495 515 465 495 515 596 656 706
Achromatic Air-Spaced Waveplate and Glan Laser Polarizing Prism

Specifications
Damage threshold Antireflection coating Extinction ratio 0.5 J/cm2 10 ns, 10 Hz at 1064 nm R < 1% all entrance and exit surfaces Ts/Tp < 1:10000
for Broadband Region

Catalogue number 990-0060-10VIS 990-0060-12VIS 990-0060-10IR 990-0060-12IR 990-0060-10FIR 990-0060-12FIR Central wavelength, nm 450-680 450-680 700-1000 700-1000 950-1300 950-1300 Clear aperture, mm 9 11 9 11 9 11 Price, EUR 1290 1395 1290 1395 1290 1395
Optical Systems
7.12
Optical Systems
990-0070
Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser beam

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical Adapter and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0197. Two Thin Film Brewster type polarizers, which reflect s-polarized light while transmitting p-polarized light, are housed into Adapter. Quartz Half Wave plates are housed in rotating holder 840-0197. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-poS-pol Thin Film Polarizer Linearly polarized beam Thin Film Polarizer
larization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizers by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
80
Transmission, %
60
40
42.1 P-pol
20
Half Waveplate
20
80
100
For Nd:YAG Laser Applications

Aperture diameter Damage threshold Polarization Contrast (after 1st polarizer) Polarization Contrast (after 2nd polarizer)
17 mm 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical >1:200 >1:500
7.13
Optical Systems
Divides laser beam into two parallel beams of manually adjustable intensity ratio Large dynamic range Negligible transmitted beam deviation High Optical damage threshold Weight 0.35 kg

Aperture diameter Damage threshold for high power laser applications Time dispersion Polarization Contrast (after 1st polarizer) Polarization Contrast (after 2nd polarizer) 17 mm >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical t<4 fs for 100 fs Ti:Sapphire laser pulses >1:200 >1:500
Related Products
Beam dumps 990-0800, 990-0820
See page 7.34
Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064
Price, EUR 850 750 650 650
Multi order half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for Nd:YAG laser pulses (laser damage threshold: 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical).


Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for femtosecond laser pulses (laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for high power femtosecond applications (laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Optical Systems
990-0070M
Motorized Variable Attenuator for linearly polarized laser beam

This motorized variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical Adapter and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0193. Two Thin Film Brewster type polarizers, which reflect s-polarized light while transmitting p-polarized light, are housed into Adapter. Quartz Half Waveplates are housed in motorized rotation stage 960-0161. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0193 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizers by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
810-0090
960-0161 840-0193
810-0090
960-0161
134.5* 84
159* 820-0110-02
157*
820-0110-02

Catalogue number 990-0070-266M 990-0070-355M 990-0070-532M 990-0070-1064M Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064 Price, EUR 1630 1530 1430 1430
Multi order half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for Nd:YAG laser application (laser damage threshold: 5 J/cm2, 10 ns pulses, 10 Hz at 1064 nm, typical).

Catalogue number 990-0070-343M 990-0070-400M 990-0070-400BM 990-0070-515M 990-0070-515BM 990-0070-800M 990-0070-800BM 990-0070-1030M 990-0070-1030BM Wavelength, nm 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 1620 1520 1670 1520 1670 1520 1670 1520 1670
For High Power Femtosecond Applications

Catalogue number 990-0070-266HM 990-0070-343HM 990-0070-400HM 990-0070-400HBM 990-0070-515HM 990-0070-515HBM 990-0070-800HM 990-0070-800HBM 990-0070-1030HM 990-0070-1030HBM Wavelength, nm 266 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 1800 1695 1595 1745 1595 1745 1595 1745 1595 1745
Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for femtosecond laser application (laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for high power femtosecond laser application (laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Optical Systems
7.14
Optical Systems
990-0071
Variable Attenuators for Linearly Polarized Laser Beam

This variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical adapter for polarizer at 56 840-0117A or 840-0118A and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0197. Thin Film Brewster type polarizer, which reflect s-polarized light at 56 while transmitting p-polarized light, is housed into adapter for polarizer at 56. Quartz Half Waveplates are housed in rotating holder 840-0197. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0197 allows to adjust Angle Of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizer by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
100
80
Transmission, %
60
sp ol.
68
ppol.
40
56
20
Attenuation range 0.5%-95%

0 0 20 40 60 Waveplate angle, deg 80 100
Light direction
Half waveplate

Aperture diameter Damage threshold Polarization Contrast 10 mm 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical >1:200
7.15
Optical Systems

Aperture diameter Damage threshold for high power laser applications Time dispersion Polarization Contrast 10 mm >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical t<4 fs for 100 fs Ti:Sapphire laser pulses >1:200

Catalogue number 990-0071-266 990-0071-355 990-0071-532 990-0071-1064 Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064 Price, EUR 510 475 445 445
Multi order half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for Nd:YAG laser pulses (laser damage threshold: 5 J/cm2 pulsed at 1064 nm, typical).


Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for femtosecond laser pulses (laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fs pulse at 800 nm, typical).
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in rotating holder 840-0197 for high power femtosecond applications (laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Optical Systems
990-0071M
Motorized Variable Attenuator for linearly polarized laser beam

This motorized variable attenuator/beamsplitter consists of special design opto-mechanical adapter for polarizer at 56 840-0117A or 840-0118A and precision opto-mechanical holder 840-0193. Thin Film Brewster type polarizer, which reflect s-polarized light at 56 while transmitting p-polarized light, is housed into adapter for polarizer at 56. Quartz Half Waveplates are housed in motorized rotation stage 960-0161. The intensity ratio of those two beams may be continuously varied without alteration of other beam parameters by rotating the waveplate. The intensity of either exit beam, or their intensity ratio, can be controlled over a wide dynamic range. P-polarization could be selected for maximum transmission, or high-purity s-polarization could be reflected when maximum attenuation of the transmitted beam takes place. The holder 840-0193 allows to adjust Angle of Incidence of the Thin Film Brewster type polarizer by 2 and to get the maximum polarization contrast.
810-0090 960-0161 840-0193 840-0117A 960-0161 810-0090
134.5* 84
129.5* 820-0110-02
157*
820-0110-02

Catalogue number 990-0071-266M 990-0071-355M 990-0071-532M 990-0071-1064M Wavelength, nm 266 355 532 1064 Price, EUR 1295 1260 1230 1230
Multi order half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for Nd:YAG laser application (laser damage threshold: 5 J/cm2, 10 ns pulses, 10 Hz at 1064 nm, typical).

Catalogue number 990-0071-343M 990-0071-400M 990-0071-400BM 990-0071-515M 990-0071-515BM 990-0071-800M 990-0071-800BM 990-0071-1030M 990-0071-1030BM Wavelength, nm 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 1380 1330 1430 1330 1430 1330 1430 1330 1430
For High Power Femtosecond Applications

Catalogue number 990-0071-266HM 990-0071-343HM 990-0071-400HM 990-0071-400HBM 990-0071-515HM 990-0071-515HBM 990-0071-800HM 990-0071-800HBM 990-0071-1030HM 990-0071-1030HBM Wavelength, nm 266 343 400 390-410 515 505-525 800 780-820 1030 1010-1050 Price, EUR 1470 1445 1395 1495 1395 1495 1395 1495 1395 1495
Zero order optically contacted half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for femtosecond laser application (laser damage threshold: >10 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Zero Order Air-Spaced half waveplate is housed in Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0161 and Polarizer with adapter in Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0193 for high power femtosecond laser application (laser damage threshold: >100 mJ/cm2, 50 fsec pulse, 800 nm typical).
Optical Systems
7.16
Optical Systems
990-1000
Precision Spatial Filter

990-0100 990-0100
860-0060-04SF 990-1000 with Precision Pinholes and Microscope Objectives
3-axes adjustment with micrometers Accommodates virtually any microscope objective Unobscured view of a pinhole facilitates alignment Easy pinhole removal and replacement
Optical Systems
Microscope Objective and Precision Pinholes can be supplied as option.

Precision Spatial Filter 990-1000 filters the beam from any low power, visible to near infrared laser. The result the output beam is delivered with a smooth, near ideal intensity profile. The Spatial Filter consists of two YZ Positioners 990-0100 and Translation Stage 860-0060-04SF (modification of 860-0060-04). YZ Posi tioner for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives 990-0100 provides adjustment of the pinhole and
Code 990-1000 Weight, kg 0.87 Price, EUR 480
objective in two axes. The precision X axis motion is provided by Translation Stage 860-0060-04SF. The pinhole and the objective should be selected and ordered separately. Provided selection of interchangeable microscope objective lenses and precision pinholes allow to build the best spatial filter for your laser.
Complementary Products Code 850-0040 860-0060-04 990-0100 Page 8.96 8.107 7.18
Related Products
Precision pinholes
See page 7.19
990-1000 Precision Spatial Filter
Microscope Objectives Precision Pinholes
Microscope objectives
See page 7.19
850-0040 Single Axis Tilt Stage
Standard Rod
Single-Axis Tilt Stage 850-0040 greatly facilitates pitch adjustment relative to the optical axis.
7.17
Optical Systems
990-0100 990-0200
Y-Z Positioner for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives

ring fixing screw
990-0100
99
0-0
10
Y-Z Positioners for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives are compact mounts designed to precisely position optical components in the plane orthogonal to the optical axis. Ideal for microscope objectives, mounted pinholes, fiber optics chucks, and diode lasers. The mounts provide 5 mm translation with sensitivity of 2 m. 990-0100 may contain one of 1 inch rings: W0.8, A1 or B1. 990-0200 may contain one of 2 inch rings: A2 or B2. Two adjustment screws 870-0030 are used for positioning. They can be replaced with any screw or micrometer with M101 mounting thread. Two ways to fasten positioner: mounting posts 820-0010 by an M6 hole; on a connecting cone 820-0250; 820-0254 by a 7 hole. Material: black anodized aluminium.
24...29
13
L
7 M4
2 contact lines
D
14 M6
Insert rings
A1, A2
W0.8
86
0-0
990-0100-B1 990-0200-B2 990-0100-W0.8
1 Positioner with ring B1 2 Positioner with ring B2 1 Positioner with ring W0.8
Model 990-0100 990-0200
D, mm 58 83
d, mm 25.5 51
C, mm 24 48
L, mm 102 127
Weight, Price, kg EUR 0.26 0.38 149 159
06
0-0
990-0050 990-0051
Y-Z PositionerS for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives

62 ... 65
Travel range 3 mm Weight 0.12 kg Y-Z Positioner 990-0050 ac cepts optics 25.4mm. Optics is stopped by a rest-flange inside the central aper ture of the platform and is secured by a hex fixing screw with hard plastic tip. 9900050 is ideal for mic ro scope objectives, mounted pinholes, fiber optics chucks and diode lasers. 990-0051 includes two plastic padding rings and a retaining ring M27x1 to fix the optics. A tightening key for the retaining ring is available on request.
53
2 contact lines
62 ... 65
M6x7
fixing screw for a hex-key
25.5 15.5
990-0050
990-0050
62 ... 65 53 2.5
62 ... 65
Code 990-0050 990-0051 990-0051
Price, EUR 119 119
M271 M6x7
990-0051
15.5
M271
23
Optical Systems
M4 fix ing co sc r co nnec ne tin ew s8 g 20 -02 50
990-0100-A1 990-0200-A2 1 Positioner with ring A1 2 Positioner with ring A2
B1, B2
7.18
Optical Systems
Precision Pinholes
6 1 3 4m
25
13
23
retaining ring 130.8 pinhole 130.15 0.15
For diffraction experiments, alignment purposes, projection applications Chemically etched apertures Apertures formed in vacuum 4 m thick pinhole in a kovar foil Ultra-thin substrate minimizes laser power loss Chemically inert
Precision Pinhole is a round aperture precisely formed and controlled in a kovar foil. To facilitate handling, a pinhole foil is mounted in 25 mm black metal donut. Precision Pinholes can be used in Precision Spatial Filters 990-1000 or YZ Positioner for Lens, Pinholes and Objectives 990-0100.
We also offer pinholes with diameter D in the range of 45100 m every 5m. Pinholes of custom dia meters up-to 200m are available on request.
Model 990-0010 990-0020 990-0030 990-0040 D, m 100.5 200.5 300.5 400.5 500.5 750.5 1000.5 Price, EUR 39 34 29 29 29 29 29
990-1000 Precision Spatial Filter
Microscope Objectives Precision Pinholes
990-0049 990-0075 990-0110
7.19
Optical Systems
990-0100
850-0040 Single Axis Tilt Stage Standard Rod
Complementary Products Code 850-0040 990-1000 990-0100 Page 8.96 7.17 7.18
Single-Axis Tilt Stage 850-0040 greatly facilitates pitch adjustment relative to the optical axis.
Microscope Objectives
Model 990-0012 990-0042 990-0027 990-0001 990-0023 990-0041 Magnification 3.7 8 20 40 40 90 Numerical aperture 0.11 0.2 0.4 0.65 0.75 1.25 Focal length, mm 33.1 18.14 8.4 8.25 4.32 1.96 Working distance, mm 27.2 8.57 1.7 0.41 1.8 0.10 S, mm 50 33 33 33 32.7 32.7 System dry dry dry dry water immersion oil immersion Price, EUR 93 124 134 157 172 222
Thread size W0.8x1/36''.
Optical Systems
992 993 994
unmounted Iris Diaphragms

EKSMA OPTICS offers three types of unmounted Iris Diaphragms: Zero aperture Iris Diaphragms (992 series), standard iris diaphragms with retainer (993 series), standard iris diaphragms screwed (994 series). Iris diaphragm provides a continuously variable field stop for controlling the focal length of an optical system or for adjusting the diameter of a beam. Iris diaphragms enable smooth operation over the lever travel, from maximum to minimum aperture. Lever actuators of the iris diaphragms are either of plastic tab or steel pin. Zero Aperture iris diaphragms provide total light extinction.
Zero Aperture Iris Diaphragms (992 Series)

AR - Leaves with AR coating, for temperatures up to 180C N - Springsteel, black finished, for temperatures up to 250C H - Stainless steel, for temperatures up to 400C HT - High-temperature alloy for up to 1000C
Code 992-2512 992-2915 992-3922 992-4830 992-6940 992-9460 992-1177 992-1258 992-1359 992-1601
A, Outer Diameter, mm 25 29 39 48 69 94 117 125 135 160
B, Max. Aperture, mm 12 15 22 30 40 60 75 85 98 113
D, Thickness, E, Number mm of Leaves 5 5 5 5 6.5 9 9.5 9.5 8.5 13 12 12 14 14 14 16 18 18 20 20
Tab/ Pin Pin Pin Pin Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Pin
L, mm 12 12 11 11 16 25 53 50 50 18
M, mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.3 4.5 4.8 4.8 4.3 6.5
W, mm 96 97 99 100 96 98 97 98 102 101
N/H/HT H/N H/N H/N H/N/HT H/N/HT H/N/HT H/N/HT H/N/HT H/N/HT N/H/NT
Please add letter H, N or HT to code to indicate temperature needed.
Iris Diaphragms with Retainer (993 Series)

Code 993-1005 993-1207 993-1482 993-1488 993-1912 993-2214 993-2415 993-2818 993-3020 993-3322-N 993-3725-N 993-4027
A, Outer Diameter, mm 10 12 14 14.8 19.8 22 24 28 30 33 37 40
B, Max. Aperture, mm 5 7 8.2 8 12 14 15 18 20 22 25 27
C, Min. Aperture, mm 0.5 0.5 0.8 1 1 1 1 1 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5
D, Thickness, E, Number mm of Leaves 4 4 4 4.5 5 5 5 5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 8 8 8 9 11 10 12 12 12 14 15 12
Tab/ Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
L, mm 4 6 6 6 10 10 13 13 13 13 13 13
M, mm 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.9 2.9 3 3
W, mm 78 88 80 77 89 94 89 90 90 94 94 91
AR/N/H AR/N AR/N N N AR/H/N AR/N H/N AR AR/H/N N N AR/H/N
Optical Systems
7.20
Optical Systems
B, Max. Aperture, mm 30 34 36 37 42 40 45 50 60 75 81 90 98 113 120 C, Min. Aperture, mm 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4 4 3 3.5 4 6 6
Code 993-4330 993-4934 993-5036-N 993-5337-N 993-5842-N 993-6040-N 993-6445-H 993-7050-N 993-8260 993-1075 993-1181-AR 993-1290-AR 993-1398 993-1513 993-1612
A, Outer Diameter, mm 43 49 50 53 58 60 64 70 82 100 110 120 130 150 165
D, Thickness, E, Number mm of Leaves 5.5 6.5 6 6 6.5 6.5 7 7 8 9 10 12 12 13 15 14 14 16 16 18 12 14 18 17 20 16 20 20 20 18
Tab/ Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
L, mm 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 15 13 15 15 15 20 20 20
M, mm 3 3.4 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.9 3.8 4.5 4.5 5 6.5 6.5 7.3 7.9
W, mm 93 93 93 90 94 88 93 93 92 94 95 97 97 95 95
AR/N/H H/N AR/H N N N N H/N N H/N H/N AR AR H/N H/N H/N
Please add letter AR, N or H to code to indicate temperature needed.
Screwed Iris Diaphragms (994 Series)

7.21
Optical Systems
Code 994-1508-N 994-1585-N 994-2214-N 994-3118-N 994-4027-N 994-4830-N 994-6040-N 994-7050-N 994-8260-N
A, Outer Diameter, mm 15 15.5 22 31 40 48.5 60 70 82
B, Max. Aperture, mm 8 8.5 14 18 27 30 40 50 60
C, Min. Aperture, mm 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.2 2.5 2.5 4
D, Thickness, E, Number mm of Leaves 5.3 5.3 6 6.5 6.2 7 7.8 7 10 9 9 10 11 12 10 12 18 17
Tab/ Pin Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab
L, mm 5 8 12 10 11 10 13 13 11
M, mm 2.3 2.3 2.8 3.4 3.4 3.7 4.5 3.9 5.4
W, mm 75 85 91 85 89 87 88 93 92
N N N N N N N N N N
Optical Systems
992 993 994
mounted Iris Diaphragms

In optics there are a lot of fields where accurate amount of light, precise projection, specific depth of focus and other requirements are necessary. For such areas the use of iris diaphragms is one of the best options. These applications are met in industry of optics, opto-electronics, laser and medical technology, lightening technology and other. Our iris diaphragms are made of high quality materials. Also, we use highest manufacturing standards. These points lead to reliability and durability of our products. Design Our iris diaphragms consist of leaves and case. Leaves are made of hardened spring steel. Stainless chrome nickel steel can be used when better resistance to heat is necessary. The surface of leaves is polished and reducing the reflections. The edges of the leaves are rounded to achieve smooth operation. For increasing the slip of leaves an invisible coating is applied. Next, protection from corrosion is guaranteed by particular polishing process. Further, for producing the case, corrosion resistant aluminum alloy is used. Fine mat black look is achieved by black-anodizing the surface of the case. Custom models We have a wide variety of iris diaphragms that suit to different applications. Also, we introduce the series of fully closing iris diaphragms to meet the needs of all customers. Nevertheless, if you dont find suitable model, we can make custom iris diaphragm. The changes can be made in dimensions, form; it can be adapted to high temperatures, adapted for special fastening or modified according to your other requests.
992-2915M
993-2415M
Mounted Zero Aperture Iris Diaphragms (992 Series)

Code 992-2512M 992-2915M 992-3922M A, Outer Diameter, mm 25 29 39 B, Max. G, Aperture, mm mm 32.5 36.5 46 12 15 22 C, Min. Aperture, mm D, Thickness, mm 5 5 5 E, NumTab/ ber of Pin Leaves 12 12 14 Pin Pin Pin L, mm 12 12 11 M, mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 W, mm 96 97 99 N/H H/N H/N H/N
AR - Leaves with AR coating, for temperatures up to 180C N - Springsteel, black finished, for temperatures up to 250C
H - Stainless steel, for temperatures up to 400C HT - High-temperature alloy for up to 1000C
Mounted Iris Diaphragms with Retainer (993 Series)

A, Outer Diameter, mm 22 24 37 49 50 70 14.8 14 B, Max. G, Aperture, mm mm 29.5 31 44 56 57 77 23 22 14 15 25 34 36 50 8 8.2 C, Min. Aperture, mm 1 1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 1 0.8 D, Thickness, mm 5 5 5.5 6.5 6 7 4.5 4 E, NumTab/ ber of Pin Leaves 10 12 15 14 16 18 9 8 Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin L, mm 10 13 13 13 13 15 6 6 M, mm 2.7 2.7 3 3.4 3.2 3.8 2.5 2.4 W, mm 94 89 94 93 93 93 77 80
Code 993-2214M 993-2415M 993-3725M 993-4934M 993-5036M 993-7050M 993-1488M 993-1482M
AR/N/H AR/N H/N N AR/H N N N N
Optical Systems
7.22
Optical Systems
Mounted Screwed Iris Diaphragms (994 Series)

Code 994-2214M 994-3118M 994-4830M 994-7050M 994-1508M 994-1585M A, Outer Diameter, mm 22 31 48.5 70 15 15,5 B, Max. G, Aperture, mm mm 29.5 38 55.5 77 23 23 14 18 30 50 8 8,5 C, Min. Aperture, mm 1 1,5 1,2 2,5 1 1 D, Thickness, mm 6 6.5 7 7 5,3 5,3 E, NumTab/ ber of Pin Leaves 10 11 10 18 9 9 Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab Tab L, mm 12 10 10 13 5 8 M, mm 2,8 3,4 3,7 3,9 2,3 2,3 W, mm 91 85 87 93 75 85 AR/N/H N N N N N N
995 Series
Motorized Iris Diaphragms (Max. Aperture Range 5-27 mm)

34
17
Specifications
Closing speed (min to max) 1.2 seconds Stepper motor/gear Limit switch Switch polarity 50:1 2 mechanical pushed is closed
M3x6 deep 2holes M4x6 deep

Optical Systems
diaphragm mount
Temperature limits AR - Leaves with AR coating, for temperatures up to 180C N - Springsteel, black finished, for temperatures up to 250C
995 Series Motorized Iris Diaphragms are available with various aperture ranges, with apertures from 5 mm to 98 mm. Irises with max. apertures from 5 mm to 27 mm are shown on this page. Irises with max. apertures up to 27 mm close from min. to max. in 1.2 seconds with resolution depending on aperture size (see table below). Zero aperture motorized iris diaphragms are available on request, max. aperture sizes from 12 mm to 40 mm.
37
62
50
Catalogue number 995-1005-AR 995-1005-N 995-1207-AR 995-1207-N 995-1488-N 995-1482-N 995-1912-AR 995-1912-H 995-1912-N Diaphragm Used 993-1005-AR 993-1005-N 993-1207-AR 993-1207-N 993-1488-N 993-1482-N 993-1912-AR 993-1912-H 993-1912-N 993-2214-AR 993-2214-N 993-2415-H 993-2415-N 993-2818-AR 993-3020-AR 993-3020-H 993-3020-N 993-3322-N 993-3725-N 993-4027-AR 993-4027-H 993-4027-N
48
Min. Clear Aperture, mm 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
H - Stainless steel, for temperatures up to 400C Max. Clear Aperture, mm 5 5 7 7 8 8.2 12 12 12 14 14 15 15 18 20 20 20 22 25 27 27 27 Resolution, steps per mm 444 444 308 308 286 260 182 182 182 154 154 143 143 118 106 106 106 98 85 78 78 78
Recommended Controllers
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
995-2214-AR 995-2214-N 995-2415-H 995-2415-N 995-2818-AR 995-3020-AR 995-3020-H
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
995-3020-N 995-3322-N 995-3725-N 995-4027-AR 995-4027-H 995-4027-N
7.23
Optical Systems
996 Series

50
Temperature limits AR - Leaves with AR coating, for temperatures up to 180C N - Springsteel, black finished, for temperatures up to 250C
M4x6 deep 2holes M6x9 deep

dmin...dmax clear aperture
34.4
H - Stainless steel, for temperatures up to 400C
diaphragm mount
Irises with max. apertures from 30 mm to 50 mm close from min. to max. in 2 seconds with resolution depending on aperture size (see table below). Zero aperture motorized iris diaphragms are available on request, max. aperture sizes from 12 mm to 40 mm.
99 58
82
54.3
dmin Aperture, mm 1.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 dmax Aperture, mm 30 30 34 34 36 37 40 42 45 45 50 Resolution, steps per mm 70 70 62 62 60 58 53 51 47 47 42
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
996-4330-H 996-4330-N 996-4934-AR 996-4934-N 996-5036-N 996-5337-N 996-6040-N 996-5842-N 996-6445-H 996-6445-N 996-7050-N
993-4330-H 993-4330-N 993-4934-AR 993-4934-N 993-5036-N 993-5337-N 993-6040-N 993-5842-N 993-6445-H 993-6445-N 993-7050-N
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
Optical Systems
Catalogue number
Diaphragm Used
7.24
Optical Systems
997 Series
new
dial knob
30 5.5
M6x15 deep
50
for M6 screws (1/4-20) 2 clearance holes
dmin...dmax
clear aperture cable with connector HDB15(M)
Smooth and fast operation Continuously adjustable light attenuation Compact design Control via PC through USB or RS232 Adjustable inserts
85
140 204
Stepper motor
7
4 4 4 4 3 3.5 4 4
160
36 49
997 Series Motorized Iris Diaphragm Mount was developed due to interest in our previously presented motorized iris 993 Series. Motorized Iris Diaphragm is designed for our small medium family. Unfortunately it is impossible to interchange iris diaphragms at home since every diaphramg has its own adapter ring and requires calibration.
Specifications
Closing speed (min to max) Stepper motor/gear Limit switch Switch polarity 3 sec 195:1 2, mechanical pushed is closed
Temperature limits AR - Leaves with AR coating, for temperatures up to 180C N - Springsteel, black finished, for temperatures up to 250C H - Stainless steel, for temperatures up to 400C Resolution, steps per mm 696 696 549 549 500 451 415 415
7.25
Optical Systems
Catalogue number 997-8260-H 997-8260-N 997-1075-H 997-1075-N 997-1181-AR 997-1290-AR 997-1398-H 997-1398-N
Diaphragm used 993-8260-H 993-8260-N 993-1075-H 993-1075-N 993-1181-AR 993-1290-AR 993-1398-H 993-1398-N
Max. aperture, Min. aperture, mm mm 60 60 75 75 81 90 98 98
980-0131F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0131-RS232
see page 8.183
Optical Systems
990-0604
Variable Wheel Attenuator

4 wheels 3 filter per wheel (12 filters in total) Filter diameter 20 or 25.4 mm Maximum deviation 0.09 mm Clear aperture 18/20 mm C-mount threads on both ends Connecting adapters available
W
1-32, 4 holes D (18 clear)
52 5
h1
h2
990-0604-01
h3
30
M6
Variable Wheel Attenuator 990-0604 is a basic model with 4 filter-set wheels. Each wheel contains 4 filter slots each for 20 mm with clear aperture of 18 mm. Each filter slot is inclined by 4to avoid retroreflections. Each wheel has 4 fixed positions. You can use any of these 4 filter positions as an optical axis. The back and front panels do not to obscure.
18 4
Both panels have 132 threaded holes (C-Mounts). Separately you may order standard connecting adapters 990-0000-01, 990-0000-02 and 990-0000-03. Custom adapters are available. Mounting M6 hole is provided in the bottom plate. 990-0604-02 model is designed to accept 1 (25.4mm) filters with maximum thickness of 3 mm. This model comes without filters.
10
11 / 32
11 / 32
10
11 / 32
0.836
132
990-0000-01
990-0000-02
990-0000-03
Model 990-0604-01 990-0604-02
H, mm 84 95
W, mm 70 80
h1, mm 67 75
h2, mm 45 50
h3, mm 23 25
D, mm 20 25.4
Weight, kg 0.35 0.40
Price, EUR 457 297
Note: 960-0604-01 is with filters 20 mm. 990-0604-02 is without filters. 960-0604-02 is suitable for Neutral Density and Colour Glass filters 25.4 mm that should be ordered seperately.
RELATED Products
Neutral Density Filters 25.4 mm
See page 1.13
Colour Glass Filters 25.4 mm

See page 1.15
Optical Systems
29
30
20
7.26
Optical Systems
990-0704
Closed Variable Wheel Attenuator

4 wheels, each containing 3 filters & 1 empty space 4 fixed positions per wheel Diameter NDF 20 mm Maximum thickness 3 mm Non-parallel filters (inclined by 4) Maximum deviation 0.09 mm Clear aperture 18 mm C-mount threads on both ends Connecting adapters available Stray light fully eliminated Variable height of the optical axis Three mounting holes Close Variable Wheel Attenuator is used when it is necessary to fully eliminate the side background lighting when using photodetectors with high sensitivity (e.g. CCD, photomultiplier, etc.). You may order standard connecting adapters 990-000001 and 990-0000-02 separately. Custom adapters are available too. Loosen the central axis and rotate the whole body of the filter to set the desired position of an optical axis at a height between 3671 mm. The base of the attenuator has M6 holes on 3 sides for mounting versatility.
990-0704
Code 990-0704
Weight, kg 0.55
Price, EUR 549
M6 77.5
86.5
M6
2 holes
64.5 4
range of filter positions
30
18
10
11 / 32 11 / 32
fixing ring optical labyrinth
10
990-0000-01
990-0000-02
7.27
11 / 32
29
20
36
36...71
Optical Systems
Optical Systems
Some applications of optical filters

In systems for laser beam diagnostics with CCD-cameras Measurement of laser power, pulse energy and pulse duration Spectroscopy We can offer a set of bandpass filters for mercury lamp, laser lines, and for your other needs A choice of filters is available for our standard 4-wheel attenuators, allowing 256 relative positions of wheels, rendering 99 different transmission values, of which you can find a very close match to the desired value. Discrete filters permit to establish accurate optical density. Also we can offer designs with 1, 2, 3 and more wheels.
Table 1. List of a standard filter-set
Variable wheel attenuators come with a standard, most popular, set of filters listed in Table 1. The standard filters are made of neutral grey glass with spectral characteristics according to Figure 3. Alternatively, attenuators (wheels and optics) can be manufactured according individual orders. We can also supply variable wheel attenuators without filters, which you can fit by yourself.
Filter #3 0.80 0.97 0.10 10.00 0.003 25.00 0.0001 40.00 Filter #4 0.50 3.00 0.03 15.20 0.001 30.00 0.00003 45.00
Transmission Wheel #1 Wheel #2 Wheel #3 Wheel #4 T dB T dB T dB T dB
Filter #1 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00
Filter #2 0.90 0.46 0.30 5.20 0.01 20.00 0.0003 35.00
In most cases detectors (CCDs, photodiodes, photo mul tip liers, etc.), used for diagnostics of laser radiations, are too delicate for direct measurement of high powers, such as from ion lasers or pulsed solid-state lasers. An atte nuator may be required to reduce laser power density at the surface of detector. Optical attenuators must be used when the laser output-power or power density exceeds working (linear) range or damage threshold of a detector. (Draft International Standard ISO/TC172/SC9/WG1) For example, the damage threshold for a typical commercially available CCD is about 100mW/cm, for the ultra high speed photodetectors series AR-S (Antel Optronic Inc.) it is about 200 mW/cm. On the other hand, laser power must be adjusted to the optimum point, which is typically just below the saturation level of the detector. For example, a typical commercially available CCD saturates at only 0.05 mW/cm at 632.8 nm and at 5.5 mW/cm at 1.06 mm (see R. Rypma Dimming the Light ..., in Photonics Spectra N.10, 1995, p.145). For preliminary attenuation of very high power lasers the simplest approach is to use just the first surface reflection of an uncoated lasergrade substrate. It is useful to have an intensity adjustment range of at least 1000:1 or more in this final stage. Even when working with a singlewavelength laser, operated at one power level, this range may be encountered when making measurements at different points in the optical train. After major reduction in intensity by reflection off an uncoated substrate is achieved, some of the low-power neutral density filters of the high optical quality can bring the beam power to the exact level necessary for optimum measurement by detection system.
POSITION NUMBER
Figure 1
POSITION NUMBER
Figure 2
Charts for the standard filter-set: possible filter positions versus resulting transmission/density.
RELATED Products
990-0604 Variable Wheel Attenuator
See page 7.26
Optical Systems
7.28
Optical Systems
Figure 3. Spectral characteristics of the grey glass filters from a standard set
990-0500
SET OF WHEEL EDGE FILTERS

Table 2. Specifications of Filter Set Wheel number 1 Type of edge filters Short wave pass Filter number 1 2 3 1 2 Short wave pass 2 3 1 3 Long wave pass 2 3 1 4 Long wave pass 2 3 Cut-on/off wavelength, nm 550 650 750 500 600 700 450 550 650 500 600 700
Set of wheel edge filters is used when it is necessary to reject the shorter or the longer wavelengths. Also, a combination of short and long wavelength filters allows to construct band pass filters with variable bandwidth (for fluorescence analysis, etc.) As standard 990-0500 of 4 wheels comes with 6 long-wave pass filters and 6 short-wave pass filters. One hole in each wheel is left open. Long-wave pass filters are made of absorbing color glass. Shortwave pass filters are interference filters.
7.29
Optical Systems
991-0704 with a CCD camera

Close Variable Wheel Attenuator 991-0704 ideally suits for use with CCD cameras. Adapters 990-0000-01 or 990-0000-02 are used for connection.
990-0602
According to your request we may design an attenuator with any number of wheels.
Optical Systems
990-0400
Filters Holder with 90 Flip

The holder of 1 inch filters 990-0415 allows fixation of up to 5 filters into 1 inch optics ring holders. The thickness of optical filters (or any other optical elements) to be held is from 0.5 mm to 8.0 mm. Filters can be easily replaced in ring holders. This filter holder allows fast filter remove from beam path flipping it at 90 position. Any position of filters can be fixed with fixing screw. The firm 0 position can be fixed with the second brass screw (included). The holder of 2 inch filters 990-0423 allows fixation of up to 3 filters into 2 inch optics ring holders. The thickness of optical filters (or any other optical elements) to be held The holder 990-0415ND is the same holder 990-0415 but with Neutral Density filters that operates as step energy attenuator and allows adjusting transmission from 100% (all 5 filters are at 90 position) till 0.015% (all 5 filters are at 0 position) at visible region. If you need other adjustment you can choose any other Neutral Density filter 25.4 mm. Using the holder 990-0415 with various color glass or dielectric filters various transmitted band pass regions can be achieved. The Filters Holder with 90 Flip is made of black anodized aluminium and brass screws.
990-0415
is from 0.5 mm to 14.0 mm.

Catalogue number 990-0415 990-0415ND 990-0423 990-0423
Acceptable filters number 5 5 3
Suitable filters diameter, mm 25.4 25.4 50.8
Clear aperture diameter, mm 23 23 48
Weight, kg 0.16 0.19 0.22
Price, EUR 155 250 145
Allows stacking of 5 filters of 25,4 mm (1''), or 3 filters of 50,8 (2'') Fast flipping in and out of beam path Available to be used in 90 position Has one M4, two M6 and two holes 6.4mm for mounting on posts or table bases Large aperture allows to attenuate large diameter laser beam Black Anodized Aluminium and Brass screws
990-0415 at 0 position
(Note: Solid base height extender 820-0210 should be ordered seperately)
990-0423 at 0 position
0 position
RELATED Products
See page 1.13
90 position
990-0415 at 0 or 90 position
Optical Systems
7.30
Optical Systems
991-0602
MotoriZed Variable TWO Wheels Attenuators
991-0602-01
Filter diameter 20/25.4 mm Clear aperture 18/23 mm Non parallel filters (inclined by 4) Maximum thickness of filters 2 mm Custom design available
Optical axis can be set anywhere in a contiguous range, except where it is obscured by the base of the filter. The elevation of the optical axis, may vary between hmin-hmax.
Closed Motorized Variable Wheel Attenuator 991-0704 is available. Ideal for CCD-cameras
Motorized Variable Two Wheel Attenuator 991-0602 consists of two filter wheels. Each wheel contains eight filter mounts of D mm with clear aperture d mm. Each mount is inclined by 4 to prevent mutual reflections between filters. We supply the attenuators 991-0602-01 with a standard, most popular, set of filters. See the table below. Alternatively, optics can be manufactured according individual orders. Or we can supply the attenuators without filters, which you can fit by yourself. Bring a filter of each wheel into the optical
Model 991-0602-01 991-0602-02 D, mm 20 25.4 d, mm 18 23 H, mm 110 115 G, mm 100 110 A, mm 35 39 B, mm 16.5 20.5 L, mm 73.5 78
7.31
Optical Systems
path easily by hand or using automation. Two wheels are driven by a single step motor. A computer can operate it via a controller. The Step Motor Controller Card 980-0030F-USB / 980-0030-RS232 and Position Control Software come separately. For fastening, attenuator has clearance slots for M6 and M4 screws. There are also two M6 holes, and one M4 hole (opposite to one of the M6 holes). Material: black anodized aluminium.
hmin, mm 34 32
hmax, mm 97 99.5
l, mm 37 39.5
Price, EUR 918 738
Note: 991-0602-01 is with filters dia 20 mm.
991-0602-02 is without filters. 991-0602-02 is suitable for Neutral Density and Colour Glass Filters 25.4 mm that should be ordered seperately.
RELATED Products
See page 1.13
Standard set filters transmittance

Wheel N1 1 0 0.9 0.5 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Wheel N2 1 0 0.8 0.3 0.03 0.003 0.0003 0.00003
Stepping motor specifications

Rated Current Resistance Inductance Holding torque Step angle Step angle accuracy Required electrical powe 0.4 A 33 52 mH 0.12 Nm 1.8 5 minutes 5.6 W

See page 1.15
Motors of other types are available.
Optical Systems
991-0702
Motorized Closed Variable Two Wheels Attenuators

Motorized Closed Variable Two Wheel Attenuator 991-0702 consists of two filter wheels. Each wheel contains eight filter mounts of D mm with clear aperture of d mm. Each mount is inclined by 4 degrees to prevent mutual reflections between filters. We supply the attenuator 991-0702-01 with a standard, most popular, set of filters. See the table below. Alternatively, optics could be manufactured to individual orders. Or we could supply the attenuator without filters, which you can fit by yourself. You bring a filter of each wheel into the optical path easily by hand or using automation. The two wheels are dri ven by a single step motor. A computer can operate it via a controller and Computer Software come separately. For fastening, the attenuator has clearance slots for M6 and M4 screws. There are also two M6 holes, and one M4 hole (opposite to one of the M6 holes). Material: black anodized aluminium.
991-0702-01
Adapters for Attenuators
Filter diameter 20/25.4 mm Clear aperture 18/23 mm Non parallel filters (inclined by 4) Maximum thickness of filters 4 mm C-mount threads on both ends
990-0000-01
990-0000-03
990-0000-02
n 119
1x1/32
M6x6 deep 8 holes
n105
125 105
stepper motor
65,5
12,5 motor connector 8 13,5 50 58 100 for M6 screw 2 clearance slots 50 60
124
Model 991-0702-01 991-0702-02
D, mm 20 25.4
d, mm 18 23
Weight, kg 0.7 0.75
Price, EUR 1118 938
Note: 991-0702-01 is with filters 20 mm. 991-0702-02 is without filters. 991-0702-02 is suitable for Neutral Density and Colour Glass Filters 25.4 mm that should be ordered seperately.
RELATED Products
See page 1.13
Standard set filters transmittance

Wheel N1 1 0 0.9 0.5 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Wheel N2 1 0 0.8 0.3 0.03 0.003 0.0003 0.00003
1x1/32
Stepping motor specifications

Rated Current Resistance Inductance Holding torque Step angle Step angle accuracy Required electrical powe 0.4 A 33 52 mH 0.12 Nm 1.8 5 minutes 5.6 W

See page 1.15
Optical Systems
for n D optics n d clear aperture
40,5 101010 9 4 4
45
7.32
Optical Systems
Computer Software Computer Software for Motorized Attenuators

Control of single stepper motor with two wheels and up to 8 filters in every wheel Three different transmittance tables can be configured for three different wavelengths Operation in transmittance and optical density modes Program can choose the best combination for required transmittance or optical density, or filters defined by user can be set Different speed and step division options Computer Software is designed to control motorized atte nua tor unit with one of our stepper motor controllers: 980-0030F-USB (page 8.180); 980-0030-RS232 (page 8.183). Motorized attenuator together with program can be applied in all kinds of optical circuitry where variable transmittance has to be achieved. Program allows to change easily transmittance or optical density of an attenuator 991-0602 and 991-0702. Just enter transmittance or optical density values, and the program will select the closest two filters. Or you can select the filters directly. The simple interface allows to use the program right away. For each of the three different wavelengths it stores a set of filter transmittance values, which a user can modify. Density/Transmittance button switches between these modes at any time. All system configuration information and current state of an attenuator is stored in a file and is automatically reloaded after the program starts.
Any of our software works only with our controllers.
7.33
Optical Systems Requirements

PC compatible computer with any minimal Windows 95/98/ME/2000/XP installation Display Step Motor Controllers
Stepper Motor Controlers for Motorized Variable Two Wheels Attenuators
Motorized Variable Two Wheels Attenuator 991-0602

see page 7.31
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
Motorized Closed Variable Two Wheels Attenuators 991-0702

see page 7.32
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
Optical Systems
990-0800
Air-cooled Beam Dump

Beam Dump 990-0800 is designed to block a CW or a pulsed laser beam. It can be used on beams of up to 50 W in the wavelength range from 0.1 to 30 m. The design is such, that, even if the nonreflective coating is damaged by high intensity pulses, theres no backward reflection.
Specifications
Wavelength range Max. Handling power Max. Energy Acceptance aperture Laser type Code 990-0800 Weight, kg 0.57 0.1-30 m 50 W 2.5 J (20 Hz) 48 mm (1.89) pulsed, CW Price, EUR 169
990-0800
102
M2x5 deep 4 holes
55
63,5 48
47
M6x6 deep
Water-cooled Beam Dump

Beam Dump 990-0820 blocks a CW or a pulsed laser beam. It is mainly intended for beams 2 inch wide. Water absorbs much energy. So, the dump is best suited for beams of up to 1 kW. The wavelength range is from 0.1 to 30 m. Even if the non-reflective coating is damaged by high intensity pulses, the beam is not reflected back into your optical scheme. The dump mounts on M6 hole on its back.
Specifications
Wavelength range Max. Handling power Max. Energy Acceptance aperture Laser type 0.1-30 m 1 kW 50 J (20 Hz) 48 mm (1.89) pulsed, CW
Code 990-0820
Weight, kg 1.2
Price, EUR 239
990-0820
80
164 140
25
M6x6 deep
66
30
Optical Systems
990-0820
7.34
Opto-MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
Opto-Mechanics Selection Guide

Optical tables (700)
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
720 740
page 8.4
704 712
page 8.6
715 716
page 8.7
740 740W
page 8.8
page 8.9
742
765 766
page 8.11
770-5060
online
778-5060
online
776-0000
online
page 8.13
791
page 8.13
792
page 8.14
793
page 8.14
794
795-0010
page 8.15
795-0016
page 8.15
Brackets & RAILS (810)
810-0001
page 8.16
810-0002
page 8.16
810-0005
page 8.17
810-0007
page 8.17
810-0010
page 8.18
810-0020
page 8.18
810-0030
page 8.19
810-0035
page 8.20
810-0040; -0050
page 8.20
810-0060
page 8.21
810-0061
page 8.22
810-0062A
page 8.23
810-0065
page 8.23
810-0067
page 8.24
810-0070
page 8.25
810-0080; -0090
page 8.25
810-0100
page 8.26
810-0110
page 8.26
810-0112
page 8.26
810-0115
page 8.27
810-0116
page 8.27
810-0120
page 8.28
810-0130
page 8.28
810-0140
page 8.29
810-0145
page 8.29
810-0146
page 8.30
810-0150
page 8.30
810-0150-01
page 8.31
810-0160
page 8.31
BASE MOUNTS & ACCESSORIES (820)
820-0010
page 8.32
820-0020
page 8.32
820-0030
page 8.32
820-0040
page 8.33
820-0045
online
820-0050
page 8.33
820-0051
page 8.33
820-0055
page 8.34
820-0060
page 8.34
820-0070
page 8.34
820-0080
page 8.34
820-0090
page 8.35
820-0100
page 8.35
820-0110
page 8.35
820-0120
page 8.36
820-0125
page 8.36
820-0130
page 8.37
820-0135
page 8.37
820-0140
page 8.38
820-0150
page 8.38
820-0160; -0170
page 8.39
820-0180
page 8.40
820-0190
page 8.40
820-0200
page 8.41
820-0210
page 8.41
820-0220
page 8.41
820-0225
page 8.42
820-0230
page 8.42
820-0240
page 8.42
820-0250 820-0254
page 8.43
820-0260
page 8.43
820-0270
page 8.43
820-0280 820-0290
page 8.43
8.1
OPTICAL MOUNTS (830)

Optical Tables
830-0010; -0020
page 8.44
830-0025
page 8.45
830-0027-08
page 8.46
830-0027-12
online
830-0030
page 8.47
830-0035
page 8.47
830-0037
page 8.48
830-0040
page 8.49
830-0050
page 8.49
830-0055
page 8.49
830-0060A; -0070A
page 8.50
830-0075
page 8.50
830-0080; -0090
page 8.50
830-0100; -0110
page 8.51
OPTICAL POSITIONERS (840)
840-0005
page 8.52
840-0006
page 8.53
840-0007
page 8.53
840-0010; -0020
page 8.54
840-0030
page 8.54
840-0032; -0033
page 8.56
840-0036
page 8.57
840-0040; -0050
page 8.59
840-0052
page 8.60
840-0053
page 8.61
840-0054
page 8.61
840-0056
page 8.62
840-0060
page 8.63
840-0080
page 8.64
840-0090
page 8.64
840-0093
page 8.65
840-0096
page 8.65
840-0100-A1
page 8.66
840-0100-A2
page 8.66
840-0100-A3
page 8.67
840-0100-A4
page 8.67
840-0100-A5
page 8.67
840-0102-T
page 8.68
840-0110-T
page 8.69
840-0110-A1
page 8.70
840-0110-A2
page 8.70
840-0110-A3
page 8.71
840-0110-A5
page 8.71
840-0111
page 8.71
840-0112
page 8.71
page 8.72
page 8.72
page 8.74
page 8.74
page 8.76
page 8.76
page 8.77
page 8.77
page 8.78
page 8.78
page 8.78
840-0150-T 840-0155
page 8.79 page 8.79
840-0155-04
page 8.80
840-0155-06; -09
page 8.80
840-0160; -0170 840-0180

page 8.81 page 8.82
840-0185
page 8.83
840-0186
page 8.84
840-0190
page 8.85
840-0191
840-0192
page 8.86
840-0193
page 2.28
840-0195
page 8.87
840-0197
page 8.88
840-0199
page 8.89
840-0210
page 8.90
840-0220; -0225
page 8.92
840-0230
page 8.93
BASE POSITIONERS (850)
page 8.94
page 8.95
page 8.95
page 8.96
page 8.96
page 8.97
Motorized Positioners
850-0010
850-0020; -0022
850-0030
850-0040
850-0095
850-0200
Adjustment Screws
Translation & Rotation Stages
online
Base Positioners
840-0115
840-0116
840-0117
840-0118
840-1120-B
840-2120-B
840-3120-B
840-4120-B
840-0120-T
840-0130-T
840-0140-T
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Base Mounts & Accessories
Brackets & Rails
8.2
TRANSLATION & ROTATION STAGES (860)

Optical Tables
860-0010
page 8.98
860-0020; -0030 860-0040; -0050

page 8.99 page 8.99
page 8.101
860-0051
page 8.102
860-0052
page 8.103
860-0053
page 8.104
860-0054
page 8.105
860-0056
page 8.106
860-0058
860-0060-02; -05
page 8.107
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
860-0060-06; -08; -10

page 8.109
860-0070-02; -04
page 8.111
860-0070-06
page 8.112
page 8.113
860-0075
page 8.114
860-0085
page 8.115
860-0090
page 8.116
860-0092
page 8.117
860-0094
860-0094-02
page 8.117
page 8.118
860-0096
page 8.118
860-0098
page 8.119
860-0099
page 8.120
860-0100
page 8.121
860-0102
page 8.122
860-0105
page 8.123
860-0106
page 8.124
860-0110
page 8.125
860-0120
page 8.125
860-0130
page 8.126
860-0140
page 8.126
860-0150
page 8.127
860-0155
page 8.127
860-0160
page 8.128
860-0165
page 8.129
860-0170
page 8.129
860-0180
page 8.130
860-0210
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS (870)
870-0010; -0020
page 8.131
page 8.131
870-0030
page 8.132
870-0040
page 8.133
870-0045
page 8.133
870-0050
page 8.134
870-0055
page 8.135
870-0060
870-0070; -0071
page 8.135
page 8.136
870-0080
870-0090; -0095
page 8.137
Motorized PosiTioners & controlLers (900)
page 8.140
940-0050
page 8.141
940-0060
page 8.142
940-0070
940-0096
online
page 8.142
940-0200
page 8.143
940-0220
page 8.144
960-0050
960-0060-01; -04
page 8.146
960-0060-06; -12
page 8.148
page 8.150
960-0065
960-0070-02
page 8.152
960-0070-04
page 8.153
page 8.156
960-0080
page 8.157
960-0090
page 8.158
960-0095
960-0095SM
page 8.159
page 8.160
961-0095
page 8.161
960-0100
page 8.162
960-0110
page 8.163
960-0115
page 8.164
960-0130
page 8.165
960-0140
page 8.166
960-0150
960-0140SM
page 8.168
960-0150SM
page 8.168
page 8.169
960-0160
page 8.170
960-0170
960-0170V
online
page 8.171
960-0180
page 8.172
960-0199
page 8.173
961-0060
961-0060V
online
page 8.175
970-0040
page 8.176
970-0050
page 8.176
970-0060
page 8.177
970-0065
page 8.177
970-0067
970-0067V
online
page 8.178
970-0070
page 8.179
970-0080
970-0085
online
970-0090
online
980-0030F-USB
page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
page 8.183
page 8.184
980-0050
980-0060-USB
page 8.185
Power Supplies
page 8.186
8.3
Optical Tables
Optical Tables
720 730 740
Honeycomb Table Tops
Honeycomb Table Tops provide the base on which precision optical and laser work is performed. The table tops have a honeycomb core inside. The table tops meet high requirements for rigidity, flatness, vibration isolation and damping. We work constantly to improve the design, weight and cost-effectiveness of the table tops. Standard Honeycomb Tabletop consists of a 5 mm thick cold-rolled stainless ferromagnetic steel top skin, and 36 mm thick bottom skin, both bound under high pressure to a honeycomb core, using a special epoxy resin. Thickness of the skin depends on the dimensions of the table top. The top skin has a pattern (grid) of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm with 0.1 mm accuracy. It allows to make very quick experimental setups, and, at the same time, ensures a high level of precision and reproducibility. The surface of the top skin is ground to flatness of 0.1 mm over 1 m area over the entire surface. The bottom skin is coated in a firm decorative coating. Our standard honeycomb core is made of 0.25 mm corrosion-resistant plated sheet steel. A special composition of epoxy resin guarantees adhesion, rigidity, stability and damping corresponding to highest requirements. The side-walls of the table top are made of a special acoustically hollow plastic which damps acoustic vibrations. The side-walls are covered in a decorative black leather substitute. Upon request a Laser Port can be embedded in the table top allowing a laser beam to be let through the table (see the next page). The Honeycomb Table Tops have been mechanically and acoustically tested by qualified specialists.
The Concept of Closed Top Honeycomb Tables
Adjustment Screws
Real Closed Top no way for liquids or tiny partic les to get in. There are only the holes you do use. Make new holes by yourself.
If You need a hole, clear it of the plug with a pencil or any similar item. Seal the no longer needed hole with the self-solidifying plastic mass again. In order to facilitate composition of optical schemes, we pre-set the plastic plugs of two colours, so that they form a coordinate grid with a mesh of 100 mm.
Base Positioners
Sandwich structure with steel honeycomb core 5 mm ferromagnetic stainless steel top skin with a pattern of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm Surface flatness 0.1 mm over any 1 m area Laser Port (optional)
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.4
25
M6
25
Top skin 5 mm thick stainless ferromagnetic steel Honeycomb core of 0.25 mm thick steel has a density of 125250 kg/m depending on the cell size and its structure Top skin has a pattern of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm Flatness 0.1 mm/m Youngs modulus 21105 kg/cm Shear modulus 8.2105 kg/cm Deflection under load 4 m/m (100 kg centrally loaded) Resonant frequency approx. 200 Hz Transient excitation delay time 50 ms
Honeycomb table tops ordering chart
Size WL, mm 6002400 8001000 8001200 8001500 8001800 8002000 8002400 9001000 9001200 Thickness T, mm 200 720-0624 720-0810 720-0812 720-0815 720-0818 720-0820 720-0824 720-0910 720-0912 720-0914 720-0915 720-0916 720-0918 720-0924 720-1010 720-1012 720-1015 720-1018 720-1020 720-1024 720-1030 720-1035 720-1212 720-1215 720-1218 720-1224 720-1230 720-1235 720-1240 720-1515 720-1518 720-1520 720-1524 720-1525 720-1530 720-1535 720-1540 730-1015 730-1018 730-1020 730-1024 730-1030 730-1035 730-1212 730-1215 730-1218 730-1224 730-1230 730-1235 730-1240 730-1515 730-1518 730-1520 730-1524 730-1525 730-1530 730-1535 730-1540 740-1224 740-1230 740-1235 740-1240 740-1515 740-1518 740-1520 740-1524 740-1525 740-1530 740-1535 730-0918 730-0924
Top view
Structure of the honeycomb table tops
Acceleration curve for 720-1224 Table Top
300
400
9001400 9001500 9001600 9001800 9002400 10001000 10001200 10001500 10001800 10002000 10002400 10003000 10003500 12001200 12001500 12001800 12002400 12003000 12003500 12004000 15001500 15001800 15002000
Compliance curve for 720-1224 Table Top
Custom sizes are available on request.
Non-Ferromagnetic Table Tops are available on request.
Example for ordering: 720-1012-NF non-ferromagnetic table top
Laser Ports are designed to lead a laser beam or cables through a Table Top. The standard location of a port is chosen for use with the Laser Shelves 792. To specify a Laser Port in your order please append letter H to the code of a Honeycomb Table Top e.g. 720-1020-H.
150 21
15002400 15002500 15003000 15003500 15004000
Laser shelves 792
8.5
Optical Tables
704 705707712
Honeycomb Breadboards
Honeycomb Breadboards provide a particularly effective way to expand the useful area of an optical table. The mounting surface has tapped M6 holes on 25 mm centers for permanent mounting of components. These baseplates use the same sandwich structure as full size honeycomb table tops. The standard top skin is made of ferromagnetic stainless steel. Thickness of the skin is 5 mm, depending on the dimensions of the table top. Honeycomb Breadboards up to 0.5 m2 have a grid of nine M6 tapped mounting holes in each corner of the bottom side. Larger breadboards can have this grid by request. The Honeycomb Breadboards can be mounted at the bottom side of a table or elevated above its surface using Silent Rods 795-0010. These Beadboards are not intended as a substitute for optical tables.Their size-to-thickness ratio produces relatively low endto-end rigidity, although their local rigidity over distances of less than about 30 to 60 cm is excellent. When attached solidly to a dynamically rigid optical table, performance of resulting working surface becomes comparable to that of the table itself.
Optical Tables Motorized Positioners Adjustment Screws Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners
120 712-0818 712-0910 712-0912 712-0914 712-0915 712-0916 712-0918 712-0924 712-1010 712-1012 712-1015 712-1018 712-1020 712-1024 712-1212 712-1215 712-1218 712-1515 712-1518 712-1520
Core 265 kg/m 0.25 mm thick steel honeycomb Top skin 5 mm thick ferromagnetic stainless steel Pattern of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm Flatness 0.1 mm/m
A breadbord can be mounted on a table using silent rods 795-0010 or 820-0055
704-0303
Top view
Bottom view for Honeycomb Breadboards up to 0.5 m square surface or by request
Honeycomb Breadbords ordering chart
Size WL, mm 300300 300600 300900 3001200 3001800 440440 500500 500750 5001000 600600 600800 600900 6001200 6001500 6001800 6002400 800800 8001000 8001200 8001500
Thickness T, mm 40 704-0303 704-0306 704-0309 704-0312 704-0318 704-4444 704-0505 704-0575 704-0510 704-0606 704-0608 704-0609 704-0612 50 705-0306 705-0309 705-0312 705-0318 705-0505 705-0575 705-0510 705-0606 705-0608 705-0609 705-0612 707-0505 707-0575 707-0510 707-0606 707-0608 707-0609 707-0612 707-0615 707-0618 707-0624 707-0808 707-0810 707-0812 707-0815 70 120
Size WL, mm 8001800 9001000 9001200 9001400 9001500 9001600 9001800 9002400 10001000 10001200 10001500
Thickness T, mm 40 50 705-0910 705-0912 705-0915 70 707-0818 707-0910 707-0912 707-0914 707-0915 707-0916 707-0918 707-0924 707-1010 707-1012 707-1015 707-1018
705-1010
Complementary Products Code 795-0010 820-0055 Page 8.15 8.34
704-0808
705-0808 705-0810 705-0812
712-0609 712-0612 712-0615 712-0618 712-0624 712-0808 712-0810 712-0812 712-0815
10001800 10002000 10002400 12001200 12001500 12001800 15001500 15001800 15002000
707-1212
707-1515
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
8.6
715
716-2040
Aluminium Breadboards
15
Thickness 15 mm M6 tapped holes pattern on 25 mm centres Clear and black anodized

Model 715-1515-BL 715-2020-BL 715-2040-BL 715-3030-BL 715-3045-BL 715-3060-BL 715-4080-BL 715-4545-BL 715-4560-BL 715-4575-BL 715-6060-BL 715-6080-BL 715-7575-BL 715-8080-BL b, mm 150 200 200 300 300 300 400 450 450 450 600 600 750 800 l, mm 150 200 400 300 450 600 800 450 600 750 600 800 750 800 Thickness, mm 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Weight, kg 0.95 1.7 3.4 3.8 5.7 7.6 13.5 8.5 11.35 14.2 15.2 20.1 23.6 26.9 Price, EUR 62 114 140 142 184 248 483 285 338 369 433 530 630 906
M6 holes spaced by 25mm
for M6 screw 4 clearance holes
25
25
Ordering information
NOT anodized breadboard of size 715-4080 40080015 mm Black anodized breadboard of size 715-4080-BL 40080015 mm
EKSMA OPTICS does not apply distributor discount for these products.
716
Solid steel Breadboard

6
14x25=350 25
M6 101 holes
25
400
15
Length 400 mm; width 200 mm Thickness 15 mm M6 tapped holes pattern on 25 mm centres Flatness 0.03 mm Ferromagnetic steel Solid Steel Breadboard is an alternative to the honeycomb table tops. It is particularly useful in small optical setups. 716-2040 is a steel plate, of one size. The plate is black chemically oxidized. The breadboards has grooves on all 4 sides, for quick mounting using Table Clamps 820-0240. On the corners there are 4 holes for M6 screw used to mount directly to tables or to fix at a certain height on Silent Rods 795-0010.
820-0240
ways to fasten a Breadboard

716-2040 mounted on Silent Rods 795-0010
EKSMA OPTICS does not apply distributor discount for these products.
8.7
6x25=150
200
Optical Tables
740
Pneumatic Vibration Isolation System

Pneumatic Vibration Isolation System 740 is an ideal foundation for equipment which is sensitive to vibration, e.g. microscopes, scales, interferometers, and similar devices. Work surface of the table is separated from the floor by means of a highly effective system of pneumatic supports. The system features solid and light supports that come in various dimensions to support a wide range of table top sizes. This enables quick creation of vibration isolation systems for a variety of tasks. Maximum load capacity of each support leg is 120 kg. Working pressure of the system is 0.56 atm (bar). Required minimum system pressure required to support a certain load in kg is shown in the load/pressure diagram.
H, mm 600 700 600 700 600 700 600 700 600 700
Specifications
Vertical movement range Precision of automatic level control Vertical resonance frequency 14 mm 0.3 mm 1.5 Hz (average load) 8593% 9098% 1.7 Hz (average load) 8593% 9097% 600 KPa (6 bar) (87 PSI) 6 mm 90% 1050 C 120 kg per isolator
Pressure from source of air Air supply socket diameter Operating humidity (max) Operating temperature range Load-bearing capacity (at 6 bar)
L
P - required minimal pressure in atm (bar). Q - load per support leg (kg). Load/Pressure diagram
B
B, mm 500 500 500 500 650 650 650 650 800 800 L, mm 700 700 1200 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 1200 1200
Code 740-5706 740-5707 740-5126 740-5127 740-6126 740-6127 740-6186 740-6187 740-8126 740-8127
f
Vibration / Isolation performance
Deflection f is minimal when the distance between supports = 0.554L
Car Pump and Air Compress are available upon request.
0. 554L
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Vertical resonance frequency: 1.5 Hz (average load) Horizontal resonance frequency: 1.7 Hz (average load) Air source pressure: up to 600 KPa (6 bar) (87 PSI)
Vertical isolation at 5 Hz Vertical isolation at 10 Hz Horizontal resonance frequency Horizontal isolation at 5 Hz Horizontal isolation at 10 Hz
Height of the vibration isolation system
600, 700 mm
Brackets & Rails
8.8
740W
Pneumatic Vibration Isolation Workstation

Pneumatic Vibration Isolation Workstation 740W consists of 740, a Honeycomb Breadboard and a Protection Armrest. As you lean on the Armrest, it protects your body from the impacts. This allows you to work at the table like at a conventional table, using microscope and other equipment. The suggested elevation of tables surface is 770 mm. We produce two standard models of 740W.
740W system can be optionally equipped with Castors, which are made of high-quality nylon, high abrasion resistant, smooth running performance on even floors, shock and impactresistant, corrosion-resistant.
H 12.5
L-200 L-100 L L
B-200 B-100 B
Laser shelves are optional breadboards. They save space when installing lasers and other equipment beneath honeycomb table tops. The shelf stays mechanically coupled to the table top. Laser shelves of two lengths: 900 and 1900 mm are available.
L+100
Code 740W-6907 740W-7509 740W-7512 740W-9147
B, mm 600 750 750 900
B B+100
L, mm 900 900 1200 1400
H, mm 770 770 770 770
742
Pneumatic Vibration Isolation System

Vertical resonance frequency: 1.5 Hz (average load) Horizontal resonance frequency: 1.7 Hz (average load) Air source pressure: up to 600 KPa (6 bar) (87 PSI)
Pneumatic Vibration Isolation System 742 is an ideal foundation for equipment which is sensitive to vibration, e.g. microscopes, scales, interferometers, and similar devices. Work surface of the table is separated from the floor by means of a highly effective system of pneumatic supports, i.e. pneumatic springs with hydraulic (oil) dampers. The system features solid and light supports that come in various dimensions to support a wide range of table top sizes. This enables quick creation of vibration isolation systems for a variety of tasks. Maximum load capacity of each support leg is 1000 kg.
8.9
Optical Tables Specifications

Height of the vibration isolation system Vertical movement range Precision of automatic level control Vertical resonance frequency Vertical isolation at 5 Hz Vertical isolation at 10 Hz Horizontal resonance frequency Horizontal isolation at 5 Hz Code 742-4004 742-5004 742-6004 742-7004 Height of Isolator, mm 400 500 600 700 Number of Isolators 4 4 4 4 Horizontal isolation at 10 Hz Pressure from source of air Air supply socket opening Operating humidity (max) Operating temperature range Load-bearing capacity (at 6 bar) H= 400, 500, 600, 700 mm 0.3 mm 1.5 Hz (average load) 8593% 9098% 1.7 Hz (average load) 9097% 600 KPa (6 bar) (87 PSI) 90% 1050 C 1,000 kg per isolator 8593%
Working pressure of the system is 0.56 atm (bar). Required minimum system pressure required to support a certain load in kg is shown in the load/pressure diagram.
P - required minimal pressure in atm (bar). Q - load per support leg (kg). Load/Pressure diagram Vibration / Isolation performance
We offer optimal Vibration Isolation Systems for the optical table of your choice. Figure shows the correct layout of pneumatic supports for tables with standard dimensions. C=C1=160...200 mm
C1
Castors made of high-quality nylon, high abrasion resistant, low rolling resistant, smooth running performance on even floors, shock and impact-resistant, corrosion-resistant.
Laser shelves are optional breadboards. They save space when installing a laser and other equipment beneath the honeycomb table tops. A shelf stays mechanically coupled to the table top. For laser shelves see page 8.13
Adjustment Screws
Armrest guards the honeycomb table from impacts of your body. This allows you to work at the table like at a conventional table, using microscope and other equipment. Optionally you may order workstation with two Armrests on the opposite sides.
On request we produce workstations with Honeycomb Table Tops of any dimensions
L=0,56 x l
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Ordering information: last number of the catalogue number indicates the quantity of isolators.
270
6 mm
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
14 mm
8.10
765 766
Optical Table Support 765/766 with Honeycomb Table Tops 720/730/740
Optical Table Supports

Optical Table Supports are primarily designed for the Honeycomb Table Tops (720740). Tab le Supports are produced from steel tubes of 100mm square section, in decorative black coating and contain two type supports, bound by a cross-beam. Optical Table Supports perfectly suit other types of optical plates and other equipment as well. This is possible because plates are not fastened they are just laid on top of the supports. On request we produce table supports of any size, design, and of greater sturdiness.
Convenient sizes Optimal height Multipurpose in use Handy assembling
L-100 L L+100
B-100 B B+100
Deflection f is minimal when the distance between supports = 0.554L
0. 554L
If required, e.g. when used with a Laser Shelf 792, the table support may be assembled upside-down. This doesnt deg rade its performance.
Type of upper leveling elements of optical table support can be chosen from AS, AR or AP (see descriptions below). Bottom elements on optical table support are of type AS. Default choice for upper elements of 765/766 is AR rubber leveling elements. Example: 765-0507-AR table support sized 500 500 700 mm (Height(h) Width(b) Length(l)) with 4 pieces of AR leveling elements on top and 4 pieces of AS leveling element at the bottom. For other types of leveling elements please append element abbreviation to product code. Examples: 766-0512-AS size 600 500 1200 mm (Height(h) Width(b) Length(l)), type of leveling elements AS (8 pieces, 4 on top and 4 at the bottom). 766-6518-AP-200 size 600 650 1800 mm (Height(h) Width(b) Length(l)), with 4 pieces of leveling elements type AP-200 on top and 4 pieces of leveling elements type AS at the bottom.
8.11
Optical Tables
AR
Rubber Leveling Element

100 70
AS
Solid Leveling Element

Optical Tables
129
M16
68025 68025 70525 78025 78025 80525 68025 70525 78025 78025 80525 68025 68025 78025 78025 80525 70525 68025
103
55...80 45 35
Fixing nut
Fixing nut
Code 765-0507-AR 766-0507-AR 765-0512-AR 766-0512-AR 765-6512-AR 766-6512-AR 765-6518-AR 766-6518-AR 765-6522-AR 766-6522-AR 765-0812-AR 766-0812-AR
B, mm 500 500 500 500 650 650 650 650 650 650 800 800
L, mm 700 700 1200 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 2200 2200 1200 1200
H, mm 64525 74525 64525 74525 64525 74525 64525 74525 64525 74525 64525 74525
M16
Code 765-0507-AS 766-0507-AS 765-0512-AS 766-0512-AS 765-6512-AS 766-6512-AS 765-6518-AS 766-6518-AS 765-6522-AS 766-6522-AS 765-0812-AS 766-0812-AS
B, mm 500 500 500 500 650 650 650 650 650 650 800 800
L, mm 700 700 1200 1200 1200 1200 1800 1800 2200 2200 1200 1200
H, mm 65525 65525 75525 65525 75525 65525 75525 65525 75525 75525 75525
AP
Passive Air Leveling Vibration Isolator

Typical passive applications include the protection of vibration sensitive equipment such as co-ordinate measuring machines, metrology inspection devices, isolation tables and electron microscopes. The 1TS-AP Isolator elastomer body made of CR grade with high elasticity oil resistant and non-aging. Pressure and bottom plates made of galvanized steel. Inflation is either through the 'moulded in' standard tyre valve or by connection to a permanent air supply.
Code 765-0507-AP-200 765-0507-AP-500 765-0507-AP-1000
Fixing nut
Passive air leveling vibration isolator 1TSAP is a low height, low stiffness air spring isolator mount suitable for both passive and dynamic applications where a support natural frequency as low as 3-5Hz is required.
Load/Pressure diagram
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 650 650 650 650 650 650
700 700 700 700 700 700 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
68025 68025 70525 78025 78025 80525 68025 68025 70525 78025 78025 80525 68025 68025 70525 78025 78025 80525
765-6518-AP-200 765-6518-AP-500 765-6518-AP-1000 766-6518-AP-200 766-6518-AP-500 766-6518-AP-1000 765-6522-AP-200 765-6522-AP-500 765-6522-AP-1000 766-6522-AP-200 766-6522-AP-500 766-6522-AP-1000 765-0812-AP-200 765-0812-AP-500 765-0812-AP-1000 766-0812-AP-200 766-0812-AP-500 766-0812-AP-1000
650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 800 800 800 800 800 800
1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
766-0507-AP-200 766-0507-AP-500 766-0507-AP-1000 765-0512-AP-200 765-0512-AP-500
M16 G
765-0512-AP-1000 766-0512-AP-200 766-0512-AP-500 766-0512-AP-1000 765-6512-AP-200 765-6512-AP-500 765-6512-AP-1000 766-6512-AP-200 766-6512-AP-500
4holes
766-6512-AP-1000
Adjustment Screws
B, mm
L, mm
H, mm
Code
B, mm
L, mm
H, mm
D C
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
65525
Brackets & Rails
Rubber leveling element (AR) ensures sufficient vibration isolation.
120
Solid leveling element (AS) is used, when no dam ping is needed.
65...90 54
8.12
791
Optical Tables
Table Connectors
Here is a drawing of a standard system designed for table tops 200 mm thick. On request, we can provide table connectors for table tops of any thickness.
791-T
791-L
791-I
Table Connectors enable to connect most table tops in any configuration: T, L, or I.

791-I
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws
Model 792-0209 792-0219 A 900 1900 Weight, kg 26 47
Codes for ordering standard Table Connecting system

Model 791-T 791-L 791-I Weight, kg 5 3.75 2.5 Price, EUR 225 200 187
Link table tops together in various configurations Easy assemblage On request easily adapted to any Table Top
Custom systems are available on request.
Table Connectors render quick and reliable way to link table tops together. The tables, being linked, usually have M6 tapped mounting holes on their tops and bottoms. The same holes are used for fastening to the Table Connectors. At minimal deflection the rigidity of the linkage is no more than 15 m/m under 100 kg load.
792
Laser Shelves
Laser Shelves are optional breadboards. They save space when installing a laser and other equipment beneath optical table tops. A shelf stays mechanically coupled to the table top. The shelves have a pattern of M6 holes. Model 792-02 has M6 screws to attach directly to the bottom of a table top. So it can be used with any table top, with any support, or vibration isolation. Location of attachment (holes) can be standard, or specified by a customer.
792-02 can be attached to any table top.
Price, EUR 368 443
Laser Ports in a Table Top are used to let a laser beam or cables through. Standard location of a port is chosen for use with the Laser Shelves 792. When ordering, append letter H to the code of a Honeycomb Table Top e.g. 720-1020-H.
Shelves of custom sizes are available on request.
8.13
Optical Tables
793
Protective Screens
Protective Screens are designed to protect an optical setup from flashes, glitters and other undesired optical disturbances. The Protective Screens 7930001 and 793-0002 have three mounting slots and can be mounted anywhere on the table. The screens are produced from steel tinplate of black finish.
Code 793-0001 793-0002 Weight, kg 0.5 0.5 Price, EUR 26 27
260
250 15 60
793-0001
20 90
20
793-0002
794
Free-standing Can be positioned anywhere over the table Does not affect vibration isolation Adjustable shelf height Sturdy metal frame supports heavy loads
Instrument Shelves
Instrument Shelves 794 provide convenient off-the-table mounting and storage for power supplies, controllers, oscilloscopes and other instruments. They are not connected with the table and does not affect vibration isolation. The height of shelves can be adjusted easily. The space saving shelf also allows wires and cables to be neatly routed away from critical setups.
Model 794-2000 794-3000 794-xxxx L, mm 3050 any size 2050
Examples of codes for 794-2000:

Optical Positioners Motorized Positioners Adjustment Screws Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners
794-2000-A 794-2000-B 794-2000-AA 794-2000-AB 794-2000-AAB one A shelf one B shelf two A shelves one A shelf and one B shelf two A shelves and one B shelf
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.14
795-0010
Silent Rods
Antivibration filling 32 mm stainless steel rod M6 tapped holes on both ends Designed for use with breadboards up to 0.5 m2 square surface Great stiffness, sturdiness and strength of steel allow the Silent Rods 795-0010 to support large loads with great stability. Each rod has M6 tapped holes and a groove around both ends. So, for moun ting to tables, you may use thread adap ters 795-0016-6 and clamp 820-0125. A Silent Rod consists of a stainless steel tube filled with vibration damping plastic. Even without external damping elements applied, the rods have high resonant frequency and low vibration amplitudes. Steel ensures strength and thermal stability.
32 19 M6
6.2
damping plastic
7 6
6.2
6 7
M6 19 32
Model 795-0010-10 795-0010-20 795-0010-30
L, mm 100 200 300
Weight, kg 0.26 0.54 0.77
L
Price, EUR 24 27 30 Page 8.36
820-0125 clamp the rod exactly at the middle
Complementary Products Code 820-0125
795-0016
Thread Adapters
Thread Adapters 795-0016 connect components when precise orientation in plane is not required. Some adapters have different threads on ends. So, you can connect components with M4 and M6 threaded holes. Material: stainless steel. Metric/imperial thread adapters are available on request.
Model 795-0016-43 795-0016-64 795-0016-84 795-0016-81 A M4 M6 M8 8-32 B M3 M4 M4 1/4-20 C 2 3 4 5/64 D 2 2 1/8
C A
D B 6 12 D D 12
Model 795-0016-44 795-0016-66 795-0016-85 795-0016-11
A M4 M6 8-32 1/4-20
D 2 3 5/64 1/8
C and D denote hex key sizes.
8.15
1.5
Brackets & Rails
Brackets & Rails

810-0001
Narrow Aluminium Optical Rail
Model 810-0001-75 810-0001-125 810-0001-150 810-0001-300 810-0001-450 810-0001-600 L, mm 75 125 150 300 450 600 n 2 4 5 7 13 19 l 25 75 100 100 250 400 Weight, kg 0.025 0.04 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 Price, EUR 21 30 32 55 80 105
Small Optical Rails Available in sizes from 75 mm (3) to 600 mm (24) Compact Low-profile dovetail design Precision CNC machined on all surfaces Material: black anodized aluminium
Typical end view
810-0001-75; 810-0001-125; 810-0001-150
810-0001-300; 810-0001-450; 810-0001-600;
810-0002
Essential Carriers for Optical Rail Setups Compact Dovetail design Precision Machined dovetail clamps Material: Black anodized aluminium For metric and inch
Narrow Aluminium Rail Carriers
810-0002-01
Narrow Aluminium Rail Carrier Adapter Ring

Narrow aluminium rail carrier adapter ring gives possibility an M4 (#8-32) screw to be used in a mounting hole that was counter-bored for a M6 (1/4"-20) screw.
Code 810-0002-01 810-0002-02
Price, EUR 18 20
810-0002-01
810-0002-02
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.16
810-0005
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws
810-0007-02
Aluminium Optical Rails

Code 810-0005-01 810-0005-02 810-0005-04 810-0005-06 810-0005-08 810-0005-10 Length, mm 150 270 470 670 800 1000 A 2 4 6 7 9 N 3 6 12 18 21 27 B 2 3 5 7 8 10 D 1 2 2 2 2 2 C, mm 100 300 500 600 800 Weight, kg 0.36 0.66 1.16 1.65 2.00 2.40 Price, EUR 64 88 109 149 225 295
Easy sliding and fixing Scale engraved Material: black anodized aluminium High stability
810-0005-02
for M6 screws D clearance slots
10
M6 N holes
for M6 screws B clearance slots
20
20 58
35
25
25
25 75 75A+25(A-1) L
25
18
810-0007
Two locking options: by integrated spring clip, and by a fixing screw Quick and easy sliding Material: black anodized aluminium
Aluminium Rail Carriers

Components are attached to the carriers by M6 screws from beneath or from the top through M6 mounting holes. To release and to move, or to lift the carrier push the lever of the clip. To stop the carrier firmly, use the fixing screw. Rather than grinding against, and damaging the rail with its tip, the screw gently clamps to the rail the wide tenon of the clip. The clip is preloaded by a spring. Its lever is removable (on a thread).
lever of a spring loaded clip
14.5
76 34 fixing screw
25
25 68
810-0007-06 810-0007-06
lever of a spring loaded clip
14.5
76 34 fixing screw
Code 810-0007-06 810-0007-02
Price, EUR 57 64
50
o25
68
810-0007-02
M6 2 holes
8.17
34
for M6 screws 3 clearance holes
10
34
M6 2 holes
for M6 screw clearance hole
10
Brackets & Rails
810-0010
Steel Optical Rails

810-0010-02
The Optical Rails 810-0010 have low profile and are made of hardened steel. Rails have patterns of M6 tapped holes and of 6.4mm clearance slots. The holes and slots are used for moun ting on optical plates, opto-me chanical elements and for interconnections.
810-0010-10 Code 810-0010-02 810-0010-04 810-0010-06 810-0010-08 810-0010-10 L, mm 55 270 470 670 55 B 1 2 4 6 2 m 1 8 14 20 1 Weight, kg 0.15 0.76 1.36 1.93 0.15 Price, EUR 99 109 148 54 49
Bigger size or rails with transversal clearance slots 810-0010-10 are available upon request.
810-0010
810-0020
Steel Rail Carriers

The Rail Carriers 810-0020 may be quickly lifted and set again on the rail. Slide the carrier to any point on the rail and secure it with the fixing screw. The carriers have patterns of M6 and 6.4 mm mounting holes for fastening of other opto-mechanical elements. Design is such that a little space is required while high versatility is achieved. Carrier 810-0020-04 has 18 mm clear aperture. Precision Carriers 810-0020 come in two available widths: 25mm and 50 mm. The Carrier 810-0020-06 may be used as a reference positioning component for repeated positioning. Units, such as 810-0020-04 or 860-0090-02, may be reinser ted exactly into the same position next to the reference carrier. Rail Carriers are made of black finished hardened steel.
Code 810-0020-02 810-0020-04 810-0020-06 Weight, kg 0.16 0.15 0.08 Price, EUR 66 66 46
13 13
77
810-0020-02
for M6 screws for M6 holes screws 3 clearance 3 clearance holes M6 M6
810-0020-04
25 25 50 50
810-0020-02
810-0020-06
for M6 screw M6 clearance hole
25
Complementary Products Code 860-0090-02 Page 8.115
25 50
810-0020-06 810-0020-04
Adjustment Screws
50 50 25 25
Base Positioners
42 42 64 64
99
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.18
810-0030
Optical Tables
Sliding Rail Carrier
M3 3 holes for fixing screw for M6 screws 3 clearance holes 50 25 M6
50 25
64
43
13
Sliding Rail Carrier 810-0030 universal platform, with additional upper rails, orthogonal to lower base rails. The Carrier allows to attach any unit on the rail 810-0010, to move it easily along the Optical Rail and to fix it across within 15 mm. The Carrier has a pattern of M6 and 6.4 mm mounting holes allowing to attach any mechanical unit. Sliding Rail Carrier is made of black finished hardened steel.
3 positions of fixing screw
Stacked rail carriers enable only coarse adjustment along X and Y axes. Zaxis translator 860-0090-04 can point its 15 mm aperture 90 to the side on single or along the rail on stacked carriers.
860-0090-04
Complementary Products Code 810-0010-04 860-0090-02 860-0120 860-0120 860-0090-02 Page 8.18 8.115 8.125
8.19
Brackets & Rails
810-0035
Multiple Mounting Plates

L
34
12
6.5
Code 810-0035-03 810-0035-02
L, mm 300 200
l, mm 265 165
Price, EUR 27 24
810-0040 810-0050
Large Rods
Code 810-0040 810-0042 810-0050 810-0051 810-0052 810-0053 Large Rod Large Rod Large Rod with black oxidized steel base Large Rod with stainless steel base Large Rod with black oxidized steel base Large Rod with stainless steel base Description Height (H), mm 300 400 315 315 415 415
50
Weight, kg 1.42 1.90 1.85 1.85 2.33 2.33
Price, EUR 31 41 48 71 78 61
The main use of model 810-0040 precision grounded stainless steel rod is vertical pos it ion er mounting. The 810-0050 is a large rod with rod base. These rods could be stably mounted on any surface with M6 tapped holes on 25 mm centers.
70
50
6.4 4 holes
28
Large rod with rod base 810-0051
Large rod without rod base 810-0040 810-0050
15
Adjustment Screws
M6
11 4 holes
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Multiple Mounting Plates 810-0035 allow to assemble groups of accessories mounted in close proximity and acting as one unit (e.g. a compound lens). For example, the slot of the plate 810-0035 allows to mount Lens Holders 830-0035 using M6 screws from be neath. Their positions can be adjus ted on the plate. 810-0035 can be attached to tables, breadboards, and rods of both metric and imperial standards at the desired height and orientation. Material black anodized aluminium.
810-0035 and 830-0035
Brackets & Rails
9.3
Optical Tables
8.20
810-0060
Optical Tables
Vertical Positioner
104 min 134 max 50 25 M6 7 holes 70
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories

Complementary Products Code 810-0050 810-0051 810-0060 810-0080 810-0090 820-0070 820-0090 840-0020 840-0115 092-0015 Page 8.20 8.20 8.21 8.25 8.25 8.34 8.35 8.54 8.72 1.19
65
25 50
30
65
The 810-0060 positioner has one mounting surface with M6 tapped holes. It provides coarse and smooth vertical positioning of mounted components. Regulating screw thread is M60.5mm. The 820-0090 base and the 810-0080, 810-0090 angle brackets can be fastened to the edge or to the mounting surface of positioner. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0051 Vertical Positioner 810-0060 Movable Base 820-0090
Mounting option Periscope: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061, Movable Base 820-0090, Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020, Adapter for Mirror at 45 840-0115 (2 pcs.), Vertical Positioner 810-0060, Movable Base 820-0070 (2 pcs.), Mirrors 092-0015
Mounting option Periscope: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020, Adapter for Mirror at 45 840-0115 (2 pcs.), Vertical Positioner 810-0060 (2 pcs.), Movable Base 820-0070 (2 pcs.), Mirrors 092-0015
8.21
Brackets & Rails
810-0061
Large Rod MOUNTING Clamp

M6 2 holes
65
50
M6 7 holes 25 50 70
The Mounting Large Rod Clamp 810-0061 has one mounting surface with M6 holes. It provides coarse vertical positioning of mounted components along the large rod 810-0040 or 810-0050. 820-0090 and 8200060 bases and 810-0080, 810-0090 angle brackets can be fastened to the edge or to the mounting surface of positioner. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 810-0040 810-0050 810-0080 810-0090 820-0060 820-0090 860-0010 XYZ 860-0110
Page 8.20 8.20 8.25 8.25 8.34 8.35 8.98
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061, Movable Base 820-0090, Tilt/Rotation Stage 860-0110
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061, Movable Base 820-0090, Compact Translation Stages 860-0010 XYZ
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061 and Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020, Movable Base 820-0060
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
8.124
Complementary Products
Brackets & Rails
25
Optical Tables
8.22
810-0062A
840-0115
Large Rod Small Mounting Clamp (aluminium)

Large Rod Small Mounting Clamp 8100062 has one mounting surface with 3M6 holes and 1M4 hole. It provides coarse vertical positioning of mounted components along the Large Rod 810-0040 or 810-0050. Optical mounts can be fastened using movable base 820-0060. Material: black anodized aluminium.
Code 810-0062A
Weight, kg 0.07
Price, EUR 22
810-0065
Periscope on Silent Rods
840-0033 Kinematic Mirror/ Beamsplitter Mount
Table Clamp 820-0125 Periscope on Silent Rods
These research and industrial grade periscope assemblies is a useful tool for changing beam path direction and elevation. Laser Beam Steering uses our kinematic mounts to create the most stable and flexible system available. Optics rest against two contact lines formed at the interface and are firmly held by a plastic securing screw. Adapter easily accommodates any 1 optics.
795-0010 Silent Rods
Code 810-2065 810-3065
Height, mm 200 300
8.23
Brackets & Rails
810-0067
Periscope on Large Rods

65
1 or 2 Kinematic Mirror Mounts 840-0032-80
2 Adapters for Mirror at 45 840-0115
Large Rod with oxidized steel base 810-0050
35 min
70
EKSMA OPTICS offers periscope on large rods assemblies that enables to adjust the height and change direction of a laser beam. The periscope assembly consists of two adapters for mirrors at 45 840-0115 where mounted optics face each other. Mounting Clamps 810-0062A allows to adjust the distance between mirrors for a position needed. The assemblies are available with one or two kinematics mirror mounts that has adjustment range of 9 and sensitivity of 3 arcsec. Other kinematic mirrors for periscope (for example with 3 adjustment screws 840-0033) are available under request. For lower than 300 mm height periscope assemblies, please see periscope on silent rods 810-0065.
Description Periscope on Large Rod with oxidized steel base Periscope on Large Rod with stainless steel base Periscope on Large Rod with black oxidized steel base Periscope on Large Rod with stainless steel base Periscope on Large Rod with oxidized steel base and two Kinematic Mirror Mounts Periscope on Large Rod with stainless steel base and two Kinematic Mirror Mounts Periscope on Large Rod with black oxidized steel base and two Kinematic Mirror Mounts Periscope on Large Rod with stainless steel base and two Kinematic Mirror Mounts
Code 810-5067 810-5167 810-5267 810-5367 810-5066
Height (H), mm 315 315 415 415 315
Distance between mirrors (LminLmax), mm 35250 35250 35350 35350 35250
Weight, kg 2.25 2.25 2.73 2.73 2.34
Price, EUR 210 217 240 247 275
810-5166
315
35250
2.34
282
810-5266
415
35350
2.82
305
810-5366
415
35350
2.82
312
Complementary Products Code 810-0050 810-0062A 820-0060 840-0032-80 840-0115 Page 8.20 8.23 8.34 8.56 8.72
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
2 Large Rod Small Mounting Clamps 810-0062A
Lmax
Lmin
Brackets & Rails
2 Movable bases 820-0060
Optical Tables
8.24
810-0070
810-0080
Large Table Base

25 25 6.4;11x7 6 holes 230 M6 39 holes
130
15
The model 810-0070 large table base could be used in the same way as standard ones as well as could be mounted above the optical table (on large rods or on the side of the table). This allows to transfer subassemblies from main optical surface. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 810-0070
Weight, kg 3.33
Price, EUR 49
810-0080 810-0090
Angle Brackets
38 25 M6 11 holes 36 38 25 M6 11 holes 36
25 25 125 90 110
75 14 6.4
14 6.4 14 75 13
810-0090
14 25 13 50 76
810-0090
114
64
50 76
810-0080
The 810-0090 standard and 810-0080 large angle brackets have M6 tapped holes on 25 mm centers. The slots in the base allow longitudinal positioning on the table top. These brackets are especially useful for translators 860-0020, 860-0030, 860-0040 and 860-0050 mounting. Orthogonal surfaces of models 810-0080 and 810-0090 are perpendicular within 0.015 mm. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 810-0080 810-0090
Price, EUR 35 31
Complementary Products Code 860-0020 860-0030 860-0040 860-0050 Page 8.99 8.99 8.99 8.99
8.25
Brackets & Rails
810-0100
Angle Bracket
35 6.4 2 holes M6 2 holes
The main use of 810-0100 mini brac ket is mounting of 860-0010 translators for three axes positioning. The 810-0100 mini bracket has two M6 tapped holes on 25 mm centers. Finish: black oxidized steel.
52 46
25 23 12.5
6 5 25 10 14.5 29
12.5
Complementary Products Code 860-0010 Page 8.98
810-0110
Angle Bracket
for M3 screws 18 holes ? 30
58
58
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Translation Stages 860-0051
Code 810-0110
Weight, kg 0.13
Price, EUR 71
860-0051 XYZ Complementary Products Code 860-0051 Page 8.101
810-0112
Angle Bracket
6
14
16
53
4 holes
32 for M3 screw
4 clearance holes
46
Complementary Products Code 860-0096 970-0080 Page 8.118 8.179 860-0096 XYZ
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Aluminium Ball Bearing Stages 860-0096 Motorized Tanslation Stage 970-0080
for M3 screw
4 clearance holes
32 40
Code 810-0112
Weight, kg 0.1
Price, EUR 31
Adjustment Screws
32
32
M3
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
58
Brackets & Rails
65 6.4 25 4 holes
25
Optical Tables
8.26
810-0115
Optical Tables
Angle Bracket
M6 25
4 holes
124 66
75
53
34
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Low Profile Aluminium Stages 860-0070-02 Motorized Translation Stages 960-0070-02
71.5
50
66
75
90.5
86
169
88 55
80
21
46
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Low Profile Aluminium Stages 860-0070-04 Motorized Translation Stages 960-0070-04
50
for M6 screws 50 75
6 clearance holes
58.5
51 88
42.5
47
93
860-0070-02 XYZ Code 810-0115 Weight, kg 0.3 Price, EUR 55
50 75
for M6 screws
6 clearance holes
810-0116
Angle Bracket
M6
4 holes
25
51
860-0070-04 XYZ Complementary Products Code Page 8.111 8.153
Code 810-0116
Weight, kg 0.4
Price, EUR 59
860-0070-04 960-0070-04
8.27
Brackets & Rails
810-0120
Angle Bracket
Angle Bracket 810-0120 is a universal attachment unit. It is ideally suited to attach together Micro Translation Stages 860-0100 oriented relative to each other or tho go nally on X, Y or Z axis.
2.5 2 holes
20 10
28
15.6
20 for M2 screw 6 clearance holes 2.5 5 holes
13
Complementary Products Code 860-0100 860-0102 Page 8.121 8.125 8.120
810-0120 860-0100
860-0100 XYZ
810-0130
Mini Angle Brackets

Mini Angle Brackets 810-0130 are used to increase functions of Mini and Micro series Optical positioners. Model 810-0130-02 enables to establish any angle of a posi tion er. 810-0130-04 also provides height orientation, as it has two 4.2 mm clearance slots. Mini Angle Brackets are made of black anodized aluminium.
860-0100 XYZ
4.2
26
M4
22.5 35
810-0130-02
810-0130-02
810-0130-04
Code 810-0130-02 810-0130-04 840-0060
Price, EUR 7 10 840-0053
4.2
810-0130-02
70
54
840-0060
840-0053
810-0130-04 810-0130-02 820-0020 810-0130-04 Post holder Complementary Products Code 820-0020 840-0020 840-0060 Page 8.32 8.54 8.63
23 M4 35
810-0130-04
10
For coarse adjustments about horizontal axis compact Mirror mounts can be used with Mini Angle Brackets.
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
31
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Black anodized aluminium 810-0120 designed to be used with: Micro Translation Stages 860-0100 XY Micro Translation Stages of Side Regulation 860-0102 Micro Rotation Stages 860-0130
20
Usage of 810-0120
860-0100 810-0120 860-0100
860-0130
10
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.28
810-0140
Optical Tables
810-0140
Angle Bracket
Angle Bracket 810-0140 is ideally suited for orthogonally attaching Single Axis Translation Stage 860-0092-01 to a two-Axes Translation Stage 860-0092-02 or 860-0094. 810-0140 may as well be used to attach units of other models together or to the base surfaces. 8100140 has holes to attach translators with M4 screws. It also has a hole of 10mm which can serve as a clear aperture.
Code 810-0140 Material Black anodized aluminium Stainless Steel Weight, kg 0.06 1.13 Price, EUR 21 49 Complementary Products 860-0092-01
20
40
14
29
29
Stainless steel Designed to be used with: Stainless Steel Translation Stages 860-0054
Brackets & Rails

810-0140SS
810-0140SS
Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
Usage of 810-0140
Code 860-0092-01 860-0092-02 860-0094
Page 8.116 8.116 8.117
Designed to be used with: Ultra Low Profile Steel Translation Stages 860-0092 Low Profile Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0094
810-0140
860-0092-02
810-0145
Angle Bracket
for N screw* 4 holes 5
860-0054 XYZ
20
Code 810-0145
Weight, kg 0.13
Price, EUR 49
* Please append letter A to the end of the code for 440 srew clearance hole or letter B for M3 clearance hole.
8.29
Brackets & Rails
810-0146
Angle Bracket
M6 2 holes for M6 screws 4 clearance holes
25
25
28,5
22
59
50 80
60
22
810-0146
810-0146SS Code 810-0146 810-0146SS 810-0146A Material Steel Stainless steel Black anodized aluminium Weight, kg 0.24 0.24 0.16 Price, EUR 55 49
Steel, Stainless Steel or Black Anodized Aluminium Designed to be used with: Stable Steel Translation Stages 860-0052 Stable Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0053
25
50
860-0053 XYZ
860-0052-SS XYZ
860-0052 XYZ
810-0150
Angle Bracket
for M4 screws 5 clearance holes 9
36
Code 860-0060-02 Code 810-0150 Weight, kg 0.11 Price, EUR 49 860-0060-04 960-0060-02
Page 8.107 8.107 8.146
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Narrow Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0060-02, 860-0060-04 Narrow Motorized Translation Stages 960-0060-02
12.5
for M4 srews 4 clearance holes
17
960-0060-02 xyz
12.5
12.5
Adjustment Screws
30
32
50 (=412.5)
100
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.30
810-0150-01
Angle Bracket
M4 2 holes
22
22
50
25
73
34
66
100
30
32
12,5
Designed to be used with: Narrow (width 30 mm) Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0060-05 Narrow Motorized Translation Stage 960-0050
12,5
17
12,5
960-0050 xyz
Code 810-0150-01
Price, EUR 49
810-0160
Angle Bracket
25 8
25
25
111
170
24.5
50
62 for M6 screws
6 clearance holes
for M6 screws
25
4 clearance holes
25
960-0060-08 xyz
Black anodized aluminium Designed to be used with: Medium Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0060-06, 860-0060-08, 860-0060-10 Medium Motorized Translation Stages 960-0060-06, 960-0060-08, 960-0060-10, 960-0060-12 Motorized Translation Stages 960-0090
960-0090 Code 810-0160 Weight, kg 0.45
960-0060 series Price, EUR 68
860-0060 series
8.31

820-0010 820-0020
Standard Rods
These 12 mm diameter stainless steel rods have M6 male threads on the top and M6 tapped holes on the bottom. It allows to mount all accessories directly on the rod, or to fix the rod directly on movable bases, translators, or to connect the rods. Cross hole at the top of the rod is very convenient for rigid fastening.
M4
M4
7.5
47
6.2
20
820-0020-20
6.2
6.2 M6
M6
820-0020-00
12 M6
820-0020-00
820-0020-20
12
820-0010
Code 820-0010-00 820-0010-01 820-0010-02
Height, mm (A) 25.4 38.1 50 75 100 150 200 14 41
Weight, kg 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.13 0.18 0.02 0.01
Price, EUR 4.4 4.8 5.2 6.0 6.9 7.9 10.0 6.0
The rod 820-0020-00 is especially designed for Precision Mirror Mount (eg. 840-0060) as well as for other mounts with mounting holes M4. Rod 820-0020 has M4 male thread for the top and M6 thread hole on the bottom.
820-0010-04 820-0010-06 820-0010-08 820-0020-00 820-0020-20
The 820-0030 collar allows to fix model 820-0010 standard rods at desirable height and to rotate the rod without chan ging height. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Code 820-0030 Weight, kg 0.01 Price, EUR 6.4
20
20
15
15
34
34
12 12
Adjustment Screws
820-0030
Collar
820-0010-03
5.6
Base Positioners
820-0010
Optical Positioners
12
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.32
820-0040
820-0040-04 820-0040-02
Rod Translators
The model 820-0040 rod translators provide stable mounting, vertical translation and fixing in place of model 820-0010 rods. One round turn of knurled collet produces 2 mm linear translation of rod with no rotation. Both the rod and translator bore are double-bored to form two line contacts in the inner wall for rigid lock down. Coarse and precision adjustments are fixed by thumbscrews. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 820-0040-02 820-0040-04 Height A, mm 67 105 Translation range B, mm 16 50 Weight, kg 0.22 0.30 Price, EUR 41 46
25
M6 12 29
42
820-0050
820-0050-08
Rod Holders
The model 820-0050 rod holders provide convenient and reliable model 820-0010 rod mounting and positioning at fixed height. To eliminate rod wobble, the inside diameter of rod holders is double-bored, providing two full-length contacts in the holder wall to support the rod along its entire length. Model 820-0050 holders can be mounted directly to a table by model 820-0260 screw as well as on bases, fixing by M6 bolts. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Code 820-0050-00 820-0050-01 820-0050-02 820-0050-03 820-0050-04 820-0050-06 820-0050-08 Height A, Weight, Price, mm kg EUR 25.4 38.1 50 75 80 100 150 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.11 10.0 10.9 11.8 12.5 12.7 13.2 17.3
820-0050-06 820-0050-04 820-0050-02
M6 24 12
35
820-0051
Rod Holder with Base Adapter

Rod holder with base adapter 820-0051 provide convenient mounting of the rod 820-0010 to an optical table using table clamp 820-0125. This combination allows convenient mounting of the rod holder that can ensure the positioning and alignment of various optical mounts using our standard rods 820-0010.
Complementary Products Code 820-0125 Page 8.36 Code 820-0051-00 820-0051-01 820-0051-02 820-0051-03 820-0051-04 Table clamp 820-0125 820-0051-06 820-0051-08 Height A, Weight, Price, mm kg EUR 38.1 50.8 62.7 87.7 92.7 112.7 162.7 0.06 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.16 16.0 16.9 17.8 18.5 18.7 19.2 23.3
8.33
820-0055
Fixed Pedestals
Solid (25 mm) stainless steel rod Random positioning Exceptional stability
0.5
14 M4
Optical Tables
12.5 25 6.4 4.5 15 50 9
820-0055
Code 820-0055-05 820-0055-10 820-0055-15 820-0055-20 820-0055-30
Height H, mm 25 50 75 100 150
Weight, kg 0.08 0.17 0.26 0.36 0.55
Price, EUR 18 20 22 24
13
16
M6 25
6.4 2 holes 20
Complementary Products Code 795-0016 820-0125 795-0016 820-0125 Page 8.15 8.36
Code 820-0060
Weight, kg 0.03
Price, EUR 7.3
820-0070
Movable Base
The 820-0070 movable base has 13 mm translation range. It is useful for small rod holders and riser blocks mounting. Finish: anodized aluminium.
6.4 12.5 25
4.5
6.4 2 holes 6 13
50 75 8.5 9
The 820-0080 movable base provides translation of mounted rod holders, translators over 13 mm range with rigid lockdown. Finish: anodized aluminium.
4.5 12.5 25 23 37.5 75 8.5 9
6.4 2 holes 6.4
Adjustment Screws
820-0080
Movable Base
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
The 820-0060 movable base is especially convenient for close space situations. Its primary use is to position rods and small riser blocks. Finish: anodized aluminium.
Optical Mounts
820-0060
Movable Base
Brackets & Rails
19
8.34
820-0090
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories
Movable Base
The 820-0090 movable base provides 50mm longitudinal translation of one or two mounted rod holders, translators or riser blocks. 85 Finish: black anodized aluminium.
50 7
Code 820-0090 37.5 Weight, kg 0.12 Price, EUR 12.7
6.4
37.5
40 80 50
75
50
4.5 50 75
6.4 3 holes
8.5
M6 2 holes
6.4 4 holes 32
820-0100
Optical Mounts
Movable Base
M6 3 holes 12 7.5 62 75 38 85 50 7
37.5 50
Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
29
6.4 3 holes
M6 2 holes
6.4 4 holes 32
The 820-0100 adjustable base provides separate X-Y adjustment. It is costeffective solution of non-critical two axes positioning of rod holders, translators and riser blocks. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Code 3 holes Weight, kg 820-0100 0.30
M6
38
Price, EUR 52
12 7.5 62
820-0110
Table Bases
64
820-0110-02
9
6.4 36.4 holes
29
50
25 25 120 L 50
820-0110-02
M6 9 holes
8.35
The 820-0110-02 and 820-0110-04 standart table bases with 9 and 12 threaded M6 holes respectively allow positioning of all basemounted accessories with M6 tapped holes or male threads anywhere on a table fixing by M6 screws or 820-0230-02 and 8200230-04 table clamps. Two slots, with 100 or 125 mm distance allow longtitudinal positioning along a line of holes in the table. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 820-0110-04 820-0110-02 820-0110-04 Dimensions, mm 12064 14564 L, mm 100 125 Weight, kg 0.48 0.57 Price, EUR 13.0 16.4
820-0120-06 820-0120-04
45
820-0120-04
820-0120-02
25
Code 820-0120-02 820-0120-04 820-0120-06 Weight, kg 0.11 0.12 0.15 Price, EUR 11 12 15
24 11
for M6(1/4-20) screws clearance holes
45
820-0120-06
side view of the bases
820-0125
Table Clamp
820-0125 Table Clamp is used for convenient and fast mounting of 795-0010 rods, 820-0055 pedestals or 820-0051 Rod Holders with Base Adapter on optical tables or breadboards. Material: stainless steel.
12 6
for M6(1/4-20) screw clearance slot
26
57
25
Complementary Products Code 795-0010 795-0016 820-0051 820-0055 Page 8.15 8.33 8.34 8.15
20
2 points of ensured contact
Adjustment Screws
24
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
65
25
35
20
Optical Mounts
30
21
820-0120-02
Bases 820-0120 are used to clamp posts and post holders in random positions. Attach a post to the base using a M6 screw. Set the position. The base rotates around the clamp through 360 and translates within 10 mm. Fix the clamp with a M6 screw. The base is made of black anodized aluminium.
24
11
25
65
24
35
50
820-0120
Base Plates with eccentric clamp
11
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.36
820-0130
Optical Tables
Base Plate with Rotary Clamp

57 M6
28
Code 820-0130
Weight, kg 0.08
Price, EUR 8
Rotary Clamp 820-0130 is used to fasten components at random positions where they can not be fastened directly to the optical table. Screw a post or post holder onto the clamps knob. Then locate the component at the required position. While the knob is firmly attached to the component, it allows the plate to rotate freely. Position the plates slot over a tapped hole and screw it down to clutch the knob. The component will remain stable.
26
0 36
Material: steel with chemical black finish.
820-0135
Universal Base Plates

5.5 (0.22") 6 (0.24")
64 (2.52") 50 (1.97") 64 (2.52")
820-0135-04
25 20
25
M3x5.5 deep 4 holes
25 (1")
25 32 38 (1.5") 57 (2.44")
820-0135-03 for metric and inch
for M6 (1/4-20) screw clearance slot
M3x5.5 deep 4 holes
25 20
25
for M6 (1/4-20) screw 2 clearance slots
50 (1.97") 36 (1.42")
820-0135-02
M4x5.5 deep 3 holes
7 (0.26")
820-0135-03
39
20
M4x5.5 deep 4 holes
820-0135-02 for metric and inch Complementary Products Code 850-0200 860-0054 860-0056 860-0060 860-0092 860-0094 860-0096 860-0098 860-0170 860-0180 960-0060 960-0170 Page 8.97 8.104 8.105 8.107 8.116 8.117 8.118 8.118 8.129 8.129 8.146 8.170
37.5 (1.5")
25 32 40
Universal Base Plates 820-0135 are designed for attaching translation and rotation stages to optical tables or to another stages. 820-0135-02 is designed for the same stages like 820-0135-03, plus 860-0060-02, 860-0060-04, 960-0060-02, 960-0060-04. 820-0135-03 is designed for 850-0200, 860-0054, 860-0056, 860-0092-01, 860-0092-02, 860-0094, 860-0094-02, 8600096, 860-0098, 860-0170, 860-0180, 960-0170. 820-0135-04 replaces model 820-0135-01. 820-0135-04 is designed for 850-0200, 860-0054, 860-0056, 860-0092-01, 860-0092-02, 860-0094, 860-0094-02, 860-0096, 860-0098, 860-0170, 860-0180, 960-0170, 860-0060-02, 860-0060-04, 960-0060-02, 960-0060-04. Material: Aluminium. Finish: Black Anodized
Code 820-0135-02 820-0135-03 820-0135-04 Weight, kg 0.1 0.1 0.1 Price, EUR 29 31
6 (0.24")
87 (3.43") 59 (2.32")
for M4 screw 6 clearance holes M3x5.5 deep 4 holes
32 25
20
22
M4x5.5 deep 3 holes
70 (2.75'') 75 (2'')
820-0135-04 for metric and inch
8.37
50 (1.97'')
25 (1")
25 12.5
5.5 (0.22")
69.5 (2.74")
25
25
6 (0.24")
6.4
9
820-0136
Universal Base Plate

9,7 (0,38")
Designed to fix listed translators to optical tables and other flat surfaces. Fits metric and imperial hole patterns.
115 (4,53") 100 (4")

M6x9 deep 6 holes
25 2,5
Designed to be used with: 860-0052, 860-0053, 860-0060-06/08/10, 9600060, 960-0065, 960-0070-02, 9600080, 960-0090, 960-0095. Material: Aluminium. Finish: Black anodized
90 (3,54")
M4x9 deep 4 holes
820-0140
Low-profile Magnetic Base

120
hex6
125
820-0140
2.8
332
820-0150
Compact Magnetic Bases

Small components may be quickly positioned on ferromagnetic optical tables and breadboards or translation stages using Compact Magnetic Bases 820-0150.
820-0150-08 820-0150-02 D, mm 19 19 27 27 Holds load up to, kg 5 5 10 10 Weight, kg 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.06 Price, EUR 10 10 16 16
M for mounts D
Code 820-0150-02 820-0150-04 820-0150-06 820-0150-08
M M6 M4 M6 M4
Adjustment Screws
15
Code
Weight, kg
Price, EUR
Base Positioners
Highest holding force up to 140 kg Nonmagnetic mounting surface M6 mounting holes pattern on 25 mm centers Low field leakage
Low-profile Magnetic Base features: a high holding force that does not degrade with time, a low profile, generous mounting provisions, a non magnetic mounting surface of the magnetic base, a holding force which you may vary continuously by the easy to reach inset adjustment screw. An exclusive stable magnetic circuit ensures that the magnetic elements move linearly. A Hex Key of 6 mm is included in each magnetic base.
Optical Positioners
M610 25 holes
100=425
Optical Mounts
OFF
ON
44
25 34 75
Brackets & Rails
75 (3")
25 34 50 75
Optical Tables
8.38
820-0160 820-0170
Optical Tables
820-0160-03
Riser Blocks
820-0160-05 820-0160-02
10.5
820-0160-04
820-0160-01
1.5
820-0170-02
6.4
820-0170-01
The 820-0160 and 820-0170 series riser blocks interface with all optical mounts and holders providing rigid mounting of components at desirable optical axis height. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
25
820-0160
10.5
1.5
6.4 4.5 25
820-0170
Code 820-0160-01 820-0160-02 820-0160-03 820-0160-04 820-0160-05 820-0170-01 820-0170-02
Mountable element 830-0010; 830-0080; 830-0030-02 830-0010; 830-0080; 830-0030-02 830-0020; 830-0030-04 830-0060; 830-0070 830-0060; 830-0070 840-0160; 840-0170; 840-0010; 840-0020; 840-0030 840-0160; 840-0170; 840-0010; 840-0020; 840-0030
Axis height, mm 50 75 75 50 75 50 75
A, mm 7 32 22 13 38 16 41
B, mm 11 36 25.5 17.6 42.6 19 44
R, mm 34 34 44 28 28
Weight, kg 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.03
Price, EUR 5.9 8.2 7.3 6.4 8.6 5.5 5.9
Complementary Products Code 830-0010 830-0020 830-0030 830-0060 830-0070 830-0080 Page 8.44 8.44 8.47 8.50 8.50 8.50 Code 840-0010 840-0020 840-0030 840-0160 840-0170 Page 8.54 8.54 8.54 8.81 8.81
8.39
820-0180
Rod Clamp
64
Optical Tables
16
Brackets & Rails
12
16
12 12
The 820-0180 clamp mounts two standard rods at right angle with respect to each other. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
820-0190
Rod Clamp
29 12 16
Optical Positioners
74 max 12.5 12 47
Base Positioners
25
Code 820-0190
Weight, kg 0.06
Price, EUR
Adjustment Screws
The 820-0190 clamp mounts two standard rods at desirable angle with respect to each other. The construction of clamp allows positioning of one rod without loosening of other. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Optical Mounts
16
8.40
820-0200
Optical Tables
Rod Clamp
25 12
89 28
20.5
46
65
The 820-0200 clamp holds standard and large rods at desirable angle with respect to each other. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
820-0210 820-0220
Solid Base Height ExtenderS

M6 M6
25 9
31 6 25
31
820-0220
25 50
M6 25
820-0210
820-0210
820-0220
The 820-0210 solid base provides mounting of components at fixed optical axis height. It adds 25 mm height for every component to be mounted on. The 8200220 height extender adds another 25mm. After positioning solid base can be reliably fixed to a table with 820-023002 or 820023004 clamps. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Code 820-0210 820-0220
Price, EUR 10.5 7.3
8.41
820-0225
Rod Holders Base Adapter

820-0225 Rod Holders Base Adapter can be fixed to 820-0050 Rod Holders transforming them to pedestal-style mount 8200051 Rod Holders with Base Adapter or fixed to 820-0010 Standard Rod enabling them to be compatible with the 820-0125 Table Clamp. Material: Stainless Steel.
Complementary Products Code Page 8.32 8.33 8.36 Code 820-0225 Weight, kg 0.04 Price, EUR 6
25 19 M6
13.3 19.3
Designed to be used with Rod Holders 820-0050
820-0010 820-0050 820-0125
820-0230
Table Clamps
L 16
16
6
9.3
820-0230-02 820-0230-04
6.4
820-0230
The 820-0230-02 and 820-0230-04 clamps provide fixing of movable bases and other components to a surface with M6 tapped holes. It is useful when direct mounting of components is not practical. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code 820-0230-02 820-0230-04
L, mm 45 60
Weight, kg 0.026 0.03
Price, EUR 6 8
820-0240
Table Clamp
Using Table Clamps 820-0240 you can position most base mounted components at any angle on the table and have not to be limited by mounting hole pattern of the optical table. For using clamps the device is positioned so that the slot of the clamp is over the base and a screw can be inserted into a tapped hole. Tightening this screw can generate sufficient force for most mounting applications. Material: steel with chemical black finish.
50
for M6(1/4-20) screw clearance slot
16
44
Adjustment Screws
14
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.42
820-0250 820-0254
Optical Tables
820-0270 820-0260
Connecting Cones
Connecting Cones are particularly useful for connecting elements when specific orientation plane is required, e.g. Narrow Translation Stages 8600060-02 (8600060-04) joined for X-Y-Z motion. Connecting cone is made of black finish ed steel and has M6 (M4) thread at one end and 50 cone in another. A component is fastened to the cone using an additional fastening screw.
Code 820-0250 820-0254 Thread M6 M4 Weight, kg 0.01 0.01 Price, EUR 4.5 4.5
M6
820-0250
11 7
820-0254
11
820-0270 820-0260 820-0280
Hex key Screws

The L shaped 820-0270 hex key is very convenient in all mounting situations. The 8200260 screw is very useful for mounting of rods, rod holders, large rod 810-0040 directly to the table top or where M6-M6 connection is required. M6-M4 adapters are also available.
Code 820-0260 820-0270 Weight, kg 0.005 0.020 Price, EUR 0.73 0.73 3
M6
16 820-0260
78
M61
34
5
10
5
820-0280 Code 820-0280-01 820-0280-02 820-0280-03 820-0280-04 820-0280-05 820-0280-06 820-0270 Length h, mm 10 16 20 25 30 45 50 Weight, kg 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.012 Price, EUR 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.11 0.12 0.13 0.14
These hex socket head cap screws are available in different lengths.
820-0280-07
820-0290
Washer
A Washer is made of black finished steel and is used for protecting of surfaces from scratches and provides more stable tightening.
1.5 6.4
12
8.43
50
M4
50
Optical Mounts
Optical Mounts
830-0010 830-0020
Self-Centring Lens Mounts

A 22
C B
830-0020
830-0010
M6
6 12
Code 830-0010 830-0020
Amin, mm 8 8
Amax, mm 40 60
B, mm 68 88
C, mm 88 108
Price, EUR 91 95
Complementary Products 820-0010 820-0040 820-0050 8.32 8.33 8.33
Adjustment Screws
Code
Page
The model 830-0010 and model 830-0020 self-centring lens mounts reliably centre and safely hold round optics and cylindrical components. Holding by three rods with V-groove tips provide easy and secure optics accommodation with high relocation repeatability. Model 830-0010 and 830-0020 mounts may be attached to series 820-0010 standard rods and then with series 820-0050 rod
holders or series 820-0040 rod translators be located on the table. Alternatively, sets of riser blocks and movable bases provide a selection of convenient, various axes height and direct location to table. Model 830-0010 accommodates optics up to 40 mm and model 830-0020 up to 60 mm in diameter. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.44
830-0025
Optical Tables
Self-Centering Lens/Optics Mounts

Automatically centers and holds optics Easy insertion and removal of optics 3 M4 holes for fixing to flat object Reverse operation on request Can be motorized 2 optics mount Self-Centering Lens/Optics Mounts reliably centres and securely holds round optics and cylindrical objects. This device is particularly valuable when len ses of different diameters are being used interchangeably, as repeated centering at constant height is necessary. The Self-Centering Lens/Optics Mount accommodates optics up to 50.8 mm and is oversized to provide easy finger access for inserting and remaining optics. When released the three arms grip the lens, automatically centering the lens within the holder. Unlike other models, 830-0025 gripping mechanism controlled by pressing vertical piston down the socket. Because of such design mount can be easily motorized. The mount can be modified on request for reverse operation mount is closing while pushing vertical piston down. This way mount can be used to hold rings and hollow cylinders from inside.
Code 830-0025-02 830-0025-04 Weight, kg 0.19 0.38 Price, EUR 99 140
20
41
7.5 14
140 101.6max
fixing nut M4x10 deep 3 holes
15
163
139
100 83
69
30
20
120
830-0025-04
(for attachment to the base surface)
4.5 3 holes
40
11 28
M4x8 deep 2 holes
40 52 80
830-0025-02
8.45
52
830-0025-04 830-0025-02
View A
M6x8 deep
M6x8 deep
M4x8 deep 2 holes
fixing handle Button for opening
110
20
50.8max 4.5/ 3 holes (for attachment to the base surface)
30
120
12
levers of mount
30
Optical Mounts
830-0027
Self-Centering Lens/Optics Mounts

Self-Centering Optics Mount 830-0027 reliably centres and securely holds round optics and cylindrical objects. This device is particularly valuable when lenses of different diameters are being used interchangeably and repeated centering at constant height is necessary. The Self-Centering Optics Mount 830-002708 accommodates optics up to 8 inch (203.2 mm); 830-0027-12 up to 12 inch (305 mm) and is oversized to provide easy finger access for inserting and removing optics. Optical elements are fixed and centered at the same time by adjusting driving screw at the top of the device. Heavy optical components are secured by wedged rods.
10
Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Tables Motorized Positioners Adjustment Screws
M4 screw 3pc
64
35
M4x9 deep 3 holes
30 64
270
Optical Mounts Translation & Rotation Stages
830-0027
20 10
For optics up to 8 or up to 12 in diameter Adjustable range from 1 (25.0 mm) to 8 (203 mm) 3 mounting holes 6.5 mm are made for mounting to flat object Reverse operation holding hollow objects from inside Made of black anodized aluminium and black oxidation steel
Catalogue number 830-0027-08 830-0027-08B 830-0027-12 830-0027-12B Description 8; without base plate 8; with a base plate 12; without base plate 12; with a base plate Weight, kg 1.8 1.85 7.35 7.55 Price, EUR 365 390 2155
25.4... 203.2 (1"...8") 215
120
126
For Self-Centering Optics Mount of 12 830-0027-12 data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
6.5 3 holes (for attachment to the base surface)
for M6 screw 2 clearance slots M6x14 deep 2 holes
for M4 screw 3 holes
20 5
30 50
Our recommended Base Plate is used to fix 830-0027 to optical table or other suitable bases. Mounting base plates of different shapes can be manufactured under customer request. Default package does not include Base Plate and it must be ordered separately.
75
60 24 10
90
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
291
Brackets & Rails
120
8.46
830-0030
Optical Tables
830-0030-02
Adjustable Lens Mounts

The 830-0030 series adjustable lens mounts provide convenient, precise optics centering and repeatable removal and replacing. Lenses are positioned and locked in place by three rigid shaft assemblies with V-groove tips. Each individually adjustable shaft incorporates a sliding sleeve for rough positioning and diameter setting and collet fix sleeve in place. A thumbscrews at the end of two orthogonal sleeves then provide fine X-Y position adjustment within 3 mm range. Mounting holes on the support ring provide easy attachment to all mounting elements. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
35max M6 2 holes
M6
C
H
Holding of cylindrical objects of various diameters Three mounting options Convenient storage of tips which are not used at the moment Quick coarse positioning and diameter setting possibility Made of black anodized aluminium
1.
M4 A
16
Changeable tips
10 5 10 2. 6 teflon
14
12
8.47
24
Brackets & Rails

820-0010
A 38max
24
Code 830-0030-02 830-0030-04 830-0030-06
Amin, mm 20 40 60
Amax, mm 45 65 85
B, mm 65 85 105
Weight, kg 0.21 0.23 0.25
Price, EUR 107 114 121
830-0035
Universal Adjustable Lens/Optics Mounts

push for removal
for M6(1/4-20) screw
The place for keeping of the changeable tip
Optical Mounts Continued 830-0035
830-0035 and 810-0035 Complementary Products Code 810-0035 Page 8.20
Code 830-0035-04 830-0035-02
A, mm 164-210 134-164
B, mm 158-185 124-141
C, mm 38-103 10-66
H, mm 65.7 49.1
Price, EUR 152
2 teflon rings B
Clear aperture C
E
Component dia
4.5 2 holes
15
M6
Code 830-0037-10 830-0037-20 830-0037-25 830-0037-40 830-0037-50 830-0037-75
A 12.7 (0.5) 20 25.4 (1) 40 50.8 (2) 75
B 26 33 38 53 65 89
C 8 17 23 37 48 72
D 12 12 12 18 18 18
E 10 10 10 16 16 16
F 13.5 18.8 21.3 28.8 34.8 46.5
G 8.5 13.8 16.3 23.8 29.8 42
Weight, kg 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.06
Price, EUR 18 17 22 24 44
Adjustment Screws
15
Base Positioners
Optical Component Mounts 830-0037 can be used to hold round and thin optical elements of standard sizes. Mounts vary in dimensions so as to support diameters from 10 to 50 mm (0.5 to 2). Original
design allows to decrease the mounts dimensions and weight. Mounting holes: one M6 and two 4.5mm. Material: black aluminium.
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
830-0037
Optical Component Mounts
99
Brackets & Rails
Universal Adjustable Lens/Optics Mounts 830-0035-04 and 830-0035-02 are used to accommodate any round and thickness objects as lenses, mirrors and lasers. Three support shafts of holder are assembled with non-rotating V-groove aluminium universal interchangeable tips for lenses mirrors, etc. While not in use the new non-abrasive flat teflon face aluminium tips for lasers are kept in special holes on aluminium support ring. Long objects like cylindrical laser heads can be held with two chucks.
Each individual adjustable shaft of holder incorporates threaded thumbscrew, sliding sleeve and fixation tool for rough positioning and diameter setting. It is enough to give only a twist thumbscrew of the shaft to provide a fine adjustment travel. Three various mounting holes M4, M6, and 6.4, 11x4 pro vides various and easy attachment possibilities to the Tables, Breadboards and Rod Holder system.
Optical Tables
8.48
830-0040
Variable Lens Holder

The model 830-0040 variable lens hol der provides optics from 15 mm to 78 mm in diameter registration. A top spring-loaded clamp holds optics of any configuration gently but firmly within V-sha ped mounting base. Kinematic clamp height fixing provide convenience when optics removed and replaced. Model 830-0040 holder is useful for thin lenses holding. Finish: black oxidized steel.
80
124 88 max
50 100 6
M6
12
830-0050
Optics Clamp
The 830-0050 clamp is especially convenient for fast optical elements clamping on bases, translators, rotators and other surfaces with M6 and M4 tapped holes. Rod material: Stainless steel. Clamp finish: black anodized aluminium
Code 830-0050 Price, EUR 19
50 max 10 min M4
62
12 6 6
M6
830-0055
Plate Clamp
Plate Clamp 830-0055 holds thin lightweight plates, like filters, transparencies, resolution targets and razor blades used in knife edge experiments. These black finished steel Clamps may be directly screwed for example to the mounting stud of a Mounting Post or to a Base Plate with Rotary Clamp 820-0130.
fixing screw 5 hex key
12
50 M6x6 deep
8.49
Optical Mounts
830-0060A
830-0070A
47
5.8 28 13
56 30
Code 830-0060A 830-0070A
Price, EUR 20 22
5.3 6
7.8
M6 3 holes
830-0070A
12
830-0075
Universal Plate Holder

Universal Plate Holder 830-0075 holds long and thick components, and can fix elements from 0 to 12 mm in width. M6 hole for mounting on posts provided in base.
fixing screw 5 hex key hole 0...12
34
Code 830-0075
Weight, kg 0.07
Price, EUR 53
M6x6 deep
9 17 60 32
830-0080 830-0090
Laser Holders
The 830-0080 and 830-0090 holders securely hold cylindrical objects like He-Ne alignment lasers at fixed position. The holders could be mounted directly to standard rods or on bases, translators and other surfaces with M6 holes with the help of screw. Finish: black oxidized steel.
M6 A 10
B E
60
830-0080
830-0090
Code 830-0080 830-0090
A, mm 55 35
B, mm 30 16
C, mm 60 40
D, mm 68 48
E, mm 75 58
Price, EUR 20 19
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
The model 830-0060A and model 8300070A filter holders provide safe, separate, with maximum clear aperture plate optics location and offer quick change convenience. Each plate held separately to prevent scratching and is registered by dovetailed pins for easy relocation. Holders are convenient and useful for quick coloured or neutral density filters combination adjustment. Model 830-0060A holder holds up to two, while model 830-0070A up to five optics plates with dimensions 4040 mm (max 8080 mm) or 40 mm (max 80 mm), thickness up to 4.5 mm in vertical position. Finish: black anodized aluminium.
56 30 28 13
12
5.3 23.6
830-0060A
Brackets & Rails
M6 3 holes
38
Optical Tables
830-0060A 830-0070A
Filter Holders
8.50
830-0100 830-0101 830-0110 830-0111
Rectangular Optics Holder

Rectangular optics holders 8300100 and 830-0110 provide easy and safe mounting of rectangular optics. Guiding pins ensure correct and reliable positioning of optical components M6 holes on two sides allow horizontal or vertical mounting 830-0101, 830-0111 have additional 1 mm raised edge for optics to stop against. Ideal for mounting rectangular windows and plano-concave cylindrical lenses. You may put lens flat side on raised edges and lock with fixing bolt. Finish: Black anodized aliuminium.
M61
54
M61
12.7
26.5
13
32 9 50
12
12.7
9 50
32
24.5
27
2 holes
2 holes
54
M61
3 holes
54
M61
52
52
25.4
12.7
25.4
13
32 9 50
9 50
12
12.7
50
3 holes
54
830-0110 and 830-0100 with lenses
830-0110
830-0100
830-0100
830-0101
32
830-0110
830-0111
Code 830-0100 830-0101 830-0110 830-0111
Suitable for optics height, mm 026 226 24.551 26.551
Weight, kg 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.06
Price, EUR 28 29 29 30
8.51
Optical Positioners
Optical Positioners
840-0005
Rigid design Long-term stability Compact Adjustment screw thread pitch 0.25 mm; vertical screw placement Additional accessories
Supper fine and stable Kinematic Optical Mounts 840-0005 and 840-0005-01 for large and heavy optics. Optionally uni ver sal element holder can be mounted from the backside of the holder to easily adapt the holder for test parts of various sizes and shapes.
265 315max
clear aperture
145
120 R60
135
140
Adjustable optical holders
35
200 226
840-0005
Specifications
Fine screw thread Axes 840-0005 840-0005-01 Horizontal rotation range Vertical yaw range Sensitivity Load capacity Compatible with optical elements Diameter Thickness 115250 mm* up to 52 mm** 2 3 1.5 1.5 0.5 arcsecond 6 kg M6x0.35
Code 840-0005-01 840-0005 840-0005-01
Axes 2 3*
Price, EUR 1134 1490
* x axis translation range 30 mm.
* Optics diameter up to 500 mm on request ** Optics thickness up to 100 mm on request
Adjustment Screws
240 248
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Large Adjustable Kinematic Optical Mount
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.52
840-0006
840-0007-10
Large Optical Mount

Big Optical Mount for large and heavy optics. The mount is designed for a transmission optics.
Optics diameter 115250 mm Optics thickness 52 mm Load capacity 6 kg
Code 840-0006
Weight, kg 5.3
Price, EUR 290
840-0007
Self-centring Large Aperture Optical Mount

140 70 5...100 121,5 77,5
140 152,5 70
45
50
for M6(1/4-20) screw 6 clearance holes 50
20 45 23,7 48,7 56 View A fixing nut 5 for optic
Tilt/tip range 2.2 Linear adjustment of X axis is possible on request More linear axes are possible on request Great variety of optics diameters can be used with this mount
840-0007-10
5...37 42
8.53
Optical Positioners
840-0007-10
206 104 78
122
Optical Tables
50
79
for M6(1/4-20) screw 6 clearance holes
51 59
view A
50
860-0052
79 5
Optics diameter range Tilt/tip range Options
5-100 mm 2.2 Translation Stage 860-0052 Base plate Code 840-0007-10 840-0007-15 Optics Diameter Range 5-100 mm 5-150 mm
840-0007-15 Complementary Products Code 860-0052 Page 8.102
840-0010 840-0020 840-0030
Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mounts (Steel)

The compact model 8400010 mirror, model 8400020 and 8400030 mirror/beamsplitter mounts provide fine and smooth angular alig n ment of mounted elements. They are designed for stable orientation of mirrors, beamsplitters, prisms and other optical components. Models 8400020 and 8400030 offer gentle, 3-point (plastic type pads and plastic ended screw for fixation) support of 22-26 mm dia optics. Mirrors can be directly bonded to the model 8400010 mount. Alternatively, model 8400010 mount could be used as precision kinematic tilt stage which is moun ted on series 8200010 standard rods in series 820-0050 rod holders or series 820-0040 rod translators.
M6 46 50 25 4.6 25 32 48
840-0010 840-0010-04
M6 25 50 23
9
840-0010
M4 3 holes
M6
30
25
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
5...37 42
5...150
20
24
Brackets & Rails
8.54
25
Optical Tables
31.4
46
M6
24
25 50 25 48
M6 50
840-0020
9 23
840-0020
28.2 25
46
M6
24
25 M6 48
M6 50
840-0030-02
9 23
840-0030
28.2 25
Mounting option: Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020, Glan Laser Polarizing Prism in M2P mount, Solid Base Height Extender 820-0210
Model 8400010, 8400020 and 8400030 mounts could be atta ched to the table using a number of fixed-height riser blocks and mo vable bases as well. These provide the most stable, rigid mounting possible. Mounts provide 6 range of ortho go nal adjustments with 8 arc-seconds resolution. Model 8400030 mount provides maximum clear aperture for beamsplitter applications at not-normal incidence angles. Models 840-0010, 840-0020, 840-0030 are completed with steel screws M60.5 mm and brass collar with an outer thread M101 mm for mounting. Additionally, model 8400010-02, model
Code 840-0010 840-0010-02 840-0010-04 840-0020 840-0020-02 840-0020-04 840-0030 840-0030-02 840-0030-04 Weight, kg 0.36 0.42 0.42 0.26 0.32 0.32 0.22 0.28 0.28 Price, EUR 56 108 118 63 115 125 67 119 129
840002002 and model 840003002 mounts are completed with model 8700010 precise screws. 8400010-04, 840002004 and 8400030 04 options come with model 870-0020 micrometer screws with reading marks. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Mounting option: Movable Base 820-0080, Rod Holder 820-0050-04, Standard Rod 820-0010-02, Kinematic Mirror Mount 840-0010 and Optics Clamp 830-0050
Mounting option: Movable Base 820-0080, Rod Holder 820-0050-04, Standard Rod 820-0010-02, Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020 and Adapter for Beamsplitter at 45 840-0116
Complementary Products Code 820-0010 820-0050 820-0060 820-0080 820-0210 Page 8.32 8.33 8.34 8.34 8.41 Code 840-0020 840-0116 870-0010 870-0020 Page 8.54 8.72 8.131 8.131
Mounting option: Movable Base 820-0060, Riser Block 820-0170-02 and Kinematic Mirror Mount 840-0010
8.55
Optical Positioners
for 1(25.4) optics
840-0033-80 comes with three Adjustment Screws 870-0080
840-0032-80
for 1(25.4) optics
Precise and handy adjustment, angular in two orthogonal planes, and linear Stable vertical mounting Adjustment range of 9 or 5 mm Sensitivity of 3 arcsec or 1 m Weight 0.09 kg Available motorized version 940-0060 Available 2 inch version
840-0033-90 comes with three Adjustment Screws 870-0090
Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mounts 8400032 and 840-0033 are designed for precise alignment of various optical elements to desired angular and linear orientation. Models with 2 or 3 screws are available. The base of the mount has holes 8.7 mm for driving screws of your choice (see section 870). As standard, we fit Fine Screws 870-0080 or 870-0090. Each screw has a hardened steel ball tip. The mounts have a one inch mounting hole with 24 mm clear aperture. 840-0032, 840-0033 may be mounted on one side or another, e.g. to swap left/right hand side of access to the drive relative to the beam. It mounts to an M6 screw or directly to mounting posts on their M6 tips. Put an M4 screw through the combined 7/M6 hole to fasten the mount to units with M4 holes. Material: Aliuminium. Finish: Black anodized (by default) or any other color on request.
M6
M4
(83 scr 2) ew
Code 840-0032-80 840-0032-90 840-0033-80 840-0033-90
Price, EUR 59 59 75
Adjustment Screws
72
* slide M4 screws through combined M6/7 mounting/clearance holes to mount the unit immediately to M4 holes, or mount the unit directly on any M6 tip.
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
840-0033-80
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
840-0032 840-0033
Kinematic Mirror, Beamsplitter Mounts (Aluminium)
8.56
Precision and High Stability L-shaped Steel Optical Mounts

Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners
840-0036-01
Special flat spring for improved stability, versatility and durability Kinematics, orthogonal angular adjustments Tilt/tip 9 range with 5 arcsec sensitivity Left or right hand mounting Vertical and horizontal mounting
Highly Stable Precision L-shaped Optical Mounts are designed on the basis of two-angules adjustment mount, and are made of steel with black chemical finishing. Special figure spring is used in these mounts for two purposes: It provides pre-loading against the tips of two precise driving screws for elimination of backlash. It ensures the absence of the roll coordinate. The Highly Stable Precision L-shaped Optical Mounts have two M10x1 threaded mounting holes for mounting of the actuators. M6 tapped holes on the sides provide a wide variety of mounting configurations, either horizontal or vertical. A special L-shaped design of the mounts provides maximum clear aperture.
840-0036
Special flat spring for improved stability versatility and durability Suitable for 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 optics 6 range Kinematics, orthogonal angular adjustments Left or right hand mountable Vertical and horizontal mounting
Stable Steel Mirror/Beamsplitter Mounts

Special holders with two Teflon dowel pads and Teflon fixing screw. The mount is ideal for precision adjustment of 1 (25,4 mm), 2 (50.8 mm), 3 (76.2 mm), 4 (101.6 mm) or 6 (152.4) mirrors or beamsplitters. The mount comes with 870-0030 screw as standard. You may choose different screws. If you order the mount with alternative screws, please specify this in order, by appending the screw code name to the mount code. Models for 1,2 and 3 optics made entirely of black anodized steel (back and front plates). Models for 4 and 6 optics use front plate made of black anodized aluminium.
Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws

840-0036-02 Code 840-0036-01 840-0036-02 840-0036-03 840-0036-04 840-0036-06 Description for 1 (25.4) optics for 2 (50.8) optics for 3 (76.2) optics for 4 (101.4) optics for 6 (152.4) optics Weight, kg 0.07 0.18 0.44 1.04 1.4 Price, EUR 89 114 147 177 266
8.57
Optical Positioners
840-0036-03
840-0036-04
fixing screw
146 153
9,5
20
optics
179.5
178.5
25
M6x9 6holes
2
42.5
42,5
25
25 178.5
21
34 61
840-0036-06
179.5
2 contact lines
Adjustment Screws
25
for 6"( 152.4)
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.58
840-0040 840-0050
Precision and High Stability ALUMINIUM Optics Mounts

Precision and High Stability Optics Mounts 840-0040 and 840-0050 are universal, dur able, and render very stable adjustment. Independent tilt about two horizontal axes 6 with 3 arcsec sensitivity. Linear translation 5 mm, sensiti vi ty1m. For translation a third actuator replaces the removable socket and the pivot bearing. To enhance stability: the platform is preloaded by three special spring blocks; actuators push against hardened steel seats. The mounts have M6 mounting holes. Mount 840-0050 also has a 42 mm clear aperture. The mounts can be fastened on any mounting post on its M6 tip. Additionally, mount 840-0040 has a hole on its back and can be mounted in horizontal position to be used as a tilt platform. The base of the stage has three holes M101 for adjustment screws of your choice. Standard screws have a pitch of 0.5 mm. For greater sensitivity you may request actuators with 0.35 or 0.25 pitch. Material: black anodized aluminium.
Weight, kg 0.35
51 48
4.5 10
52
40
M4
4 holes
47 9
41
77 75 72 51 40
77 75 72
39
41
M6
3 holes
25 51 72 76
M6
3 holes
25 72 76
With square type frame of 50.8 mm (2 inches)
840-0040-SQ2
With ring type frame of 50.8 mm (2 inches)
840-0050-RN2
8.59
39
4.5 10
11
840-0040-35
840-0040-35
840-0050-25
840-0050-25
Modifications 840-0040 and 840-0050
fixing screw
48 51
Optical Positioners
Ordering 840-0040 and 840-0050

840-0040-24 840-0040-34 840-0040-S34 840-0040-25 840-0040-35 840-0040-S25 840-0040-26 840-0040-36 840-0040-27 840-0040-37 840-0040-34 with two 870-0030 adjustment screws, 1 ball with three 870-0030 adjustment screws made of steel, has three 870-0030 adjustment screws with two 870-0060-01 adjustment screws, 1 ball with three 870-0060-01 adjustment screws made of steel, has two 870-0060-01 adjustment screws, 1 ball with three 870-0070 adjustment screws with two 870-0080-C3 adjustment screws, 1 ball with three 870-0080-C3 adjustment screws Code Price, EUR 111 62 59 82 136 71 68 96 Code 840-0050-24 840-0050-25 840-0050-26 840-0050-27 840-0050-34 840-0050-35 840-0050-36 840-0050-37 Price, EUR 65 62 85 146 74 72 99
840-0040-25 840-0040-26 840-0040-27 840-0040-34 840-0040-35 840-0040-36 840-0040-37
Precision Kinematic Optical Mounts

Precise and handy two orthogonal angular adjustments Stable vertical mounting Till/tip range 9 Various modifications with sensitivity from 10 to 3 arcsec M60.35 adjustment screws provide precise kinematic control Made of black anodized aluminium Precision Kinematic Optical Mounts are ideally suitable for precise aligning of various optical elements to desired angular orientation. The tilting element is always true-kinematicregistered. The drive screw pushes the alignment mechanism via hardened steel balls. These mounts provide angular range 9 in both orthogonal axes. The Precision Kinematic Optical Mounts are produced of aluminium and can be anodized in the color according to your request.
840-0052
Universal Mirror Mount/Platform

The Universal Mirror Mount/Platform 8400052 is suited for precise adjust ments of standard mirrors which can be directly bound to it. The mount may also be used in horizontal position as a tilt table. Then it can be used to align opto-mechanics around two axes. For such mounting the Mount has an M4 hole on its back.
M60.35
50
32.5
6.5 17 35
M4
27
M4
3 holes
Adjustment Screws
50
11.5
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
The stage may be fitted with 2 or 3 screws. A variant with 2 adjustment screws has a ball 8 as a third base-point. The stage comes with 870-0030 screw as standard. Dont specify this screw in order. If you order the stage with alternative screws, please specify this in order, by appending the screw code name to the stage code.
See section 870 for optional driving screws (p. 8.1318.136).
840-0040-24
121
Brackets & Rails
with two 870-0070 adjustment screws, 1 ball
Optical Tables
Examples of codes for 840-0040 stages
8.60
840-0053
840-0053-01
Large Aperture Optical Mount

The Large Aperture Optical Mount 8400053-01 on its platform has 31.8 mm aperture and six M4 mounting holes. It is designed for precise orthogonal adjustment of mirrors. The Large Aperture Optical Mount 840-0053-02 on its platform has 51 mm aperture and six M4 mounting holes. It is designed for precise kinematics orthogonal adjustment of mirrors.
Code 840-0053-01 840-0053-02 Weight, kg 0.08 0.1 Price, EUR 45 99 840-0053-01
M60.35
34 51
M4
6 holes
6.5 16 35
840-0053-02
34
12.7
25.4
M4
68
M4
40 68
840-0053-02
RELATED PRODUCTS
840-0054
For 12.7 mm optics (0.5 inch) Kinematic Clear edge design Hex key drive Tilt/tip range 14 Sensitivity 8 arcsec Material: black anodized aluminium Weight 0.03 kg Mirror version available
Miniature Kinematic Mirror / Beamsplitter Mount

fixing screw 2 contact lines 12.7 25.4 7
M4 2 holes
21 26
2.1 hex key hole
Code 840-0054 840-0054-02
Type Mirror version
Accepts optics, mm 12.7 (0.5 inch) 12.7 (0.5 inch)
Clear aperture, mm 10.2 10.2
Price, EUR 60 60
Note: Mirror version is a right hand version of the standard model
8.61
42 58
Optical Positioners
840-0056
Kinematic Mirror / Beamsplitter Mounts

Optical Tables
840-0056-11 840-0056-22
ffixing screws
H
37
.5 32 .5 28
fixing screw
fixing screw
56
70
100
fixing screw
26
kn
ob
kn
36
54
ob
16
26
2 contact lines
2 contact lines
kn
ob
36
840-0056-11
840-0056-12
51 92
840-0056-13
RELATED PRODUCTS
Motorized version 940-0060-01
See page 8.141 for more information.
Code 840-0056-21 840-0056-22 840-0056-23 Code 840-0056-11 840-0056-12 840-0056-13
H, mm 56 72.5 102.5
W, mm 56 64 92.5
B, mm 37.5 37.5 50.5 Price, EUR 75 115 166
b, mm 32.5 32.5 45.5
Ax, mm 26 37.4 53.6
Ay, mm 26 38.2 55.4
Price, EUR 87 129 182
Description for 1 optics for 2 optics for 3 optics
Adjustment Screws
45 50 .5 .5
2 contact lines
51
Base Positioners
Kinematic Mirror / Beamsplitter Mounts 840-0056 are used for precise angular and linear alignment of optical elements. We provide two types of kinematic mirror/ beamsplitter mounts: for round optical elements (840-0056-11; 840-0056-12; 840-0056-13) and for square optical elements (840-0056-21; 840-0056-22; 840-0056-23). 840-0056 has a resting flange to stop the optics. One fixing screw (two in square mounts) secures the optics against 2 contact lines, which make 2 contact points. To prevent damage to the optics, the tip of the fixing screw is made of plastic. Square mounts 840-0056-20 additionally have 4 fixing screws for thin optics. They have conic tips to work as wedges to clutch a thin plate of optics to the resting flange. For thick optics square mounts have 2 screws rather than one.
A platform is preloaded by two strong coil springs, ensuring tight kinematic fit. A thick base adds to stability. This allows to eliminate part of the mount, keeping clear one edge of the optics. Useful in schemes where beams go very close to each other. As standard, mounts come with screws 870-0080. See section 870 for the alternative screws. You may order the mounts with 2 or 3 adjustment screws. The prices are given of kinematic mirror/beamsplitter mounts with 3 driving screws.
kno
Ax
b B
M6
M4
(83 scr 2) ew
Optical Positioners
2 contact lines
Optical Mounts
Ay
1, 2, 3 optics mounts Tilt range 9 (about two axes) Travel range 4 mm Sensitivity of 3 arcsec and 1 m Mounting on either of 2 sides Two models: round and square aperture Kinematic Clear edge design A screw pulses via seat of hardened stainless steel Mirror version available Material: black anodized aluminium Available motorized version 940-0060
Brackets & Rails
8.62
Precision Mirror Mounts

Miniature mounts for small optics 10 tilt adjustments about two orthogonal axes High degree of versatility Made of black anodized aluminium
Precision Mirror Mounts ensure precise angular adjustments of small optics about two orthogonal axes with 10arcsec sensitivity. M4 and M6 taped holes are provided for mounting. These black anodized aluminium mounts are ideal for holding 25 mm and smaller optics in tight spaces.
840-0060
Mirror / Optics Mount

The Mirror/Optics Mount 8400060 provides smooth and precise adjustment with sensitivity of 10 arcsec. It can be used as a tilt platform with Spring Clamp 840-0112 and Mounting post. The mount has holes of M60.35 mm holes on its base for adjustment screws. As standard, fine screws 870-0060 are used. The Mirror/Optics Mount 840-0060 has 6.2 mm clear aperture.
Code 840-0060 Weight, kg 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 Price, EUR 39 49 59 49
840-0060 Complementary Products Code 810-0130-02 810-0130-04 820-0020 840-0112 Page 8.28 8.28 8.32 8.71
28
840-0060-00 840-0060-45 840-0060S
5
840-0060S
Modifications
840-0060
810-0130-04
810-0130-02
840-0060-00 820-0020 840-0060 For coarse adjustments about horizontal axis compact Mirror mounts can be used with Mini Angle Brackets 810-0130. View A 840-0112 is specially designed for use with Mirror/Optics Mount 8400060. 26 26 840-0112
28 max 28 max
840-0060-45
View A
Mirror/Optics Mount 840-0060 with adapters 8400060-00 and 840-0060-45 are suitable for round (25.4 (1) and 12.7(0.5)) and square (15x15 mm and 20x20 mm) optical elements.
840-0060 820-0020
Ordering Information:
840-0060 standard mount 840-0060S standard mount with wrench driven screws 840-0060-00 mirror/optics mount with adapter (see drawing) 840-0060-45S mirror/optics mount with adapter and screws (see drawing) 840-0112 spring clamp
840-0060 can be used in horizontal orientation as a small Tilt Table. Special Support Rod 820-0020 and Spring Clamp 840-0112 ideally suit this purpose.
8.63
14
31
Optical Positioners
840-0080
Mirror Mounts with Locking Screws

fine adjustment screw M6x0,5
25
12
25
10
33
locking screw 2 hex key

10
M6x4 deep
21,7
35
840-0080-01 840-0080-01
840-0080-02
840-0080-02 Code 840-0080-01 840-0080-02 H, mm 68 33 Weight, kg 0.07 0.04 Price, EUR 37 35
Miniature Precision Mirror Mounts ensure precise angular adjustments of small optics about two orthogonal axes with 10 arcsec sensitivity. Mirror Mounts are provided with M4 and M6 taped holes for mounting. These black anodized aluminium mirror mounts are ideal for holding of 25 mm and smaller optic in tight spaces. Lock Screws Mirror Mount 840-0080 are provided with extended back for convenient mounting in horizontal or vertical position. Teflon fixture of driving screws ensures stability during exploitation.
840-0090
Compact Mirror Mount

The extremely small mount has small adjustment screws with a hexagonal head or a hexagonal keyhole. Miniature Precision Mirror Mount ensures precise angular adjustments of small optics about two orthogonal axes with 10 arcsec sensitivity. Mirror Mount is provided with M4 and M6 taped holes for mounting. These black anodized aluminium mirror mount is ideal for holding of 25 mm and smaller optic in tight spaces. A suffix to the unit code specifies adjustment screws of a desired type of drive: 840-0090 with hexagonal keyhole 840-0090-01 with hexagonal keyhole and six holes for a wrench 840-0090-02 with hexagonal head and six holes for a wrench. See figures to the right.
840-0090
23.3 max
840-0090-01 Code 840-0090 840-0090-01 840-0090-02 Weight, kg 0.04 0.04 0.04 Price, EUR 36 38 34
840-0090-02
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.64
840-0093
840-0093 820-0020 Post holder 820-0150
Miniature Tilt / Rotation Mount of Side Control

6 tilt and in-plane rotation Top side drive Compact design for dense optical schemes Stable design Material: black anodized aluminium Miniature Tilt/Rotation Mount 840-0093 allows to tilt and to rotate a component. To reduce the footprint and to ease access, both adjustment screws are placed on one side the top this saves space in schemes where units are placed densely. A flat spring preloads three main pieces of the mount that make it bend on two separate pivot axes. Mounts of other designs have a common pivot point for all adjustments. The design ensures that both adjustment movements are independent and do not cause mutual distortions. So the adjustment scheme is very close to an ideal kinematic model. Mounting surface with two M4 holes in the platform is on the same side with the adjustment screws.
Code 840-0093 Tilt range, deg 6 Rotation range, deg 6
hex 3
29
axis of tilt
26
M4 2 holes
12.5
axis of rotation
25
M4
bottom view
Base of the mount has an M4 hole for mounting to other posi tioners. The adjustment screws have a pitch of 0.25mm. Each screw can be driven with a 3mm hex key.
Sensitivity, arcsec 10
Weight, kg 0.06
Price, EUR 99
840-0096
Gimbal Mount
Two plastic padding rings and a retaining ring M271 to fix the optics are included. A tightening key for the retaining ring is available on request.
25
M4x8 deep 3holes
19,5 10
fine adjustment screw M6x0,25
17
gimbal axis
23
13
clear aperture
23
retaining ring
True Gimbal design Adjustment knobs are with engraved scale 2.5 angular range Hardened steel drive for stability Lightweight aluminium body
93
M27x1
64 20
30
10
M4x8 deep 3holes
30
8.65
M27x1
2,5
25
65
Optical Positioners
Motorized Gimbal Mount 940-0096

Optics diameter Clear aperture Angular range Type of actuator Resolution* in 1/8 step Lead screw pitch Repeatability Maximum speed Cable Motor connector Weight 0.156 m 0.25 mm 1 m 4 mm/s 1.2 m length cable included HDB15(M) in full step 25.4 mm 23 mm 2.5 970-0060 1.25 m
*Dependence between actuators movement and angular displacement of optical element is not linear.
840-0100-A1 may be attached to the platform of 840-0102-T mount on any side. Optics is firmly held by a stainless steel fixing screw, and it rests against two contact lines the edges of the cut-off corner. The frame doesnt obstruct the view. It allows to work with two beams going very close to each other.
Code 840-0100-A1 Weight, kg 0.01 Price, EUR 21
840-0100-A2
Miniature Clamp
Ideal if the mount is used as a tilt platform. It has a fixing screw, and a plastic fastening pad. Allows fastening of optical elements upto 1. The rod has a mounting thread M3. So the clamp combines with any units, which has M3 holes.
Code 840-0100-A2 Weight, kg 0.01
25
35
M3
Price, EUR 9.5
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
840-0100-A1
Round Optics Adapter
0.7 kg
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Specifications
8.66
840-0100-A3
Mirror Adapter
Connecting cone facilitates adjustment of the adapter to the required position. The cut-off side clears the edge of the optics for working with a beam very closely situated to another beam. A fixing screw of stainless steel clutches optics firmly against two contact lines formed at the cut-off side.
Code 840-0100-A3 Weight, kg 0.01 Price, EUR 9.9
fixing screw
3 25.6
32
14
6 9
840-0100-A4
Prism and Polarizing Cube Adapters

fixing screw 18 6.5 fixing screw 17 22 8
23
25
840-0100-A4-2
29
840-0100-A4-4
Connecting cone allows to adjust the adapter to the required angle by hand. The adapter allows to work with two beams going close to each other. Stainless steel fixing screw clutches optics firmly. There are two models: 840-0100-A4-2, and 8400100-A4-4 (apertures 13 and 16 mm).
Code 840-0100-A4-2 840-0100-A4-4 B, mm 16 18 Aperture, mm 13 16 Price, EUR 21 26
840-0100-A5
Platform Adapter
11 4 M3 4 holes 15 10
Allows to turn optics to a convenient position.
25
Code 840-0100-A5
Price, EUR 10
8.67
25
13
16
13
Optical Positioners
840-0102-T
Small Optical Mount of Side Drive

Optical Tables
Special base mounts and optics adapters Code 840-0102-T Weight, kg 0.05 Price, EUR 89
Single side drive Tilt/tip 5 about two orthogonal axes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws Sensitivity 10 arcsec Large assortment of additional adapters Material: black anodized aluminium 840-0102T is designed to hold optics in high density schemes. Adapters are available for round and rectangular lenses, mirrors and beamsplitters or polarizing cubes (see below). The unit mounts on M4 hole in its base. Special Base Mounts (see below) and standard ones are available in order to mount the unit in various orientations. A platform has four M3 holes on its face for mounting of optics, and three M4 holes on the sides for adapters. Adapters with connecting cones match 6.2 mm hole, where a cone is clutched by the fixing screw. A platform is preloaded against a base by coil springs. The mount is held together and stabilized by a flat spring.
Special Base Mounts 840-0100-B allow to mount 840-0102-T in different positions. 840-0102-T may be mounted as a tilt platform
23 10 18
4.2; 8 4.2
30
12.5
Code 840-0100-B1 840-0100-B2 840-0102-T
Price, EUR 17 7 89
Adjustment Screws
840-0100-B1 allows mounting with extremely low-profile
4.5 6.5 2 holes 13
840-0100-B2 attaches to 840-0102-T both immediately and through the intermediate accessories.
6.5 13 8
12.5
28
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Note: 810-0102-T replaces the older mount 840-0100-T. Adapters 840-0100-B combine with the new mount 840-0102-T in the same manner.
Brackets & Rails
8.68
840-0110-T 840-0110-TE
Mirror Mounts of Side Regulation
38
20
25
20
15
6.5
13
4.5 2 holes
6.5 13 8
8.69
35
840-0110-T
Mirror Mount of Side Regulation 840-0110-T. Eccentric moun ting holes 6.2 mm for connecting cone allow handy replacement and adjustment of Adapters to required place.
840-0110-T
Mirror Mount of Side Regulation 840-0110-TE. This option has no clear aperture. This makes it an ideal tilt platform. The flat surface clear of holes allows to mount or paste mirrors on it.
Mirror Mount of Side Regulation 840-0110-T enables to greatly increase the thickness of optical elements as it has a convenient access to the regulation handles. L-shaped flat spring of original design renders the great stability of the mounts platform. Angular range is 2.5 about each of two orthogonal axes. Precision screws with pitch of 0.25 mm render sensitivity of 3 arcsec. M4 tapped holes on the sides of the base allow a variety of mounting configurations, e.g. horizontal and vertical. The mount is produced from black anodized aluminium. L-sha ped spring is produced from high quality stainless spring steel.
Code 840-0110-B1 Weight, kg 0.09 0.09 Price, EUR 26 9 89 80
840-0110-TE
840-0110-B2 840-0110-T 840-0110-TE
Special Base Mounts 840-0110-B2 allow to mount 840-0110-T in different positions. 840-0110-T may be mounted as a tilt platform using 840-0110-B1
840-0110-B1 allows mounting with extremely low-pro file
30 25
10
840-0110-B2 attaches to 840-0110-T both immediately and through the intermediate accessories.
4.2;84.2
Optical Positioners
840-0110-A1
Round Optics Adapters

840-0110-A1 can be attached to the platform of 840-0110-T mount on any side. Optics is firmly held by a stainless steel fixing screw and it rests against two contact lines the edges of the cut-off corner. The frame doesnt obstruct the view. It allows to work with two beams situated very close to each other. 840-0110-A1-4 fixes thin opti cal elements 3040mm. 840-0110-A1-2 fixes elements 2025 mm (1).
Optical Tables Motorized Positioners Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices Adjustment Screws Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners Optical Positioners Optical Mounts Base Mounts & Accessories Brackets & Rails
840-0110-A1-2
Code 840-0110-A1-2 840-0110-A1-4
Price, EUR 31 33
840-0110-A1-4
840-0110-A2
Miniature Clamp
35 4 15
Ideal if a Mount is used as a Tilt platform. Plastic clutching pad clamps elements up to 40 mm (1.5).
50
M3
Code 840-0110-A2
Price, EUR 15
8.70
840-0110-A3
Optical Tables
Mirror Adapter
36
Brackets & Rails
Connecting cone facilitates adjustment of the adapter. The cut-off side clears the edge of the optics for working with a beam very closely situated to another beam. Optics is firmly clutched by a stainless steel fixing screw and rests against the two contact lines formed at the cut-off side. The adapter is suitable for optical elements up to 50 mm (2 inch).
Code 840-0110-A3
Price, EUR 17
Note: for optics 2025.4 mm adapter 840-0100-A3 is used.
840-0110-A5
Platform Adapter
11 4 M3 4 holes
25
15
Allows to turn optics to a con ve nient position.
Code 840-0110-A5
Price, EUR 12
840-0111
Spring Clamps
Spring Clamps 840-0111 are used to clamp components directly to surfaces of optical tables or translation stages. These Clamps are used to hold prismatic elements like glass blocks, prisms, cells. The Spring Clamps 840-0111 have an M4 external screw and can be mounted anywhere where M4 threaded holes are available.
840-0112T 840-0060
Model 840-0111 840-0112 820-0020-00 840-0112T (includes the adapter) is designed for Mirror/Optics Mount 840-0060 when it is used as a tilting table.
h, mm 0...52 0...28
H, mm 65.5 41.5
L, mm 40 26
8.71
Optical Positioners
840-0115 840-0116
Suitable for dichroic mirrors and beamsplitters operating at AOI 45
Adapter for Mirror and Beamsplitter at 45

Optics is firmly held by a plastic securing screw and it rests against two contact lines formed at the interface. Adapter easily accommodates any optical mount designed for 1 optics or can be attached to any mount using a baseplate.
3
For fine adjustment adapter can be mounted into kinematic mirror mount 840-0020. Such combination provides +-6 range of orthogonal adjustments with 8 arc-seconds resolution.
45 A
M4 A-A
12.5
41.2*
45
10
6
M6
25.4 33 25.6
840-0115
840-0115 Optics with diameter 22.4-25.5 mm and thickness 5-8 mm can be secured with a plastic screw. Optics of other thickness can be cemented into adapter.
Suitable for high reflection mirrors operating at AOI 45
B
3
A-A
4
B
5
A
M4
12.5
10
M6
A 25.4 33 B 25.6
840-0116S
Suitable for dichroic mirrors and beamsplitters operating at AOI 45
3
A-A C
45
M4
15
41.2*
45
15
840-0116A
25.4 33
840-0116A Optics with diameter 22.4-25.5mm and thickness 5-8 mm can be secured with a plastic screw. Optics of other thickness can be cemented into adapter.
Suitable for dichroic mirrors, beamsplitters and beam combiners operating at AOI 45
25.6
Adjustment Screws
24
12.5
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
15
45
41.2*
25
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.72
Code 840-0115 840-0116 840-0116A 840-0116S Item adapter for mirror at 45 adapter for beamsplitter at 45 adapter for beamsplitter at 45 with additional aperture adapter for beamsplitter at 45 Finish black anodized aluminium black anodized aluminium black anodized aluminium black oxidized steel Weight, kg 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.13 Price, EUR 25 25 26 35

840-0115 with mirror
Light directions using one of adapters. View from top
Light directions using 840-0115 adapter
Light directions using 840-0116 adapter
Complementary Products Code 820-0010 820-0050 820-0070 820-0080 840-0020 Page 8.32 8.33 8.34 8.34 8.54 Light directions using 840-0116A adapter
Mounting option: Movable base 820-0080, rod holder 820-0050-04, standard rod 820-0010-02, kinematic mirror and beamsplitter mount 840-0020 and adapter for beamsplitter at 45 840-0116.
Mounting Option: Adapter for Beamsplitter 840-0116A, Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0056, Rod Holder 820-0050-04, Standard Rod 820-0010-02, Movable Base 820-0070.
8.73
Optical Positioners
840-0117 840-0118
Suitable for thin film laser polarizers at 56
Adapters for Polarizer at 56

Optics is firmly held by a plastic securing screw and it rests against two contact lines formed at the interface. Adapter easily accommodates any optical mount designed for 1 optics or can be attached to any mount using a baseplate. For fine adjustment adapter can be mounted into kinematic mirror mount 840-0020. Such combination provides 6 range of orthogonal adjustments with 8 arc-seconds resolution.
A A B 33.6
34
3
A-A
M4
12.5
25
14.4
39.2*
56
M6 25.4 40 B 25.6
840-0117
A-A C
5.5
3
M4
12
56
43.6
12
40
840-0117A 840-0117A Optics with diameter 21.0-25.5mm and thickness 2-6 mm can be secured with a plastic screw. Optics of other thickness can be cemented into adapter.
B 25.6
6.2 A-A
34
B
13
M4
25
10
14.4
M6 25.4 40
38.8*
56
840-0118
840-0118 Optics with width 5.0-15 mm and length 25-30 mm and thickness 2-6 mm can be secured with a plastic screw. Optics of other thickness can be cemented into adapter.
15
30 .
25.4
13
55.5*
11 2
34
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
10
Brackets & Rails
4 3 4
8.74
56
A 7
25.4 40 B 33.6
A-A
3
M4
12
11 2
34
41.1
840-0118A Optics with width 5.0-15 mm and length 25-30 mm and thickness 2-6 mm can be secured with a plastic screw. Optics of other thickness can be cemented into adapter.
Code 840-0117 840-0117A
Item adapter for round polarizer at 56 adapter for round polarizer at 56 with additional aperture adapter for rectangular polarizer at 56 adapter for rectangular polarizer at 56 with additional aperture
Finish black anodized aluminium black anodized aluminium black anodized aluminium black anodized aluminium
30
.2
Weight, kg 0.05 0.09 0.05 0.09
12
10.5
54.5*
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners
Mounting option: Adapter for Round Polarizer 840-0117, Kinematic mirror and beamsplitter mount 840-0020, Standard rod 820-0010-02, Collar 820-0030, Rod translator 820-0040-02, Movable base 820-0060.
15 *
Price, EUR 27 28 28 29
840-0118 840-0118A
Light directions using one of adapters. View from top
Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
Light directions using 840-0117 and 840-0118 adapter
Mounting Option: Adapter for Round Polarizer 840-0117, Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount 840-0056, Rod Holder 820-0050-04, Standard Rod 820-0010-02, Movable Base 820-0070.
Light directions using 840-0117A and 840-0118A adapter Complementary Products Code 820-0010-02 820-0030 820-0040-02 Page 8.32 8.32 8.33 8.33 8.34 8.34 8.41 8.54 8.89
Mounting Option: Adapter for Round Polarizer 840-0117A, Kinematic Mirror and Beamsplitter Mount 840-0020, Solid Base Height Extender 820-0210.
820-0050 820-0060 820-0070 820-0210 840-0020 840-0199
8.75
Optical Positioners
Budget Kinematic Optical Mounts

Handy two orthogonal angular adjustments 9 range Sensitivity 3 arcsec M60.25 adjustment screws provide precise kinematic control Made of black anodized aluminium Budget Kinematic Optical Mounts are designed for angular alignment of optical elements, in a range of 9 in both orthogonal axes. The tilting element is always true-kinematic-registered. The Mounts are produced of black anodized aluminium. Custom colors are available on request.
Optical Tables Motorized Positioners Adjustment Screws Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners Optical Positioners Optical Mounts Base Mounts & Accessories Brackets & Rails
840-1120-B
Prism / Optics Mount

Prism Mount 840-01120-B provides basic mounting for prisms, beamsplitter, cubes and etc. Spring clamps 840-0111 series should be ordered seperately. This mount is metric compatible. 840-1120-B Mounts are equipped with fine pitch M6x0.25 mm adjustment screws, which rest upon hardened steel seats to provide reliable and repeatable adjustment. Mounting through holes for M4(8-32) screws. Weight: 0.1 kg.
50
5 25 50 M6x4 deep 2 holes M4x4 deep 6 holes 24,5 10 10 40 18 25 12,5 12,5 25 49 21,5 25
10
840-0111 Spring Clamps see page 8.71 Model 840-1120-B2 840-1120-B3 840-1120-BM2 840-1120-BM3 Description 2 fine screws 3 fine screws 2 fine screws, right hand version 3 fine screws, right hand version
39
3 hex key hole
for M4 (8-32) screw 2 holes
Right-hand version available
840-2120-B
Universal Platform Mount

Universal Platform Mount 840-2120-B is designed for precise adjustments of various optical components which can be directly bound to it. The mount can be also used horizontally for tip/tilt adjustment. Mounting through holes for M4(8-32) screws. Weight: 0.1 kg.
3 hex key hole
10
M4x6 deep 8 holes
37,5 25 12,5
M3x6 deep 9 holes
37,5 25 12,5
25
1 25 50 for M4(8-32) screw 2 holes 25
Model 840-2120-B2 840-2120-B3 840-2120-BM2 840-2120-BM3
Description 2 fine screws 3 fine screws 2 fine screws, right hand version 3 fine screws, right hand version
Price, EUR 46
10 21,5
58
1 25
50
8.76
840-3120-B
Beamsplitter / Mirror Mounts
840-3120E-B
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics Reset-flange inside the central aperture stops the optic Nylon-tipped fixing screw secures the optic M6x0.25 adjustment screws provide precise kinematic control Right-hand version available
Code 840-3120E-B2 840-3120E-B3
Description 2 fine screws 3 fine screws
Price, EUR 44 53
840-4120-B
Mirror Optical Mount
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics 2 contact points for optimum stability One edge of the optics stays clear, helpful in schemes where beams are very closely situated to one another M6x0.25 adjustment screws provide precise kinematic control Right-hand version available
840-4120E-B
Code 840-4120E-B2 840-4120E-B3
Description 2 fine screws 3 fine screws
Price, EUR 50 59
8.77
Optical Positioners
Precision Optical Mounts of Side Control Series T

Adjustment of both angles is controlled from a single side Ideal for high density optical schemes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Travel range 2 Hardened inserts under adjusters Original L-shaped flat spring Precision Optical Mounts of Side Control enable to greatly increase thickness of optical elements as it has a convenient access to the adjustment handles. L-shaped flat spring of original design provides great stability of the mounts platform. The spring performs two functions: that of a usual spring, and also eliminates polarizing rotation of the platform. Angular range is 2 about each of the two orthogonal axes. Precision screws with pitch of 0.25 mm provide sensitivity of 10 arcsec. Three M4 tapped holes on the sides of the base and on its back allow a variety of mounting configurations, e.g. horizontal and vertical. The mount is produced from black anodized aluminium. L-shaped spring is produced from high quality stainless spring steel.
Optical Tables Motorized Positioners Adjustment Screws Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners Optical Positioners
Weight, kg 0.09 Price, EUR 63 Weight, kg 0.12 Price, EUR 69
840-0120-T
Objective Mount
50
25
Code 840-0120-T
Weight, kg 0.1
Price, EUR 89
M4x8 W0.8-36 2holes
840-0130-T
Beamsplitters/Optics Mount
The Beamsplitters/Optics Mount 8400130-T is designed to adjust beamsplitters measuring 25 mm. Fixing screw with a plastic tip clutches a beam splitter against 2 contact lines. The aperture has a restblade around its edge designed to stop optics inside.
Code 840-0130-T
840-0140-T
Universal Mirror Mount/Platform

50 M4 6 holes
The Universal Mirror Mount/Platform 8400140-T is suited for precise adjustment of standard mirrors which can be directly bound to it. The Mount may also be used in horizontal position as a tilt table. Then it can be used to align opto-mechanics around two axes.
Code 840-0140-T
38 27
M4x8 2holes
27
Optical Mounts
The Objective Mount of Side Control 8400120-T has W0.836 mm aperture and is used for precise adjustment of standard microscope objective lenses and ensures low-cost positioning of a focus point. Also it can be used in the fiber optics.
Brackets & Rails
8.78
840-0150-T
Optical Tables
Large Aperture Optical Mount

50 M4 6 holes
38 27
.8 31
The Large Aperture Optical Mount 8400150-T on its platform has 31.8 aperture and three M4 mounting holes. It is designed for precise orthogonal adjustment of mirrors.
25
optics stays in the experiment
26
Brackets & Rails
Code 840-0150-T
Weight, kg 0.09
Price, EUR 79
M4x8 2holes
27
840-0155
Flipping Mirror / Beamsplitter Mount

Flips optics in and out of the experiment Kinematic design Precise and handy angular adjustment in two orthogonal planes Stable vertical mounting Adjustment range of 8 Sensitivity of 3 arcsec Repeatibility 30 rad Made of black anodized aluminium Mirror version available Weight 0.09 kg Use the Flipping Mount 840-0155 to place optics in and out of the optical scheme. Flip the platform out and back again it sits on the adjustment screws in a repeated position. Precise alignment of various optical elements to desired angles is done by 2 adjustment screws. 3 seats form 3 kinematic points for defi nite position of the platform. Theseats are made of hardened steel. This increases the service life, as they counter the hardened steel tips of adjustment screws and pivot balls. Mount 840-0155 has a 1 mounting hole with 24mm clear aperture. A fixing screw secures the optics against 2 contact lines, which make 2 contact points. To prevent damage to the optics, the tip of the fixing screw is made of plastic. On one side the edge of the optics stays clear. So you can use the optics close to the edge in schemes where you work with a beam very closely situated to another beam. Ultra-Fine Adjustment Screws 870-0080 come as standard (one screw has its tips modified to form a kinematic point). Depending on which side you mount the unit, flip the platform either vertically or horizontally. By flipping out vertically, the optics goes beneath the common level of the optical scheme. Still one leg of the base, with a adjustment screw on it, stays up. Yet this would not obstruct the optical path, as it would not when the optics was flipped in. Legs protruding upwards ease access to the adjustment screws, with less risk of obscuring the beam. There is no need to design the legs extended down, so as to clear the space totally.
Code Price, EUR 135 135 Code 840-0155-02 840-0155-02M Price, EUR 127 127
fixing screw for 1(25.4) optics
840-0155-01 (left hand version)
840-0155-01M (right hand Mirror version)
840-0155-01 uses Ultra-Fine Screws 870-0080 (with knobs) through combined M6/7 mounting holes
32
.5 16
fixing screw for 1(25.4) optics
26 54
2 hard rests
optics flipped to the side
optics flipped out down
840-0155-01 840-0155-01M
840-0155-02 uses Fine Hex Adjustment Screws (without knobs), hex key included
8.79
Optical Positioners
840-0155-04
Flipping Mirror / Beamsplitter Mount

Flip optics in and out of the optical scheme Tilt/tip range 8, sensitivity 3 arcsec Kinematic design Maximum optics thickness 7 mm For 50.8mm optics (2 inch) 49 mm clear aperture Repeatability 20 rad Clear edge design Hex key drive optional Material: black anodized aluminium Mirror version available
Code 840-0155-04 840-0155-05 Price, EUR 155 147
for 2(50.8) optics

M6 M4 (83 scr 2) ew
840-0155-06 840-0155-07 840-0155-08 840-0155-09

Flip optics in and out of the optical scheme Repeatability 20 rad Tilt/tip range 9 Sensitivity 8 arcsec For 12.7 and 25.4 mm (0.5 and 1) optics Clear edge design suits schemes where beam passes close to optics edge Kinematic design High stability Hex key drive Material: black anodized aluminium Weight 0.02 kg Mirror versions available
Miniature Flipping Mirror / Beamsplitter Mount
840-0155-08
840-0155-08
flipped out position
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
840-0155-04
840-0155-05
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.80
Optical Tables
840-0155-06 840-0155-06
flipped out position
Model 840-0155-06 840-0155-07 840-0155-08 840-0155-09
Type Mirror version Mirror version
Accepts optics 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 25.4 mm (1 inch) 25.4 mm (1 inch)
Clear aperture, mm 10.2 10.2 24 24
Price, EUR 99 99 104 104
Note: Mirror version is a right hand version of the standard.
840-0160 840-0170
Prism Holders
51
M6 3 holes
36
25
9 23
18
6 25 50
14
9 46
840-0160 840-0160 840-0170-04
Prism holders 840-0160 and 840-0170 provide easy and safe mounting of prism type optics. Precision kinematic adjustment around two orthogonal axes ranges within 6. The screw position locks ensure right and reliable optical components position fixing. Precise screws provide 8 arcsec adjustment resolution. The model 840-0160 accepts optics 026 mm height. The model 840-0170 accepts 24.551 mm
height optics. Additionally models 8400160-02 and 840-0170-02 are completed with model 870-0010 precise screws. 84000160-04 and 840-0170-04 options come with model 870-0020 micrometer screws with reading marks. The models 840-0160 and 840-0170 are completed with steel screws M60.5 mm and brass collar with an outer thread M101 mm. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Code Complementary Products Code 870-0010 870-0020 870-0071 Page 8.131 8.131 8.135 840-0160 840-0160-02 840-0160-04 840-0170 840-0170-02 840-0170-04
Optics L height, mm 026 026 026 24.551 24.551 24.551
Adjustment screw 870-0071 870-0010 870-0020 870-0071 870-0010 870-0020
Weight, kg 0.22 0.28 0.28 0.24 0.30 0.30
Price, EUR 63 115 125 65 117 127
8.81
Optical Positioners
840-0180
Polarizer Holders
Optical Tables
840-0180-A1
840-0180-A2
840-0180-A3
2 engraved scales located on face and outer surfaces Compact design with roller bearings Lockable Continuous 360 rotation Direct mounting of optics 1, 2 or 3 in diameter Polarizer Holders 840-0180-A are ideal for positioning rotation sensitive optics such as po la rizers or waveplates. Hol ders are offered for optics of 1, 2 or 3 diameter. Optics is placed inside central aperture, where it is securely held in place by a threaded retaining ring. The position is indicated on two 360 angular scales, with gradation of 2. Where space doesnt allow to read one scale, you always will be able to view another. The base of a holder has M6 and M4 threaded holes for mounting on posts or bases. 840-0180-A has a removable rod to rotate the platform by any of its 4 holes.
840-0180-A1, 840-0180-A2
840-0180-B1, 840-0180-B2
840-0180-B1 Code 840-0180-A1 840-0180-B1 840-0180-A2 840-0180-B2 840-0180-A3 840-0180-B3 D, mm 51 51 82 82 115 115 E, mm 16.5 16.5 19 19 24.5 24.5 H,mm 17.5 17.5 20 20 26.5 26.5 B, mm 25.5 25.5 51.5 51.5 76.9 76.9 d, mm 23 23 48 48 72 72 L, mm 25 25 40.5 40.5 57 57 M, mm M271 M271 M531 M531 M781 M781 F, mm 7.5 7.5 9.5 9.5 12 12 m, mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 Weight, kg 0.08 0.08 0.18 0.17 0.46 0.46 Price, EUR 69 69 138 138 210 210
Adjustment Screws
Polarizer Holders 840-0180-B are the same as 840-0180-A, except that their fixing screw is tightened with a hex-key (included), and it does not stand out from the surface. Like in 840-0180-A, the platform is rotated by any rod or the same hex key. The holders are made of black anodized alumi nium.
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
8.82
840-0185
Optical Tables
Polarizer Holders
360
use a hex-key or any rod for precise rotation fixing screw for a hex-key
Revolving scale resets the angular position Conical scale easily read from a wide angle Continuous 360 rotation Lockable Accepts 1 optics (25.4 mm); 2 model available Accepts optics upto 19 mm thick Mounting holes M6 and M4 Compact design with roller bearings
E 2.5 d clear aperture

4 holes for precise rotation M6
scale fixing screws for a hex-key 2 pieces
Polarizer Holder 840-0185 is an ori gi nal mount with revolving conical angular scale on the face of the holder. This enables the user to set the current position on the scale to any chosen angle independently of the position of the holder. The optical element is secured inside central aperture of the platform of the holder by the threaded retaining ring. The zero on the revolving scale is aligned to the desired axis of transmission. For example rotate the platform to choose the required orientation of polarization. Lock the platform with its fixing screw. Revolve the scale to reset its zero origin. Lock the scale by retightening its own two fixing screws. Now the scale moves simultaneously with the platform of the holder, so you measure angles relative to any initial position. The holder accommodates rotation sensitive optics 1 (25.4 mm) or 2 (50.8 mm) in diameter. The scale is graduated into 2 increments. It is engraved on a conical surface. Angle of the cone is 60. So the scale is read from a wide angle.
D, mm 50 81 E, mm 23 26 H,mm 24 27 B, mm 25.5 51.5 d, mm 23 48
The platform rotates the whole 360. It has a knurled edge for easy grip. Also it has 4 holes on its perimeter. Use the same 1.5 mm hex-key to rotate the platform by these holes, to lock the platform, and to lock the revolving conical scale. To mount on posts or bases the holder has both M6 and M4 holes. M4 holes in its base. Material: black anodized aluminium.
Code 840-0185-01 840-0185-02
M, mm M271 M531
F, mm 10 11
D
Price, EUR 82 139
8.83
Retaining ring
M4
Optical Positioners
840-0186
High Precision Rotation Mount 840-0186 is ideal for positioning rotation sensitive optics such as polarizers or waveplates. The most common requirement for polarizers is to rotate them about their optical axis. Mounts accept optics of 1 in diameter. Optics are placed inside central aperture, where it is securely held in place by a threaded retaining ring. The position is indicated on 360 angular scale with gradation of 2. Once mount is fixed in desired position it can be fine ajusted within 5
locking screw engages micrometer head adjustment nonius
range with 1 arcmin accuracy. Micrometer screw 870-0055 is used, can be optionally replaced with 870-0095 fine hex adjustment screw. The base and side of the polarizer holder has M6 threaded holes for mounting on posts or bases. Surface around mounting holes is flattened so the mount stays rigid once fixed on a mounting post or any other flat base. 840-0186 has a removable rod to rotate the platform by any of its 4 holes.
360 Continuous rotation locking screw Sensitivity 1 arcmin engages micrometer Compact design with roller head adjustment micrometer 85max bearings nonius 40max Direct read 2 graduations 2 teflon ringson main dial When locked, micrometer driven 5 of fine rotation Ideal for 1 polarization optics locking screw One engages retaining ring included micrometer head adjustment Micrometer screw 870-0055 85max installed
64 M27x1 25
nonius 2.5
85max
micrometer
40max
2 teflon rings
M27x1
A 2.5
micrometer M6x6 deep 2 teflon rings
40max 17.5
23 25 clear aperture
64
M4x6 deep View B
View A
10
10
M27x1
flat space
M27x1
head adjustment
flat space
2.1 hex key hole
nonius
70max
M27x1
fine screw 2 teflon rings
M6x6 deep
7.5
25 16.5 removable rod B
16.5
clear aperture
64 M27x1
4 holes for removable rod
360 continuously adjustable 17.5 M4x6 deep View A flat space
10
M27x1
25
flat space
23
View B
A 2.5
10
M6x6 deep
7.5
25
removable rod
360 continuously adjustable
17.5
clear aperture
16.5
flat space
Code 840-0186-11 840-0186-01
View B
Description
840-0186-11
View A
10
for 1 optics. with micrometer 870-0095 for 1 optics. with micrometer 870-0055
M27x1
16.5
Adjustment Screws
23
Base Positioners
2.5
23
le rod
removable rod
View B locking screw flat space 10 engages micrometer
View A
clear aperture
25
840-0186-01
Optical Positioners
7.5
25
removable rod
25
flat space
17.5
Optical Mounts
M4x6 deep
10
64
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
High Precision Rotation Polarizer, Waveplate Mount
8.84
840-0190
Code 840-0190-01 840-0190-A1
Polarizer Holder
840-0190-A1
Base of 840-0190 has beveled sides for fingers to rotate the platform by its knurled edge. You may transform a polarizer holder into a rotation stage. For this you need to order an insert platform 840-0190-A1 separately. To mount components on it the platform has a pattern of M4 holes and a central 7-to-M6 hole. If you need to fasten to the central hole a unit with M4 mounting hole, you can slip an M4 screw through this 7-to-M6 combined hole (see the drawing for 840-0190-01).
Weight, kg 0.12 Price, EUR 78 6
840-0190-01
8.85
Optical Positioners
840-0192
Kinematic Double Optical Mount of Side Drive

Optical Tables
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics Clear aperture 23 mm Kinematic design Dimensions most compact among 1 inch optics mounts Tilt/tip range 2 Sensitivity 3 arcsec Both tilt and tip controlled from aside the optical path Ideal for dense optical schemes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws Accepts two pieces of optics: on the platform (adjustable), and on the base (not adjustable)
To prevent damage to the optics the fixing screws have plastic tip.
Code 840-0192
Weight, kg 0.1
Price, EUR 90
840-0193
Kinematic Optical Mount of Side Drive

For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics Clear aperture 23 mm Kinematic design Dimensions most compact among 1 inch optics mounts Tilt/tip range 2 Sensitivity 3 arcsec
fixing screw 3
77 max
7.5
M4 2 holes
29
22
Code 840-0193
55
Weight, kg 0.12 Price, EUR 87
To prevent damage to the optics the fixing screw has a plastic tip.
2 contact lines
29
2 3
Adjustment Screws
Both tilt and tip controlled from aside the optical path Ideal for dense optical schemes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
front and rear view the base has an aperture for the second optics (not adjustable)
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
8.86
840-0195
Adjustable Polarizer Holder of Side Drive

Adjustable Polarizer Holder 840-0195 is a 1 inch polarizer with an integrated adjustment of tilt and tip about two orthogonal axes within 2. The design is the slimmest ever. The polarizer platform is graduated in 2 on a 360 angular scale. The platform has a removable rod by which you rotate it continuously the whole 360, without obscuring the aperture. You can use the rod on any of the 4 holes on the perimeter. The holder accepts 25.4 mm optics. Optics is stopped by a rest-flange, and is secured by a threaded retaining ring with 23mm clear aperture. A tightening key for the retaining ring is available on request. Tilt and tip is done by two stainless steel fine adjustment screws with pitch of 0.25 mm. The screws push rolling balls against hardened seats, ensuring smooth operation and sensitivity of 3 arcsec. Large knobs ease the strain on your fingers. Both screws protrude from the top side, allowing easy access in dense schemes. For tilting, the platform is preloaded against the base with L-shaped flat spring of our original design which ren ders great stability and eliminates induced polarization. Three M4 tapped holes on the sides of the base and on its back allow horizontal or vertical mounting. The holder easily mounts on posts and bases. Material: black anodized aluminium. L-shaped spring is made of high quality stainless spring steel.
4 holes for rotation
fixing screw
26
25.4 (1
) 26 52
28
23 clea r aperture
Dimensions most compact among 1 optics mounts Both tilt and tip are controlled from aside the optical path Original stabilized L-shaped flat spring Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened inserts under adjusters Accepts optics 25.4 mm (1) in diameter Accepts optics upto 10.5 mm thick Tilt/tip travel range 2 Roller bearings Lockable Continuous 360 rotation Horizontal and vertical mounting Mounting holes M4 on three sides
M4 3 mounting holes
3 mounting holes allow different mounting orientations, e.g. as a rotation stage.
Specifications
Tilt/tip range Sensitivity Rotation range Scale gradation Optics accepted diameter thickness Clear aperture Weight 25.4 mm 10.5 mm 23 mm 0.13 kg 2 3 arcsec 360 2
Code 840-0195
Price, EUR 155
8.87
75 max
M27x1
Optical Positioners
840-0197
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics Clear aperture 23 mm Kinematic design Dimensions most compact among 1 inch optics mounts Tilt/tip range 2 Sensitivity 3 arcsec Both tilt and tip controlled from aside the optical path Ideal for dense optical schemes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws Rotation range 360 Scale gradation 2 Accepts two pieces of optics: - on the platform (adjustable), - and on the base (not adjustable)
The screw for fixing optics in the base has a plastic tip. A retaining ring M27x1 to fix the optics is included. A tightening key for the retaining ring is available on request.
Code 840-0197
Weight, kg 0.13
Price, EUR 169
back view the base has an aperture for the second optics (not adjustable)
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Optical Mount of Side Drive with Adjustable Polarizer Holder
8.88
840-0199
Kinematic Adjustable Polarizer Holder of Side Drive
For 25.4 mm (1 inch) optics Clear aperture 23 mm Kinematic design Dimensions most compact among 1 inch optics mounts Tilt/tip range 2 Sensitivity 3 arcsec Both tilt and tip controlled from aside the optical path Ideal for dense optical schemes Fine adjustment screws with 0.25 mm pitch Hardened seats under adjustment screws Rotation range 360 Scale gradation 2
This kinematic mount accepts crystal housings of 25.4 mm and thickness up to 10.5 mm. The housing is stopped by a rest-flange inside the central aperture of the platform, and is secured by a threaded retaining ring. The rotation position (X axis) is indicated on 360 angular scale with a gradation of 2. The rotation platform has a remov able rod that allows continuous 360 rotation without obscuring the aperture. This removable rod can be fitted into any of the four holes on the perimeter of rotation platform. Angular adjustment range of tilt/tip (Z, Y axes) is 2.5. Two high resolution stainless steel vertical-drive screws with a pitch of 0.25 mm and wedge and ball mechanism ensure smooth and precise angular tilt/tip adjustment with 3 arc sec sensitivity. For tilting, the platform it is preloaded against the base with high quality springs.
Large knobs on the adjusting screws relieve the strain on operator fingers during adjustment. Both screws protrude from the top allowing convenient adjustment outside the laser beam path and providing easy access for adjustments in densely packed optical set-ups. An extra M4 tapped hole on the side of the base allows you to operate the mount as a side-drive adjustment control mount. The mount is made of black anodized aluminium to help minimize reflections. A retaining ring M271, two Teflon rings and a tightening key to fix the crystal ring housing is included.
8.89
Optical Positioners
840-0210
tip e t/ Til rang 2 ion e lat ns rang a r t Y mm 2 ion lat e ns ng tra m ra X m 2
Five axes Kinematic Optical Mount

Five-axes mounts are considered as a combination of: side drive kinematic optical mount (840-0192 / 840-0193), Y-Z translation optical mount (990-0050), optical zoom option. Five-axes optical mount 840-0210 consists of: top side regulation two-axes kinematic mirror mount with two screws (thread pitch 250 m (100 TPI)); two-axes translation stage with 2 mm travel range driven by two screws (thread pitch 250 m (100 TPI)); zoom providing 100 mm travel range. 840-0210 holds 1 inch optics. The adapters may be purchased to mount optics of different diameters. Five-Axes Optical Mounts have M4 holes on the bottom to accommodate different mounting systems directly or through tread adapters. Vacuum compatible model of the mount can be provided on request.
Specifications
Optics diameter Tilt/tip range Sensitivity XY translation range Sensitivity for XY translation Sensitivity for Z translation Z translation range Material Finishing: 840-0210 840-0210-10 Weight 25.4 mm 2
screw thread pitch 250 m (100TPI)
3 arcsec 2 mm 1 m 1 m 10 mm aluminium black anodized vacuum compatible 0.28 kg
ion lat e g ns tra ran Z m m 0 1
tip t/ e Til ang r 2
Complementary Products Code 840-0192 840-0193 990-0050 Page 8.86 8.86
Five Axes Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0210

Optical Positioners
Four Axes Kinematic Optical Mount 840-0209
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Mounts
7.18
Brackets & Rails
screw thread pitch 250 m (100TPI)
Optical Tables
8.90
Three Axes Translation Optical Mount 840-0208

Two Axes Translation Optical Mount 840-0207
Code 840-0210 840-0210-01 840-0209 840-0208 840-0207 Mount Five Axes Kinematic Optical Mount: - Tilt/tip range; - XY translation range; - Z translation range Five Axes Kinematic Optical Mount with reinforced springs for mounting of heavy objects Four Axes Kinematic Optical Mount: - Tilt/tip range; - XY translation range Three Axes Translation Optical Mount: - XY translation range; - Z translation range Two Axes Translation Optical Mount: - XY translation range Price, EUR 270 280 257 257 206
8.91
Optical Positioners
840-0225
840-0220
ure lex 3 f oints p
op
tics l nta fro spring t fla
3 points fix optics between the frontal spring and the back plate
25
M4x7 deep 2holes
for n25,4 (1") optics

Optical Positioners
0,5
5,7
2c s line ac ont t
7,6
2 hex key hole
50
M4 hole for fixing screw
18,1
op
tic
Catalogue number 840-0220-01 840-0220-02L 840-0220-02S 840-0220-03L 840-0220-03S 840-0225-01 840-0225-02L 840-0225-02S Description Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount for 25.4 mm (1) optics Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount for 50.8 mm (2), 12.7 mm thickness optics Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount for 50.8 mm (2), 8 mm thickness optics Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount for 76.2 mm (3), 12.7 mm thickness optics Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount for 76.2 mm (3), 8 mm thickness optics Ultra-stable Mirror Mount with L-shaped flat spring for 25.4 mm (1) optics Ultra-stable Mirror Mount with L-shaped flat spring for 50.8 mm (2) optics for 8 mm thickness optics Ultra-stable Mirror Mount with L-shaped flat spring for 50.8 mm (2) optics for 12.7 mm thickness optics Weight, kg 0.18 11 11 11 11 0.18 11 11 Price, EUR 128 128
292
Adjustment Screws
A fixing screw secures the optics against contact lines, which make 2 contact points. To prevent damage to the optics, the tip of the fixing screw is made of plastic.
Drawings of 50.8 mm are available at www.eksmaoptics.com
locking screws 1,5 hex key hole
16,3 16,8
Universal Base Plate
Base Positioners
w cre gs ixin tic tip f M4 plas h wit
25,5
840-0220 and 840-0225 mirror mounts use secure 3-points mirror suspension in between the frontal flat spring and the back plate.
n29 n35
62max 56
90
Optical Mounts
Ultra-stable Mirror Mounts 840-0220 and 840-0225 are designed to minimize mount-induced wavefront distortions. In conventional mounts, the mirror is tightened by a side screw. Radial forces acting on the mirror induces parasitic wavefront distortion, such as astigmatism. Uniformly distributed axial forces eliminate wavefront distortion.
These mounts are ideal for industrial applications in different optical devices (laser cavities, optical sub-assemblies, limited space applications) because of their longterm stability.
For 1, 2 or 3 optics Stainless steel Compact/robust design Lockable adjustment screws Fine screws pitch 0.25 mm (101.6 TPI) Tilt/tip range 2.5 Sensitivity 2 arcsec Vacuum compatible version is available on request Weight 0.18 kg
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
840-0220 840-0225
Kinematic Vertical Drive Optical Mount Vertical Drive Optical Mount
8.92
840-0230
Kinematic Vertical Drive Optical Mount

Kinematic Vertical Drive Optical Mount 840-0230 is designed to minimize mount-induced wavefront distortions. In conventional mounts, the mirror is tightened by a side screw. Radial forces acting on the mirror induces parasitic wavefront distortion, such as astigmatism. Uniformly distributed axial forces eliminate wavefront distortion. This mount is ideal for industrial applications in different optical devices (laser cavities, optical sub-assemblies, limited space applications) because of their long-term stability. A fixing screw secures the optics against contact lines, which make 2 contact points. To prevent damage to the optics, the tip of the fixing screw is made of plastic.
Code Product Ultra-stable Kinematic Mirror Mount Weight, kg 0.1
For 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) optics Stainless steel Compact/robust design Lockable adjustment screws Fine screws pitch 0.25 mm (101.6 TPI) Tilt/tip range 2.5 Sensitivity 2 arcsec Vacuum compatible version is available on request
840-0230
For additional frontal flat spring please append letter F to product code.
Fine Adjustment screw M40.25 2 hex key hole
30
M2.53.5 deep 2 holes
15
42
19
12.7
25.4 M4/63* 2 holes 16
M46 deep
5.5
12.94.7 deep
36.5
23
M4
Additional frontal flat spring can be ordered for optics of given thickness. Please append letter F to product code when ordering.
fixing screw
locking screw 1.2 hex key hole
*slide M3(4-40) screws through combined M4/6 mounting/clearance holes to mount the unit immediately to M3(4-40) holes, or mount the unit directly on any M4 tip
8.93
19
Base Positioners
Base Positioners
850-0010
Multi-Axes Tilt Platform
26 16
6 33
148
125 100 75 50 25
M6 4 holes
110 ... 120
SPECIFICATIONS
50
Tilt y Rotation z Load capacity Weight Code 850-0010 Price, EUR 188 2 2.5 15 kg 1 kg
820-0240
820-0240
ways to mount the unit
70
20
bottom view
Complementary Products Code Page 820-0240 8.42
Motorized version is available - 970-0090
SPECIFICATIONS
Tilt y Rotation z Resolution: in full step in 1/8 step Lead screw pitch Repeatability Maximum load capacity Type of actuator Cable Motor connector Weight 2 2.5 1.25 m 0.156 m 0.25 mm 1 m 10 kg 970-0065 1.2 m length cable included DB15(M) 1.3 kg
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Multi-Axes Tilt Platform 850-0010 provides angular adjustment about two axes tilting and in-plane rotation. The mounting platform is rotated around kinematic pivot point by two micrometers. The out-of-plane tilting range is 2 and the in-plane rotation ranges is 2.5. Two micrometer screws are located side by side for a handy use. The adjustment movements are not calibrated, and they are uncoupled. The platform has a 25 mm grid of M6 and M4 tapped holes. Two clearance holes 6.2 mm are provided in the base of the unit. This allows to attach 850-0010 to tables and breadboards. Also you can clamp the base of the unit by Table Clamp 820-0240; this way you can place the unit on the table in any direction. The tilt platform is made of black anodized aluminium.
M4 22 holes
Optical Positioners
50 92
25
Optical Mounts
M6 15 holes
10
M6
4.5
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.94
850-0020 850-0022
850-0020
Kinematic Bases
Kinematic repositioning with repeatability of several arcsec Exclusive mounting disk for extra freedom in positioning (850-0020 only) Hooks made of spring steel enable reliable locking and quick-release A kinematic base is used for repeated positioning of groups of units mounted on its platform. A platform has M6 mounting holes. Alternatively, fit an M6 screw through a clearance hole from beneath. Unhook the platform from the bottom plate and stow it away with all the units still mounted. Later replace the platform, just as it was, with a repeatability of seve ral arcsec. The bases use a kinematic scheme, where three steel balls register with a cone, a vgroove, and a flat. The balls and registers are made of hardened polished steel. Hooks prevent a platform from accidental movements. A bottom plate is fastened through clearance holes or a slot. 850-0020 has a revolving mounting disk adding a degree of freedom of positioning. Material: aluminium. Finish: black anodized.
89
for M6 screw clearance slot in a revolving disk
o76
850-0020
M6 8 holes
22
for M6 screws clearance slot
62 50

o25
Code 850-0020 850-0022
Price, EUR 75 70
50
850-0022
M6 4 holes
850-0030
Magnetic Kinematic Base

You can lift the units mounted on the platform as a group. The platform is replaced with a repeatability of 50 mikrom. The platform has patterns of M4 and M6 mounting holes. Alternatively, fit M6 screws through its clearance slots from beneath. Two high strength magnets lock the platform to the bottom plate. The bottom plate is fastened by M6 screws through a pair of transversal clear ance slots. Push the special lever to lift the platform with minimal jolts. Material: aluminium. Finish: black anodized.
lift lever
for M6 screws 4 clearance slots 25 84 25 25 M6 10 holes o 75 25 M4 9 holes 25
8.95
o50
22
Base Positioners
850-0040
Single Axis Tilt Stage

A Single-Axis Tilt Stage 850-0040 provides tilt range of 6 with 6 rad sensitivity. Pivot is done on two hardened steel balls. The base has M6 tapped holes on four sides, to fasten the platform, for example on mounting posts. Material: aluminium. Finish: black anodized.
Code 850-0040 850-0045 Weight, kg 0.11 0.16 Price, EUR 61 66 850-0040
special flat spring
22.7
2 balls
36 M6
Example codes 850-0045 850-0040 850-0045 850-0040-06 850-0045-06 850-0040 850-0040-08 850-0045-08 Fine driving screw 870-0030 (comes as
standard omit the screw code)
See page 8.131
M6
36 M4
2 balls
screw append 06 to the code)
8.135 8.133
25 50 72 75
850-0045
850-0095
Adjustable Laser / Laser Head Holder

Adjustable Laser/Laser Head Holder 850-0095 is used for repeatable mounting and drift-free pointing of laser heads and other cylindrical objects. You may easily reposition the two supports to select an optimal basis for cylindrical objects of differing lengths (basis of 25, 50, or 70 mm). 850-0095 is made of black anodized aluminium and is equipped with 6.4 mm clearance slots and M6 tapped holes to attach to tables and breadboards.
Code 850-0095 850-0085 D, mm 2536 4855 H, mm 75 65
25,50,70
6.4 50 84 M6 46 min 64
Stable design Precise adjustment about linear and angular coordinates Wide adjustment angle High load capacity Convenient mounting
Price, EUR 98 106
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
870-0050
25 50 72
870-0060 (alternative
25 72 75
Brackets & Rails
850-0040-08
M6 M6 2 holes
M6
23
55
Optical Tables
8.96
850-0200
Adjustable Height Platform
Adjustable Height Platform 850-0200 is a stable vertical translation stage of original design with 25 mm travel range and maximum load capacity of 3 kg. A polished lead screw has 0.5mm pitch and allows to define the height of platform with 20m sensitivity. Arrays of mounting holes M6 and 6.5 mm with 25 mm spacing are identical on the upper and lower plates. Adjustable Height Platform is ideal for use with 860-0060-06 Translation Stage, when it is necessary to define one or two horizontal coordinates at a certain height. The platform is produced from black anodized aluminium, the lead screw block is produced from stainless steel and bronze.
Code 850-0200
Weight, kg 0.5
Price, EUR 221
Motorized Vertical Translation Stage 940-0200 see page 8.142
8.97

20 20 M6 2 holes M6 2 holes M6 2 holes
860-0010
Compact Translation Stage

23 46 23 46 23 46 7.5
20
20
The model 860-0010 compact translation stage is well suited for positioning applications in laboratory experiments requiring linear motion within small space. Ball bearing rolling between opposing of hardened, polished steel rods provide smooth, accurate translating platforms ride. Model 860-0010 stages are designed to stack for X-Y motion. Vertical motion may be also added using model 810-0100 angle bracket. Model 860-0010 stage provides 13 mm travel with 5m resolution and max. 3 kg loading capacity. Max. straightness is 6 m only. Model 860-0010 is completed with steel screw M60.5mm and brass collar with an outer thread M101mm for mounting. Additionally model 860-0010-02 is completed with model 8700010 precise screw. 860-0010-04 option comes with model 8700020 micrometer screw with reading marks. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061, Movable Base 820-0090, Compact Translation Stages 860-0010 XYZ
25
6.4 2 holes 6.4 2 holes 6.4 2 holes
7.5
25
7.5 25
25
25 58 max 25 11 58 max 11
16.5 min 30 max
58 max
16.5 min 30 max M6 16.5 min 8 holes 30 max M6 8 holes M6 8 holes
25 12.5 25 10.5 12.5
10.5
Code 860-0010 860-0010-02 860-0010-04 Weight, kg 0.31 0.34 0.34
6.5
Price, EUR 107 133 138
25
Complementary Products Code 810-0061 810-0100 820-0090 870-0010 870-0020 Page 8.20 8.22 8.26 8.35 8.131
12.5
6.5
12.5 810-0050 25
810-0100 860-0010 860-0010
110
860-0010 860-0010
50
Adjustment Screws
860-0010
8.131
25 6.5 10.5 12.5
12.5 25
Base Positioners
11
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
20
20
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
8.98
860-0020 860-0030 860-0040 860-0050

The models 8600020, 8600030, 8600040, 8600050 precision trans lation stages provide smooth and precise platform movement along one axis. They feature preci sion ball bearing construction, with hardened balls rolling between opposing pairs of hardened, polished steel rods. Carefully selected springs ensure preloading against the actuator tip to eliminate backlash. Four models of precision tran s lation stages provide a real choice for wide range of applications. Universal construction of translation stages allows to construct unit from two or three stages by the help of model 8100080 or model 8100090 angle brackets. For direct mounting of model 860-0020 and 860-0030 stages to the table a use of model 8200110-04 movable base is recommended, for models 8600040 and 860-0050 model 8200110-02 movable base is used. Finish: black oxidized steel.
Precision Translation Stages
38
2 holes
76
38
36 50 25 M6
8 holes
25
M6
M6
25 50
M6
9 holes
24
25
140 50 33 25
140 50 33
M6
2 holes
102
6.4
2 holes
6.4
2 holes
50 99
8 99
50
860-0020
860-0030
Specifications
Max. stage travel, mm 25 2 200 3 30 Drive position side side end end
Complementary Products Code 810-0080 810-0090 820-0110-02 820-0110-04 Weight, kg 1.72 1.59 1.64 1.51 Page 8.25 8.25 8.35 8.35 Price, EUR 196 203 189 196
Resolution, m Angular deviation (any axis), rad Max. straightness, m Max. loading capacity, kg Code 860-0020 860-0030 860-0040 860-0050 Clear aperture no yes no yes
8.99
102
24
76
860-0020 on base plate 820-0110-04
860-0030 on base plate 820-0110-04
025
90 45
025
90 45
11
11
860-0040 on base plate 820-0110-02
860-0050 on base plate 820-0110-02
102 8 50 8 50
102 25
6.4
2 holes
M6
2 holes
6.4
2 holes
M6 33 50 210
33
50 210
26
26
90 45
025 45
90
025 36
76
76
38
38
M6 50
11
M6 50
8 holes
11
9 holes 2 holes
860-0040
860-0050
860-0030
810-0090
860-0020
860-0020
810-0110-04
Total height of XYZ stage is 209 if connecting angle bracket is 810-0090. Total height of XYZ stage is 224 if connecting angle bracket is 810-0080.
8.100
Adjustment Screws
209
Base Positioners
25
25
Optical Positioners
25
25
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
860-0051
Optical Tables
2.76 1 2.09...2.68
Translation Stage
Micrometer drive X-Y-Z configuration available
Specifications Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws
820-0136-01 Travel range Sensitivity Scale graduation Tracking accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight 10 kg 5 kg 0.41 kg 15 mm 1 m 10 m 2 m
Code 860-0051
Price, EUR 249
XYZ Translation Stage 860-0051 XYZ

14.5(0.57)
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Scale graduation Tracking accuracy Load capacity 15 mm 1 m 10 m 2 m 5 kg
90(3.54) 77.1(3.04) 50
27.5
60.5(2.38)
54.5(2.15)
for M6(1/4-20) screws 2 clearance slots

Base Plate top view
13(0.51)
1/4-20 9 holes
3.15 2
M6 9 holes 8-32 4 holes
80 50
860-0051 810-0110
M4 4 holes
860-0051
70 25
100(4)
25
820-0136-01
53...68
820-0136-02 820-0136-03
3.54 4.73
860-0051E XYZ (for Inch)
90 120
860-0051M XYZ (for Metric)
100(4) 140(5.52)max
820-0136-02
The stages are assembled of:
3 pieces of 860-0051 1 piece of 820-0136-01 1 piece of 810-0110

Code 860-0051E XYZ Weight, kg 1.35 1.35
1 piece of 820-0136-02 1 piece of 820-0136-03
Price, EUR 747 747
810-0110
860-0051M XYZ 820-0136-03
8.101
860-0052
Stable Steel Translation Stage

Optical Tables
Solid box design 25 mm travel range Variety of mounting holes and options Easily stacked in X-Y configuration For Z axis add 810-0146 Large mounting surface Made of steel
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Reading accuracy Angular deviation Tracking accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Assemblies: X-Y Z directly 810-0146 20 kg 5 kg 25 mm 1 m 10 m <200 Rad 2 m Complementary Products 810-0146 8.30
bottom view
810-0146
M6 2pc
ORDERING INFORMATION Adjustment Screws

298 930
Steel version: 860-0052; 860-0052 XYZ
M6 2pc
860-0052 XYZ
Stable Steel version: 860-0052S; 860-0052S XYZ Version for vacuum: 860-0052V; 860-0052V XYZ
Code 860-0052 860-0052V XYZ 860-0052 XYZ
Weight, kg 0.78
Price, EUR
8.102
M6 4pc
Stable Steel Translation Stages 860-0052 have large mounting surface, great travel range for this relatively small size, low profile, and increased stability and precision. Box design reinforces the stage, reducing flex. Steel, as a material, adds to stability. You can mount a second driving screw on the other end (to lock the platform in fixed positioning applications). The platform is preloaded by springs. The stages can be stacked immediately to other units, or to their own type (e.g. in X-Y configuration). The stages can be used upside-down. For immediate attachment the base has 2 clearance holes for M6 screws. Similarly, the platform has 4 clearance holes for M4 screws. Slip the screws from top or under through the access holes in a platform/base. Micrometer 870-0040-25 comes as standard. The stage has black anodized finish.
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Code
Page
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
860-0053
Optical Tables
Low Cost Linear TRanslation Stage
M6x8 4 screws
57 o34
M6x8 2 screws 860-0053-02 Translation stage 860-0053-01 Translation stage
for M6 screws 2 access holes
Right hand version
820-0136 Base plate

M4x10 4 screws
o63 o50 25
860-0053-03
M6 (1/4-20) 4 screws
100
M4x6 deep 4 holes
25 o34 72,5
860-0053-02
M6x6 deep 11 holes
8.103
19
860-0053-01 860-0053-02
Solid box design 25 mm travel range Variety of mounting holes and options Easily stacked in X-Y configuration For Z axis add 810-0146-AI Large mounting surface Made of aluminium Stable Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0053 have large mounting surface, great travel range for this relatively small size, low profile and increased stability of precision. Box designed reinforces the stage, reducing flex. The platform is preloaded by springs. The stage could be stacked immediately to other units or to their own type (e.g. in X-Y configuration). Z-axis is attached through angle bracket 810-0146-Al. The stage could be used upside-down. For immediate attachment the base has 2 clearance holes for M6 screws. Similarly, the platform has 4 clearance holes for M4 screws. Slip the screws from top or under through the across holes in a platform/base. Micrometers 8700040-25 comes as standard.
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Reading accuracy Angular deviation Tracking accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight Material Assemblies: X-Y Z Code 860-0053-01 860-0053-02 860-0053-03 directly 810-0146-AI Description standard stage side driven stage side driven right hand stage Price, EUR 210 217 217 860-0053-01 20 kg 5 kg 0.4 kg black anodized aluminium 25 mm 1 m 10 m < 200 rad 2 m

M6x8 2 screws 860-0053-01 Translation stage
52 25 20
M4x10 deep 4 holes
810-0146-Al Angle bracket
123
860-0054
Stainless Steel Single to Multi-Axes Stages

Stable Steel Translation Stages 860-0054 have low profile, and increased stability and precision. Box design reinforces the stage, reducing flex. Steel, as a material, adds to stability. The platform is preloaded by springs. The stages can be stacked immediately to other units, or to their own type (e.g. in X-Y configuration). The stages can be used upside-down. The stages are entirely made of stainless steel.
A 3 holes
38,5 (1,52") 25 (1")
29 (1,14")
20 (0,79")
E
Brackets & Rails
B 2 holes
E-E view
860-0054-02 and 860-0054
D 2 holes
8,5 (0,33")
860-0054 with Mini Micrometer 870-0055-04
860-0054; 860-0054-02
65 7
for M4(8-32)screw 4 clearance holes for M6(1/4-20) screw 2 clearance slots 20

860-0054 with Fine Hex Adjustment Screw 870-0090MN 860-0054 with Fine Hex Adjustment Screw 870-0090ML
Specifications
Travel range 6 mm 1 m 10 m <150 rad 2 m 45 kg 3 kg 0.1 kg 860-0054-02 (imperial) #8-320.11 deep #8-320.19 deep #4-400.23 deep 0.20.27 deep 860-0054 (metric) M43 deep M36 deep 67 deep 860-0054 XYZ Code 860-0054 860-0054-02 Price, EUR 149 149
25(1")
38,5
Sensitivity Reading accuracy Angular deviation Tracking accuracy
Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight
Base Plate
(3,12) 25 (1")
Complementary Products Code 810-0145 860-0054 870-0055-04 870-0090ML 870-0090MN Page 8.29 8.104 8.134 8.137 8.137 Dimension A B C D
Ordering
810-0145
860-0054 model of metric dimensions is the standard one. 860-0054-02 model of imperial dimensions is produced on demand. Note: actuator is not included. It can be ordered separately. Suitable micro me ters are: 870-0055-04, 870-0090M, 870-0090MN. For vacuum applications please indicate this in your order. We will prepare the stage with appropriate components (e.g. apply alternative lubricants).
(2,63...2,88")
(4)
(0,5")
8.104
Adjustment Screws
(0,79)
M45 deep
50(2")
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Solid box design Compact design 6 mm travel range Large mounting surface Easily stacked in X-Y configuration Made entirely of stainless steel easily adaptable for vacuum applications
M6x0,5 3,5mm (0,14") deep
20 (0,79")
25 (0,98") C 2 holes
13 (0,52")
6,5 (0,26")
12,5 (0,49" )
Optical Tables
860-0056
Optical Tables
116
Non-Magnetic Translation Stage

Precision non-magnetic translation stage In this stage are used only non-magnetic materials (brass, bronze, aluminium) X-Y-Z configurations available
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Screw backlash Load capacity: horizontal 2 kg 1 kg 0.19 kg 20 mm 5 m 0.02 mm
12.5x4=50 12.5
M4x5 deep 5 holes
20
M2.5x5 deep 2 holes
10
for M2.5 screw 2 clearance holes
for M3 screw 2 clearance holes M3x4 deep 6 holes
16 9.5
Code 860-0056
Price, EUR 280
vertical Weight
40 25
0...20
26 20 12.5
2
Optical Mounts You may stack the stages for XY applications directly only using two non-magnetic M3 screws
121
12.5
M4x5 deep 4 holes
66 77.5
66 50
50
M2.5 screws
50 for M6 screw for M4 screw 2 holes 4 holes Base Plate

860-0056
860-0056
860-0056 860-0056
860-0056 860-0056
89
77.5
83.5
77.5
860-0056 XYZ For quick YZ assembly stages may be stacked using two non-magnetic M2.5 screws
860-0056 XYZ Angle bracket allow to stabilize stack the stages for YZ motion
8.105
60
10
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
860-0058
Side Control Linear Stages

Side control linear translation stages 860-0058 are equipped with 870-0040 series micrometer screws and provide convenient control in limited space setups. Both left-hand (860-0058-10, 8600058-20) and right-hand (860-0058-11; 860-0058-21) versions are available. These stages can be used in multiaxis combinations and are compatible with 860-0060 series stages. In dense optical schemes with limited access to multi-axis stages you have a possibility to control all three axes from one side.
SPECIFICATIONS Optical Tables
860-0058 left hand version 860-0058 right hand version
10, 20 mm travel ranges Side Control Linear Stage Driving micrometer screw Precise ball bearings Compact XYZ configuration with all screws from one side Right and left hand versions are available
Model Travel range, mm Sensitivity, m Tracking accuracy, m Reading accuracy, m Load capacity: horizontal, kg vertical, kg Weight, kg Assemblies: X-Y Z Price, EUR
860-0058-10 10 1 2
860-0058-20 20
5 ( division) 10 5 0.18 810-0250 810-0150 206 239 0.23
Description left hand version right hand version left hand version right hand version
A, mm 31 31 34 34
B, mm 46 46 51 51
L, mm 79 79 89 89
T, mm 67-77 67-77 74-94 74-94
Weight, kg 0.18 0.18 0.23 0.23
Base Plate 810-0250

Adjustment Screws Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices
8.106
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
860-0060
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws
Code 810-0150 810-0150-01 810-0160 810-0250 820-0254 870-0040 860-0060-02 860-0060-04 860-0060-05
Narrow (width 30 mm) Aluminium Translation Stages

Stages 860-0060 allow manual linear motion. Standard micrometers 870-0040 are used as driving screws. Customer may specify other screws with non-matching travel range to save space. A platform is spring preloaded against the driving screw to provide high resolution, low backlash, smooth and accurate motion. An array of mounting holes on a platform and on a base allow a variety of convenient mounting options, including mounting on Posts.
bottom view
860-0060-02
10, 20 mm travel ranges Optional travel: 5, 6, 25, 30 mm Stackable for compact X-Y-Z configuration Custom angle brackets are made promptly Driving micrometer screw Precise ball bearings Material: black anodized aluminium
Specifications Travel range, mm Sensitivity, m Tracking accuracy, m Reading accuracy, m Load capacity: horizontal, kg vertical, kg Weight, kg Assemblies: X-Y Z Price, EUR Complementary Products Page 8.30 8.31 8.31 8.106 8.43 8.132 810-0250 810-0150 191 0.16 860-0060-02 10
bottom view
860-0060-04
860-0060-04 20 1 2 5 ( division) 10 5 0.2 810-0250 810-0150 224
860-0060-05 50 860-0060-05
bottom view
0 86
-0
06
0-
04
0.31 directly 810-0160 283
2s
8 s M4rew
c
81
0-
01
50
8 s M4crew
2s
For rigid XYZ assembly we offer a connecting plate 810-0250 (for Y axis) and an angle bracket 810-0150 (for Z axis).
For quick XYZ assembly stages may be stacked using connecting cones 820-0254 (7.1 holes with fixing screws on the sides are provided).
c 2s
8 s M4rew
86
0 0-
06
0-
04
81
0 0-
25
0 8 8 s M4rew
c
60
00
60
-0
2s
8.107
Example of 860-0060-02 XYZ

Optical Tables
12.5 151
Complementary Products Code Page 8.30 8.107 810-0150 860-0060-02
M6 2 holes M4 2 holes 33
12.5
12.5
M6 2 holes 860-0060-02
25
80...90
40
810-0150
810-0250
31...41 111...121
860-0060-02 112 max
5 max
Code
Page 8.30 8.107
M6 2 holes 38
M4 2 holes
810-0150 860-0060-04
12.5
12.5
860-0060-04
M4 3 holes M6 2 holes
40
810-0150
25
860-0060-04 810-0250 860-0060-04
100...120
7 max 118...138
25...45 122...142
8.108
Adjustment Screws
169
12.5
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
M4 3 holes
860-0060-02
Brackets & Rails
860-0060
bottom view
Medium (width 50 mm) Aluminium Translation Stages
50, 100, 150 mm travel ranges Stackable for X-Y-Z configuration Convenient patterns of mounting holes Precise ball bearings Custom angle brackets are made promptly Material: black anodized aluminium 860-0060-06 uses 870-0040 micrometer as a driving screw. The platform is spring preloaded against the screw. 860-0060-08 and 860-0060-10 use their own integrated driving screws. The screw has a micrometric scale (on the body and knob). The pitch of the screw is 0.5 mm. Custom pitch and gears are available on request. The platform of 860-0060-08 (-10) is preloaded by a collar of our original design on the screw, rendering an increased load capacity, stability, and reduced backlash.
860-0060-08
860-0060-10
860-0060-06
bottom view
860-0060-08
860-0060-06
Specifications Travel range, mm Sensitivity, m Tracking accuracy, m Reading accuracy, m Load capacity: horizontal, kg vertical, kg Weight, kg Price, EUR
860-0060-06 50
860-0060-08 100
860-0060-10 150
10 40 9 0.74 397
10 40 20 1.24 417
10 40 20 1.15 549
8.109
X-Y-Z assemblies Optical Tables
XY axes stages stack directly. For Z axis we offer an angle bracket 810-0160.
Vacuum Compatible Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0060V-08, 860-0060V-10 is available.
860-0060V-10
bottom view
860-0060-10

Optical Positioners
Complementary Products Code 810-0160 Angle Bracket 810-0160 860-0060-08 Page 8.31 8.109 820-0115 Base Plate
8.110
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Mounts
For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
Brackets & Rails
860-0070
860-0070-02
Low Profile Aluminium Translation Stages

Precision movement 25, 50 mm travel ranges Stackable for multi-axes positioning Reversible for left or right hand applications 2 inches (50 mm) clear aperture Insert platform with M6, M4 and clearance holes
860-0070-02 Specifications Travel range, mm Sensitivity, m Reading accuracy, m Load capacity: horizontal, kg vertical, kg Weight, kg Assemblies: 860-0070-04 with insert platform X-Y Z Price, EUR 810-0115 309 directly 810-0116 434 0.5 16 7 1.2 860-0070-02 25 1 5 ( division) 860-0070-04 50
Low Profile Aluminium Translation Stages 860-0070 provide single axis movement. Items are fixed on a platform by M6 tapped holes. 860-0070-04 has M4 holes in addition. The stages have central clear aperture50mm (2 inch), which remains unobstructed over some 15 mm of travel. Close the aperture with an insert platform laid against the resting flange. The insert platform provides additional mounting holes, which you can rotate. It is locked by two fixing screws. Angle Brackets 810-0115 (810-0116) tie the stages 860-0070-02 (860-0070-04) into an X-Y-Z translation system.
Insert platform
860-0070-04
8.111

for M6 screw
4 clearance holes
75
25
M67
12 holes
92 49 51 860-0070-02
860-0070-02 860-0070-02
5.5 ... 30.5
Complementary Products Code 810-0115 860-0070-02 Page 8.27
73.5 ... 98.5
120 ... 145
152
860-0070-06
Low Profile Translation Stage with Quick Move Lever
860-0070-06 with insert platform 860-0070-06 xy with insert platform
Scale graduation Load capacity Weight
10 m 16 kg 0.6 kg Code 860-0070-06 Price, EUR 498
8.112
Lever for quick movement by passing the driving screw Precise movement 100 mm travel range Quick move lever bypassing a driving screw Stackable for multi-axes positioning 2 inches (50 mm) clear aperture Insert platform with M6, M4 and clearance holes
SPECIFICATIONS
Travel range Sensitivity 100 mm 1 m
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
8.111
810-0115
174
o50 o75 88
25
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages
Insert platform
860-0075
Vertical Translation Stage
Pantograph design 16 ball bearings Precision lead screw 100 mm vertical travel Height: min 84 mm max 184 mm Top and bottom plates parallel to 1 mm Load capacity 7 kg Weight 2.72 kg
Vertical Translation Stage 860-0075 boasts our unique design. Being very compact, it provides smooth and stable adjustment of height. It has a large travel range, and it supports large loads. While moving the platform stays parallel to the base. The lead screw acts at a varying angle, so the resolution of the stage varies with position. The platform has an array of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm. The base has six M6 and two 6.5 holes. Material: black anodized aluminium.
Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
8.113
860-0085
Basic Translation Stages

Optical Tables
860-0085-02
860-0085-01
10 mm travel Low profile X-Y-Z direct stacking
860-0085-02 bottom view
860-0085-01 bottom view
Code 860-0085-01 860-0085-02
Price, EUR 179 188
860-0085-02 860-0085-02 860-0085-02
860-0085-02
860-0085-01 860-0085-01 860-0085-01
8.114
860-0085-01 860-0085-01 860-0085-01
Adjustment Screws
You may stack the stages for XYZ applications directly without intermediary pieces, using only 4 standard M6 screws.
Base Positioners
Basic Translation Stages 860-0085. 8600085-01 for X axis. Two such stages stack in XY axes with greater stability (2 screws M6 are used). 860-0085-02 for Z axis. It has less XY mounting provisions than 860-0085-01. It has extra mounting holes for end items. 2 screws M6 are used for Z stacking. 860-0085-02 has patterns of mounting holes: M6 on the platform, and M4 on the base. The base has a 12 mm clear aperture not obscured over the whole travel range. The platform rolls on ball bearing guides, and is preloaded against the driving screw by springs. Load capacity is up to 3 kg, when mounted vertically. The stages mount directly to their own type, or to other stages, optical tables. The stages are of black finished aluminium.
Specifications
Sensitivity Angular deviation Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity: horizontal against away Weight 10 kg 3 kg 0.5 kg 0.3 kg 860-0085-01 1 m < 200 rad 2 m 5 m ( div.)
Optical Positioners
vertical (relative to driving screw)
Optical Mounts
Travel range
10 mm
Brackets & Rails
860-0090
Code 860-0090-02 860-0090-04 Weight, kg 0.18 0.23 Price, EUR 191 206 860-0090-02
Mini Rail System Ball Slide Positioners

The Mini Rail System Ball Slide Positioner 860-0090-02 has a travel range 5 mm. Using the micrometer driving screw mounted into M101 taped hole, the resolution 10 m is achieved. Positioners have adapters for mounting onto mini optical rail system rails and can be locked in a position using a fixing screw. With a help of Rail Carriers the Mini Rail System Ball Slide Positioner 8600090-02 can be coarsely positioned in a range of 30 mm. With two 860-0090-02 and one 860-0090-01 you may stack the X-Y-Z applications directly. 810-0010 for building optical bench or precise optical rail system suitable for these precise positioners.
Specifications
Travel range Rough XY travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical 3 kg 1 kg 5 mm 20 mm 1 m 2 m 5 m (1/2 div.)
Complementary Products Code 810-0010 Page 8.18 860-0090-02
You may stack the stages for X-Y-Z applications directly, without screws. Default base plate choice for 860-0090 XYZ is 810-0010-10 optical rail.
860-0090-04
860-0090-04
60
00
90
-0
ing fix rew sc
5m
810-0010-10
Optical Rails 810-0010-10 can be used as base plates for stacking translation stages 860-0090 to optical tables or to other stages
81
0-
00
10
86
0 0-
09
0-
02
810-0010-10
8.115
860-0092
Two-Axes stages only 20 mm height !

Stages of stainless steel are available!
860-0092-02
860-0092-01
Compact X-Y configuration Exceptionally precise orientation of axes at 90 Precision movement 10 mm travel range Precision ball bearings
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical 6 kg 3 kg 10 mm 1 m 2 m 5 m ( div.)
Ultra Low Profile Steel Two-Axes 8600092-02 and Single Axis 860-0092-01 Translation Stages. The height of single axis translation stage is 10.5 mm, and of two axes translation stage 20 mm. To match the low height of the stages Thin Micrometers 870-0045-04 with small knob diameter (13 mm) are used as driving screws. It is possible to easily combine 860-009202, 860-0092-01 and angle bracket 8100140 to have 3 axis translation system. Difference between models 860-0092-01 and 860-0092-01U is that the 860-009201U has a reversed central hole compared to the 860-0092-01. Although the system looks very light and thin, it is very reliable and precise.
Code 860-0092-01 860-0092-01U 860-0092-01SS Weight, kg 0.14 0.14 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.34 0.35 0.35 Price, EUR 171 214 219 328 328 330 625 415
860-0092-01 810-0140 860-0092-02
usage of Angle Bracket 810-0140
820-0135-01
820-0135-01 universal base plate for stacking the translation stages to optical tables or to another stages.
See page 8.37
860-0092-01SSU 860-0092-01SSV 860-0092-01SSVU 860-0092-02 860-0092-02SS 860-0092-02SSV
-SS in product code indicates that stages are of stainless steel; -V in product code indicates that stages are Vacuum 10-6 Torr compatible.
M4x3 deep 8 holes
50,5 50
31
25
25
12,5
20 32
10,5
M4x5 deep 2 holes
20 32
10,5
M4x5 deep 2 holes
24,5
50
94,5...104,5
20
94,5...104,5
14
25
99...104
25
25
12,5
50 24,5 12,5
M4x3 deep 8 holes for M4 screw clearance hole
50 24,5 12,5
M4x3 deep 8 holes
50,5 50 24,5
94...104
94...104
A
860-0092-01
A
99..104
860-0092-01U 860-0092-02
8.116
25
50
50
25
Adjustment Screws
14
25
50
M4x3 deep 8 holes
31
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
171
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Ultra Low Profile Steel Translation Stages Single and two-Axes
860-0094
Low Profile two-Axes Aluminium Translation Stage
Compact X-Y configuration Exceptionally precise orientation of axes at 90 Precision movement 10 mm travel range Precision ball bearings Perpendicular and side control configuration Low Profile Two-Axes Aluminium Translation Stage 860-0094 provides smooth, precise, X-Y axes movement. The travel of this Stage is 10mm with resolution 10 m. Eight M4 tapped holes are provided in order to mount other components. It can be directly mounted to breadboards and other equipment from our by use of mounting holes 4.5mm and M4. The base and the platform are produced from the black anodized aluminium.
Code 860-0094 Price, EUR 319 For Z axis use Translation Stage 860-0092 and Angle Bracket 840-0140.
820-0135-01
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight 15 kg 5 kg 0.38 kg 10 mm 1 m 2 m 5 m ( div.)
See page 8.37
820-0135-01 universal base plate for stacking the translation stages to optical tables or to another stages.
860-0094-02
Low Profile two-Axes Aluminium Translation Stage of Side Control

A rare opportunity to control an X-Y translation stage by access from a single side
For your convenience we have rotated by 90 the driving screw for X axis in the Translation Stage 860-0094-02. Now it is situated parallel to the Y axis adjustment screw, so the stage is controlled from a single side. This helps in optical schemes of great concentration. In other respects, including the specifications, the stage is the same as 860-0094.
Code 860-0094-02 Weight, kg 0.38 Price, EUR 384
Other dimensions such as 860-0094
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight 15 kg 5 kg 0.38 kg 10 mm 1 m 2 m 5 m ( div.)
8.117
860-0096
Aluminium Ball Bearing Stage

Specifications
Drive type Travel range Sensitivity Angular deviation Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity vertical Lead screw pitch Guide Material 3 kg 0.5 mm Ball bearings aluminium black anodized 0.12 kg directly 810-0112 Code 860-0096 Price, EUR horizontal Side 13 mm < 200 rad 2 m 5 m ( division) 10 kg 1 m
o32
Compact design Precise movement 13 mm travel range Lockable X-Y direct stacking
Weight Assemblies: X-Y Z
58
220
32 40
74max
860-0096 (2 pieces) and 860-0098-02 stacked in XYZ coordinates 860-0096 may be stacked with 860-0098 on top or under
860-0096 (2 pieces) stacked in XY coordinates
Specifications
Sensitivity 1 m 1 m 5 m 0.5 mm Ball bearings aluminium black anodized 3 kg
29...34
Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity Lead screw pitch Guide Material Finish
Compact Lockable High precision Travel range 5 mm See 860-0099 for 13 mm travel
Code 860-0098-02
Travel, mm 5
H, mm 29...34
Weight, kg 0.15
Price, EUR 169
8.118
Aluminium Ball Bearing Vertical Stages 860-0098 is made in most compact design. Vernier scale is engraved on one side of the stage. Travel range 5 mm. Locking mechanism to secure stages in desired position is made on the other side. Two through holes for M3 screws are made in the positioners platform for mounting on other suitable surfaces, for example on translation stage 860-0096. Can be fastened on mounting posts 820-0020 through M6 hole centered on the bottom surface.
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
860-0098
Aluminium Ball Bearing Vertical Stages
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
15,5
Finish
for M3 screws 4 clearance holes lock screw 2 hex key 38,3 M3x4 deep 32 9 holes
Brackets & Rails
16
Optical Tables
860-0099
Optical Tables
16 4 40 42...55
Vertical Stage
Compact High precision Travel range 13 mm See 860-0098 for 5 mm travel Motorized version 960-0199 available Vertical Stages 860-0099 is made in most compact design. Vernier scale is engraved on one side of the stage. Travel range 13 mm. Four M4 holes are made in the positioners platform for mounting on other suitable surfaces, two of those can be used as thought holes for M3x10 screws to stack stages ontop of others, for example on translation stage 860-0096.
Specifications
Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity Guide Material Finish 1 m 1 m 5 m 5 kg Ball bearings Aluminium Black anodized
42...55
820-0135-03 Universal Base Plate is required to fix stages to a flat surface, for example, optical table.
See page page 8.37
M6x5 deep
Code 860-0099
M3x5 deep 6 holes

Motorized Vertical Stage 960-0199

Resolution up to 0.03 m
40 32
M4x6 deep 4 holes
41
stepper motor
Code 960-0199
Page 8.172
cable with connector HDB15(M)
M3x5 deep 6 holes
40 32
65
61,5 56
40 32
86 89
M6x5 deep
stepper motor
32 40 45
Base Plate 820-0135-03

dial knob
8.119
16
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts
micrometer scale
A 43,2 40 32
view A (bottom view)
M4x6 deep 4 holes
32
860-0100
Micro Translation Stage

Micro Translation Stage 860-0100 pro vides smooth, precise single axis movement. M2 and M4 moun ting holes are provided. Angle brackets 810-0120 allow to stack the stages for X-Y and X-Y-Z motion. The base and the platform are produced from the black anodized aluminium.
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight 0.5 kg 0.2 kg 0.04 kg 5 mm 1 m 2 m
Code 860-0100
Price, EUR 142
Compact design Precision movement 5 mm travel range Precision ball bearings

860-0100 XY
Base Plate
65
Use two Angle Brackets 810-0120 for X-Y-Z assembly.

860-0100 with Thin Micrometer 870-0045 installed 810-0120
for M2 screw 6 clearance holes for M6(1/4-20) screw 2 clearance slots M2 4 holes
860-0100
860-0100
25(1") 20 10
40
810-0120
For stacking the translation stages 860-0100, 860-0102 and rotation stage 860-0130 to optical tables or to another stages.
Usage of angle bracket 810-0120
8.120
20 50(2")
860-0100
810-0120
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
860-0100 XY
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
860-0102
Optical Tables
5 25(1") 20 10
XZ Micro Translation Stage of Side Regulation

XZ Micro Translation Stage 860-0102 provides smooth, precise two axes movement. The driving screws are positioned so that the unit is controlled only from one side. Thats why 860-0102 is very handy in optical schemes with very dense placement of instruments. The travel of the stage is 4 mm with 5 m sensitivity. M2 tapped holes are provided for components mouting. The unit has a 7 mm clear aperture. So it is ideally suited for use as a holder of diaphragms. Angle bracket 810-0120 may be used to combine the stage with other units. The base and the platform are made of black anodized aluminium.
22,60,2
M3x3 deep
Optical Positioners Base Positioners
11 5
11
28,5 15 10
44
12,5
M2x3 deep 2 holes
20 25 33,5...36 0,8
12,5
M2x4 deep 4 holes
Base Plate
65
Code 860-0102 860-0102L 860-0102-04
Description standard version lockable version with mini micrometer 870-0055-04 installed
0,8
M2x3 deep 10 2 holes 15 M2x4 deep 4 holes

Weight, kg 0.06 0.06 0.08 Price, EUR 220 235 290
for M2 screw 6 clearance holes for M6(1/4-20) screw 2 clearance slots M2 4 holes
Complementary Products Code 810-0120 870-0055-02 Page 8.28 8.134
20 50(2")
For stacking the translation stages 860-0100, 860-0102 and rotation stage 860-0130 to optical tables or to another stages. Lockable version
8.121
40
20 27
Brackets & Rails

860-0102
860-0102-02; 860-0102 with mini micrometer 870-0055-02 installed
Specifications
Travel range Sensitivity Tracking accuracy Load capacity: horizontal vertical 0.3 kg 0.1 kg 4 mm 1 m 2 m
Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
Ultra Compact configuration Precise rectilineal movement 4 mm X-Z or X-Y travel range Precision ball bearings Fine Screws pitch 0.25 mm (100 threads per Inch)
3 hex key hole 7 M3x3 deep
860-0105
Linear Flexure Translation Stage

The 860-0105 linear flexure translation stages provide ultra smooth translation for optical assemblies and other components. These stages guarantee linearity of motion over the whole travel range. High stability and smoothness of translation of the stages is ideal for applications in
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity with: Micrometer screw Differential Screw Tracking accuracy Reading accuracy Load capacity Assemblies: X-Y Z directly Angle Bracket 1 m 0.1 m 2 m 10 m 1 kg
M4x5 deep 10 holes
M3x5 deep 12 holes
25 40 50 70
Code 860-0105
Weight, kg 0.4
Price, EUR 297
12.7 25 40 50 70
40
Base Plate
860-0105 for M4 screw 2 access holes
185
12,7
clear aperture 860-0105 860-0105
106,5...111,5
136
Base Plate
135
clear aperture
50,5
8.122
for M6 screw 2 clearance slots
860-0105 XYZ You may stack the stages for XY applications directly only using two M4x8 screws. Angle bracket allow to stabilize stack the stages for YZ motion.
Adjustment Screws
12,7
100
Base Positioners
Angle bracket
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
111 max
30
Travel range
5 mm
Brackets & Rails
interferometry, biomedicine, microscopy and other nanoprecision adjustment. Extremely low friction. Stackable for X-Y-Z configurations. Available options include linear flexure stage equipped with stepper motor actuator, DC motor actuator and piezo actuator.
Optical Tables
860-0106
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts
860-0106 860-0106
Dovetail Linear Translation Stage

The Dovetail Translation Stage is miniature, ideal for use in applications where space is limited. The design uses a precision M4x0.25mm pitch lead screw for smooth linear positioning along the entire range of travel. The moving platform is lockable. Various application accessories are also available.
A threaded (M4x4 deep) bronze insert on bottom of stage 1,5x3 deep 2 holes
860-0106
SPECIFICATIONS
Travel range Fine Screw pitch Sensitivity Resolution Drive Location Bearings Load capacity Horizontal 1.5 kg 1 kg Aluminium Black anodized 0.03 kg Vertical Material Finish Weight 10 mm 1 m 1 m Center drive Dovetail 0,25 mm
20 42,2 8
Compact design Rebust Dovetail Mechanism Rapid, Smooth Positioning Lockable Moving Platform XY Miniature Dovetail Stages
Code 860-0106 860-0106 XY 860-0106 XYZ Price, EUR 59 123 199
16
25,4 20 25,4 20
locking screw 1,5 hex key hole

2,5 hex key
hole
1,5x3 deep 4 holes
M4x4 deep
860-0106
860-0106
860-0106
860-0106
860-0106 xyz
860-0106 xy
8.123
10
M6 Translation & Rotation Stages 25
860-0110
9.5 Tilt / Rotation Stage
6.4
3 The model 860-011050 tilt/rotation stage provides 56 two independent tilt adjustments within 5 range and 4 in-plane rotation adjustment. Precision screws provide 9 arcsec resolution in rotation and both tilt planes (adjustment screws M60.25, 3 pcs.). The mounting 0...38 clamp with a spring-loaded disengagement knob allows easy insertion and 88 removal of optical components up to 39 mm height and 3030 mm in square. 860-0110 stage is attached 3.5 to a table through clearance holes 38 in its base. The main elements of the stage are finished with black anodized aliuminium. 5 25
71
M6
Brackets & Rails
25 9.5 3 50 56 6.4
22 44 68 25
0...38 88 3.5 38
48 M4 4 holes
5 25
Code 860-0110
22 68
Optical Positioners
44
25
48
M4 4 holes
Mounting option: Large Rod with Rod Base 810-0050, Large Rod Mounting Clamp 810-0061, Movable Base 820-0090, Tilt/Rotation Stage 860-0110
8.124
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Mounts
Optical Tables
860-0120
860-0120
Mini Rotation Stage

Mini Rotation Stage 860-0120 provides smooth, low friction 360 rotation. A micrometer driving screw renders 1 resolution. A clear aperture of 15 mm allows attachment of lenses and filters directly in front of the stage. A removable ring (included) can be screwed into the aperture. The rings hole is of 6.5 mm, so you can put an M6 screw from underneath to mount some component di rect ly onto the stage. 860-0120 can be mounted to optical rails using rail carriers. Clear top design allows attachment of larger components.
860-0120E
Base Plate
Specifications
Rotation Resolution Wobble Load capacity: horizontal vertical 5 kg 2 kg 0.23 kg Price, EUR 232 232 860-0120 360 coarse, 15 fine 1 coarse, 1 fine 3 arcmin
Base plate for stacking 860-0120 to optical tables or to another stages.
Weight Code 860-0120 860-0120E
860-0130
Micro Rotation Stage

Micro Rotation Stage 860-0130 is a compact 360 rotation platform. Using a fine screw it is possible to rotate platform precisely. Pitch of the screw is 0.25 mm. Vernier can be read to 1. Using M2 screws and an angle bracket 810-0120, this compact stage may be attached to other micro stages (like 8600100). Other angle brackets 810-0120 are available in order to attach the stage to other units, e.g. to 840-0060. The stage is produced from black anodized aluminium.
Specifications
Rotation range Reading accuracy Sensitivity Wobble Load capacity: horizontal vertical Weight 0.1 kg 0.1 kg 0.04 kg Complementary Products Code 810-0120 820-0020 840-0060 870-0045 Page 8.28 8.32 8.63 8.133 360 coarse, 15 fine 1 0.5 arcmin 1 arcmin
Code 860-0130 860-0130-45 860-0130
Price, EUR 186 224
810-0120
840-0060 820-0020 860-00130-45. 860-0130 with thin micrometer 870-0045 installed
8.125
860-0140
Precision Rotary Stage

Optical Tables
Code 860-0140 Price, EUR 324 Max. drive torque Weight 0.3 kgm 0.63 kg
860-0150
2 inch Aperture Rotation Stage

2 inch Aperture Rotation Stage 8600150 allows full 360 coarse rotation by hand. You may lock coarse adjustment. Then fine adjustment can be done over a range of 10 using the micrometer. Angular position is read on 360 graduated scale on the platform, which is marked every 1. The stage has a central aperture of 50.8 mm. For horizontal fastening three corners of the base have clearance holes for M6 screws.
SPECIFICATIONS
Rotation range: coarse fine Sensitivity Reading accuracy Wobble Load capacity: 360, resolution 1 10, resolution 1 arcmin 20 arcsec 1 arcmin 1 arcmin 15 kg 7 kg 0.58 kg
50 132max
45
7,5
45
M4x6 deep 4 holes fixing screw
75(3") 92
Vertical mounting: 2 sides of the base each has two M6 holes spaced by 50 mm.
horizontal vertical Weight
Code 860-0150
Price, EUR 317
8.126
for M6 (1/4-20) screw 3 clearance holes
Adjustment Screws
Rolling ball movement 360 rotation 10 fine adjustment 50.8 mm (2) clear aperture Inch version 860-0150E is available
60
51
50 75(3") 92 102
M6x6 deep 4 holes
M6x6 deep 4 holes
Base Positioners
26,5
26
Optical Positioners
We offer you a fine rotary stage with micrometer screw. Fine motion range is 15 with resolution of 1 arcmin. For coarse adjustment release the fixing screw and turn the platform. The platform has M6 and M4 mounting holes. Precision rotary stage has an aperture M301 with clear aperture of 25 mm. Two retaining rings with 1 inch clear aperture are included. To close the platforms aperture you can thread in an insert platform (included) with a centered clearance hole and M6, M4 holes. The stage can be fastened horizontally and vertically using M6 screws.
Specifications
Rotation range fine Sensitivity Reading Accuracy Wobble Load capacity horizontal vertical 12 kg 5 kg 15, resolution 1 arcmin 20 arcsec 1 arcmin 1 arcmin coarse 360, resolution 1
Optical Mounts
M301 diameter platform insert Two 25 mm (1 inch) retaining rings Centered platform insert Inch version 860-0140E is available
Brackets & Rails
860-0155
Code 860-0155-01 860-0155-02 860-0155-01E 860-0155-02E Aperture M271 30 mm M271 30 mm Price, EUR 339 343 339 343
Rotation Stages
The main advantage of this precise rotation stage is that it has very compact dimensions and low-profile together with the great aperture in the middle. This rotation stage has two modifications with different apertures: M27x1 or 30 mm. 860-0155 doesnt need additional adapter plate to be mounted on any surface as it has 3 M6 holes on bottom.
Specifications
Rotation range Resolution Reading accuracy Sensitivity Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity: horizontal radial Weight 360 2 arcmin 2 arcmin 0.4 arcmin 0.6 arcmin 10 m 8 kg 1.7 kg 0.55 kg
Vacuum Compatible Rotation Stage 860-0155V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
(2)
(2)
(1/4-20)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1/4-20)
(1/4-20)
(2) 860-0155-01
860-0155-02
860-0160
Rotation Stage of Big Platform
200 mm platform 360 rotation 10 fine adjustment 50.8 mm (2) clear aperture
Specifications
Rotation range coarse fine Reading accuracy Sensitivity Wobble Horizontal load capacity Weight 360 10 0.5 arcmin 0.1 arcmin 1 arcmin 15 kg 2.55 kg
The Rotation Stage of Big Platform 860-0160 is used to manually rotate large optical components through continuous 360 with accuracy of 1, and to adjust them finely within 10 by a micrometer, with accuracy of 0.5 arcmin. The stage has 50.8mm clear aperture. The stage has 50.8 mm clear aperture. The platform has a pattern of M6 mounting holes for components.
Code 860-0160
Price, EUR 399
8.127
860-0165
Rotation Stage of Big Platform

220 205
Optical Tables
45
200 173(7")
100 150
190 mm platform 360 rotation 10 Fine adjustment 88.9 mm clear aperture Available for vacuum (860-0165V)
15
90x1
M4x5 deep 12holes
An insert base plate for 860-0165
190
The Rotation Stage of Big Platform 8600165 is used to rotate manually large optical components through continuous 360 with accuracy of 1, and finely adjust them within 10 by a micrometer, with accuracy of 0.5arcmin. The stage has 88.9 mm clear aperture. The platform has a pattern of M6 and M4 mounting holes for components.
Specifications
Rotation range: coarse fine Reading accuracy Sensitivity Wobble Load capacity: Material Finish Weight Aluminium Black anodized 3 kg horizontal 360 10 0.5 arcmin 0.1 arcmin 1 arcmin
15
140
45 0 6 75
Compatible with 10-6 Torr vacuum 860-0165V
Code 860-0165 860-0165V 860-0165E 860-0165EV
Description black anodized rotary stage vacuum compatible rotary stage black anodized inch version vacuum compatible inch version
Price, EUR 790
8.128
1422
Adjustment Screws
60 kg
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
M6x17 deep 6holes
40
88,9
for M6(1/4-20) screw 7 clearance slots
45
Brackets & Rails
100 150
M5x7 deep 8holes
860-0170
Mini Rotation Stage

Specifications
Rotation range Sensitivity Reading accuracy Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity: horizontal radial Clear aperture Weight 4 kg 1.5 kg 11 mm 0.2 kg 360 (continuous) 1 arcmin 3 arcmin 1 arcmin 10 m
Worm gear design 11 mm clear aperture in the center Very compact design 4665 mm No need in adapter plate for mounting (there are mounting holes on bottom) Resolution 3 arcmin
Advantages of Rotation Stage 860-0170 regarding analogues of other manufacturers is existence of the 11 mm aperture in the center of rotation stage while it has very compact dimensions 46x65 mm together with its high precision, there is no need to use extra adapter plate for mounting since there are mounting holes on bottom. There you could see examples of stacked stages:
Code 860-0170 860-0170E
Price, EUR 319 319
Complementary Products Code 860-0096 860-0098-02 Page 8.118 8.118 Motorized Rotation Stage 960-0170 stacked on 860-0096 (2 pieces), and 860-0098-02 860-0170 stacked on 860-0096 (2 pieces), and 860-0098-02 860-0170 stacked on 860-0096
860-0180
Small Goniometer
Compact High precision Rotation about virtual point 15 mm virtual point height
Specifications
Rotation range Reading resolution Drive geometry driving screw pitch transmission ratio ratio decimal (the ratio is per revolution) Load capacity: horizontal Material Finish Weight 1 kg Aluminium black anodized 0.1 kg 15 0.1 (vernier scale) Lever (tangential) 0.25 mm 02759...03045 0.4665...0.5126
8.129
860-0210
Fiber Coupling Stage

Optical Tables
Fiber coupling stage of flexure design Rotating platform on the top Compact block design Long-term stability Smooth motion
Flexure stages 860-0210 are ideal for high precision device manipulation. This stage suits almost any micropositioning applications range, for example, from fiber launch systems for singlemode, multimode and polarization maintaining fibers as well as waveguide alignment, through to the manipulation of microstructures in bioscience. Fiber Coupling Stage of flexure compact block design with high-resolution micrometers ensures long-termed stability and good stiffness together with smooth motion without the severe limitations of stiction and friction. Flexure stages have a combination of overall size, travel, resolution, and low cost that makes them unique decision to meet the stringent requirements of photonics laboratory applications. Vacuum compatible versions are delivered on request. Also as an option fiber coupling stage could be provided with differential screws.
Specifications
Travel range in each XYZ direction Sensitivity Reading accuracy Cross-Talk Mechanical stability Load capacity Weight 2 mm 0.2 m 1.25 m (1/2 division) 20 m/mm flexure design with Stainless Steel Spring 1.5 kg 1.6 kg
8.130
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Adjustment Screws
870-0010 870-0020
Precise and Micrometer Screws
M60.5 fixing screw 0...13 16 6 870-0010 870-0020 49 870-0010 fixing screw
10 5 0 45 0
Precise screw 870-0010 M101 Precise screw travel, mm Thread step, mm Sensitivity, m 13 0.5 1 16 Price, EUR 32 37 840-0050-24 Page 8.59 8.59
M101
M60.5
M101
16
40 6 0...10
6 Micrometer screw 870-0020 with reading marks Micrometer screw travel, mm Division value, mm Limit of permisibble error, m Thread step, mm 13 0.01 4 0.5 Code 870-0010 870-0020
49 870-0020 Weight, kg 0.05 0.05
870-0030
Fine Closed Screw

Fine Closed Screw 870-0030 offers high 1 m resolution and smooth movement. Its travel range is 10 mm. The screw is used with most of our mounts. The handle covers the thread over the comp lete travel range. Special micrometer screw design for use in optical mounts for angular adjustment. External mounting thread M10x1. External M10x0.5 mounting thread is available on request.
SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment screw thread Sensitivity Axial load capacity Nominal travel Weight Code 870-0030 M6x0.5 1 m 80 N 10 mm 0.02 kg Price, EUR 44 Complementary Products Code 840-0040-34 840-0050-24 840-0040-34
8.131
Adjustment Screws
870-0040
Micrometer Screws
Micrometer screws 840-0040, 840-0041 have M6x0.5 internal driving screw thread. External mounting thread M10x1. External M10x0.5 mounting thread is available on request. Vernier scale is engraved on a revolving cylindrical collar of the micrometer screw. The collar can be rotated to make the scale visible if micrometer screw is mounted with the scale out of sight. 840-0040, 840-0041 are used in translation stages and mirror mounts and can be used in mounts and stages of other manufacturers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Micrometer screw thread M60.5 1 m 10 m 80 N M101
870-0040
Designed for micro-positioning applications Stainless steel screw with hardened steel ball tip Brass threaded collar Very smooth motion allows positioning with sensitivity of 1 m Scale 10 m division Nominal travel 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50 mm
Sensitivity Scale division Axial load capacity Mounting thread
860-0058-20 with 870-0040-20 installed
870-0040
Code 870-0040-05, 870-0041-05 870-0040-10, 870-0041-10 870-0040-15, 870-0041-15 870-0040-20, 870-0041-20 870-0040-25, 870-0041-25 870-0040-30, 870-0041-30 870-0040-50, 870-0041-50
Nominal travel, mm 5 10 15 20 25 30 50
Maximum travel, mm 7 13 17 22 27 32 52
L, mm 40 54 60 70 81 92 136
Weight, kg 0.03 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.10
Price, EUR 47 / 65 51 / 69 60 / 78 66 / 84 79 / 97 100 / 118 860-0053 XYZ with 870-0040-25 installed
Code 860-0053 860-0058-20 860-0060-06
Page 8.103 8.106 8.107
8.132
Adjustment Screws
55 / 73
870-0041
Base Positioners
860-0060-06 with 870-0040-50 installed
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
870-0045
Optical Tables
870-0045-02
Thin Micrometers
There are two types of the Thin Micrometers. They differ in their mounting method: 870-0045-02(04) has a 8x7 mm mounting barrel. 870-0045-52(54) can be mounted by tightening a fixing nut included on a M8x1 thread.
870-0045-52
SPECIFICATIONS
Micrometer screw thread Sensitivity M60.5 1 m 10 m 80 N Mounting barrel Mounting sleeve with fixing nut
Designed for micro-positioning applications Stainless steel screw with hardened steel ball tip Brass threaded collar Very smooth motion allows positioning with sensitivity of 1 m Scale 10 m division Nominal travel 5, 10 mm
Scale division Axial load capacity Way of mounting: 870-0045-02(04) 870-0045-52(54)
860-0092-02 with 870-0045-04 installed
870-0045-02
870-0045-52
Code 870-0045-02 870-0045-52 870-0045-04 870-0045-54
Nominal travel, mm 5 5 10 10
L, mm 46 46 58.5 58.5
Weight, kg 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03
Price, EUR 49 49 53 53 Complementary Products Code 860-0092 860-0096 Page 8.116 8.118 860-0096 XYZ with 870-0045-02 installed
870-0050
High-Resolution Micrometers
High-Resolution Micrometers 870-0050 provide increased reading accuracy by combining a large knob and a stainless steel screw with fine pitch of 0.25 mm. External mounting thread M10x1. External M10x0.5 mounting thread is available on request.
Stainless steel screw with hardened steel ball tip Brass threaded collar Mounts on M10 holes Scale 2.5 m division Nominal travel 5, 10 mm
Code 870-0050 870-0050-02 Nominal Travel, mm 5 10 L, mm 40 45
SPECIFICATIONS
Micrometer screw thread Sensitivity Scale division Axial load capacity M60.25 0.5 m 2.5 m 50 N 860-0210 with 870-0050 installed l, mm 2...7 2...12 Weight, kg 0.05 0.08 Price, EUR 61 64 Complementary Products Code 860-0210 Page 8.130
8.133
Adjustment Screws
870-0055
Mini Micrometers
There are two types of the Mini Micrometers 870-0055-02 and 870-0055-04. They differ in their mounting method: 870-0055-02 has a 6x6 mm mounting barrel. 870-0055-04 series micrometer is designed to be mounted using the M6x0.5 thread. Final position of the micrometer can be set by fastening the included fixing nut.
Optical Tables
Designed for micro-positioning applications Stainless steel screw with hardened steel ball tip Brass threaded collar Very smooth motion allows positioning with sensitivity of 1 m Scale 10 m division Nominal travel 6.35 mm
SPECIFICATIONS
Micrometer screw thread Sensitivity Travel range Scale graduation Axial load capacity M40.5 1 m 5 mm 60 N Small stainless steel stage 860-0054 with 870-0055-04
870-0055-02
870-0055-04
Code 870-0055-02 870-0055-04
Nominal travel, mm 5 10
Price, EUR 51 54
Micro translation stage 860-0100 with 870-0055-02
8.134
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Micro Rotation Stage 860-0130 with 870-0055-04 installed
Optical Mounts
10 m
Brackets & Rails
870-0055-02
870-0055-04
870-0060
870-0060
Compact Fine Screws
870-0060-01 870-0060 870-0060-01
Compact Fine Screws 870-0060 provide high resolution. A unique design allows smooth adjustment and high repeatability thanks to matched stainless steel screw/ brass nut pairs. Using screw/nut matching technology, backlash is in high precision M6x0.35 thread almost eliminated. The combination of metals provides a superior match for both movement and long lifetime. 870-0060 has a mounting diameter of 8mm. The 870-0060-01 has a mounting thread M10x1, or M10x0.5 as an option. A compact knob is made from black anodized aluminium.
SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment screw thread Sensitivity Nominal travel Axial load capacity Code 870-0060 870-0060-01 Weight, kg 0.015 0.015 M60.35 1.3 m 8 mm 70 N Price, EUR 18 21 840-0060 with 870-0060 installed Complementary Products Code 840-0060 Page 8.63
870-0070 870-0071
Adjustment Screws
870-0070
870-0071
Adjustment Screws 870-0070 and 870-0071 are popular for their low cost and miniature size, in appli cations where rough resolution about 5 m is enough. 870-0071 consists of M6x0.5 screw and nut with M10x1 mounting thread (M10x0.5 as option). 870-0070 and 870-0071 series screws suite well for optical mount and can be chosen as an option in mounts 840-0040, 850-0095 and others.
SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment screw thread Sensitivity Axial load capacity M60.5 1.5 m 80 N
870-0070
870-0071
840-0036-01
Code 870-0070-08 870-0071-08 870-0070-18 870-0071-18
Travel, mm 8 8 18 18
L, mm 29 29 39 39
Weight, kg 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03
Price, EUR 6 10 8 12 Complementary Products Code 850-0095 Page 8.96 850-0095 with 870-0070-18 installed
8.135
Adjustment Screws
870-0080
Ultra-Fine Adjustment Screws

Ultra-Fine Adjustment Screws 870-0080 are compact and provide extremely high resolution. Special design provides a smooth and repeatable action by mating a high precision 0.25 pitch stainless steel screw with a high precision brass collar. The screws have either a hardened steel ball on top or a blunt ground tip. The mounting surface of collar is either plain cylindrical or with a thread. The collars are ideally suitable for all mechanical stages and elements. The handy dimensions of the knobs are optimally chosen to feel rotation as little as 0.51. This enables to achieve 0.5 m positioning sensitivity. The knobs are made of hard aluminium and come in various colours: black, white, red, green, yellow, blue, etc. By default the knobs are in black or white colour, 5 mm thick (dimension K).
Optical Tables
Stainless steel screw with pitch of 0.25 mm Precision brass collars of 3 types Tolerances better than tightest industry standards
SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment screw thread Sensitivity Axial load capacity Weight M60.25 0.5 m 50 N 0.01 to 0.02 kg
840-0033 with 870-0080-A3 installed
Complementary Products Code 840-0033 Page
M6x0.25
12
8.7
10.3
Model 870-0080-A2 870-0080-A3 870-0080-A4
Travel, mm 7 10 25
L, mm 22 25 40
Tip ball tip ball tip ball tip
Price, EUR 18 34
14
11
870-0080-A
Ball
M6x0.25
870-0080-C2
7 10 25
20 23 38
ball tip ball tip ball tip
21 24 34
14
870-0080-C3 870-0080-C4
7
870-0080-C
Ball
The 870-0080-C has a mounting thread M10x1, but you may specify an alternative pitch of M10x0.5.
M6x0.25
L 20
Model
Travel, mm 5 10 25
L, mm 28 33 48
Tip ball tip ball tip ball tip
Price, EUR 27 29 31
9.5
15
14
870-0080-E1 870-0080-E3 870-0080-E4
Lock screw 2 hex key

870-0080-E
M6x0.25
12
8.7
10.3
Model 870-0080-B2 870-0080-B3 870-0080-B4
Travel, mm 7 10 25
L, mm 19 22 37
Tip blunt tip blunt tip blunt tip
Price, EUR 18 21 31
11
870-0080-B
Blunt
8.136
14
Adjustment Screws
9.5
Ball Fixing nut
M8x1
Base Positioners
L 10
M10x1
Model
Travel, mm
L, mm
Tip
Price, EUR
12
Optical Positioners
21
Optical Mounts
8.56
Brackets & Rails
M6x0.25
K
Optical Tables
L 10
M10x1
Model 870-0080-D2
Travel, mm 7 10 25
L, mm 19 22 37
Price, EUR 21 24 34
12
14
870-0080-D3 870-0080-D4
7
870-0080-D
Blunt
The 870-0080-D has a mounting thread M10x1, but you may specify an alternative pitch of M10x0.5.
M6x0.25
9.5
15
14
Load capacity Weight
40 N 0.01 kg
L 20
M8x1
Model 870-0080-F1 870-0080-F3 870-0080-F4
Travel, mm 5 10 25
L, mm 25 30 45
Price, EUR 27 29 31
Lock screw 2 hex key

870-0080-F
9.5
Blunt Fixing nut
Knobs come in 5 mm (standard), 10 mm or 15 mm length. When ordering, please append the standard screw code with the desired value for the length of the knob. For example: 870-0080-A nominal travel 7 mm, ball tip, standard 5 mm lenght knob. 870-0080-D2-K10 nominal travel 7 mm, blunt tip, 10 mm lenght knob. 870-0080-F4-K15 nominal travel 25 mm, blunt tip, 15 mm lenght knob.
870-0090 870-0095
Fine hex Adjustment Screws

Fixing nuts 3N6X05 (for 870-0090 series) and 3N8X1 (for 8700095 series) are available for screws with threaded collar. It will allow to fix the screw at any depth in walls too thin for the 6 mm collar thread. It will fix a screw so that the locking screw is in desired position. When you order our units with these screws, we will make sure to include the fixing nut, in case the units wall is thin. In other cases you may order the nut separately. See examples below.
Small (M3 or M4) adjustment screws Screw of stainless steel Brass nut with outer M6 mounting thread Hex key drive Screw thread pitch 0.25 mm Travel 5 mm Lockable models available
SPECIFICATIONS
Adjustment screw thread 870-0090 870-0095 Sensitivity M30.25 M40.25 0.5 m
Fixing Nuts
nD
0,9
Model 3N6X05 3N8X1 3N10X05 3N12X1 D, mm 10 12 14 16 M M6x0.5 M8x1 M10x0.5 M12x1 B, mm 2.5 3.5 3 3.5
Miniature screws
8.137
Adjustment Screws
Model 870-0090 870-0095
d, mm 5.1 6
D, mm 5.5 7
m, mm M3x0.25 M4x0.25
hex key 1.5 2
Price, EUR 14.6 15.3 870-0090ML, 870-0095ML
870-0090ML 870-0095ML
9 11
M3x0.25 M4x0.25
M6x0.5 M8x1
1.5 2
24 25
870-0090M, 870-0095M Model 870-0090M 870-0095M D, mm 7 9 m, mm M3x0.25 M4x0.25 M, mm M6x0.5 M8x1 H 6 8 hex key 1.5 2 Price, EUR 17.5 18
870-0090MF, 870-0095MF hex key 1.5 2 Price, EUR 24 25
Model 870-0090MF 870-0095MF
D, mm 7 9
D1, mm 6 8
m, mm M3x0.25 M4x0.25
M, mm M6x0.5 M8x1
H 6 8
870-0090MN, 870-0095MN Model 870-0090MN 870-0095MN D, mm 8 10 m, mm M3x0.25 M4x0.25 M, mm M6x0.5 M8x1 hex key 1.5 2 Price, EUR 21 22
860-0054 and 870-0090ML
fixing nut
860-0054 and 870-0090MN
8.138
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Model
D, mm
m, mm
M, mm
hex key
Price, EUR
Brackets & Rails
870-0090, 870-0095
Optical Tables
ORDERING INFORMATION for Motorized Translation and Rotation Stages
Damper
Encoder MEn1
Code example 960-0060-08-MEn1
Damper RD1
Code example 960-0060-08-RD1
When damper RD is used, vibrations and motor noise is greatly reduced, settling time is improved and system resonances are suppressed. For ordering motorized stages with damper, please add symbols RD1 to the code of motorized stages. Example: 960-0060-08-RD1 translation stage 960-0060-08 with damper RD1. 968-0140-RD1 rotation stage 968-0140 with damper RD1.
Revolution sensor E4 Dial knob
Code example 960-0060-08-E4
Code example 960-0060-08
Default Choice
Default choice for ordering motorized translation or rotation stages is with dial knob. Example: 960-0060-08 translation stage 960-0060-08 with dial knob. 968-0140 rotation stage 968-0140 with dial knob.
Encoder
Our 2-channel encoder is compact and lightweight.
Technical Characteristics of Encoder
Operating Voltage max. Current Consumption Pulse Width Signal-Phase Shift Signal-Rise-/Fall-Time Limit Frequency Output Signals Pulses per Revolution Operating Temperature DC 4.5 V to 5.5 V (at 5 V) 57 mA 180 45 degree (Channel A vs. B) 90 15 degree 0.25 / 0.25 S up to 100 kHz rectangular 2 1000 0 C to +70 C
Revolution sensor
Revolution sensor counts stepper motor axis revolutions. It consists of Codewheel with one mark and Optointerrupter. When motor is connected to controller 980-0030F-USB, signal from revolution sensor allows monitoring of motor axis revolutions, possible loss of steps and detecting motor stalling. It is not as accurate as encoder, which provides feedback for each step of motor. Revolution sensor determines whether there was any loss of steps within one revolution of motor axis. This information is reported to the controller and corrective actions can be taken. Revolution sensor can also be used for precise home position setting. For ordering motorized stages with revolution sensor, please add symbols E4 to the code of motorized stages. Example: 960-0060-08-E4 translation stage 960-0060-08 with revolution sensor E4. 968-0140-E4 rotation stage 968-0140 with revolution sensor E4.
Encoder measures motor axis position change and direction and provides feedback to controller. Encoder type HEDS-5540-B14 with 1000 pulses per revolution is used by default. Controller 980-0030F-USB can use signal from the encoder for motion monitoring. Result of the monitoring is high system reliability controller can detect motor stall situation very quickly. Threshold level of motor stall detection is programmable using program SMCVieW included with controller 980-0030F-USB. User specific software can get feedback from encoder through controller 980-0030F-USB and send motion correction commands back to it using provided software libraries. Unlike servo motors, stepper motors do not necessarily require encoders for operation. Encoder provides monitoring option. 1000 pulses per revolution ensure precise step monitoring down to 1/4 microstep mode. For ordering motorized stages with encoder, please add symbols MEn1 to the code of motorized stages. Example: 960-0060-08-MEn1 translation stage 960-0060-08 with encoder MEn1. 968-0140-MEn1 rotation stage 968-0140 with encoder MEn1.
8.139
Stepper and DC Motors Datasheets

Model 20 28 28S 4233 4247 5618 5918 ZSS43 Wiring scheme bippolar bippolar bippolar bippolar bippolar bippolar bippolar bippolar Design Voltage, V 4.3 4.56 3.75 12 3.84 4.82 3 42 Phase Current, A 0.8 0.67 0.67 0.4 1.2 2.01 2.1 1.2 Holding Torque, Nm 0.03 0.106 0.071 0.25 0.45 1.84 1.98 0.26 Detend Torque, mNm 1.5 3.75 2.5 8.5 15.5 39 68 7 Phase Resistance, Ohm 5.415% 6.815% 5.615% 3010% 3.210% 2.415% 210% 19 Inductance, mH 1.520% 4.820% 420% 3720% 620% 8.420% 8.820% 22.9 Steps/Revolution 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8) 200 (1.8)
Stepper Motors with Brake

Model 5918-B
bippolar
2.4
2.82
1.05
40
0.8510%
3.620%
200 (1.8)
0.4 Nm; 24 V; 10 W
DC motors
Model DCE369751 DCJ252445 DCE1524 DCE RE25 Design Voltage, V 3.6 1.8 6 24 Continuous Current, A 0.587 0.72 0.021 1.37 Continuous Torque, Nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 Continuous Power, W 2 1.2 1.7 20 Resistance, Ohm 3.5 1.07 5.1 1.53 Inductance, mH 0.114 0.0216 0.07 0.186 Max Speed, rpm 120 7 35 1800 Gearbox 67:1 1119:1 141:1 4.4:1 Encoder 16 CPT, 2 channels 256 CPT, 2 channels 1000 CPT, 3 channels
940-0050
Motorized Mirror Mounts

Motorized Mirror Mounts 9400050 are designed for precise angular alignment of optical elements. Platform is tilted about two axes. A retaining ring keeps optics in a non-through mounting opening of the platform. The ring is fixed by 3 screws. It has 3 dents with which it clamps optics against similar 3 rests in the platform. The dents are exactly opposite to the rests this minimizes deformation.
Optical Positioners
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
Tilt range
Code 940-0051 940-0053 940-0055
Price, EUR 575 575 575
8.140
5 both axes dial knobs graduated in 200 steps per revolution Resolution 0.0016 (00006) per step Optics accepted diameter (D), clear aperture (A): 940-0051 25.4 mm (1), A=21.4 mm 940-0053 40 mm, A=36 mm 940-0055 50.8 (2), A=46.8 mm custom sizes available 10 mm (retaining rings for Optics thickness custom thickness available) Material black anodized aluminium Motor 4233 Motor connector DB9(M) Mechanical end limit switches 2 per motor Switch polarity pushed is closed Weight 1.08 kg Visual reading
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
Adjustment Screws
Specifications
Base Positioners
Optical Mounts
Wiring scheme
Design Voltage, V
Phase Current, A
Holding Torque, Nm
Detend Torque, mNm
Phase Resistance, Ohm
Inductance, mH
Steps/ Revolution
Braking Power
Brackets & Rails
200 (1.8)
Optical Tables
Stepper motors
940-0060
Optical Tables
940-0060-01
Motorized Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mounts
Clear Edge Design 1, 2, 3 optics mounts Kinematic Stable Mounting on either of 2 sides Black anodized aliminium
940-0060 Motorized Mirror Mounts combines our traditional 840-0056 Kinematic Mirror/Beamsplitter Mount with our designed Motorized Compact Actuator 9700060. This motorized mirror mount enables to achieve more precise positioning than
Specifications
Model Travel range Optics diameter Clear aperture Resolution Tilt range Speed (980-0030F-USB) Installed actuators Optocoupler end limit switches Cable Weight Price 699 EUR 25.4 mm 23 mm 940-0060-01
with the manual adjusters. Ideal for use in closed systems. Integrated opto-electrical limit switches prevent damage, while providing homing repeatability better than 10 arcsec.
940-0060-02 4 mm 50.8 mm 48 mm <1 arcsec 9 (about two axes) from 1 arcsec/sec to 1/sec 2 970-0060 2 per actuator, pushed is open 1.2 m length cable included 0.3 kg 731 EUR
940-0060-03 76.2 mm 74 mm
776 EUR
DC motor base actuators are available on request.
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.141
940-0070
940-0070
744
Specifications
Resolution: in full step in 1/8 step XY translation range Lead screw pitch Optics diameter Clear aperture Installed actuators Cable Motor connector Weight Optocoupler end limit switches Switch polarity 1.25 m 0.156 m 2 mm 0.25 mm 25.4 mm 23 mm 2 x 970-0060 1.2 m length cable included HDB15(M) (wiring diagram) 0.8 kg 2 per actuator pushed is open Complementary Products Code 840-0207 970-0060 Page 8.91
M4 2holes
24 9,5
n 23 cleare aperture
50
M27x1
M27x1
n25,5
n31
15 15
36
13
15 15 36
50 145 4,5
6 11 25 35
25
17,5
940-0200
Motorized Vertical Translation Stage

Pantograph design 16 ball bearings Stepping motor drive Precision lead screw Motorized Vertical Translation Stage 940-0200 boasts our unique design. Being very compact, it provides smooth and stable adjustment of height. It has a large travel range and supports large loads. While moving the platform stays parallel to the base. Examples of use: making up for height differences during the set up; automation of technological processes, like laser welding. A stepper motor type 5918, 200 steps. Customer can specify other type of motors to install. Load capacity and speed all greatly depend on the motor. We can test and select an appropriate motor for your requirements. The lead screw acts at a varying angle, so the resolution of the stage varies with position. The platform has an array of M6 holes spaced by 25 mm. The base has six M6 and two 6.5 holes. Material: black anodized aluminium.
8.142
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
2,5
17,5
25
Optical Positioners
145
n4,5 2holes
Optical Mounts
8.176
DC motor base actuators are available on request.
Brackets & Rails
1 optics mounts Limit switch: optoelectronic couple Designed to use with microscope Black anodized aluminium
The 940-0070 is made of 840-0207 XY Translation Mount and 970-0060 Compact Motorized Actuator.
Code Price, EUR
Optical Tables
Motorized Two Axes Translation Optical Mount
Opto-MECHANICAL COMPONENTS Specifications

Travel range Height: Min. Max. Lead screw pitch Top and bottom plates parallel to Load capacity 89 mm 184 mm 1 mm 1 mm 8 kg (depending on motor and controller) black anodized aluminium 36 V DB9(M) 5918 4.3 kg 2 pushed is closed 95 mm
50...55 50...55 8 8 7 7
120 120 160 160
13 13 220 220
Compact Stiff and stable Two optical limit switches Clean room grease
Specifications
Travel range Resolution in full step in 1/8 step Lead screw pitch Wedge reduction rate Repeatability Accuracy Lift parallelism (to the base) Mounting surface flatness Position stability (max) Maximum speed Maximum load capacity 5 mm 0.625 m 0.078 m 0.5 mm 4:1 3 m 10 m 20 m 10 m 3 m 2.5 mm/s 8 kg optoelectronic Limit switches couple Motor connector DB9(M) Stepper motor 4247 Optocoupler end limit switches 2 Switch polarity pushed is open
for M6 screw 4 clearance holes for M6 screw 4 clearance holes
M4x7 deep 28 holes M4x7 deep 28 holes damper damper
120 120 108 108 100 100 75 75 50 50 25 25
Motorized Vertical Lift Stage 940-0220offers precise vertical translation for elevating object up to 8kg. An optional 1000-line rotary encoder is available for the stepper motor.
25 50 25 75 50 100 75 100 108 108
M6x7 deep 13 holes M6x7 deep 13 holes
connector DB9(M) connector DB9(M)
980-0030F-USB 980-0030-RS232 980-0050
see page 8.180 see page 8.183 see page 8.184
8.143
37 37
Material Supply voltage Motor connector Motor Weight Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
940-0220
Motorized Vertical Lift Stage

stepper motor stepper motor
Narrow Motorized Translation Stages

Narrow (30 mm) Compact design High guide way accuracy Resolution 0.156 m (1/8 step) X-Y-Z configurations available Motorized translation stage 960-0050 is a newly developed stage, which incorporates all the improvements and modifications implemented since its predecessor 9600060-05 was launched. 960-0050 replaces older stage 960-0060-05. It boasts possibility to operate in any orientation, which means that the stage can be hung upside-down or be operated vertically with motor facing upward or downward. Durability of stage was taken seriously into consideration and now you can apply grease directly to the screw without disassembling the stage. Vertical load capacity is increased to 3 kg. Stage is spring preloaded to eliminate backlash. Design of 960-0050 ensures more stable and precise motion over full translation range. For vertical (Z axis) mounting we offer angle bracket 810-0150-01. Angle brackets of custom design can be manufactured on request. Two mechanical limit switches built into each translation stage used for emergency stop at ends of travel range or to establish a reference position with accuracy of several motor steps. Motor position can be visually determined with accuracy of one step by reading a scale engraved on dial knob fitted on motor shaft (use Encoder for monitoring exact position using PC). Body and platform of 960-0050 are made of black finished aluminum. Functional parts are made of steel.
Optical Tables
12,5 34
M6x6 deep 3holes
50 7.1
Optical Positioners
stepper motor
71,5 129 max 100,5 77

54 9
60,5
22 164,5
2 clearance holes for M4 screw
Specifications
Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution in full step* Max. speed* Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Weight Assemblies: X-Y Z 810-0250-01 810-0150-01 5 kg 3 kg integrated, 1.6 m length HDB15(M) 28 0.5 kg 50 mm 0.25 mm 1.25 m 5 mm/s
M4x5,5 deep 3holes
HDB15(M)
stepper motor
12,5 12,5
Adjustment Screws
11,5
Narrow Motorized Translation Stage with Vacuum compatible stepper motor 960-0050V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com Recommended Controllers
980-0030F-USB 980-0030-RS232 980-0050
*Test condition: 980-0030 controllers; Power supply 36 V.
8.144
cabel with connector
36,5
30
Base Positioners
28
35
Optical Mounts
960-0050
Narrow Motorized Translation Stage with stepper motor
Brackets & Rails
961-0050 962-0050
Narrow Motorized Translation Stages with DC motor

12.5 34
M6x6 deep 3 holes
28
60,5
22
2 clearance holes for M4 screw 238.5 max
961-0050
M4x5.5 deep 3 holes
Specifications
Model Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution Minimal incremental motion Bi-directional Repeatability Max. speed Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Cable Motor connector DC motor Weight Assemblies: X-Y Z Price, EUR 936 810-0250-01 810-0150-01 773 5 kg 1 kg integrated, 1.6 m length HDB15(M) DCE RE25 0.5 kg DCJ252445 7 mm/s 0.014 m 0.1 m 0.04 m 0.38 mm/s 961-0050 50 mm 0.25 mm 962-0050
12.5 12.5 11.5 210

961-0050
Narrow Motorized Translation Stage with Vacuum compatible DC motor 961-0050V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
12.5 34
M6x6 deep 3 holes
50 7.1
962-0050 stage is equipped with DC motor without encoder and can be operated with joystick only. Ideal for systems with own feedback, e.g. visual feedback when used with microscope.
71.5
129 max 100.5 77
51
28
60.5
22
195.5 max
M4x5.5 deep 3 holes
2 clearance holes for M4 screw
30
980-0060-USB for 961-0050

see page 8.185
962-0100 for 962-0050
12.5 12.5 11.5

167
962-0050
8.145
36
41.1
30
36
961-0050 stage is equiped with DC motor that provides smoother motion and closed loop operation. High number of motor reduction gear provides high resolution, but low speed in turn. Ideal for applications demanding high accuracy but not sensitive to speed limitations.
50 7.1
71.5 129 max 100.5 77
90.5
960-0060
960-0060-02
Narrow (30 mm) Compact design High guide way accuracy Lead screw pitch 0.25 mm Travel 10, 20, 25, 30 mm Optional travel 5, 6, 8 mm and other X-Y-Z configurations available Motorized Translation Stages 960-0060 are created on the base of 860-0060 translators. Mechanical parameters of the motorized stages are the same as of translators 8600060. Resolution, speed and load capacity all depend on parameters of motor, leading gear, as well as on the controller and driving mode a user chooses to use. For vertical (Z axis) mounting we offer angle bracket 810-0150. Custom brackets are available. Two mechanical limit switches built into each translation stage used for emergency stop at ends of travel range or to establish a reference position with accuracy of several motor steps. Motor position can be visually determined with accuracy of one step by reading a scale engraved on dial knob fitted on motor shaft (use encoder for monitoring exact position using PC). Body and platform of 960-0060 are made of black finished aluminium. Functional parts are made of steel.
Specifications
Travel range, mm Lead screw pitch, mm Resolution in full step*, m Max. speed* mm/s Load capacity: Horizontal, kg Vertical, kg Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Weight, kg Assemblies: X-Y Z Model Complementary Products Code 810-0150 810-0250 Page 8.30 8.106 960-0060-01 960-0060-02 960-0060-03 960-0060-04 L, mm 124 134 138 144 810-0250 810-0150 A, mm 60 70 74 80 B, mm 45 45 49 55 810-0250 810-0150 C, mm 7.5 7.5 11 11.5 810-0250 810-0150 D, mm 21.5 26.5 30.5 36.5 E, mm 49 56 60 66 810-0250 810-0150 Price, EUR 399 402 425 439 0.43 0.46 5 2 HDB15(M) 28 0.47 0.48 10 20 0.25 1.25 5 25 30
integrated, 1.6 m length
8.146
Adjustment Screws
Model
960-0060-01
960-0060-02
960-0060-03
960-0060-04
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Narrow (width 30 mm) Motorized Translation Stages

12.5
M46 2 holes
Accessories, like connection plates and angle brackets, required for assembly of 3 axes systems, and adapted to specific optical scheme, we produce upon ordering.
182
960-0060-02
810-0250
112 ... 132
960-0060-02 134 ... 153
22 ... 42 134

25
M611
20 holes
for M6
4 clearance holes
M311
3 holes
for M4
2 clearance holes
324 25 M47
125(=1012.5)
10 holes
153
M67
12 holes
391
960-0060-08
200 225
810-0160
130 ... 230
960-0060-08
960-0060-08
80 ... 180
324
324
8.147
7.5 12.5
12.5
810-0150
45
M66 2 holes 26.5 12.5
960-0060-02
M45.5 3 holes
960-0060
960-0060-06
960-0060-10
960-0060-06
Narrow (50 mm) Compact design High guide way accuracy Resolution 0.31 m (1/8 step) Travel 50, 100, 150, 200 mm X-Y-Z configurations available
Vacuum Compatible Motorized Stages 960-0060V is available. For product data sheets please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
Motorized stages of higher speed are available upon request.
960-0060-08
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
980-0060-USB
see page 8.185
8.148
Adjustment Screws
view A
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Medium (width 50 mm) Motorized Translation Stages
Complementary Products Code 810-0160 Page 8.31 960-0060-06 xy
In XY configuration medium width stages stack directly using M6 screws. For XYZ stacking optional brackets are available.
960-0060-10
Angle Bracket 810-0160
view A
Angle Bracket 810-0160 is used to transform horizontal translators into vertical ones.
See page 8.31 for details.
Base Plate 820-0136
960-0060-12
Specifications
Medium width stages have a motor protruding from the bottom. To place such stages on flat surfaces you need a base plate. It is designed for attaching translation stages 860-0060 and motorized translation stages 960-0060, 960-0080.
Model Travel range, mm Lead screw pitch, mm Resolution in full step*, m Max. speed*, mm/s Load capacity: horizontal, kg vertical, kg Motor connector Stepper motor Weight, kg Assemblies: X-Y Z Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity Price, EUR
960-0060-06 50
960-0060-08 100 0.5 2.5 10
960-0060-10 150
960-0060-12 200
8 3 DB9(M) 4247 1 1.5 directly 810-0160 2 786 pushed is closed 884 1114 1.5
1.6
1552
8.149
960-0065
Narrow Compact design High speed Heavy load capacity X-Y-Z configurations available Motors of other types are available
Motorized Translation Stage

50x3=150 19,5 50
for M6 screw 2 clearance holes connector DB9(M)
25
32
25
25x5=125
M6x11 deep 8 holes
42,5
35
255 189 58 9
stepper motor
M6x6 deep 8 holes
50 40 25
81
960-0065-20BS1
view A M4x6 deep 13 holes

25 40 50 55 75
960-0065-10BS1
view A
50x4=200 50
Specifications
Travel range: 960-0065-10BS1 960-0065-15BS1 960-0065-20BS1 Lead screw pitch Resolution in full step* Max. speed* Load capacity: Horizontal Vertical Motor connector Stepper motor Assemblies: X-Y Z directly 810-0160 30 kg 8 kg 4247 DB9(M) 100 mm 150 mm 200 mm 1 mm 5 m 20 mm/s
19,5

Base Positioners
connector DB9(M)
stepper motor
32
25
M6x11 deep 10 holes

25x7=175
305 239 58 9
stepper motor
view A
Code 960-0065-10BS1 960-0065-15BS1 960-0065-20BS1 Weight, kg 1.1 1.4 1.65 Price, EUR 1024 1333 1722
M4x6 deep 13 holes
960-0065-15BS1
8.150
25 40 50 55 75
Adjustment Screws

50 40 25
M6x6 deep 8 holes
81
42,5
35
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
stepper motor
Optical Tables
50x5=250 19,5 50
for M6 screw 4 clearance holes connector DB9(M)
355 289 58 9
stepper motor
M6x6 deep 8 holes
50 40 25
view A
M4x6 deep 13 holes
25 40 50 55 75
960-0065-20BS1
810-0160 960-0065-20BS1 XYZ
Angle Bracket 810-0160 is used to transform horizontal translators into vertical ones.
See page 8.31 for more information.
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.151
81
42,5
35
view A
25
stepper motor
32
25
M6x11 deep 12 holes

25x9=225
960-0070-02

75 66
M6 hole on both sides for M6 screw 4 clearance holes
25 51
stepper motor
insert platform
960-0070-02BS1 / 960-0070-02LS with insert platform
fixing screw on both sides
960-0070-02BS1, unlike the 960-007002LS, is designed for high-speed movement. Used ball bearing lead screw makes movement fast and smooth. The positioner also can be used with microscope on XY axes. As shown in the pictures, the upper plate has a removable insert in the center, the size of which is 2 inches, the base plate is made with slot size of 51 76 mm, on the same vertical.
7,5
167
36,5
117 115 92 75 50
54
49 51
view A
25
960-0070-02BS1 / 960-0070-02LS
M6x7 deep 12holes
0...12,5
88
0...12,5
Mirror version of 960-0070-02BS1 and 960-0070-02LS

36,5
stepper motor
M6 hole on both sides
9 54
25 51
cabel with connector HDB15(M) for M6 screw 4 clearance holes insert platform
66 75
960-0070-02BS1-M / 960-0070-02LS-M with insert platform
fixing screw on both sides
25
stepper motor
30
0...12,5
7,5
167 88 25 0...12,5
51 49
117 115 92 75 50
view A
view A
stepper motor
960-0070-02BS1-M / 960-0070-02LS-M
8.152
M6x7 deep 12holes
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
stepper motor
cabel with connector HDB15(M)
25
30
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Opto-MECHANICAL COMPONENTS Specifications
Insert platform
Model Travel range, mm Resolution in full step, m in 1/8 step, m Ball screw pitch, mm Lead screw pitch, mm Repeatability, m Maximum speed, mm/s Maximum load capacity Horizontal, kg Vertical, kg Limit switches Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Weight, kg Price, EUR
960-0070-02BS1 25 5 0.625 1 1.5 25 30 7
960-0070-02LS 1.25 0.156 0.25 1 6 30 7
2 pc mechanical 1.6 m length HDB15(M) 28 0.8 583 478
Related Products
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0060-USB
see page 8.185
Power Supply
see page 8.186
960-0070-04
960-0070-04 with insert platform
Motorized Translation Stage 960-0070-04 is designed on the basis of 860-0070-04 translator.The movement is produced by a step motor through the reducing gear and a lead-screw. There are 1000 steps per millimeter. Individual units are accompanied by indication of electrical parameters and connection schemes of the motors. The motors have 200 steps per revolution. To drive the motor, we offer a range of controllers. Controllers can drive the motor in 1,1/2,1/4,1/8 step division mode. There are microstepping controllers, available from other manufacturers, which divide a step into 10 parts. Mechanics of 960-0070-04 translation stage cab be easily attached to any type of stepping motor or servo motor of your choice. Motorized translation stage motor or controller is available upon request. Motorized Translation Stage 960-0070-04 with stepper motor 4247.
960-0070-04
8.153
960-0070-04C28 with insert platform
view A
960-0070-04C28
960-0070-0428
Motorized Translation Stage 960-0070-0428 with stepper motor 28.
Insert platform
Adjustment Screws
960-0070-0428
8.154
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Motorized Translation Stage 960-0070-04C28 with stepper motor 28 with connector DB9(M) on motor itself.
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
961-0070-04 Model Travel range, mm Resolution in full step, m in 1/8 step, m Lead screw pitch, mm Reduction motor/screw Bi-direction repeatability *, m Minimal incremental motion, m Resolution(calculated), m Maximum speed, mm/s Maximum load capacity Horizontal, kg Vertical, kg Limit switches Cable Motor connector Stepper motor DC motor Weight, kg Price, EUR DB9(M) 4247 1.4 1070 DB9(M) 28 1.4 1070 7 3 2 pc mechanical 1.6 m length HDB15(M) 28 1.4 1045 HDB15(M) DCE RE25 1.5 1407 1 0.125 0.5 2.5:1 2 5 1 0.125 0.5 2.5:1 2 5 961-0070-04
Specifications
960-0070-04 960-0070-04C28 100 1 0.125 0.5 2.5:1 2 5 0.5 11:1 0.8 0.02 0.023 5.5 960-0070-0428 961-0070-04
* After backlash compensation. Backlash compensation value provided with each actuator.
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.155

M6 10 holes 50 25
To stack 960-0070-04 stages in X-Y-Z coordinates you need a connecting plate 810-0270 and an angle bracket 810-0116.
100 75
Complementary Products 810-0116 8.27
for M6 4 clearance holes 75 (=612.5)
125 (=1012.5)
M4 16 holes
50 960-0070-04 810-0116
M6 20 holes
53
960-0070-04 810-0270
71.5 ... 171.5
96 ... 196 222
960-0070-04 222...285
960-0080
Short stage long travel!
Code 960-0080
Price, EUR 921
Specifications
Model Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution* in full step in 1/8 step Max. speed* Load capacity: horizontal vertical Motor connector Stepper motor Weight Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity 960-0080 100 mm 0.5 mm 2.5 m 0.31 m 10 mm/s 8 kg 3 kg DB9(M) 4247 1.3 kg 2 pushed is closed
Recommended controllers 980-0030F-USB see page 8.180 980-0030-RS232 see page 8.183 980-0050
see page 8.184
On request we fit alternative motors.
8.156
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
152
Brackets & Rails
Code
Page
Optical Tables
960-0090
Optical Tables
Weight Assemblies: X-Y Z Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity directly 810-0160 2 pushed is closed 1.5 kg
960-0090 960-0090-XYZ
923 2835
359 105...205
Code
Price, EUR
Recommended controllers 980-0030F-USB 980-0030-RS232 980-0050

327
Narrow Compact design Resolution 0.125 m (1/8 step) X-Y-Z configurations available Motors of other types are available
Specifications
Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution in full step* in 1/8 step* Reduction motor/screw Max. speed* Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Motor connector Stepper motor 8 kg 3 kg DB9(M) 4247 100 mm 0.5 mm 1 m 0.125 m 2.5:1 5 mm/s
327
960-0090 XYZ
8.157
960-0095

Specifications
Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution: in full step* in 1/8 step* Max. speed* Load capacity: horizontal vertical Motor connector Stepper motor Weight
100 mm 0.5 mm 2.5 m 0.31 m 10 mm/s 40 kg 6 kg DB9(M) 4247 2.2 kg
960-0095
1515
Recommended controllers 980-0030-RS232 980-0050 Optical Positioners In X-Y configuration 960-0095 stages stack directly using M4 screws Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices 980-0030F-USB
view A
960-0095
M6 screw
Optical Table
820-0125
8.158
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Mounts
Code
Price, EUR
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
960-0095SM
Optical Tables
96
5
4 elements for detail look at viewA connector for cable*
Motorized Translation Stage with SM system

Specifications
Travel range Lead screw pitch Encoder resolution Minimal incremental motion Max. speed Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Cable* Motor Weight 40 kg 6 kg 2m SM 2.5 kg 100 mm 0.5 mm 4000 counts/rev 0.125 m 25 mm/s
25x4=100
50
35
9,5
27
123
M4x7 deep 8holes M6x7 deep 4holes
27
46,5
M3x7 deep 4holes
20 50 75 85
8.159
85
34 43
75
140
*Cable supplied with 960-0095SM consists of power cable and RS232 communication cable and includes connector to computer RS232 (DSUB9), connector to motor (DSUB 7W2) and power connector (SOCKET DC 2.1/5.5 mm for Cable).
960-0095SM consists of DC servo motor, motion controller, encoder and amplifier. Requires only power supply Power supply PUP120-17 36 V; 3.34 A 167 x 65 x 37 mm 640 g Mini-DIN male 4-pin power connector.
356
The SM system is a complete, compact and user-friendly integrated control system that features a brushless DC servo motor, motion controller, encoder and amplifier. It is a decentralized drive system. It is a fully integrated motor system that includes a Brushless D.C. Servo-Motor (BLDC), Motion Controller, Drive-Electronics, Position Feedback Encoder and Fully Programmable Points of I/O (Inputs/Outputs). All these components are placed inside one integral frame or housing. Each decentralized drive system is fully programmable as a stand-alone system or as part of a network fieldbus - Profibus, DeviceNet or RS232, RS485. The integration of motor, controller and drive reduces complexity in an application and significantly increases reliability. The command set and firmware enables the SM system to perform a wide range of motion controls, arithmetic and conditional logic functions. The unit is a highly capable, stand-alone, complete motion control system that is easy to implement and use.
The SM system has more features than most full-size controls:

260
- Brushless DC servo motor - S-232 & RS-485 - Stand alone capability - Torque to 2000+ oz. in. / 15 NM - Network up to 100 Servida Motors - 4kHz PID - Speeds 0 - 10,000 RPM - CE marked & UL registered - Expandable and programmable I/O expandable to 800 inputs and 800 outputs - On-the-fly parameter changes - Position Mode - Velocity Mode - Torque Mode - Infinite Ratio Gearing - Electronic Gearing/ Following Mode - Step & Direction Mode - Limit switch inputs - Closed loop on external encoder - Single voltage input - Standard NEMA mount - 32k user EEPROM - Software current limit - Thermal protection - Easy Windows Software - Contouring mode from host PC
961-0095
Motorized Translation Stage with DC motor

Travel range Lead screw pitch Minimal incremental motion Resolution Max. speed Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Motor connector DC motor Weight 30 kg 5 kg HDB15(M) DCE RE25 2.2 kg 100 mm 0.5 mm 0.2 m 0.028 m 13 mm/s 960-0095 961-0095 960-0095SM Motorized Translation Stage with stepper motor 4247 Motorized Translation Stage with DC motor & encoder Motorized Translation Stage with SM system
960-0095SM-XY-960-0150SM 3 Axis Motorized Translation-Rotation System

Specifications
Translation xy Rotation z Load capacity 100x100 mm 960-0095SM 360 960-0150SM 5 kg on rotation stage
8.160
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
960-0100
Motorized Delay Line

Motorized Delay Line 960-0100 provides precision path delays of up to 300 mm. Driven by a stepper motor with integrated limit switches, the motorized delay line offers a high-resolution delay of 2.5 m. The main feature of this delay line are its high-stability, compact and monolithic design as well as high resolution which makes the device ideal for integration in high precision measurement systems. Such delay line is in great demand in laboratories for precision optical path length control or other experiments (spectrum analysis, interferometry, etc.). Motorized delay line can be controlled manually by means of dial knob with increments located on the end of the stage. This device also could be considered as a long travel (300 mm) motorized translation stage. Resolution could be improved by means of steps division in motor using our up-to-date stepper motor controllers.
Specifications
300 mm travel range Steel rail design. Stability and rigidity ensured 2.5 m nominal resolution Recirculating ball modules are incorporated in the platform Stepper motor with 200 steps per revolution
Travel range Resolution in full step Resolution in 1-8 step Lead screw pitch Max. speed Load capacity Horizontal Vertical Supply voltage Motor connector Motor Weight
300 mm 2.5 m 0.31 m 0.5 mm 8 mm/s* 10 kg 3 kg 36V DB9(M) 4247 4.28 kg 2 pushed is closed
*Test condition:
Code 960-0100
Price, EUR 2515
Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity
Stepper motor 4247: 2 phase bipolar wiring, phase resistance 3.2, 200 steps per revolution; step angle 1.8, current 1.2 A, 36 V; 980-0030 controller.
To drive the motor from a computer we offer controller cards 980-0030F-USB or 980-0030-RS232 separately.
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.161
960-0110
Long-Travel Motorized Linear Stages

960-0110 series stages are designed to provide high-speed movement. Standard motors allow moving loads up to 40 kg. Load capacity can be increased using more powerful motors. This stage provides moderate resolution and accuracy. 960-0110 series stages are supplied equipped with platform, bases plates (2 pc) and appropriate amount of inserts. Resolution and speed of 960-0110 series stages can be varied choosing appropriate ball screw pitch. Several standard options are available and should be specified upon ordering. For applications requiring travel over 500 mm we suggest using 960-0115X series stages (X) paired with 960-0110X series stages (Y) to make XY assemblies. For applications requiring vertical Z axis movement, we suggest using stages with brake mounted on motor, to prevent carrier sliding down when motor current is turned off. Ordering code of Z stages is 960-0110Z.
A-A
Optical Tables
960-0110-340-2.5
Accessories for 960-0110 series*

10.5
* Included in standard package and to be ordered only as extra units
A
78 75 81
stepper motor
4 elem.
L=travel range + 361
12
10.5
M6x12 deep 2 holes
70 50
76
stepper motor
2.5
Place for Slide Nut
6H7
960-0110X
A-A
Platform
A
78 75
13
stepper motor
10.5
37
33
L1=travel range + 150
33
dial knob
50
A
M6x12 deep 2 holes
Specifications
Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution: in full step* in 1/8 step* Max. speed* Load capacity: Horizontal Vertical Motor connector Stepper motor 960-0110X 960-0110Z Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity 5918 5918-B 2 pushed is open 40 kg 10 kg DB9(M) 12.5 m 1.57 m 40 mm/s
on request we fit alternative motors
4 elem.
connector DB9(M)
340...2840 mm 2.5/4/5/10 mm
12
10.5
5
70 50
6.5
stepper motor with brake
Place for Slide Nut
6H7
33
33
*Test condition: Lead screw pitch 2.5 mm; Stepper motor: 2 phase bipolar wiring; phase resistance 2.4; 200 steps per revolution; step angle 1.8; current 1.5A; 980-0030 controllers; Power supply 36 V.
960-0110Z
960-0110-XXX-X Travel range** 340...2840 mm

Examples of codes travel range* 340 mm 540 mm 740 mm 840 mm 960-0110-340-2.5 960-0110-540-4 960-0110-740-5 960-0110-840-10
Lead screw pitch 2.5 / 4 / 5 / 10 mm

2.5 mm 4 mm 5 mm 10 mm

** Possibility to order standard travel range with 100 mm-grid space
8.162
lead screw pitch
Adjustment Screws
124
56.4
2.5
75
Base Positioners
81
with brake
Optical Positioners
Slide Nut
Base Plate
6.5
56.4
75
Optical Mounts
50
connector DB9(M)
Brackets & Rails
960-0115
Optical Tables
Long-Travel Motorized Linear Stages

960-0115 stages are designed to provide high-speed movement. Standard motors allow moving loads up to 60 kg. Load capacity can be increased using more powerful motors. This stage provides moderate resolution and accuracy. 960-0115 stages are supplied equipped with platform, bases plates (2 pc) and appropriate amount of inserts. Resolution and speed of 960-0115 stages can be varied choosing appropriate ball screw pitch. Several standard options are available and should be specified upon ordering. For applications requiring vertical Z axis movement, we suggest using stages with brake mounted on motor, to prevent carrier sliding down when motor current is turned off. Ordering code of Z stages is 960-0115Z.
A-A
10.5 78 75
25 125
6 elem.
A
M6x12 deep 2 holes
connector DB9(M) dial knob
10.5
5
12
70 50
2.5
6.5
Place for Slide Nut
150 75
13
stepper motor
Slide Nut
33
33
76
960-0115X
A-A
10.5 78 75
A
81
56.4
Base Plate
25 125
6 elem.
A
M6x12 deep 2 holes
connector L=travel range + 395 DB9(M)
Travel range Lead screw pitch Resolution: in full step* in 1/8 step* Max. speed* Load capacity: Horizontal Vertical Motor connector Stepper motor 960-0115X 960-0115Z Mechanical end limit switches Switch polarity
340...2840 mm 2.5/4/5/10 mm
10.5
5
12
Specifications
70 50
150 75
2.5
12.5 m 1.57 m 40 mm/s

on request we fit alternative motors
124
2elem.
6H7
6.5
Place for Slide Nut
60 kg 10 kg DB9(M) 5918 5918-B 2 pushed is open
*Test condition: Lead screw pitch 2.5 mm; Stepper motor: 2 phase bipolar wiring; phase resistance 2.4; 200 steps per revolution; step angle 1.8; current 1.5A; 980-0030 controllers; Power supply 36 V.
33
33
960-0115Z
960-0115-XXX-X Travel range** 340...2840 mm

Examples of codes 960-0115-340-2.5 960-0115-540-4 960-0115-740-5 960-0115-840-10 travel range* 340 mm 540 mm 740 mm 840 mm
Lead screw pitch 2.5 / 4 / 5 / 10 mm

lead screw pitch 2.5 mm 4 mm 5 mm 10 mm

** Possibility to order standard travel range with 100 mm-grid space
8.163
56.4
Platform
2elem.
6H7
37
81
* Included in standard package and to be ordered only as extra units
960-0115-340-5
Accessories for 960-0115 series*
A
stepper motor
960-0130
Large Motorized Rotation Stages

Optical Tables
Hardened steel with aluminium body Large diameter ball bearings Worm Gear Ratio is 1:120 Hall-effect reference limit switch Stepper motor or DC motor with encoder Motor can be optionaly equipped with reduction gear 1.8 m long cable included Very high load capacity
960-0130-01
960-0130-02
Rotation Stage with stepper vacuum motor VSS43 960-0130V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
960-0130-02
Specifications
Model Rotation range Resolution in full step* 960-0130-01 in 1/8 step* Repeatability (bidirectional) Backlash Maximum speed* Wobble 54 arcsec 6.75 arcsec 72 arcsec 40 arcsec. max. 10 turn/min 40 Ra 1.6 m length DB9(M) 5918 60 kg 25 kg 6.6 kg 5.7 kg 1, pushed is closed 4247 960-0130-01 960-0130-02 360 continuous
6 turn/min
Cable Motor Connector Stepper motor Load capacity horizontal vertical
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
Weight Reference hall switch
8.164
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
960-0140
960-0140
Motorized Rotation Stages

360 degrees rotation graduated in 1 50.8 mm (2 inch) aperture Resolution 4.5 arcsec in 1/8 step Zero backlash High stability Home/zero position limit switch Mounting modifications available on request
cables from limit switch
View A
M4x7 deep 4 holes
50
45
M6x5 deep 4 holes M6x7 deep 4 holes
Three steps of connection motor to rotation stage

Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages
third step first step second step
45
muff M4x5 deep 4 holes
10
32,5
10
75(3") 96 101
50
85
90
8,5
60
75(3") 92 100
for M6 (1/4-20) screw 3 clearance holes M8x6 deep
8 15
M3x7 deep 4 holes
960-0140
For the drawings of rotation stages with other stepper motors, please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
Specifications
Rotation range Resolution in full step* Max.rotation speed* Backlash Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity 968-0140 horizontal radial torque Weight 10 kg 2 kg 1 Nm 0.65 kg 360 0.6 arcmin (0.01) 8 turn/min 0 m 0.5 arcmin 10 m
Code Description 960-0140 960-0140SM 962-0140 964-0140 968-0140 969-0140
* Test condition: Stepper motor 4247; 980-0030 controllers; 36 V. Price, EUR 890 1990 963 930 938 1336

Rotation stage 960-0140 without motor Rotation stage with SM system Rotation stage 960-0140 with stepper motor 4247 (1.2 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0140 with stepper motor 4233 (0.4 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0140 with stepper motor 28 (0.67 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0140 with stepper motor ZSS43 (0.6 A, 200 steps)
8.165
21 10 10
Base Mounts & Accessories Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners
21,5
View A
50,8
960-0150

360 rotation graduated in 1 Three types of platform: platform without big central hole (960-0150) M271 for 1 optics mounting (23) (960-0150-23) 30 mm aperture (960-0150-30) Resolution 4.5 arcsec in 1/8 step
Optical Tables
960-0150-30
view A
muff is used to connect motor shaft to worm-gear
(3) (1/4-20)
960-0150
bottom view
(3)
(3)
962-0150-30 Rotation stage 960-0150-30 with stepper motor 4247
960-0150-30
(1/4-20)
8.166
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
(3)
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
964-0150-30
(3) (3)
(3)
960-0150-23 (1/4-20)
(3)
Optical Tables Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners Recommended controllers 980-0030F-USB 980-0030-RS232 980-0050
see page 8.180 see page 8.183 see page 8.184 968-0150
(1/4-20)
964-0150-23 Rotation stage 960-0150-23 with stepper motor 4233

bottom view
Specifications
Rotation range Resolution in full step* Max.rotation speed* Backlash Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity: horizontal radial torque 10 kg 2 kg 1 Nm 360 0.6 arcmin (0.01) 8 turn/min 0 m 0.5 arcmin 10 m Code 960-0150 962-0150-23 962-0150-30 964-0150-23 964-0150-30 968-0150 969-0150-23 Price, EUR 848 921 936 913 928 896 1294 Code 960-0150 960-0150-23 960-0150-30 Weight, kg 0.65 kg 0.65 kg 0.65 kg
*Test condition: Stepper motor 4247; 980-0030 controllers; 36 V.
We can equip our stage with any of your provided motors
Examples of codes for motorized rotation stages 960-0150: 960-0150 960-0150-23 960-0150-30 960-0150SM 962-0150-23 962-0150-30 964-0150-23 964-0150-30 968-0150 969-0150-23 Rotation stage 960-0150 without motor and without big central hole Rotation stage 960-0150 without motor. Clear aperture 23 mm Rotation stage 960-0150 without motor. Clear aperture 30 mm Rotation stage 960-0150-30 with SM system Rotation stage 960-0150-23 with stepper motor 4247 (1.2 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0150-30 with stepper motor 4247 (1.2 A 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0150-23 with stepper motor 4233 (0.4 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0150-30 with stepper motor 4233 (0.4 A, 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0150 with stepper motor 28 (0.6 A; 200 steps) Rotation stage 960-0150-23 with stepper motor ZSS43 (0.6 A; 200 steps)
8.167
Specifications
Rotation range Encoder resolution Max. rotation speed Backlash Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity 960-0140SM Horizontal Vertical Torque Cable* Motor 10 kg 2 kg 1 Nm SM 2m 360 2000 16 turn/min 0.5 arcmin 10 m
*Cable supplied with 960-0140SM and with 960-0150SM series consists of power cable and RS232 communication cable and includes connector to computer RS232 (DSUB9), connector to motor (DSUB 7W2) and power connector (SOCKET DC 2.1/5.5 mm for Cable).
The SM system is a complete, compact and user-friendly integrated control system that features a brushless DC servo motor, motion controller, encoder and amplifier. It is a decentralized drive system. It is a fully integrated motor system that includes a Brushless D.C. Servo-Motor (BLDC), Motion Controller, Drive-Electronics, Position Feedback Encoder and Fully Programmable Points of I/O (Inputs/Outputs). All these components are placed inside one integral frame or housing.
Each decentralized drive system is fully programmable as a stand-alone system or as part of a network fieldbus - Profibus, DeviceNet or RS232, RS485. The integration of motor, controller and drive reduces complexity in an application and significantly increases reliability. The command set and firmware enables the SM system to perform a wide range of motion controls, arithmetic and conditional logic functions. The unit is a highly capable, stand-alone, complete motion control system that is easy to implement and use.
960-0150-23SM 960-0150-30SM
8.168
Adjustment Screws
- Brushless DC servo motor - S-232 & RS-485 - Stand alone capability - Torque to 2000+ oz. in. / 15 NM - Network up to 100 Servida Motors - 4kHz PID - Speeds 0 - 10,000 RPM - CE marked & UL registered - Expandable and programmable I/O expandable to 800 inputs and 800 outputs - On-the-fly parameter changes - Position Mode - Velocity Mode
- Torque Mode - Infinite Ratio Gearing - Electronic Gearing/ Following Mode - Step & Direction Mode - Limit switch inputs - Closed loop on external encoder - Single voltage input - Standard NEMA mount - 32k user EEPROM - Software current limit - Thermal protection - Easy Windows Software - Contouring mode from host PC
960-0140SM, 960-0150SM series consists of DC servo motor, motion controller, encoder and amplifier. Requires only power supply Power supply PUP120-17 36 V; 3.34 A 167 x 65 x 37 mm 640 g Mini-DIN male 4-pin power connector.
Base Positioners
The SM system has more features than most full-size controls:
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
960-0150SM
For the drawings of the motorized rotation stages with SM system, please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
Brackets & Rails
0 m
Optical Tables
960-0140SM 960-0150SM
Motorized Rotation Stages with SM SYSTEM
960-0160
Optical Tables
(2)
Angle bracket for vertical mounting

7 18 M3 2 holes 50 32 M6 2 holes
(2)
12,5
50
Brackets & Rails Base Mounts & Accessories Optical Mounts Optical Positioners Base Positioners Translation & Rotation Stages Adjustment Screws Motorized Positioners 980-0030F-USB 980-0030-RS232
29,5 6,5 2 holes 15 M6
960-0162 960-0161
(1/4-20)
(2)
960-0161
(1/4-20)
61
(2)
960-0162
Specifications
Rotation range Resolution* in full step in 1/8 step Max. rotation speed* Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity: horizontal radial torque Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Weight Optocoupler reference home switch Switch polarity 360 0.6 arcmin 4.5 arcsec 50 deg/s 0.6 arcmin 10 m 6 kg 1.7 kg 0.5 Nm integrated, 1.6 m length HDB15(M) 28 0.56 kg 1 Pushed is open, sensor schematic
Code 960-0161 960-0162 Price, EUR 687 697
960-0161 has M271 for 1 optics mounting (23 mm clear aperture). 960-0162 has a 30 mm aperture.
RELATED Controllers
see page 8.180 see page 8.183
8.169
960-0170
Motorized Rotation Stage

Specifications
Model Rotation range Resolution in full step Uni-Directional Repeatability Bi-Directional Repeatability Max. rotation speed Wobble Eccentricity Load capacity Horizontal Radial Torque Cable Motor connector 960-0170 Stepper motor Weight Mechanical home reference switch Price 649 EUR 28 0.4 kg 4 kg 1.5 kg 0.5 Nm 968-0170 968-0170S 360 0.9 arcmin (0.015) 0.4 arcmin 1.6 arcmin 30 /s (12V) 1 arcmin 10 m 4 kg 1.5 kg 0.35 Nm HDB15(M) 28S 0.35 kg 1, pushed is closed 649 EUR 649 EUR 20 0.3 kg integrated, 1.6 m length 3 kg 1.5 kg 0.15 Nm 75 /s (36 V) 960-0170
960-0170S
25
93,5
M3x6 deep 4holes on 30 M2,5x6 deep 4holes
stepper motor
45 32 20
968-0170, 968-0170S
960-0170
Model 968-0170 968-0170S
L, mm 111 98
m, mm 54 41
Motor 28 28S
960-0170V
Universal Base Plates Universal base plates for stacking the translation stages to optical tables or to another stages.
820-0135-04
Complementary Products Code 820-0135 860-0096 860-0098-02 Page 8.37 8.118 8.118
968-0170, 860-0096 (2 pieces), and 860-0098-02 stacked
820-0135-02
820-0135-03
8.170
Adjustment Screws
Mini Motorized Rotation Stage with Vacuum compatible stepper motor 960-0170V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
Base Positioners
20 32 40
Optical Positioners
11
37 39,6
48
Optical Mounts
knob
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
960-0180
960-0189-50
Motorized Goniometers
Goniometers rotate an object about an axis in space located outside the body of the unit (usually above the platform), so the axis is not obscured by the unit itself. Goniometers have small travel range and greater stability, compared to rota tion stages. Goniometers have to have different heights of points of rotation, so that, when you stack goniometers one on the top of the other, they rotate an object about a common point in space. The mechanism rolls smoothly on ball bearings. The position is read within one revolu tion on the scale engraved on the dial knob sitting on the axle of the motor. Posi t ion can be read to each step. Overall position accounting is up-to your computer. Goniometers have two limit switches to signal an out of limits error situation. The switches may also be used to roughly establish a zero reference. The stage is driven by a stepping motor. A dial knob on its axle allows manual drive.
Rotates an object without obscuring the optical path Superb stability 1 or 2 axes of rotation (stackable) Smooth operation with ball bearings Compact square body
Specifications
960-0189 Travel range Resolution 960-0189-50, -0180-50 960-0189-80, -0180-80 Height of center of rotation 960-0189-50, -0180-50 960-0189-80, -0180-80 Load capacity Lifetime Weight Motor connector Motor Optocoupler end limit switches Switch polarity Price 850 EUR 50 mm 80 mm 2 kg 20 million full steps 1.2 kg DB9(M) 4233 2 pushed is open 850 EUR 16.12 10.96 20.6 16.5 2.5 960-0180 0.5
960-0189-50; 960-0180-50
960-0189-80; 960-0180-80
960-0180 and 960-0189 stacked
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.171
960-0199
Motorized Vertical Translation Stage

40 32
M4x6 deep 4 holes
41
16 4
stepper motor
40
Travel range 13 mm
42...55
Specifications
Model Travel range, mm Lead screw pitch, mm Resolution in full step*, m Max speed*, mm/s Load capacity, kg Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Mechanical limit switches Type Weight, kg Price, EUR 960-0199-01 13 1 0.083 0.416 6 HDB15(M) 28S two end switches Pushed is closed 0.45 879
61,5 56
86 89 65
M3x5 deep 6 holes
40 32
M6x5 deep
stepper motor
Stacks directly with stages:

dial knob
970-0080
860-0170, 860-0096 (2 pieces), and 860-0098-02 or 860-0099 stacked
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.172
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
integrated, 1.6 m length

40 32
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
961-0060
961-0064
Narrow Motorized Translation Stage with DC Motor

12,5 12,5
M6x6 deep 2holes M4x6 deep 2holes
D E A B
7,1 M4 hole for fixing screw
30
28
962-0060 series stages are equipped with DC motor without encoder and can operated with joystick only. Ideal for systems with own feedback, e.g. visual feedback when used with microscope.
30
Model 961-0062 961-0064 961-0065 961-0066
L, mm 133.5 143.5 147.5 153.5
A, mm 60 70 74 80
B, mm 45 45 49 55
C, mm 7.5 7.5 11 11.5
D, mm 21.5 26.5 30.5 36.5
E, mm 49 56 60 66
Price, EUR 533 536 559 573
28
61.8 L
M4x5,5 deep 3holes
DC motor provides smoother motion and closed loop operation. High number of motor reduction gear provides high resolution, but low speed in turn. Ideal for applications demanding high accuracy, but not sensitive to speed limitations.
12,5 12,5
961-0060 series
Narrow Motorized Translation Stage with Vacuum Compatible DC Motor 961-0060V series is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com
12,5 12,5
M6x6 deep 2holes
M4x6 deep 2holes
D E A B
7,1 M4 hole for fixing screw
962-0064
49
Model 962-0062 962-0064 962-0065 962-0066 L, mm 130.5 140.5 144.5 150.5 A, mm 66 76 80 86 B, mm 45 45 49 55 C, mm 7.5 7.5 11 11.5 D, mm 27.5 32.5 36.5 42.5 E, mm 55 62 66 72 Price, EUR 533 536 559 573
L
M4x5,5 deep 3holes
12,5 12,5
962-0060 series
8.173
Motorized Positioners Specifications Optical Tables
Recommended controllers for 961 series narrow motorized translation stage with DC motor
Model Travel range, mm Lead screw pitch, mm Resolution, m Minimal incremental motion, m Bi-directional Repeatability, m Max. speed* mm/s Load capacity: Vertical, kg Cable Motor connector DC motor / DC motor without encoder Weight, kg Assemblies X-Y Z Mechanical end limit switches Horizontal, kg
961/962-0062 10
961/962-0064 20
961/962-0065 25
961/962-0066 30
0.25 0.058 / 0.1 0.4 0.5 / 0.038
1 integrated, 1.6 m length HDB15(M) / DB9(M) DCE369751 / DCJ252445 0.43 0.46 810-0250 810-0150 2, pushed is closed 0.47 0.48
Recommended controllers for 962 stages: 980-0060-USB-B1

See page 8.185
* Test condition: controllers, power supply - 36 V.
Example of 961-0064 XYZ

Optical Mounts
961-0064
810-0150 961-0064
961-0064 810-0250
8.174
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Brackets & Rails
970-0040
Optical Tables
Motorized Screws
Specifications
Model Travel range 970-0042, 978-0042 10 mm 25 mm 1.25 m 0.25mm 60 N HDB9(M) 4233 80 N HDB15(M) 28 970-0040 978-0040
970-0042
Brackets & Rails
970-0045, 978-0045 Resolution in full step Lead screw pitch Nominal force Motor connector Stepper motor
978-0042
Mechanical end limit switches
2, pushed is closed
Manual drive with a dial knob Resolution 0.156 m in 1/8 step Scale on the dial knob allows reading accuracy to a step Two limit switches Optional power supplies for higher voltages/speeds are available
Model 970-0042 970-0045 978-0042 978-0045
M, mm 37 47 37 47
L min, mm L max, mm 143.5 153.5 157.5 167.5 153.5 178.5 167.5 192.5
Weight, kg 0.5 0.55 0.45 0.5
Price, EUR 296 306 280 290
Other types of motors can be installed on request.
970-0040
978-0040
8.175
970-0050
Motorized Actuator
Compact Manual drive with a knob Limit switch: optoelectronic couple Step motor controllers (USB, RS232, Manual) are offered separately Optional power supplies for higher voltages/speeds are available
Model Travel range Resolution Lead screw pitch Nominal force Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Weight Model 970-0050-15 970-0050-25 970-0050-10* * by request L, mm 92 ... 105 101 ... 126 87 ... 100
970-0050-15 13 mm
970-0050-25 25 mm
0.25 mm 30 N integrated, 1.2 m length HDB15(M) 20 0.12 kg L1, mm 15 15 10 L2, mm 7 7 4.5 0.15 kg L3, mm 30 40 30 Weight, kg 0.12 0.15 0.12
970-0060
Compact Motorized Actuator

knob stepping motor
23
n6
15 7
M10x0,5
20 23,5
n10
4min 25,5
Sample of assembling
79...87
Specifications
Travel range Resolution Lead screw pitch 8 mm 1.25 m 0.25 mm 30 N 0.10 kg
M1

8.176
940-0060 modified kinematic mirror/beamsplitter mount with motorized actuator 970-0060 installed. See page 7.155
Adjustment Screws
Reduced size Manual drive with a knob Limit switch: optoelectronic couple Step motor controllers (USB, RS232, Manual) are offered separately Optional power supplies for higher voltages/speeds are available
Nominal force Weight Cable Motor connector Stepper motor
integrated, 1.2 m length HDB15(M) 20
0.5
nut by request
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
1.25 m
Brackets & Rails

0 5
970-0065
Motorized Actuator
Compact Manual drive with a knob Two limit switches Step motor controllers (USB, RS232, Manual) are offered separately Optional power supplies for higher voltages/speeds are available
Specifications
Travel range Resolution Lead screw pitch Nominal force Cable Motor connector Stepper motor Optocoupler end limit switches Switch polarity 10 mm 1.25 m 0.25 mm 70 N integrated, 1.2 length HDB15(M) 28 2 pushed is open Weight, kg 0.15 Price, EUR 336

see page 8.180 see page 8.183 see page 8.184 Code 970-0065
970-0067
Ultra-High Resolution Compact Motorized Actuator with DC Motor

encoder DC motor
gear
970-0067-15
Specifications
Model Travel range Minimal Incremental Motion Resolution Lead screw pitch Max.speed Nominal force Cable Motor connector DC motor Weight Price 0.12 kg 390 EUR 970-0067-15 13 mm 0.028 m 0.1 m 0.25 mm 0.15 mm/s 30 N integrated, 1.2 m length IDC-10F DCE1524 0.15 kg 420 EUR 970-0067-25 25 mm
Ultra-High Resolution Compact Motorized Actuator with Vacuum compatible DC motor 970-0067V is available. For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com.
Recommended controllers
DC controller 980-0060-USB
see page 8.185
Model 970-0067-15 970-0067-25
L, mm 109.5...122.5 119.5...144.5
L1, mm 15 15
L2, mm 7 7
L3, mm 50 60
8.177
970-0070
Motorized Fiber Coupling Stage

Optical Tables
157
206
Other dimensions such as 860-0210. (See page 8.130)
Specifications
Travel range in each XYZ 2 mm direction Resolution 1/8 step Cross-Talk Mechanical stability Load capacity Type of actuator Cable Motor connector Weight 0.2 m 20 m/mm flexure design with Stainless Steel Spring 1.5 kg 970-0065 integrated, 1.2 m length 1.6 kg DB15(M)
970-0070
1578
980-0030F-USB
see page 8.180
980-0030-RS232
see page 8.183
see page 8.184
980-0050
8.178
Adjustment Screws
Code
Price, EUR
Base Positioners
Fiber coupling stage of flexure design Rotating platform on the top Compact block design Motorized Actuator 970-0065 Long-term stability Smooth motion
Flexure stages 970-0070 are ideal for high precision device manipulation. This stage suits almost any micropositioning applications range, for example, from fiber launch systems for single-mode, multimode and polarization maintaining fibers as well as waveguide alignment, through to the manipulation of microstructures in bioscience. Fiber Coupling Stage of flexure compact block design with high-resolution motorized actuators ensures long-termed stability and good stiffness together with smooth motion without the severe limitations of sticking and friction. Fiber Coupling Flexure stages have a combination of overall size, travel, resolution, and low cost that makes them unique decision to meet the stringent requirements of photonics laboratory applications.
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
239
Brackets & Rails
970-0080
Optical Tables

knob
10 stepper motor 43
Brackets & Rails
32
21 16

38,3 32
32
M3x4 deep 9 holes
Compact design Precise movement 13 mm travel range X-Y-Z direct stacking Motorized Actuator 970-0050-15 Lockable Black anodized aluminium
Specifications
Travel range Resolution Lead screw pitch Weight Optocoupler end limit switches Switch polarity 13 mm 1.25 m 0.25 mm 0.25 kg 2 per actuator pushed is open
70,2
117...124
970-0080 XY
Code 970-0080
Price, EUR 490
Motorized Translation Stage 970-0085 with motorized actuator 970-0067-15 is available.

970-0080XYZ
For product data sheet please visit www.eksmaoptics.com.
820-0135-04 Universal base plate for stacking the translation stages to optical tables or to another stages.
See page 8.37
980-0131F-USB
1 axis stepper motor controller for USB interface
see page 8.180
980-0232F-USB
2 axes stepper motor controller for USB interface
see page 8.180
980-0233F-USB
3 axes stepper motor controller for USB interface
see page 8.180
8.179
42,7
32 40
20
USB in
Motorized Positioners 67 60
stepping motor connector power in
980-0030F-USB
connector P1 power in
67 60
3.5
4holes USB in stepping motor connector
41
3.5
stepping motor 67 driver 60
connector P1
3.5
4holes
41 26
77 70
USB out connector P1
stepping motor 980-0030F-USB
driver
Revolutions counter input (shared with Synchronization Input) USB Expansion Each 980-0030F-USB controller card comes with an integrated USB hub to allow easy system expansion of additional single- or multi-axis controller cards Additional controllers can be connected directly to the computer in use or via any other controller card in the system. In either case the software will appropriately recognize the added controller card(s) and treat all connected controllers as a system Two USB expansion ports can be found on each controller card. Note when ordering encased cards that only the single-axis controller has access to the USB expansion outputs on the rear panel of the unit Ordering information
Code 980-0030F-USB 980-0131F-USB 980-0232F-USB 980-0233F-USB 980-0234F-USB USB Cable Controller Board 1 axis Controller in a box 2 axes Controller in a box 3 axes Controller in a box 4 axes Controller in a box Cable to a Computer
Additional features include two programmable limit switches, an emergency limit switch, encoder, and revolution sensor for stall detection and input/output for synchronization Programming Graphical user interface SMCView for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 Drivers and dynamic link library for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/Mobile host programming Set of virtual instruments for National Instruments LabView Mechanical Operating temperature range: 0 to 70C Box size for 1-axis controller : 90 x 120 x 70 mm Box size for 2 and more axis controller : 180 x 120 x 90 mm
980-0233F-USB
980-0234F-USB
For added flexibility Eksma Optics offers the 980-0030F-USB series controller in CCA form for ease of integration into custom systems. When ordering the CCA version of the controller the current limit values will still be set by the manufacturer before leaving the factory, but this limit can be changed by the user in the field. The CCA product will also include the USB hub IC and a heatsink for the motor driver IC. Warranty and support options may vary for the CCA version of controller.
Price, EUR 295 550 780 1010 980-0131F-USB
8CA9(F) - 15(M) actuator - standard length is 1.5 m, other lengths are available by request.
8.180
320
Adjustment Screws
Ordering of 980-0030F-USB series circuit card assemblies (CCA)
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
PWM chopper type current control (up to 1.5 A per phase) Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Speed: up to 5000 steps/s Full featured control software with graphical user interface for Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 included Set of virtual instruments for NI LabView included RoHS compliant
Specifications
3.5
Electrical
Motion
26
Power supply voltage ranges from 12V to 36V Overcurrent, overvoltage and temperature protection USB out Synchronization Input and Output Encoder Inputs for stall detection (shared with Synchronization Input)
Programmable acceleration and deceleration ramps Soft start/stop mode Control PC control via USB interface Optional handheld remote offers manual two button directional control
Optical Mounts
Targeted for bipolar, two phase stepper motors with current ratings motor limit of 0.25A to 1.5 A.stepping The current driver value is set by the manufacturer
Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Speed: 2-5000 steps/s

USB out
Programmable speed and trip points
26
4holes
Brackets & Rails
3.5
77 70
Optical Tables
77 70
41
Stepper Motor Controller Card with USB Interface
3.5
USB in
stepping motor connector
Manual control of 980-0030F-USB

The 980-0131F-USB-MC offers a handheld manual control option that allows for two button directional control of the unit in addition to the USB communication, the buttons are labeled Forward and Backward. The Forward button is intended for moving the positioner Forward. The Backward button is intended for moving the positioner Backward. Two LEDs indicate direction of movement. The LED of interest will flash to indicate rapid movement and will remain constantly illuminated upon reaching the limit switch. The handheld remote is usually used for precise manual positioning of the stage during such processes as calibration. Another common application of is for the control of stepper motors when a computer is not easily accessible. Front panel manual control is available as an option for the 980-0232F-USD-2MC. There are four buttons on this front panel: Forward Axis1, Backward Axis1, Forward Axis2 and Backward Axis2. There are also four LED indicators to show the direction of movement along with limit switch indication.
Code 980-0131F-USB-MC 980-0232F-USB-2MC 980-0232F-USB-2MC Description 1 axis controller with external wired remote control 2 axis controller with knobs for manual control on box front panel Price, EUR 390 650
PUP120-17-B1 980-0131F-USB-MC
Software Options for 980-0030F-USB controller

The 980-0030F-USB comes with a suite of advanced software tools that can be used to control and adjust stepping motors. All software tools operate on Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. SMCVieW is a friendly graphical user interface for controlling, monitoring and adjustment of your stepping motors. It can also be used for easy setup and save/load of all parameters for each stepping mo tor. Interface supports up to 30 drivers simul ta neously. 980-0030F-USB is a modified version of previous controller board 980-0030-USB with replaced motor connector from DB15(M) to DB15(F). USMCDLL.dll is a dynamic link library for host programming in C/C++, Visual Basic and other languages. It includes all basic commands for stepping motors control. Some examples of using these functions are also enclosed. SMC.llb is a set of virtual instruments (VI) for National Instru ments LabVIEW 7 programming language. Some examples of using these VIs are also enclosed.
SMCView main screen example. Three 980-0030F-USB drives found.
Power Supply
A 12V 36V, 1.5A 3.6 A power supply is required to operate the controller. You can use your own power supply or the following power supplies: model PSA18U-120 (12 V; 1.5 A) model PSC30U-120 (12 V; 2.5 A) model PUP120-17-B1 (36 V; 3.34 A) See page 8.186 model GS60A24-P1 (24 V; 2.5 A).
8.181
Applications of 980-0030F-USB
Users can connect 980-0030F-USB various stepper motors using bipolar, two phase connection. We offer many motorized stages that can be driven by 980-0030F-USB: actuators, rotators, translators, variable wheel attenuators. These stages also can be mechanically fixed to various systems: XYZ translators, translators + rotator and others. There are several possibilities to initiate movement actions for mentioned stages connected to 980-0030F-USB: by manual push buttons or by software. Using of software allows automated motion actions required for various scientific experiments or for industrial complex multidimensional movement shape execution. The 980-0030F-USB comes with a suite of advanced software tools that can be utilized to control and adjust your stepping motors. All software tools operate on Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7: USMCDLL.dll is a dynamic link library for host programming in C/C++, Visual Basic and other languages. It includes all basic commands for stepping motor control. Some examples of these functions are also enclosed. SMC.llb is a set of virtual instruments (VI) for National Instruments LabView programming language. Some examples of these VIs are also included. USMCDLL.dll for Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 (which have just the same functionality as USMCDLL.dll for Microsoft Windows XP). SMCVieW is a friendly graphical user interface for control, monitoring and tuning your stepping motors. It can also be used for easy setup and save/load of all parameters for each stepping motor. Interface supports up to 30 drivers simultaneously.
Optical Mounts
ATTENUATOR program main screen example
2D Motion - allows driving two 980-0030F-USB controllers connected in schematic XY translator. Included in SMCview inside Extras menu, may require separate license. ENGRAVING add-on - allows driving three 980-0030F-USB controllers connected in schematic XYZ translator + laser beam shutter. Included in SMCview inside Extras menu, may require separate license. 3D Motion - allows driving three 980-0030F-USB controllers connected in schematic XYZ translator. Included in SMCview inside Extras menu, may require separate license. ATTENUATOR program this separate program allows driving Motorized Variable Wheel Attenuator (991-0602, 991-0702). May require separate license.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Warning: The Power driver IC fin (rear) is electrically connected to the rear of the chip. When current flows to the fin, the Power driver IC malfunctions. If there is any possibility of a voltage being generated between the ground of the 980-0030F-USB and the fin, either ground the fin or insulate it. Warning: There are appreciable power dissipation on Power driver (up to 6 W depending on input voltage and rated current of stepper motor). Appropriate heatsink must be used to maintain temperature range. Heating the Power driver over 85 C is forbidden! Warning: Current sense resistors must be chosen for every stepper motor according to its rated current and connection diagram. For more details see 4.2.1. of User Manual. Wrong current sense resistors can cause the malfunction of 980-0030F-USB or damage stepper motor. Warning: There is some power dissipation on Voltage regulator (up to 0.5 W depending on input voltage). Appropriate heatsink may be required. Heating the Voltage regulator over 85 C is forbidden! Warning: 980-0030F-USB power supply must never exceed 36 V. Power driver can be damaged if such exceeding happened. Warning: If a single power supply mode is used, make sure that input voltage is not exceeding 12 V. Otherwise the overheating of the Voltage regulator may happen. Heating the Voltage regulator over 85 C is forbidden! Warning: Make sure that there are no contact between stepping motor phase windings and 980-0030F-USB ground. Power driver will be damaged obligatory if such grounding present. Warning: You must never connect to, or disconnect from the 980-0030F-USB any stepping motors while the controller keeps currents in the motor windings. Power driver can be damaged if such reconnection happened.
Translation & Rotation Stages Base Positioners
8.182
Adjustment Screws
Optical Positioners
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Cyclic Motion program - allows motion from limit switch to limit switch or from point to point. Included in SMCview inside Extras menu.
980-0030-RS232
980-0231-RS232
Stepper Motor Controller Card with RS232 Interface
PWM chopper type current control (up to 1.5 A per phase) Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Speed: up to 5000 steps/s Examples of control programs included Set of virtual instruments for National Instruments LabView included RoHS compliant
980-0234-RS232
Specifications Electrical Targeted for bipolar, two phase stepper motors with a current rating of 0.25A to 1.5 A. The current limit value is set by the manufacturer Power supply voltage ranges from 12 V to 36 V and 1.5 A to 3.6 A Synchronization Input and Output Galvanic isolation of Synchronization Input and Output Motion Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Speed: 2-5000 steps/s Programmable speed and trip points Programmable acceleration and deceleration ramps Soft start/stop mode Control Control via RS232 interface 3 button front panel control Capable of connecting two programmable limit switches for every axis Programming Serial communications command system for Windows, Linux and most other operating systems. Host is master and controllers are addressable slaves. Programming examples included Drivers and dynamic link library for Windows host programming Set of virtual instruments for National Instruments LabView Mechanical Operating temperature range: 0 to 70 C RoHS Compliant Box size for 1-axis controller : 90 x 140 x 70 mm Box size for 2 and more axis controller : 180 x 185 x 90 mm
Ordering of 980-0030-RS232 series circuit card assemblies (CCA)

Multiple configurations of the 980-0030-RS232 circuit card assemblies for flexibility in building custom systems are offered. Note that the current limit values are set by the manufacturer before the controller leaves the factory, but are user adjustable. Multiple CCA controllers can be serially connected to a single RS232 COM port for multi-axis systems. Each board will also come with a heatsink for the motor driver IC.
Code 980-0030-RS232 980-0131-RS232 980-0232-RS232 980-0233-RS232 980-0234-RS232 980-0000-9 Product Controller Card 1 axis controller 2 axes controller 3 axes controller 4 axes controller Cable to a computer Price, EUR 246 265 496 728 919
Manual control of 980-0030-RS232

The 980-0030-RS232-MC comes with a 2-button manual control panel. The two buttons are located on the top panel and are labeled Step Forward, Step Backward. Two LED indicators show direction of movement. The LEDs will also indicate when a limit switch has been tripped. This manual control option is often used for calibration and stepper motor control when a computer is not easily accessed.
1 axis controller with manual control option 980-0030-RS232-MC
Power Supply
See page 8.186
GS60A24-P1
A 12V 36V, 1.5A 3.6 A power supply is required to operate the controller. You can use your own power supply or the following power supplies: model PSA18U-120 (12 V; 1.5 A) model PSC30U-120 (12 V; 2.5 A) model PUP120-17-B1 (36 V; 3.34 A) model GS60A24-P1 (24 V; 2.5 A).
980-0232-RS232
8.183
980-0050
Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 selectable by DIP switches Version with speed from 300 to 600 steps/s tunable by trimmer LED indicators of status PWM chopper type current control (up to 0.25 A per phase) RoHS compliant
Specifications Electrical Targeted for bipolar, two phase stepper motors with current ratings of 0.25 A. Current limit value setting is done during controller manufacturing Power supply voltage 12 V (nominal)
980-0151
Control Front panel manual controls Capable of connecting two limit switches for every axis Mechanical Operating temperature range: 0 to 70C Box size for 1-axis controller (B1): 80 x 130 x 65 mm
Motion Resolution: full step, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 Speed: 300-600 steps/s
Ordering of 980-0050 series circuit card assemblies (CCA)

It is possible to order circuit card assemblies of the 980-0050 series controllers building custom systems. The current limit values are initially set by the manufacturer, but can be user adjustable. Warranty and support options for CCA version may vary.
Code 980-0050 980-0151 980-0252 Description Circuit card assembly (CCA) 1 axis Controller (0.25 A max motor current setting) 2 axes Controller (0.25 A max motor current setting) Price, EUR 97 171 80
980-0253
Power Supply
See page 8.186
PSA18U-120
A 12V, 1.5A power supply is required to operate the controller. You can use your own power supply or the following power supplies: model PSA18U-120 (12 V; 1.5 A) model PSC30U-120V (12 V; 2.5 A).
8.184
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Optical Positioners
Box size for 2 and more axis controller (B2): 90 x 200 x 60 mm
Optical Mounts
Brackets & Rails
Optical Tables
Stepper Motor Controllers with manual control
980-0060-USB
Brushed DC Servo Motor Controllers with USB Interface
USB powered Compact Full featured Windows software included Virtual serial port communication using FTDI drivers for Windows and for other OS RoHS compliant
980-0060-USB
980-0060-USB is a compact, low cost USB powered controller for brushed DC servo motors. This controller is a great solution for almost all compact DC brushed motors up to 6W that are equipped with encoder or potentiometer feedback. Multiple units can be connected to a single PC via standard external USB hub for multi-axis motion control applications.
Specifications
Input Power Motor Output Power Operating Modes Control Algorithm Velocity Profile Position Count Feedback Feedback Bandwidth Dimensions board Size of 1-axis box Number of multiple axes USB, external 12V DC up to 500mA up to 12V/500mA, 6W position, velocity, tune-up, loft compensation PID trapezoidal 32 Bit incremental encoder, potentiometer and limit switches 200 kHz 35 74.5 15 mm 35 80 20 mm 128
The 980-0060-USB utilizes well known FTDI virtual COM-port technology and supports Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows 98, Linux, Mac OS X, Mac OS 9, Mac OS 8, Windows CE.NET etc. Included control software provides a fully featured suite of tools for Windows that allows immediate and easy out-ofthe-box configuration and use of the 9800060-USB. Using the software interface, you are able to select which controller in your system you want to control and then monitor the critical parameters.
980-0060-USB-B1 box version controller
980-0060-USB 980-0060-USB-B1 Controller board Box version controller
8.185
Power Supplies for Controllers

Current requirements for stepper motor controller power supplies:
During operation, current consumption will vary depending upon how the controller is being used. Before shipment, our controllers are calibrated to the rated current of the motors they are to be used with. If you do not specify a motor, the controllers will be calibrated to a factory default value. Due to Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) our controllers usually consume less current than the rated current of motors. However, to avoid problems during worst case scenarios, we recommend selecting a power supply with a max current not less than the rated current of motors that will be connected to the controller. In case of multi-axis controllers you will need to sum the current of all controllers connected to the power supply.
Optical Tables
PSA18U-120
PSC30U-120
Our stepper motor controllers are a chopper drive type. This means that in the initial phase of the motor step our controller will apply significantly higher voltage to motor winding than will occur in other drive types. This method allows stepper motors to be driven with higher torque at higher
speeds. It should also be noted that stepper
motor parasitic resonant effect behavior (bad frequencies position, for example) depends on supply voltage. Minimal allowable DC voltage of our stepper motor controllers is 12V and maximum is 36V, both of which we keep in stock.
Specifications
Model PSA18U-120 PSC30U-120V GS60A24-P1 GS60A24-P1 PUP120-17-B1 Voltage, V Current, A 12 12 24 36 1.5 2.5 2.5 3.34 Dimensions, mm 98.5 55 31.5 98.5 55 31.5 125 50 31.5 167 65 37 Weight, kg 0.2 0.25 0.31 0.64 Connector 2.1/5.5 2.1/5.5 Mini-Din male 4-pin power connector Mini-Din male 4-pin power connector
PUP120-17-B1
8.186
Adjustment Screws
Base Positioners
Vacuum compatible products with stepper motors require voltage 24 36 V. Recommended power supplies are GS60A24-P1 and PUP120-17.
Optical Positioners
Optical Mounts
Requirements for stepper motor controllers power supply voltage:
Brackets & Rails
Appendixes
Appendixes
Useful Formulas & Constants.............................................. A.2 Optical Components Cleaning Instructions......................... A.4 Tweezers / Forceps for Optical Components...................... A.4 Crystals Handling Safety Guide........................................... A.5
A.1
Useful Formulas & Constants

Physical Constants
Plancks constant h = 6.626075510-34 Js = 4.510-15 eVs = 6.62610-27 ergs Diracs constant = h/2 = 1.05410-34 Js = 1.05410-27 ergs Boltzmanns constant kB = 1.38010-16 erg/K = 8.6210-5 eV/K = 1.38010-23 J/K kT = 25.9 meV at room temperature = 0.36 meV at liquid-helium temperature (4.2 K) = 6.7 meV at liquid-nitrogen temperature (4.2 K) Velocity of light in vacuum c = 2.99792458108 m/s Electron charge e = 1.60210-19 coulombs Avogadro number Na = 6.02213671023 particles/mol Permeability of vacuum 0 = 410-7 T2m3/J = 12.56637061410-7 T2m3/J Permittivity of vacuum 0 = 1/(0c2) = 8.85418781710-12 C2/Jm Electron rest mass me = 9.109389710-31 kg Proton rest mass mp = 1.672623110-27 kg Neutron rest mass mn = 1.674928610-27 kg
Etalon Formulas
Two parameters completely specify an etalon: the free spectral range (FSR) and the finesse (). The FSR is the spacing (usually given in frequency) between transmission peaks. The finesse is the ratio of the free spectral range to the full width at half maximum (FWHM) of the transmission peak and is directly related to the reflectivity of the surface R.
c is the speed of light, n is the index of refraction of the etalon, and L is the thickness of the etalon. At high finesse values (where R is very close to 100% or 1), Finesse 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 Reflectivity 24% 47% 60% 68% 73% 81% 85%
Wave Vector, Frequency, Wavelength & Wavenumbers

k = wave vector
International System of Units (SI) Prefixes

Factor 1021 1018 1015 1012 109 106 103 102 10-2 10-3 10-6 10-9 10-12 10-15 10-18 10-21 10-24 Name zetta exa peta tera giga mega kilo hecto centi mili micro nano pico femto atto zepto yocto Symbol Z E P T G M k h c m n p f a z y
lar frequency
= frequency = 2 = angu = wavelength 0 = wavelength

in vacuum n = refractive index
An easy number to remember is a 1-pm linewidth is approximately 125 MHz at 1550 nm.
Wavelength (in vacuum), nm 1561.42 1550 1320 1064 980 780 632.8 350
Frequency, THz 192.00 193.41 227.12 281.76 305.91 384.35 473.76 856.55
Electron Volts, eV 0.80 0.80 0.94 1.17 1.27 1.59 1.96 3.55
Wavenumber, cm-1 6404.43 6451.61 7575.76 9398.50 10204.08 12820.51 15802.78 28571.43
Common Material Properties

Material Air Fused Silica Silicon LASFN9 Refractive Index, n 1.000 1.444 3.477 1.813 FSR*, MHz 0.0 13.1 198.1 9.4 Thermal Expansion Coefficient , ppm/C 0.0 0.55 3.24 7.4 Thermo-Optic Coefficient or n/T, ppm/C 1.0 6.57 160 1.3
Snells Law
n1 sin1 = n2 sin2
*Change in FSR due to dispersive effects as measured from 1510 to 1570 nm for a 50-GHz etalon
A.2
Numerical Aperture
NA = n sin
Brewsters Angle
The angle where only s-polarized light is reflected
Total Internal Reflection Angle
Collimating
where ntransmitted medium< nincident medium is required for total internal reflection.
Gausian Beam
A Gaussian beam spreads as follows, Focusing where (x) is the 1/e2 radius, l is the wavelength, and x is the distance from the beam waist w0 where x=0.
Scaling Law for Laser Radiation Damage

where E [J/cm2] is the damage threshold, t is the pulse duration, E1 and t1 are the reference damage threshold and pulse duration.
Reflection Air / Material

at AOI=0 Where n refractive index, AOI Angle of Incidence.
Non Critical Phase Matching A Rule of Thumb for Choosing a Lens

NCPM when crystal phase matching angle equals 90 ( = 90). NCPM is achieved at special temperatures and/or wavelengths.
where f is the lens focal length, d is the beam diameter at the focus, D is the 1/e2 diameter of the collimated beam.
Uniaxial Crystals Refractivity

Polar coordinate system for description of refractive properties of uniaxial crystal.
A.3
Phase Matching Types of Nonlinear Crystals

Negative crystals (no>ne) Type 1 ko1+ko2=ke3() or ooe interaction Type 2 ke1()+ko2=ke3() or eoe interaction Type 2 ko1+ke2()=ke3() or oee interaction Positive crystals (ne>no) Type 1 ke1()+ke2()=ko3 or eeo interaction Type 2 ko1+ke2()=ko3 or oeo interaction Type 2 ke1()+ko2=ko3 or eoo interaction Whereas k-wave propagation vector (k=2n/); phase matching angle in the crystal; o ordinary polarization, e extraordinary polarization; 1, 2, 3 indices corresponds to wave vectors with longest (1), mid (2) and shortest (3) wavelengths.
Nonlinear Crystal Thickness Limited by Group Velocity Mismatch (GVM)
Whereas t pulse duration, c speed of the light, n refractive index, wavelength.
Whereas K light propagation vector at phase matching conditions, Z optical axis of crystal, phase matching angle (or cut angle), azimuthal angle.
Nonlinear Crystal acceptances

Nonlinear Crystal acceptances Angular , Temperature T, Spectral corresponding bandwidths at Full Width of Half Maximum (FWHM) of conversion efficiency.
Birefrigency angle or Walk-off
Upper signs refer to negative crystal (no>ne) and the lower signs refer to positive one (ne>no). Beam displacement because of walkoff: = L tan () Whereas L crystal length, walk-off angle.
Z c Z
o beam
e beam
Optical Components Cleaning Instructions
Optical Components
Cleaning Instructions
Inspect and make sure that you need to clean your optical component. If its not necessary, avoid extra cleaning. The polished face of the crystals is the key element that ensures preservation and longer usability of the component. If you need to clean the optical component, please follow these instructions: Always wear powder-free latex gloves or finger cots and handle component by the edges. Do not touch the surface of optical component with your fingertips. Avoid handling optics with metal instruments. Use delicate tweezers with soft tips for a small size components. Any larger dust and dirt particles can be removed by using very soft brush or compressed air. Attention: if you use compressed air, keep the distance (at least 10 cm). In the less distance you can damage the polished face with temperature stress. If polished face looks fine do not clean with something else. If its still dirty please use solvents. Never clean dry: Cleaning dry optics, no matter what the wiper, is virtually guaranteed to cause problems. Use only extra pure water free class solvents, such as ethyl acetate (C4H8O2), butyl acetate (C6H10O2), or similar. Always use lint-free lens tissues for optics cleaning. For the optical component cleaning apply a small drop of the cleaning solution on the top surface. Leave enough time for it to dissolve and float away any contaminating materials. But before the cleaner dries, gently wipe the surface with the highest quality lens cleaning tissue. For crystal and small (up to 5 mm2 area) optical component cleaning use lint-free lens tissue or cotton swab. Do not use cotton swabs for a larger component as it leaves stripes. Moisten a tissue with solvent and carefully cross the surface of crystal. Make sure that the wiper size is the same or a bit larger than the polished face of component. The tissue is only for onetime use! Repeat this action till the component looks fine. If the cleaning does not help to remove contamination the optical component must be repolished.
260-1050
Tweezers / Forceps for Optical Components

These stainless steel tweezers/forceps are convenient instrument for handling of optical components with diameter from 10 to 50.8mm. Tweezers/forceps have silicon tips that reduce the risk of damage of optics.
Optical Components Cleaning Instructions
A.4
Crystals Handling Safety Guide
Crystals Handling
Safety Guide
Do not open container until contents are at the room temperature to prevent moisture condensation. Open package carefully in dust free and dry (relative humidity less than 60%) atmosphere.
Please use gloves to handle crystals. Hold the crystal at the non-polished faces only. Holding the crystal near the breath will destroy the polishing.
A.5
Crystals Handling Safety Guide
Dust from the polished surface can be removed by soft paint brush. Experienced users can try to clean faces with particlesfree cotton wool tipped swabs soaked in water free ethyl-acetate.
The crystals are temperature sensitive. Drastic chilling or warming (at the rate > 5degC/min) will cause shattering by thermal stress.
The crystals should be stored in desiccator or in a container with minimum gas volume.

EKSMA

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EKSMA

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Laser Components

Technical Flexibility Serving Your Photonics Needs

SPIN-OFF FROM PHYSICS INSTITUTE AND EKSMA ESTABLISHED

UNITED KINGDOM NETHERLANDS BELGIUM GERMANY

UKRAINE FRANCE CZECH REPUBLIC

Nonlinear & Laser Crystals

Nd:YAG LaserLine Components

DPSS Lasers& Diode Laser Modules

Online product catalogue

Quality Control Laboratory

Analytik Jena spectrophotometer

Moeller-Wedel Optical Elcomat

G-5 Goniometers for prisms EKSPLA laser spectrophotometer

Nikon Microscopes x56-400

ESDI Intellium Z100 Fizeau

magnification microscopes with CCD cameras for surface quality inspection

EKSPLA NL220 laser Nd:YAG Trioptics Super-Spherotronic HR

PROFORMA INVOICE No.40011 Ship to:

2013-04-15 Bill to:

Sub-total: Shipping charges: Total:

An Example of Purchase Order at www.eksmaoptics.com for wire transfer payment.

Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices

Bases for positioning of groups of units

TRANSLATION & ROTATION STAGES (860)......................8.98

Accessories for opto-mechanics assemblies

Motorized PosiTioners and controlLers (900) ........................................................8.139

BASE MOUNTS & ACCESSORIES (820).............................8.32

OPTICAL POSITIONERS (840).............................................8.52

Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices

Solid State Pulsed Lasers

Visit www.ekspla.com for product information

Power Supplies and Optoelectronics

Nonlinear Crystals Ovens Pump Chambers

Visit www.ekspla.com for product information

Optical Components Selection Guide

Windows & Filters

Optical ComponentS Cleaning Instructions

Products Selection Guide

Lenses (UV FS, BK7, CaF2)

Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices

Laser Line Coatings

1031. HR>99.5% @ 780 nm, AOI = 45.

3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 980

1039-i0 1045-i0 1047-i0 1049-i0

1037. HR>99.8% @ 1064 nm, AOI = 0.

Contact us for other wavelengths and AOI's values.

AOI=45 1106-i45 1110-i45 1114-i45 1116-i45 1118-i45

Wavelength, nm 220-250 260-340 350-450 420-680 450-600

Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.5

1106-i0 1110-i0 1114-i0 1116-i0 1118-i0

1130. HR>99% @ 600900nm, AOI= 0.

Contact us for other wavelengths and AOI's values.

Partial Reflecting Coatings

50 40 p-pol 30 20 10 0 550 650 750 Wavelength, nm 850 950

Contact us for other wavelengths and AOI's values.

frequency doubled laser systems by selec-

100 80 60 40 20 0 400 600 800 1000 Wavelength, nm 1200 1400

Damage threshold, J/cm2 in 10 ns 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

Price, EUR 25 / 50 111 / 133 74 / 96 83 / 105 67 / 89 89 / 111 83 / 105 72 / 105

Contact us for other wavelengths and AOI's values.

Visit www.eksmaoptics.com for new products and prices

Laser Harmonic Separators

Windows & Filters